Upload
izyab
View
2.153
Download
9
Tags:
Embed Size (px)
Citation preview
CF5001
Service Manual[Field Service]
Dual references may be used on the following:
Official Options name : Popular Options name
AFR-20 : RADF, DF
C-208 : LT
FN-120 : FNS
FN-9 : FNS
Cover Inserter D : PI
PK-5 : PU
TMG-3 TU
In-System Writer : ISW
CF5001 Field Service Ver.1.0 Sep 2003 CONTENTS
i
I D
IS./
AS
SE
MB
LY
II A
DJ
US
TM
EN
TII
I S
ER
VIC
E T
OO
LIV
S
ER
VIC
EV
C
OD
E L
IST
VI
DIA
GR
AM
S
CONTENTSSAFETY AND IMPORTANT WARNING ITEMS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . S-1
IMPORTANT NOTICE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . S-1
DESCRIPTION ITEMS FOR DANGER, WARNING AND CAUTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . S-1
SAFETY WARNINGS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . S-2
SAFETY INFORMATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . S-10
IMPORTANT INFORMATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . S-10
SAFETY CIRCUITS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . S-11
INDICATION OF WARNING ON THE MACHINE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . S-13
I DISASSEMBLY/ASSEMBLY
1. EXTERIOR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1
1.1 Replacing the dust filter /2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1
1.2 Replacing the dust filter /1 and the ozone filter /1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2
1.3 Replacing the toner collection box. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4
1.4 Angle adjustment of the operation board. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-6
1.5 Removing and reinstalling the main board unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-7
2. SCANNER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-11
2.1 Screws that must not be removed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-11
2.2 Removing and reinstalling the platen glass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-11
2.3 Removing and reinstalling the CCD unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-12
2.4 Removing and reinstalling the exposure unit. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-14
2.5 Removing and reinstalling the exposure lamp. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-17
2.6 Removing the scanner wire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-18
2.7 Reinstalling the scanner wire. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-20
3. WRITING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-23
3.1 Screw that must not be removed. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-23
3.2 Removing and reinstalling the write unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-24
4. PROCESS UNIT. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-27
4.1 Flow of the disassembly of the process unit section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-27
4.2 Cleaning the charging corona unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-28
4.3 Cleaning/replacing, removing and reinstalling the charging wire assy/the charging control plate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-30
4.4 Pulling out the process unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-31
4.5 Removing and reinstalling the transfer belt unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-32
4.6 Replacing the belt cleaning brush unit. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-35
4.7 Replacing the belt cleaning blade . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-36
4.8 Replacing the toner collection sheet /1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-37
4.9 Replacing the belt separation claw . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-38
4.10 Replacing the transfer belt. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-39
4.11 Replacing the 1st transfer roller. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-41
4.12 Replacing the 2nd transfer roller /U. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-42
4.13 Replacing the drum cartridge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-43
CONTENTS CF5001 Field Service Ver.1.0 Sep 2003
ii
I D
IS./
AS
SE
MB
LY
II A
DJ
US
TM
EN
TII
I S
ER
VIC
E T
OO
LIV
SE
RV
ICE
V
CO
DE
LIS
TV
I D
IAG
RA
MS
4.14 Removing and reinstalling the drum . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-44
4.15 Replacing the developing unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-46
4.16 Replacing the developer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-48
4.17 Replacing the belt separation claw solenoid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-50
4.18 Removing and reinstalling the process unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-51
4.19 Removing and reinstalling the image correction unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-52
5. TONER SUPPLY. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-53
5.1 Opening and closing the toner supply section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-53
5.2 Replacing the charging dust filter. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-54
6. PAPER FEED TRAYS /1 to /3. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-55
6.1 Removing and reinstalling the paper feed unit. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-55
6.2 Removing and reinstalling the paper feed trays /1 to /3. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-57
6.3 Replacing the paper feed roller and the feed rubber . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-58
6.4 Replacing the double feed prevention rubber . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-60
6.5 Replacing the paper feed clutch and the pre-registration clutch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-61
6.6 Removing and reinstalling the tray up/down wire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-62
7. BY-PASS TRAY. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-66
7.1 Replacing the paper feed roller and the feed roller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-66
7.2 Replacing the double feed prevention roller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-68
7.3 Replacing the paper feed clutch /BP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-69
8. VERTICAL CONVEYANCE. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-71
8.1 Removing and reinstalling the vertical conveyance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-71
8.2 Replacing the intermediate conveyance clutch /1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-74
9. FIXING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-75
9.1 Screws that must not be removed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-75
9.2 Removing and reinstalling the fixing unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-76
9.3 Replacing the fixing upper heater lamps /1 and /2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-77
9.4 Replacing the fixing lower heater lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-79
9.5 Replacing the fixing roller /U, ball bearing /U and the heat insulating sleeve /U . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-82
9.6 Replacing the fixing roller /L, ball bearing /L and the heat insulating sleeve /L . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-84
9.7 Replacing the fixing temperature sensor /3, and removing and reinstalling the fixing temperature sensor /1 and the thermostat /1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-86
9.8 Replacing the fixing temperature sensor /4, and removing and reinstalling the fixing temperature sensor /2 and the thermostat /L . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-91
9.9 Replacing the fixing drive gear. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-96
9.10 Replacing the fixing cleaning unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-98
9.11 Replacing the fixing torque limiter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-100
10.REGISTRATION/ADU/REVERSE/PAPER EXIT. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-102
10.1 Removing and reinstalling the ADU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-102
10.2 Replacing the registration cleaning sheet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-104
10.3 Replacing the separation discharging plate unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-105
10.4 Replacing the transfer ground plate unit and the 2nd transfer roller /L . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-106
10.5 Replacing the registration roller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-107
10.6 Replacing the intermediate conveyance clutches /2 and /3. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-109
10.7 Replacing the ADU conveyance clutches /1 and /2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-110
10.8 Replacing the ADU pre-registration clutch. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-111
10.9 Replacing the decurler roller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-112
CF5001 Field Service Ver.1.0 Sep 2003 CONTENTS
iii
I D
IS./
AS
SE
MB
LY
II A
DJ
US
TM
EN
TII
I S
ER
VIC
E T
OO
LIV
S
ER
VIC
EV
C
OD
E L
IST
VI
DIA
GR
AM
S
11. OTHER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-114
11.1 Installation of the Key Counter Socket (OPTION) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-114
11.2 Installation / Remove of the Memory Unit (OPTION). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-115
AFR-20 DISASSEMBLY/ASSEMBLY
1. EXTERIOR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-117
1.1 RADF hinge opening/closing angle adjustment. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-117
1.2 Removing and reinstalling the front cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-119
1.3 Removing and reinstalling the rear cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-120
1.4 Removing and reinstalling the registration roller cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-121
2. PAPER FEED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-122
2.1 Cleaning the no paper sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-122
2.2 Removing and reinstalling the paper feed unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-123
2.3 Replacing the paper feed roller and the feed roller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-125
2.4 Replacing the double feed prevention roller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-127
3. PAPER FEED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-129
3.1 Cleaning the registration roller. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-129
3.2 Cleaning the registration sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-130
3.3 Removing and reinstalling the conveyance belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-131
4. REVERSE/PAPER EXIT. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-133
4.1 Cleaning the paper exit roller/the paper exit sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-133
4.2 Cleaning the reverse roller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-133
5. REMOVING AND REINSTALLING RADF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-134
C-208 DISASSEMBLY/ASSEMBLY
1. EXTERIOR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-135
1.1 Removing and reinstalling the front cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-135
1.2 Removing and reinstalling the clutch replacement cover and the rear cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-137
1.3 Removing and reinstalling the paper feed pick-up cover. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-138
2. PAPER FEED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-139
2.1 Cleaning the paper dust removing brush. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-139
2.2 Removing and reinstalling the paper feed unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-140
2.3 Replacing the paper feed roller and the feed roller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-141
2.4 Replacing the double feed prevention roller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-142
2.5 Replacing the paper feed clutch and the pre-registration clutch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-144
3. TRAY UP/DOWN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-145
3.1 Removing and reinstalling the rear drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-145
3.2 Removing and reinstalling the up/down wire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-150
FN-9/FN120 DISASSEMBLY/ASSEMBLY
1. EXTERIOR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-159
1.1 Removing and reinstalling of the booklet tray (FN-9 only). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-159
1.2 Removing and reinstalling of the top cover /1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-160
1.3 Removing and reinstalling of the top cover /2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-160
1.4 Removing and reinstalling of the side cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-161
1.5 Removing and reinstalling of the finisher door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-161
CONTENTS CF5001 Field Service Ver.1.0 Sep 2003
iv
I D
IS./
AS
SE
MB
LY
II A
DJ
US
TM
EN
TII
I S
ER
VIC
E T
OO
LIV
SE
RV
ICE
V
CO
DE
LIS
TV
I D
IAG
RA
MS
1.6 Removing and reinstalling of the rear cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-162
1.7 Removing and reinstalling of the main tray . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-163
1.8 Removing and reinstalling of the main paper exit opening cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-164
1.9 Removing and reinstalling of the booklet paper exit opening cover (FN-9 only) . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-164
2. CONVEYANCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-165
2.1 Replacing the paper exit roller /A (sponge roller). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-165
2.2 Replacing the intermediate conveyance roller (sponge roller). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-167
2.3 Removing and reinstalling of the paper exit opening unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-168
3. MAIN TRAY. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-170
3.1 Replacing the tray up/down motor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-170
3.2 Removing and reinstalling of the up/down wire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-171
4. STACKER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-175
4.1 Replacing the stacking assist roller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-175
4.2 Removing and reinstalling of the stacker unit cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-175
4.3 Removing and reinstalling of the stacker unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-176
5. STAPLER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-179
5.1 Removing and reinstalling of the stapler unit cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-179
5.2 Replacing the clincher . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-180
5.3 Replacing the stapler . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-182
PK-5 DISASSEMBLY/ASSEMBLY
1. PUNCH SECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-185
1.1 Replacing the Punch unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-185
1.2 Cleaning the Punch Edges and Punch Scraps Full PS (PS802) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-188
Cover Inserter D DISASSEMBLY/ASSEMBLY
1. External Section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-189
1.1 Removing / Re-installing the External covers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-189
2. Paper feed unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-191
2.1 Replacing the Paper feed roller and Feed roller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-191
2.2 Replacing the Double feed prevent roller and Torque limiter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-192
TMG-3 DISASSEMBLY/ASSEMBLY
1. TRIMMER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-193
1.1 Replacing the trimmer knife /U and trimmer knife /L . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-193
II ADJUSTMENT
1. HOW TO USE THE ADJUSTMENT SECTION. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1
1.1 Composition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1
2. ADJUSTMENTS WHEN REPLACING PARTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1
3. LIST OF ADJUSTMENT ITEMS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2
4. MODE CHANGE MENU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4
4.1 Setting method. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4
4.2 Display transition of 36 modes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5
4.3 Display transition of 25 modes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7
4.4 Display transition of Key Operation modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8
CF5001 Field Service Ver.1.0 Sep 2003 CONTENTS
v
I D
IS./
AS
SE
MB
LY
II A
DJ
US
TM
EN
TII
I S
ER
VIC
E T
OO
LIV
S
ER
VIC
EV
C
OD
E L
IST
VI
DIA
GR
AM
S
5. CHECKING BY THE P FUNCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-10
5.1 Checking method of the P function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-10
6. 25 MODE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-11
6.1 List of adjustment items for 25 mode. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-11
6.2 Setting method . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-12
6.3 Setting software DIPSW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-12
6.4 Paper size setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-25
6.4.1 Standard size setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-25
6.4.2 Non-standard size setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-25
6.4.3 Wide paper setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-25
6.5 PM count setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-26
6.5.1 Count reset. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-26
6.5.2 Change setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-26
6.6 Data collection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-27
6.7 Parts counter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-42
6.7.1 Count of special parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-42
6.7.2 Count of each parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-47
6.8 Password setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-48
6.9 Telephone number setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-48
6.10 M/C serial number setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-49
6.11 Indication of ROM version . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-49
6.12 ISW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-49
6.13 Setting date input. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-50
6.14 Board change mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-50
7. 36 MODE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-51
7.1 Setting method . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-51
7.2 Process adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-51
7.2.1 High voltage adjustment. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-52
7.2.2 Drum peculiarity adjustment. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-52
7.2.3 Sensor output check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-58
7.2.4 Exclusive paper setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-58
7.2.5 Recall standard data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-59
7.3 Image adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-60
7.3.1 Magnification adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-60
7.3.2 Timing adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-66
7.3.3 RADF adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-74
7.3.4 Centring adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-76
7.3.5 Non-image area erase check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-79
7.3.6 Recall standard data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-80
7.4 Image quality adjustment. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-81
7.4.1 Scanner gamma adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-81
7.4.2 Printer gamma adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-82
7.4.3 Sharpness adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-87
7.4.4 Contrast adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-88
7.4.5 Image judge adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-88
7.4.6 ACS adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-90
7.4.7 Density adjustment. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-91
CONTENTS CF5001 Field Service Ver.1.0 Sep 2003
vi
I D
IS./
AS
SE
MB
LY
II A
DJ
US
TM
EN
TII
I S
ER
VIC
E T
OO
LIV
SE
RV
ICE
V
CO
DE
LIS
TV
I D
IAG
RA
MS
7.4.8 Tone adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-93
7.4.9 Recall standard data. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-94
7.5 Running test mode. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-95
7.5.1 Setting method . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-95
7.6 Test pattern output mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-96
7.7 Test pattern density setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-100
7.8 Finisher adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-100
7.8.1 Stitch and fold stopper adjustment (FN-9 only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-101
7.8.2 Fold stopper adjustment (FN-9 only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-101
7.8.3 Cover sheet tray size adjustment (Cover Inserter D only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-102
7.8.4 Trimming stopper adjustment (TMG-3 only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-102
7.8.5 Punch adjustment (PK-5 only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-103
7.8.6 Three-folding adjustment (FN-9 only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-105
7.8.7 2 positions staple pitch adjustment. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-106
7.9 List output mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-106
8. 47 MODE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-107
8.1 47 mode/multi mode setting method . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-107
8.2 Adjustment data display. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-108
8.3 Hard disk check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-108
8.4 Input check list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-109
8.5 Output check list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-121
9. OTHER ADJUSTMENTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-131
9.1 Paper feed roller/BP pressure adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-131
9.2 Paper feed height (upper limit) adjustment (by-pass) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-132
9.3 Pick-up movement amount adjustment (by-pass) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-134
9.4 Paper feed tray /1 to /3 mis-centering adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-135
9.5 Paper feed tray/1 to /3 sheet feed pressure adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-136
9.6 FNS adjustment of the by-pass conveyance guide plate magnet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-138
9.7 FNS adjustment of the by-pass gate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-139
9.8 FNS adjustment of the shift position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-141
9.9 FNS adjustment of the paper exit opening solenoid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-142
9.10 FNS adjustment of the position of paper exit arm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-144
9.11 FNS adjustment of the position of alignment plate/U. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-146
9.12 FNS adjustment of the position of alignment plate/L (only for FN-9) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-148
9.13 FNS adjustment of the stapling position (flat stapling). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-150
9.14 FNS adjustment of the stapling position in a vertical direction. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-152
9.15 FNS adjustment of the stapling position (flat stapling) (only for FN-9). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-156
9.16 FNS adjustment of the angle of the folding stopper (only for FN-9). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-158
9.17 FNS adjustment of the folding force (only for FN-9) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-160
9.18 FNS adjustment of the three-holding position (only for FN-9) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-161
9.19 FNS adjustment of the stapler drive belt position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-162
9.20 TU adjustment of the sheet cutting parallelism . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-166
9.21 LCT tray mis-centering adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-167
9.22 LCT skew adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-169
9.23 LCT paper feed roller pressure adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-171
9.24 LCT up/down plate horizontal adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-172
9.25 LCT sheet feed pressure adjustment. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-173
CF5001 Field Service Ver.1.0 Sep 2003 CONTENTS
vii
I D
IS./
AS
SE
MB
LY
II A
DJ
US
TM
EN
TII
I S
ER
VIC
E T
OO
LIV
S
ER
VIC
EV
C
OD
E L
IST
VI
DIA
GR
AM
S
9.26 LCT paper feed height (upper limit) adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-174
9.27 LCT pick-up release amount adjustment. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-176
9.28 PK Adjusting the tilt of the punch hole position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-178
9.29 Sensitivity adjustment for the PK paper edge sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-179
9.30 PI Centering Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-180
9.31 Adjusting the tilt of PI (when PK punch is used) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-181
III SERVICE TOOL
1. ISW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1
1.1 Description of the ISW. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1
1.2 Installing the USB driver for ISWTrns . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1
1.3 Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2
1.3.1 Board used for the ISW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2
1.3.2 Data flow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2
1.3.3 ISW transfer type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2
1.3.4 Instances of ISW transfer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3
1.3.5 Setup procedure. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4
2. UPDATING WITH ISW Trns . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-9
2.1 Setting Up ISW Trns . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-9
2.1.1 Installing the application program. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-9
2.1.2 Setting up ISW Trns . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-9
2.1.3 ISW Trns Main Window Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-11
2.1.4 Parallel port setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-13
2.2 Copying Transfer Data (Update Data) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-14
2.3 Connecting the CF5001. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-15
2.4 Updating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-15
2.4.1 Update operation overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-15
2.4.2 Checking the ROM version of the copier (before updating) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-16
2.4.3 Preparing the copier to transfer.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-16
2.4.4 Running ISW Trns. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-16
2.4.5 Selecting transfer file (update data) conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-16
2.4.6 Selecting a version of transfer files (update data) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-17
2.4.7 Verifying transfer files (update data) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-18
2.4.8 Transmitting transfer files (update data). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-18
2.4.9 Exiting ISW Trns. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-19
2.4.10 Verifying the ROM version of the copier (after updating) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-19
2.5 ISW Trns Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-20
2.6 Troubleshooting ISW Trns . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-22
2.6.1 Unable to run ISW Trns . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-22
2.6.2 Send file is not displayed when a combo box item is selected. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-22
2.6.3 NG produced by a file check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-22
2.6.4 “??” produced by a file check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-22
2.6.5 Unsuccessful file transfer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-22
2.7 Connecting to the ISW connector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-22
2.7.1 Procedure. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-22
3 INTERNET ISW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-23
3.1 What is the Internet ISW? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-23
CONTENTS CF5001 Field Service Ver.1.0 Sep 2003
viii
I D
IS./
AS
SE
MB
LY
II A
DJ
US
TM
EN
TII
I S
ER
VIC
E T
OO
LIV
SE
RV
ICE
V
CO
DE
LIS
TV
I D
IAG
RA
MS
3.2 Operating environment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-23
3.3 Main features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-23
3.4 Initial setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-24
3.4.1 Setting on Control panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-24
3.4.2 Setting on Web browser . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-24
3.5 Internet ISW using E-Mail remote notification system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-32
3.5.1 Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-32
3.5.2 Transmitting E-Mail. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-33
3.6 Internet ISW using Web utility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-38
3.6.1 Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-38
3.6.2 How to use . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-38
3.7 Precautions for use . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-41
3.7.1 Prior announcement to administrator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-41
3.7.2 If power failure occurs during data rewriting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-41
3.7.3 ISW of multiple programs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-41
3.7.4 If ISW fails in low power mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-41
3.8 Proxy server authentication in Internet ISW. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-42
3.8.1 What is a proxy server? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-42
3.8.2 Authentication of proxy server . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-42
3.8.3 Type and command list for authentication on proxy server . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-42
3.8.4 Remarks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-43
4 MAIL REMOTE NOTIFICATION SYSTEM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-44
4.1 What is the Mail remote notification system?. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-44
4.2 Operation environment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-44
4.3 Initial setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-44
4.4 How to use the Mail remote notification system. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-53
4.5 Disabling system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-59
IV SERVICE
1. SERVICE SCHEDULE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1
1.1 Service schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1
1.2 Maintenance items. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3
1.3 Periodic check items (main body) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-8
1.4 Periodic check items (AFR-20) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-11
1.5 Periodic check items (C-208). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-12
1.6 Periodic check items (FN-120/FN-9) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-13
1.7 Periodic check items (Cover Inserter D) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-14
1.8 Periodic check items (TMG-3) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-14
1.9 Replacement parts list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-15
1.10 Important maintenance parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-18
2. COPY MATERIAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-19
2.1 Product. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-19
2.2 Materials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-19
2.3 PM parts kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-20
3. SERVICE MATERIAL LIST . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-21
4. CE TOOLS LIST . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-22
CF5001 Field Service Ver.1.0 Sep 2003 CONTENTS
ix
I D
IS./
AS
SE
MB
LY
II A
DJ
US
TM
EN
TII
I S
ER
VIC
E T
OO
LIV
S
ER
VIC
EV
C
OD
E L
IST
VI
DIA
GR
AM
S
V CODE LIST
1. JAM CODE LIST. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-1
2. ERROR CODE LIST. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-11
3. ABOUT ABNORMAL UNIT ISOLATION. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-37
VI DIAGRAMS
1. PARTS LAYOUT DRAWING. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1
1.1 CF5001 parts layout drawing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1
1.2 AFR-20 parts layout drawing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-22
1.3 C-208 parts layout drawing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-23
1.4 FN-120/FN-9 parts layout drawing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-24
1.5 TMG-3 parts layout drawing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-28
2. CONNECTOR LAYOUT DRAWING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-30
2.1 Main Body connector layout drawing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-30
2.2 AFR-20 connector layout drawing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-39
2.3 C-208 connector layout drawing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-39
2.4 FN-120/FN-9 connector layout drawing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-40
2.5 TMG-3 connector layout drawing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-41
3. TIMING CHART . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-42
3.1 Main Body timing chart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-42
3.2 AFR-20 timing chart. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-44
3.3 C-208 timing chart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-51
3.4 FN-120/FN-9 timing chart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-52
3.5 TMG-3 timing chart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-56
4. OVERALL WIRING DIAGRAM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-59
4.1 AFR-20 Overall Wiring Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-59
4.2 C-208 Overall Wiring Diagram. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-61
4.3 FN-120/FN-9 Overall Wiring Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-63
4.4 TMG-3 Overall Wiring Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-65
4.5 Cover Inserter D Overall Wiring Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-67
4.6 PK-5 Overall Wiring Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-68
5. APPENDIX
5.1 CF5001 Overall Wiring Diagram (1/8)
5.2 CF5001 Overall Wiring Diagram (2/8)
5.3 CF5001 Overall Wiring Diagram (3/8)
5.4 CF5001 Overall Wiring Diagram (4/8)
5.5 CF5001 Overall Wiring Diagram (5/8)
5.6 CF5001 Overall Wiring Diagram (6/8)
5.7 CF5001 Overall Wiring Diagram (7/8)
5.8 CF5001 Overall Wiring Diagram (8/8)
CONTENTS CF5001 Field Service Ver.1.0 Sep 2003
x
I D
IS./
AS
SE
MB
LY
II A
DJ
US
TM
EN
TII
I S
ER
VIC
E T
OO
LIV
SE
RV
ICE
V
CO
DE
LIS
TV
I D
IAG
RA
MS
Blank page
SAFETY AND IMPORTANT WARNING ITEMS
S-1
Read carefully the Safety and Important Warning Items described below to understand them before doing ser-
vice work.
Because of possible hazards to an inexperienced person servicing this copier as well as the risk of damage to
the copier, Minolta Corporation strongly recommends that all servicing be performed only by Minolta-trained ser-
vice technicians.
Changes may have been made to this copier to improve its performance after this Service manual was printed.
Accordingly, Minolta Corporation does not warrant, either explicitly or implicitly, that the information contained in
this Service manual is complete and accurate.
The user of this Service manual must assume all risks of personal injury and/or damage to the copier while ser-
vicing the copier for which this Service manual is intended.
Therefore, this Service manual must be carefully read before doing service work both in the course of technical
training and even after that, for performing maintenance and control of the copier properly.
Keep this Service manual also for future service.
In this Service manual, each of three expressions “ DANGER”, “ WARNING”, and “ CAUTION” is defined
as follows together with a symbol mark to be used in a limited meaning.
When servicing the copier, the relevant works (disassembling, reassembling, adjustment, repair, maintenance,
etc.) need to be conducted with utmost care.
Symbols used for safety and important warning items are defined as follows:
SAFETY AND IMPORTANT WARNING ITEMS
IMPORTANT NOTICE
DESCRIPTION ITEMS FOR DANGER, WARNING AND
CAUTION
DANGER :Action having a high possibility of suffering death or serious injury
WARNING:Action having a possibility of suffering death or serious injury
CAUTION :Action having a possibility of suffering a slight wound, medium trouble, andproperty damage
:Precaution when using the copier.General precaution Electric hazard High temperature
:Prohibition when using the copier.General prohibition Do not touch with wet hand Do not disassemble
:Direction when using the copier.General instruction Unplug Ground/Earth
SAFETY AND IMPORTANT WARNING ITEMS
S-2
1. MODIFICATIONS NOT AUTHORIZED BY MINOLTA
Minolta copiers are renowned for their high reliability. This reliability is achieved through high-quality design and
a solid service network.
Copier design is a highly complicated and delicate process where numerous mechanical, physical, and electrical
aspects have to be taken into consideration, with the aim of arriving at proper tolerances and safety factors. For
this reason, unauthorized modifications involve a high risk of degradation in performance and safety. Such mod-
ifications are therefore strictly prohibited. the points listed below are not exhaustive, but they illustrate the rea-
soning behind this policy.
SAFETY WARNINGS
DANGER : PROHIBITED ACTIONS
• Using any cables or power cord not specified by Minolta.
• Using any fuse or thermostat not specified by Minolta. Safety will not be
assured, leading to a risk of fire and injury.
• Disabling fuse functions or bridging fuse terminals with wire, metal clips, sol-
der or similar object.
• Disabling relay functions (such as wedging paper between relay contacts)
• Disabling safety functions (interlocks, safety circuits, etc.) Safety will not be
assured, leading to a risk of fire and injury.
• Making any modification to the copier unless instructed by Minolta.
• Using parts not specified by Minolta.
SAFETY AND IMPORTANT WARNING ITEMS
S-3
2. CHECKPOINTS WHEN PERFORMING ON-SITE SERVICE
Minolta copiers are extensively tested before shipping, to ensure that all applicable safety standards are met, in
order to protect the customer and customer engineer (hereafter called the CE) from the risk of injury. However,
in daily use, any electrical equipment may be subject to parts wear and eventual failure. In order to maintain
safety and reliability, the CE must perform regular safety checks.
2.1 Power Supply
WARNING: Wall Outlet
• Check that mains voltage is as specified. Plug the power cord into the dedi-
cated wall outlet with a capacity greater than the maximum power consump-
tion.
If excessive current flows in the wall outlet, fire may result.
• If two or more power cords can be plugged into the wall outlet, the total load
must not exceed the rating of the wall outlet.
If excessive current flows in the wall outlet, fire may result.
WARNING: Power Plug and Cord
• Make sure the power cord is plugged in the wall outlet securely.
Contact problems may lead to increased resistance, overheating, and the
risk of fire.
• Check whether the power cord is damaged. Check whether the sheath is
damaged.
If the power plug, cord, or sheath is damaged, replace with a new power
cord (with plugs on both ends) specified by Minolta. Using the damaged
power cord may result in fire or electric shock.
• When using the power cord (inlet type) that came with this copier, be sure to
observe the following precautions:
a. Make sure the copier-side power plug is securely inserted in the socket
on the rear panel of the copier.
Secure the cord with a fixture properly.
b. If the power cord or sheath is damaged, replace with a new power cord
(with plugs on both ends) specified by Minolta.
If the power cord (inlet type) is not connected to the copier securely, a
contact problem may lead to increased resistance, overheating, and risk
of fire.
• Check whether the power cord is not stepped on or pinched by a table and
so on.
Overheating may occur there, leading to a risk of fire.
kw
SAFETY AND IMPORTANT WARNING ITEMS
S-4
• Do not bundle or tie the power cord.
Overheating may occur there, leading to a risk of fire.
• Check whether dust is collected around the power plug and wall outlet.
Using the power plug and wall outlet without removing dust may result in
fire.
• Do not insert the power plug into the wall outlet with a wet hand.
The risk of electric shock exists.
• When unplugging the power cord, grasp the plug, not the cable.
The cable may be broken, leading to a risk of fire and electric shock.
WARNING: Wiring
• Never use multi-plug adapters to plug multiple power cords in the same out-
let.
If used, the risk of fire exists.
• When an extension cord is required, use a specified one.
Current that can flow in the extension cord is limited, so using a too long
extension cord may result in fire.
Do not use an extension cable reel with the cable taken up. Fire may
result.
WARNING: Ground Lead
• Check whether the copier is grounded properly.
If current leakage occurs in an ungrounded copier, you may suffer electric
shock while operating the copier. Connect the ground lead to one of the
following points:
a. Ground terminal of wall outlet
b. Ground terminal for which Class D work has been done
WARNING: Power Plug and Cord
SAFETY AND IMPORTANT WARNING ITEMS
S-5
2.2. Installation Requirements
• Pay attention to the point to which the ground lead is connected.
Connecting the ground lead to an improper point such as the points listed
below results in a risk of explosion and electric shock:
a. Gas pipe (A risk of explosion or fire exists.)
b. Lightning rod (A risk of electric shock or fire exists.)
c. Telephone line ground (A risk of electric shock or fire exists in the case
of lightning.)
d. Water pipe or faucet (It may include a plastic portion.)
WARNING: Prohibited Installation Place
• Do not place the copier near flammable materials such as curtains or volatile
materials that may catch fire.
A risk of fire exists.
• Do not place the copier in a place exposed to water such as rain water.
A risk of fire and electric shock exists.
WARNING: Nonoperational Handling
• When the copier is not used over an extended period of time (holidays, etc.),
switch it off and unplug the power cord.
Dust collected around the power plug and outlet may cause fire.
CAUTION: Temperature and Humidity
• Do not place the copier in a place exposed to direct sunlight or near a heat
source such as a heater.
A risk of degradation in copier performance or deformation exists.
Do not place the copier in a place exposed to cool wind.
Recommended temperature and humidity are as follows:
Temperature: 10 °C to 30 °CHumidity: 10 % to 80 % (no dew condensation)
Avoid other environments as much as possible.
CAUTION: Ventilation
• Do not place the copier in a place where there is much dust, cigarette smoke,
or ammonia gas.
Place the copier in a well ventilated place to prevent machine problems
and image faults.
WARNING: Ground Lead
SAFETY AND IMPORTANT WARNING ITEMS
S-6
• The copier generates ozone gas during operation, but it is not sufficient to be
harmful to the human body.
If a bad smell of ozone is present in the following cases, ventilate the room.
a. When the copier is used in a poorly ventilated room
b. When taking a lot of copies
c. When using multiple copiers at the same time
CAUTION: Vibration
• When installing the copier, read the Installation Guide thoroughly. Be sure to
install the copier in a level and sturdy place.
Constant vibration will cause problems.
• Be sure to lock the caster stoppers.
In the case of an earthquake and so on, the copier may slide, leading to a
injury.
CAUTION: Inspection before Servicing
• Before conducting an inspection, read all relevant documentation (Service
manual, technical notices, etc.) and proceed with the inspection following the
prescribed procedure in safety clothes, using only the prescribed tools. Do
not make any adjustment not described in the documentation.
If the prescribed procedure or tool is not used, the copier may break and a
risk of injury or fire exists.
• Before conducting an inspection, be sure to disconnect the power plugs from
the copier and options.
When the power plug is inserted in the wall outlet, some units are still pow-
ered even if the POWER switch is turned OFF. A risk of electric shock
exists.
• The area around the fixing unit is hot.
You may get burnt.
DANGER: Work Performed with the Copier Powered
• Take every care when making adjustments or performing an operation check
with the copier powered.
If you make adjustments or perform an operation check with the external
cover detached, you may touch live or high-voltage parts or you may be
caught in moving gears or the timing belt, leading to a risk of injury.
CAUTION: Ventilation
SAFETY AND IMPORTANT WARNING ITEMS
S-7
• Take every care when servicing with the external cover detached.
High-voltage exists around the drum unit. A risk of electric shock exists.
WARNING: Safety Checkpoints
• Check the exterior and frame for edges, burrs, and other damages.
The user or CE may be injured.
• Do not allow any metal parts such as clips, staples, and screws to fall into the
copier.
They can short internal circuits and cause electric shock or fire.
• Check wiring for squeezing and any other damage.
Current can leak, leading to a risk of electric shock or fire.
• When disconnecting connectors, grasp the connector, not the cable.
(Specifically, connectors of the AC line and high-voltage parts)
Current can leak, leading to a risk of electric shock or fire.
• Carefully remove all toner remnants and dust from electrical parts and elec-
trode units such as a charging corona unit.
Current can leak, leading to a risk of copier trouble or fire.
• Check high-voltage cables and sheaths for any damage.
Current can leak, leading to a risk of electric shock or fire.
• Check electrode units such as a charging corona unit for deterioration and
sign of leakage.
Current can leak, leading to a risk of trouble or fire.
• Before disassembling or adjusting the write unit incorporating a laser, make
sure that the power cord has been disconnected.
The laser light can enter your eye, leading to a risk of loss of eyesight.
• Do not remove the cover of the write unit. Do not supply power with the write
unit shifted from the specified mounting position.
The laser light can enter your eye, leading to a risk of loss of eyesight.
• When replacing a lithium battery, replace it with a new lithium battery speci-
fied in the Parts Guide Manual. Dispose of the used lithium battery using the
method specified by local authority.
Improper replacement can cause explosion.
DANGER: Work Performed with the Copier Powered
SAFETY AND IMPORTANT WARNING ITEMS
S-8
WARNING: Safety Checkpoints
• After replacing a part to which AC voltage is applied (e.g., optical lamp and
fixing lamp), be sure to check the installation state.
A risk of fire exists.
• Check the interlock switch and actuator for loosening and check whether the
interlock functions properly.
If the interlock does not function, you may receive an electric shock or be
injured when you insert your hand in the copier (e.g., for clearing paper
jam).
• Make sure the wiring cannot come into contact with sharp edges, burrs, or
other pointed parts.
Current can leak, leading to a risk of electric shock or fire.
• Make sure that all screws, components, wiring, connectors, etc. that were
removed for safety check and maintenance have been reinstalled in the orig-
inal location. (Pay special attention to forgotten connectors, pinched cables,
forgotten screws, etc.)
A risk of copier trouble, electric shock, and fire exists.
DANGER: HANDLING OF SERVICE MATERIALS
• Toner and developer are not harmful substances, but care must be taken not
to breathe excessive amounts or let the substances come into contact with
eyes, etc. It may be stimulative.
If the substances get in the eye, rinse with plenty of water immediately.
When symptoms are noticeable, consult a physician.
• Never throw the used cartridge and toner into fire.
You may be burned due to dust explosion.
DANGER : HANDLING OF SERVICE MATERIALS
• Unplug the power cord from the wall outlet.
Drum cleaner (isopropyl alcohol) and roller cleaner (acetone-based) are
highly flammable and must be handled with care. A risk of fire exists.
SAFETY AND IMPORTANT WARNING ITEMS
S-9
3. MEASURES TO TAKE IN CASE OF AN ACCIDENT
• If an accident has occurred, the distributor who has been notified first must immediately take emergency
measures to provide relief to affected persons and to prevent further damage.
• If a report of a serious accident has been received from a customer, an on-site evaluation must be carried
out quickly and Minolta Corporation must be notified.
• To determine the cause of the accident, conditions and materials must be recorded through direct on-site
checks, in accordance with instructions issued by Minolta Corporation.
• For reports and measures concerning serious accidents, follow the regulations given in “Serious Accident
Report/Follow-up Procedures”.
4. CONCLUSION
• Safety of users and customer engineers depends highly on accurate maintenance and administration.
Therefore, safety can be maintained by the appropriate daily service work conducted by the customer
engineer.
• When performing service, each copier on the site must be tested for safety. The customer engineer must
verify the safety of parts and ensure appropriate management of the equipment.
• Do not replace the cover or turn the copier ON before any solvent remnants
on the cleaned parts have fully evaporated.
A risk of fire exists.
• Use only a small amount of cleaner at a time and take care not to spill any
liquid. If this happens, immediately wipe it off.
A risk of fire exists.
• When using any solvent, ventilate the room well.
Breathing large quantities of organic solvents can lead to discomfort.
DANGER : HANDLING OF SERVICE MATERIALS
SAFETY AND IMPORTANT WARNING ITEMS
S-10
The Center for Devices and Radiological Health (CDRH) of the U.S. Food and Drug Administration implemented
regulations for laser products manufactured since August 1, 1976. Compliance is mandatory for products mar-
keted in the United States.
This copier is certified as a “Class 1” laser product under the U.S.
Department of Health and Human Services (DHHS) Radiation Performance Standard according to the Radiation
Control for Health and Safety Act of 1968. Since radiation emitted inside this copier is completely confined within
protective housings and external covers, the laser beam cannot escape during any phase of normal user opera-
tion.
SAFETY INFORMATION
IMPORTANT INFORMATION
SAFETY AND IMPORTANT WARNING ITEMS
S-11
This machine is provided with the following safety circuits to prevent machine faults from resulting in serious
accidents.
• Overall protection circuit
• Fixing upper lamp /1 (L2), Fixing upper lamp /2 (L3), Fixing lower lamp (L4) overheating prevention circuit
These safety circuits are described below to provide
the service engineer with a renewed awareness of
them in order to prevent servicing errors that may
impair their functions.
1. Overall protection circuit
1.1 Protection by circuit breaker /1 (CBR1) and circuit breaker /2 (CBR2)
CBR1 and CBR2 interrupt the AC line instantaneously when an excessive current flows due to a short in
the AC line.
CAUTION:
The CBR1 and CBR2 functions must not be deactivated under any circumstances.
SAFETY CIRCUITS
NF
CBR1
CBR2
8050sf001
SAFETY AND IMPORTANT WARNING ITEMS
S-12
2. Fixing upper lamp /1 (L2), Fixing upper lamp /2 (L3), Fixing lower lamp (L4) overheating
prevention circuit
2.1 Protection by software
The output voltage from fixing temperature sensor /1 (TH1) and fixing temperature sensor /2 (TH2) is read
by the CPU. If this voltage is abnormal, L2, L3, and L4 are turned OFF by opening main relay (RL1).
CAUTION:
• The clearance between the fixing upper roller and TH1 and the clearance between the fixing
lower roller and TH2 must not be changed. When replacing them, make sure to comply with the
specified clearances.
• The RL1 function must not be deactivated under any circumstances.
2.2 Protection by the hardware circuit
The output voltages from fixing temperature sensor /1 (TH1), fixing temperature sensor /2 (TH2), fixing
temperature sensor /3 (TH3), and fixing temperature sensor /4 (TH4) are compared with the abnormality
judgment reference value in the comparator circuit. If the output voltage from TH1, TH2, TH3, or TH4
exceeds the reference value, L2, L3, and L4 are turned OFF by opening RL1.
CAUTION:
• The clearance between the fixing upper roller and TH1 and the clearance between the fixing
lower roller and TH2 must not be changed. When replacing them, make sure to comply with the
specified clearances.
• Periodically check the contact between the fixing upper roller and TH3 and the contact
between the fixing lower roller and TH4, and replace them if any abnormality is detected.
• The RL1 function must not be deactivated under any circumstances.
2.3 Protection by thermostat /1 (TS1) and thermostat /2 (TS2)
When the temperature of the fixing upper roller exceeds the specified value, TS1 is turned OFF, thus inter-
rupting the power to L2 and L3 directly. When the temperature of the fixing lower roller exceeds the speci-
fied value, TS2 is turned OFF, thus interrupting the power to L4 directly.
CAUTION:
Do not use any other electrical conductor in place of TS1 and TS2.
Control
section
AC driver
section
TS1
PRCB ACDB
TS2
L2
L3
L4
RL1RL1
TH1
TH3
TH2
TH4
FHCB
8050sf002e
SAFETY AND IMPORTANT WARNING ITEMS
S-13
Caution labels shown below are attached in some areas on/in the machine.
When accessing these areas for maintenance, repair, or adjustment, special care should be taken to avoid
burns and electric shock.
CAUTION
INDICATION OF WARNING ON THE MACHINE
Please adhere to all caution labels to avoid burns or injury.
8050sf003e
SAFETY AND IMPORTANT WARNING ITEMS
S-14
CAUTION
-
Please adhere to all caution labels to avoid burns or injury.
8050sf004e
SAFETY AND IMPORTANT WARNING ITEMS
S-15
CAUTION
8050sf005e
-
Please adhere to all caution labels to avoid burns or injury.
SAFETY AND IMPORTANT WARNING ITEMS
S-16
CAUTION
8050sf006e
-
Please adhere to all caution labels to avoid burns or injury.
SAFETY AND IMPORTANT WARNING ITEMS
S-17
CAUTION
8050sf007e
-
Please adhere to all caution labels to avoid burns or injury..
SAFETY AND IMPORTANT WARNING ITEMS
S-18
CAUTION
8050sf008e
Unplug the machine before removing platen glass.
Debrancher le copieur avant de retirer la vitre d'exposition.
Desenchufe la maquina antes de quitar el vidrio.
Desconecte a unidade da tomada antes de remover o vidro de exposicao.
PS
~
-
Please adhere to all caution labels to avoid burns or injury.
CF5001 Field Service Ver.1.0 Sep 2003 EXTERIOR
1-1
I D
IS./
AS
SE
MB
LYI DISASSEMBLY/ASSEMBLY
Caution:
• Make sure the power cord of the copier is
unplugged from the power outlet before dis-
assembly or assembly.
1. EXTERIOR
1.1 Replacing the dust filter /2
A. Periodically replaced parts/cycle
• Dust filter /2: Every 100,000 copies
B. Procedure
1. Loosen 2 screws [1] and remove the filter cover
[2].
2. Pull out the dust filter /2 [2] from the filter cover
[1].
3. Reinstall the above parts following the removal
steps in reverse.
[1]
[2] 8050ma3001
[2][1] 8050ma3002
EXTERIOR CF5001 Field Service Ver.1.0 Sep 2003
1-2
I D
IS./
AS
SE
MB
LY
1.2 Replacing the dust filter /1and the ozone filter /1
A. Periodically replaced parts/cycle
• Dust filter /1: Every 100,000 copies
• Ozone filter /1: Every 100,000 copies
B. Procedure
1. Loosen 4 screws [1] and remove the side cover /
2 [2].
2. Pull out the filter replacement duct [1].
[1]
[1][2] 8050ma3004
[1] 8050ma3005
CF5001 Field Service Ver.1.0 Sep 2003 EXTERIOR
1-3
I D
IS./
AS
SE
MB
LY
3. Remove the 2 dust filters /1 [2] and the ozone fil-
ter /3 [3] from the filter replacement duct [1].
4. Reinstall the above parts following the removal
steps in reverse.
Note:
• When reinstalling the ozone filter /1, be care-
ful not snap and fracture it.
• When reinstalling the dust filter /1, be sure to
press it against the stopper section [4] of the
filter replacement duct.
[4]
[1] [3] [2]
8050ma3006
EXTERIOR CF5001 Field Service Ver.1.0 Sep 2003
1-4
I D
IS./
AS
SE
MB
LY
1.3 Replacing the toner collec-tion box
A. Periodically replaced parts/cycle
• Toner collection box: Every 50,000 copies (to be
replaced by the user)
B. Procedure
1. Open the toner collection door [1] and pull out
the toner collection box [2]. [1]
[2] 8050ma3007
CF5001 Field Service Ver.1.0 Sep 2003 EXTERIOR
1-5
I D
IS./
AS
SE
MB
LY
2. Peel the label [2] off the toner collection box [1]
and plug the entrance of the toner collection box
[1].
3. Reinstall the above parts following the removal
steps in reverse.
[1]
[2]
[2][3]
8050ma3008
EXTERIOR CF5001 Field Service Ver.1.0 Sep 2003
1-6
I D
IS./
AS
SE
MB
LY
1.4 Angle adjustment of theoperation board
Note:
• The operation board can be set at the two
steps of 7 and 18 degrees depending on the
front cover /2 provided or not provided.
When the front cover /2 provided: 7 degrees
When the front cover /2 not provided: 18
degrees
A. Procedure
1. Open the front door [1] and the toner supply
door [2].
2. Remove 2 screws [3] and release the fixing of
the operation board [4].
3. With the operation board raised up, remove the
front cover /2 [5] (when the angle is changed
from 7 to 18 degrees).
4. Fasten the operation board [4] with 2 screws [3].
5. Close the front door [1] and the toner supply
door [2].
Note:
• When changing the angle of the operation
board from 18 to 7 degrees, install the front
cover /2 by following Step 3.
[4][3] [5] [3]
[1]
[2]
8050ma3009
CF5001 Field Service Ver.1.0 Sep 2003 EXTERIOR
1-7
I D
IS./
AS
SE
MB
LY
1.5 Removing and reinstallingthe main board unit
A. Procedure
1. Remove the platen cover.
2. Remove the filter cover. (See "1.1 Replacing the
dust filter /2.")
3. Loosen 2 screws [1], remove 13 screws [2], and
then remove the rear cover [3].
4. Remove the side cover /2. (See "1.2 Replacing
the dust filter /1 and the ozone filter /1.")
5. Remove the screws [5], one for each, and then
remove the 2 original cover supports [6].
6. Remove 2 caps [4].
7. Remove 4 screws [7] and then remove the scan-
ner cover /R [8].
8. Remove the special screw [1].
9. Remove 4 screws [2] and then remove the
board seal plate /2 [3].
[8] [7] [6] [5] [4][6] [5]
[1][3]
[2]
[2]
[2]
[4]
8050ma3010
[1][3]
[2] 8050ma3011
EXTERIOR CF5001 Field Service Ver.1.0 Sep 2003
1-8
I D
IS./
AS
SE
MB
LY
10. Remove 5 connectors [1].
11. With the lock lever [2] brought down this side,
release the lock and pull out the ribbon cable [3].
Note:
• Move the lock lever [1] forward, then insert the
ribbon cable [2] firmly into the connector
while ensuring that the conductive face of the
ribbon cable [3] is positioned on the opposite
side of the lock lever.
[1] [3] [1]
[1]
8050ma3012
[2][3]
[1]
[2]
[3]
CF5001 Field Service Ver.1.0 Sep 2003 EXTERIOR
1-9
I D
IS./
AS
SE
MB
LY
• Then with the lock lever [1] brought back to its
original position, lock the ribbon cable [2].
12. Remove 2 screws [1] and then remove the
board seal plate /4 [2].
[1]
[2]
[1]
[2] 8050ma3013
EXTERIOR CF5001 Field Service Ver.1.0 Sep 2003
1-10
I D
IS./
AS
SE
MB
LY
13. Remove a bracket cable clamp [1].
14. Remove 2 connectors [2].
15. Remove 4 screws [3] and then remove the main
board unit [4].
16. Reinstall the above parts following the removal
steps in reverse.
Note:
• When removing or reinstalling the main board
unit, be careful that the battery on the memory
board (MB) does not touch with the frame.
[3][4]
[3][1]
[2]
8050ma3014
CF5001 Field Service Ver.1.0 Sep 2003 SCANNER
1-11
I D
IS./
AS
SE
MB
LY
2. SCANNER
2.1 Screws that must not beremoved
Note:
Screws that have been paint-locked are not
allowed to be removed. So, be careful not to
remove them.
2.2 Removing and reinstallingthe platen glass
A. Procedure
1. Remove 3 screws [1] and then remove the origi-
nal positioning plate /R [2].
2. Remove 2 screws [3] and then remove the origi-
nal positioning plate /L [4].
3. Remove 2 screws [5] and the remove the scan-
ner cover /M [6].
4. Remove the platen glass [7].
5. Reinstall the above parts following the removal
steps in reverse.
Note:
• Be sure to reinstall the platen glass with its
white reference plate [8] up.
[1]
[1][1][1] 8050ma3015
[5][1] [6][4] [2]
[7][3] [8] 8050ma3016
SCANNER CF5001 Field Service Ver.1.0 Sep 2003
1-12
I D
IS./
AS
SE
MB
LY
2.3 Removing and reinstallingthe CCD unit
A. Procedure for removal
1. Remove the platen glass. (See "2.2 Removing
and reinstalling the platen glass.")
2. Remove the connector [1].
3. Remove 9 screws [2] and then remove the CCD
cover [3].
4. Remove the screw [4] and then remove the rib-
bon cable cover [5].
5. With the lock lever [1] brought down, release the
lock and pull out the ribbon cable [2].
Note:
• Move the lock lever [1] downward, then insert
the ribbon cable [2] firmly into the connector
while ensuring that the conductive face of the
ribbon cable is positioned on the opposite
side of the lock lever.
• Then bring the lock lever back to its original
position, lock the ribbon cable.
[4] [5] [3]
[2][1] 8050ma3141
[2][1] 8050ma3142
CF5001 Field Service Ver.1.0 Sep 2003 SCANNER
1-13
I D
IS./
AS
SE
MB
LY
6. Remove 4 screws [1] and then remove the CCD
unit [2].
Note:
• Be careful not to remove screws other than
those mentioned above. Otherwise, it
becomes necessary to make all sort of optical
adjustments which cannot be handled in the
field.
• Be careful not to touch the lens. This may
result in poor images.
7. Reinstall the above parts following the removal
steps in reverse.
[1] [2]
[1] 8050ma3143
SCANNER CF5001 Field Service Ver.1.0 Sep 2003
1-14
I D
IS./
AS
SE
MB
LY
2.4 Removing and reinstallingthe exposure unit
A. Procedure for removal
1. Remove the slit glass. (See "2.2 Removing and
reinstalling the slit glass.")
2. Open the toner supply section. (See "5.1 Open-
ing and closing of the toner supply section.")
3. Remove 2 caps [2].
4. Remove 6 screws [1].
5. After removing the relay connector [4] with the
scanner cover /F [3] shifted to the front side
once, remove the scanner cover /F [3].
[1]
[4][3]
[1][2] [2]
8050ma3017
CF5001 Field Service Ver.1.0 Sep 2003 SCANNER
1-15
I D
IS./
AS
SE
MB
LY
6. Remove 2 screws [1] and release the fixing of
the exposure unit [2].
7. Rotate the exposure unit [2] while holding it hor-
izontally, pull it up and place it upon the scanner
room [6].
8. Remove the connector [1].
9. Remove the screw [2] and release the cable [4]
from the cable holder [3].
10. Remove the exposure unit [5].
[2][5][1] [4]
[1]
[3]
[6] [5] 8050ma3018
[5][1][2] [3]
[4] 8050ma3019
SCANNER CF5001 Field Service Ver.1.0 Sep 2003
1-16
I D
IS./
AS
SE
MB
LY
B. Procedure for reinstallation
1. Set the exposure unit [1] into the main body.
2. Move the V-mirror unit [2] to the paper exit side,
and pass an optical positioning jig [3] through
each of the exposure unit [1] and the V-mirror
unit [2] from the front side.
Note:
• When reinstalling the exposure unit, be sure
to use the optical positioning jig.
3. Fasten the exposure unit [1] with 2 screws [4].
4. Remove 2 optical positioning jigs [3].
5. For the subsequent steps, reinstall the parts fol-
lowing the removal steps in reverse.
[2] [1][4]
[4]
[3] 8050ma3020
CF5001 Field Service Ver.1.0 Sep 2003 SCANNER
1-17
I D
IS./
AS
SE
MB
LY
2.5 Removing and reinstallingthe exposure lamp
A. Procedure
1. Remove the exposure unit. (See "2.4 Removing
and reinstalling the exposure unit.")
2. Cut the binding band [1] and release the fixing
of the cable [2].
3. Remove 2 screws [3] and then remove the HP
detection plate [4].
4. Remove 2 screws [5] and then remove L1 (expo-
sure lamp) [6].
5. Reinstall the above parts following the removal
steps in reverse.
[6][1] [3]
[2] [4] [5] 8050ma3021
SCANNER CF5001 Field Service Ver.1.0 Sep 2003
1-18
I D
IS./
AS
SE
MB
LY
2.6 Removing the scanner wire
A. Procedure
1. Remove the exposure unit. (See "2.4 Removing
and reinstalling the exposure unit.")
2. Remove 2 caps [1].
3. Remove the screw [2] and remove the scanner
cover /R [3].
4. Remove the screw [4] and remove the scanner
cover /L [5].
5. Loosen the screws [1], one for each, and
release the fixing of two spring fixing plates [2].
[1] [4] [1][3] [2]
[5] 8050ma3022
[2]
[1] 8050ma3023
CF5001 Field Service Ver.1.0 Sep 2003 SCANNER
1-19
I D
IS./
AS
SE
MB
LY
6. Remove the wire terminal [3] of the scanner wire
/R [2] from the spring fixing plate [1], and then
remove the scanner wire /R [2] in the order of
the pulley /3 [4], the outside of the V-mirror pul-
ley [5] and the pulley /2 [6].
7. Remove the metal bead [8] of the scanner wire /
R [2] from the wire stopper [7], and then remove
the scanner wire /R [2] in the order of the inside
of the V-mirror pulley [5] and the pulley /1 [9].
8. Remove the scanner wire /R [2] from the drive
pulley [10].
9. Remove the scanner wire /F [11] by following
Steps 5 to 7.
Note:
• The scanner wires /F and /R are installed sym-
metrically.
[2]
[3]
[1]
[2] [8][7][11]
[5]
[3][6][4]
[2]
[10]
[9]
8050ma3024
SCANNER CF5001 Field Service Ver.1.0 Sep 2003
1-20
I D
IS./
AS
SE
MB
LY
2.7 Reinstalling the scanner wire
A. Procedure
1. Move the V-mirror unit [1] to the paper exit side,
and pass the optical positioning jig [2] through
the V-mirror unit [1] from the front side.
Note:
• Be careful not to damage the mirror with the
jig.
• When reinstalling the scanner wire, be sure to
fasten the V-mirror with the optical position-
ing jig.
2. Drop into the fitting hole of the drive pulley [4] a
metal bead [3] provided at the center of each of
the scanner wires /F [1] and /R [2], and starting
from this hole, wind the scanner wire 2.5 turns
[5] outwards and 3.5 turns [6] inwards.
Note:
• For the scanner wires /F and /R, common
wires are used.
• Be sure to wind each of scanner wires so that
the wire terminal is on the outside and the
metal bead [7] on the inside.
• Be sure to wind each of scanner wires so that
both ends of the wire come out under the
drive pulley.
• Be sure to wind each of the scanner wires
closely around the drive pully with no wire
running on another wire.
3. After winding the scanner wires /F and R/, be
sure to fasten each wire end with a tape [8] so
that it will not come off.
[1]
[2] 8050ma3025
8050ma3026
[7] [3]
[5][6]
[4]
[1]
[7][3]
[5] [6]
[4]
[2]
[8]
[8]
[4]
CF5001 Field Service Ver.1.0 Sep 2003 SCANNER
1-21
I D
IS./
AS
SE
MB
LY
4. Pass the scanner wire /R [2] on the metal bead
[3] side (inside) which is wound around the drive
pulley [1] through the pulley /1 [4] and the V-mir-
ror pulley [5] in this order, and then hook the
metal bead [3] onto the wire stopper [6].
5. Pass the scanner wire /R [2] on the wire terminal
[7] side (outside) which is wound around the
drive pulley [1] through the pulley /2 [8] and the
outside of V-mirror pulley [5] and the pulley /3 [9]
in this order, and then hook the wire terminal [7]
onto the spring fixing plate [10].
6. Reinstall the scanner wire /F [11] by following
Steps 4 and 5.
[2]
[3]
[1]
[2] [8][7][11]
[5]
[3][6][4]
[2]
[10]
[9]
8050ma3027
FRONT
SCANNER CF5001 Field Service Ver.1.0 Sep 2003
1-22
I D
IS./
AS
SE
MB
LY
7. Tighten the screws [1], one for each, and fasten
the 2 spring fixing plates [2].
8. For the subsequent steps, reinstall the parts fol-
lowing the removal steps in reverse.
[2]
[1] 8050ma3140
CF5001 Field Service Ver.1.0 Sep 2003 WRITING
1-23
I D
IS./
AS
SE
MB
LY
3. WRITING
3.1 Screw that must not beremoved
Note:
• The screws [1] of each unit of the YMCK are
not allowed to be removed. So, be careful not
to remove them.
[1] 8050ma3028
WRITING CF5001 Field Service Ver.1.0 Sep 2003
1-24
I D
IS./
AS
SE
MB
LY
3.2 Removing and reinstallingthe write unit
Warning:
• Be sure that the write unit should not be
powered with it slid from its normal instal-
lation position.
• Be sure not to remove the write unit cover
while being supplied with power. Otherwise,
laser beams get into your eyes and you may
lose your sight.
Note:
• Be sure not to remove the write unit cover. Do
not loosen the screws, either.
• When removing the write unit, be careful not
to touch the dust glass (to prevent the mirror
from being stained).
• Be sure not to remove the write unit for at
least two minutes after the main power switch
is turned off.
• When replacing the side cover /1, insert the
prong [1] on the side cover /1 into the notch
on the main body.
A. Procedure
1. Open the by-pass tray [1].
2. Loosen 4 screws [2] and remove the side cover /
2 [3].
3. Loosen 5 screws [4] and remove the side cover /
1 [5].
8050ma3175[1]
[4] [2][5]
[3]
[1] 8050ma3029
CF5001 Field Service Ver.1.0 Sep 2003 WRITING
1-25
I D
IS./
AS
SE
MB
LY
4. Remove 5 relay connectors [1].
5. Remove 10 screws [2] and then remove the fan
holder /R [3].
Note:
• Check the direction where the fan is assem-
bled.
[1] Turn the label side inside.
[2] Turn the label side outside.
6. Remove 2 screws [1] and then remove the write
pressing board [2] while pressing it downward.
7. Remove 2 screws [3] and then remove 2 write
cooling ducts [4].
Note:
• Be sure to hold the upper half of the write
pressing board when removing it.
[2] [2]
[2][1][2] [3] 8050ma3030
[2] 5001ma3030[1]
[3]
[4]
[1]
[2][3] 8050ma3031
WRITING CF5001 Field Service Ver.1.0 Sep 2003
1-26
I D
IS./
AS
SE
MB
LY 8. Remove the connectors [1], 2 each, and then
remove the write unit /Y [2], write unit /M [3],
write unit /C [4] and the write unit /K [5].
9. Reinstall the above parts following the removal
steps in reverse.
Note:
• The write units /C, /M and /Y are all common.
• The bottom of the write units /C, /M and /Y is
provided with a wire tension spring [1] which
differentiates these three write units from the
write unit /K.
• Be careful not install any other write unit in
the installation place for the write unit /K.
[1]
[1]
[1]
[1][2]
[3]
[4]
[5]
8050ma3032
[1] 8050ma3034
CF5001 Field Service Ver.1.0 Sep 2003 PROCESS UNIT
1-27
I D
IS./
AS
SE
MB
LY
4. PROCESS UNIT
4.1 Flow of the disassembly ofthe process unit section
Open the toner supply section
Pull out the process unit Remove the charging corona unit
Pull out the transfer belt unit
Remove the drum cartridge Remove the developing unit
Remove the process unit
Remove the image correction unit
Open the front fan cover
PROCESS UNIT CF5001 Field Service Ver.1.0 Sep 2003
1-28
I D
IS./
AS
SE
MB
LY
4.2 Cleaning the charging corona unit
A. Procedure
Note:
• The charging corona units are provided for
the four colors of yellow, magenta, cyan and
black. These units are common. Do not reuse
a charging corona unit that was once used for
a color since it has been stuck with the toner
of the color.
1. Open the toner supply section. (See "5.1 Open-
ing and closing the toner supply section.")
2. With the lever [2] of the charging corona unit [1]
pressed down once to the lower right side, pull
out the charging corona unit this side for
removal.
[2]
[1]
8050ma3037
CF5001 Field Service Ver.1.0 Sep 2003 PROCESS UNIT
1-29
I D
IS./
AS
SE
MB
LY
3. Remove a charging cleaning block [3] from the
charging suction assembly [2] provided on the
outside of the toner supply unit [1].
Note:
• There are two charging cleaning blocks pro-
vided. Be sure to use either of these two
blocks when cleaning the charging corona.
4. Holding the charging corona unit [2] so that the
charging control plate [1] comes up, set the
charging cleaning block [3] to the notch and
insert it from under the bottom on the rear side,
and turn it about 45° clockwise.
Note:
• If the charging wire is cleaned with the charg-
ing control plate facing down, there is a risk
that dust that has stuck to the charging wire
sticks to the charging control plate. So, when
cleaning the charging wire, be sure to hold the
charging corona unit so that the charging
control plate comes upward.
5. Clean the charging wire [4] by sliding back and
forth the charging cleaning block [3].
6. Reinstall the above parts following the removal
steps in reverse.
[2]
[3] [1]
8050ma3038
[3]
[1]
[2]
8050ma3039
PROCESS UNIT CF5001 Field Service Ver.1.0 Sep 2003
1-30
I D
IS./
AS
SE
MB
LY
4.3 Cleaning/replacing, remov-ing and reinstalling the charging wire assy/the charging control plate
A. Periodically replaced parts/cycle
• Charging wire assy: Every 100,000 copies
• Charging control plate: Every 200,000 copies
• Charging grid spring: Every 200,000 copies
Note:
• The charging corona unit is made up of a
charging wire assy, charging control plate and
a charging grid spring.
B. Procedure
1. Remove the charging corona unit. (See "4.2
Cleaning and replacing the charging corona
unit.")
2. Remove 2 charging control springs [1] and then
remove the charging control plate [2].
3. Clean the charging control plate by blowing off
dust with a blower brush.
4. Reinstall the above parts following the removal
steps in reverse.
Note:
• Be sure to install the charging control plate so
that the side on which the charging control
spring is hooked comes to the front of the
charging corona unit.
• Be sure to install each of the charging control
springs with its tips [3] of both ends point
toward the charging wire.
[3]
[1]
[2]
[2]
8050ma3040
CF5001 Field Service Ver.1.0 Sep 2003 PROCESS UNIT
1-31
I D
IS./
AS
SE
MB
LY
4.4 Pulling out the process unit
Note:
• In order to prevent the main body from falling
down, the process unit and the ADU are pro-
vided with a safety mechanism so that they
cannot be pulled out at the same time.
• If the ADU has been pulled out when pulling
out the process unit, be sure to push it back
into the main body.
A. Procedure
1. Open the toner supply section. (See "5.1 Open-
ing and closing the toner supply section.")
2. Loosen the screw [1] and open the front fan
cover [2].
3. Bring down the stand handle /L [1] and the
stand handle /R [2] to the inside at the same
time to release the fixing of the process unit [3].
Then, hold each of the stand handles to pull out
the process unit [3].
4. Reinstall the above parts following the removal
steps in reverse.
[2]
[1] 8050ma3035
[3]
[1]
[2]
8050ma3036
PROCESS UNIT CF5001 Field Service Ver.1.0 Sep 2003
1-32
I D
IS./
AS
SE
MB
LY
4.5 Removing and reinstallingthe transfer belt unit
A. Procedure
1. Pull out the process unit. (See "4.4 Pulling out
the process unit.")
2. Loosen the screws [1], 2 each.
3. After turning once the belt positioning shaft [2]
counterclockwise, pull it out for removal.
4. Remove the supporting rod [3] from the charg-
ing corona suction assembly [2] provided on the
inside of the toner supply unit [1].
Note:
• The supporting rod is an auxiliary device to
allow a removed transfer belt unit to self
stand. When removing the transfer belt unit,
be sure to make necessary arrangements in
advance.
[1]
[1]
[2]
8050ma3043
[2]
[3] [1]
8050ma3044
CF5001 Field Service Ver.1.0 Sep 2003 PROCESS UNIT
1-33
I D
IS./
AS
SE
MB
LY
5. With the handle [1] raised up, remove the trans-
fer belt unit [2].
Note:
• Be careful not to touch and damage the trans-
fer belt [3] with bare hands.
• Make sure to grab both ends of the handle of
the transfer belt with both hands.
6. Set the supporting rod [2] to the transfer belt unit
[1] to allow it to self stand.
7. Reinstall the above parts following the removal
steps in reverse.
Note:
• Make sure not to touch and damage the trans-
fer belt unit with the drum at installation.
[3]
[1]
[2]
[2]
5001ma3045
[1]
Hold Hold
[1][2] 8050ma3046
PROCESS UNIT CF5001 Field Service Ver.1.0 Sep 2003
1-34
I D
IS./
AS
SE
MB
LY
Note:
• When reinstalling the transfer belt unit [1], be
sure to turn the cam [3] clockwise fully until it
will not turn any more before starting work.
• Be sure to install the transfer belt unit so that
2 transfer support blocks /F [4] and the 2
transfer support blocks /R [5] are accompa-
nied with the guide pins [2] provided at two
places each at front and rear.
• Be sure not to rotate the transfer belt when
the transfer belt unit self stand with a support-
ing rod.
[4]
[1]
[5] 8050ma3047
[2]
[3]
[2]
CF5001 Field Service Ver.1.0 Sep 2003 PROCESS UNIT
1-35
I D
IS./
AS
SE
MB
LY
4.6 Replacing the belt cleaningbrush unit
A. Periodically replaced parts/cycle
• Belt cleaning brush unit: Every 600,000 copies
B. Procedure
1. Remove the transfer belt unit. (See "4.5 Remov-
ing and reinstalling the transfer belt unit.")
2. Remove 2 screws [2] while holding the belt
cleaning unit [1] by hand, and then remove the
belt cleaning unit.
3. Replace the belt cleaning brush unit with a new
one.
4. Reinstall the above parts following the removal
steps in reverse.
Note:
• The belt cleaning unit is made up of the belt
cleaning brush unit and the parts listed below.
(For details of these parts, see "4.7 Replacing
the belt cleaning blade" and "4.8 Replacing
the toner collection sheet /1.")
Belt cleaning blade : 1 piece
Blade spring : 2 pieces
Stop ring : 2 pieces
Blade fulcrum shaft : 1 piece
Toner collection sheet /1 : 1 piece
Toner collection sheet /2 : 1 piece
Screw : 3 pieces
• Before installing the belt cleaning unit, apply
the setting powder on the portion [3] on the
transfer belt.
• When reinstalling it, set the guide sections
provided on both sides below the belt clean-
ing unit to the pins of the transfer belt unit,
and then attach the screws.
[1]
[2][2]
[3]
8050ma3048
PROCESS UNIT CF5001 Field Service Ver.1.0 Sep 2003
1-36
I D
IS./
AS
SE
MB
LY
4.7 Replacing the belt cleaningblade
A. Periodically replaced parts/cycle
• Belt cleaning blade: Every 100,000 copies
B. Procedure
1. Remove the belt cleaning unit. (See "4.6
Replacing the belt cleaning unit.")
2. Remove 2 blade springs [1].
3. After removing the stop ring [2], pull out the
blade support shaft [3] and remove the belt
cleaning blade [4].
4. Reinstall the above parts following the removal
steps in reverse.
Note:
• Before installing the belt cleaning unit, coat
the entire surface on the side on the transfer
belt, on which the belt cleaning unit is to be
mounted, with the setting powder. [1][3]
[2]
[3][4]
8050ma3049
CF5001 Field Service Ver.1.0 Sep 2003 PROCESS UNIT
1-37
I D
IS./
AS
SE
MB
LY
4.8 Replacing the toner collec-tion sheet /1
A. Periodically replaced parts/cycle
• Toner collection sheet /1: Every 200,000 copies
B. Procedure
1. Remove the belt cleaning unit.
2. After removing 3 screws [1], remove the toner
collection sheet /2 [2] and then remove the toner
collection sheet /1 [3].
3. Reinstall the above parts following the removal
steps in reverse.
Note:
• Be careful not to fold the PET sheet of the
toner collection sheet /1, or damage it by hit-
ting it on the edge.
[3][2]
[1]
8050ma3159
PROCESS UNIT CF5001 Field Service Ver.1.0 Sep 2003
1-38
I D
IS./
AS
SE
MB
LY
4.9 Replacing the belt separa-tion claw
A. Periodically replaced parts/cycle
• Belt separation claw: Every 600,000 copies
B. Procedure
1. Remove the transfer belt unit. (See "4.5 Remov-
ing and reinstalling the transfer belt unit.")
2. Remove the screw [1] and then remove the sep-
aration claw unit [2].
Note:
• Be careful not to touch and/or damage the
transfer belt [3] with bare hands.
• When reinstalling the separation claw unit, be
sure to apply setting powder to the semicircle
[4] of the transfer belt [3].
3. Remove the screws [1], one each, and then
remove 3 transfer belt separation claws [2].
4. Reinstall the above parts following the removal
steps in reverse.
[2]
[2]
[1]
[4]
[3]
8050ma3050
[2]
[1]
8050ma3051
CF5001 Field Service Ver.1.0 Sep 2003 PROCESS UNIT
1-39
I D
IS./
AS
SE
MB
LY
4.10 Replacing the transfer belt
A. Screw that must not be removed
Note:
• The screws [1] shown in the drawing below
are not allowed to be removed. Be careful not
to remove them.
B. Periodically replaced parts/cycle
• Transfer belt: Every 200,000 copies
C. Procedure
1. Remove the transfer belt unit. (See "4.5 Remov-
ing and reinstalling the transfer belt unit.")
2. Remove the belt cleaning unit. (See "4.6
Replacing the belt cleaning unit.")
3. Remove the separation claw unit. (See "4.9
Replacing the belt separation claw.")
4. Remove 2 tension springs [1].
[1] 8050ma3148
[1][1]
8050ma3053
PROCESS UNIT CF5001 Field Service Ver.1.0 Sep 2003
1-40
I D
IS./
AS
SE
MB
LY
5. Stand up the transfer belt unit [1] by using the
front side of the transfer belt unit [1] as the bot-
tom.
6. Remove the screw [2] and release the fixing of
the handle [3].
7. Remove 2 screws [4] and then remove the shaft
stopper [5].
8. Remove the screw [6] and then remove the ten-
sion plate /R [7].
Note:
• When reinstalling the tension plate /R, knock
against the projection of the tension plate /R.
9. Remove 2 screws [8] and then remove the high
voltage supply curler /R [9].
10. Remove the stop ring [10] and then remove the
bearing [11].
Note:
• When reinstalling the stop ring, be sure to
raise the shaft so that the stop ring is set in
the groove of the shaft.
11. Pull up the transfer belt [12] for removal.
Note:
• Be sure to reinstall the transfer belt so that
the rear side stamped with "UP SIDE" at the
edge of the belt comes up.
• When holding the transfer belt by hand, hold it
within 10mm from the upper end. Be careful
not touch any part other than this.
12. Reinstall the above parts following the removal
steps in reverse.
Note:
• Be careful not to touch and/or damage the
transfer belt with bare hands.
• Before installing the belt cleaning unit, coat
the entire surface on the side on the transfer
belt, on which the belt cleaning unit is to be
mounted, with the setting powder.
[3] [6][2]
[8][11]
8050ma3054
[7]
[5][4]
[9][10]
[12] [1]
8050ma3152
CF5001 Field Service Ver.1.0 Sep 2003 PROCESS UNIT
1-41
I D
IS./
AS
SE
MB
LY
4.11 Replacing the 1st transferroller
A. Periodically replaced parts/cycle
• 1st transfer roller /Y, /M, /C, /K: Every 200,000
copies
B. Procedure
1. Remove the transfer belt. (See "4.10 Replacing
the transfer belt.")
2. Place the transfer belt unit as shown in the illus-
tration.
3. Remove the stop ring [1].
4. After removing 1 bearing [2], slide the stopper /4
[3] to open the tip end of the transfer release
arm [4].
5. Remove the 1st transfer roller /K [6] while sliding
it.
6. Remove 3 1st transfer rollers/Y, /M, /C [5].
Note:
• Be sure to reinstall the 1st transfer roller so
that a shallow groove near the groove of the
E-ring comes this side.
7. Remove the E-rings [7], 2 each, from each of
the 1st transfer rollers.
8. Reinstall the above parts following the removal
steps in reverse.
[3] [4]
[2][1]
[7]
[7][5]
[7]
[7] [6][4] [3]
8050ma3055
PROCESS UNIT CF5001 Field Service Ver.1.0 Sep 2003
1-42
I D
IS./
AS
SE
MB
LY
4.12 Replacing the 2nd transferroller /U
A. Periodically replaced parts/cycle
• 2nd transfer roller /U: Every 200,000 copies
B. Procedure
1. Remove the transfer belt. (See "4.10 Replacing
the transfer belt.")
2. After raising the 2nd transfer roller /U [1] once,
remove it diagonally from the lower side.
Note:
• The fixing of the 2nd transfer roller /U was
released when the transfer belt was removed
at the time of the removal of the high voltage
supply curler.
• Be sure to reinstall the 2nd transfer roller /U
so that the shaft end with a dent comes to the
bottom.
3. Remove 2 bearings [2] from the 2nd transfer
roller /U [1].
4. Reinstall the above parts following the removal
steps in reverse.
[2]
8050ma3056
[1]
[1][2]
1
2
CF5001 Field Service Ver.1.0 Sep 2003 PROCESS UNIT
1-43
I D
IS./
AS
SE
MB
LY
4.13 Replacing the drum car-tridge
A. Periodically replaced parts/cycle
• Drum cartridge: Every 100,000 copies
B. Procedure
Note:
• The drum cartridges are provided for the four
colors of yellow, magenta, cyan and black,
and they are all common. However, be sure to
avoid reusing a drum cartridge that was once
used for a color since it has been stuck with
the toner of that color.
1. Remove the transfer belt unit. (See "4.5 Remov-
ing and reinstalling the transfer belt unit.")
2. After raising once both ends [2] of the drum stay
/U [1], hold them and remove the drum cartridge
/Y [3].
3. Remove the drum cartridge /M [4], drum car-
tridge /C [5] and the drum cartridge /K [6] in the
same manner as in Step 2.
4. Reinstall the above parts following the removal
steps in reverse.
Note:
• When reinstalling each drum cartridge, be
sure to check if both ends of the cartridge
have been dropped into the grooves of the
drum installation blocks /F [7] and /R [8]. (The
drum installation blocks /F [7] and /R [8] are
for yellow drum cartridges. Repeat the steps
for other cartridges in the same manner.)
• When reinstalling the drum cartridge /K [6], be
careful that the mylar [9] is not caught up.
• Be careful not touch and damage the photo-
sensitive material of the drum with bare
hands.
• When the drum cartridge is not used for a
long period of time, be sure to store it in the
dark place with a cover on it (to shield the
light).
[2]
[8]
[1]
[6]
[5]
[4]
[3][7]
[9] 8050ma3057
PROCESS UNIT CF5001 Field Service Ver.1.0 Sep 2003
1-44
I D
IS./
AS
SE
MB
LY
4.14 Removing and reinstallingthe drum
A. Screw that must not be removed
Note:
• Screws that are paint locked are not allowed
to be removed. Be careful not to remove them
at all costs.
B. Procedure
1. Remove the drum cartridge. (See "4.13 Replac-
ing the drum cartridge.")
2. Remove 2 screws [1] and then remove the drum
stay /U [2].
[1][1]
8050ma3058
[1]
[2] 8050ma3059
CF5001 Field Service Ver.1.0 Sep 2003 PROCESS UNIT
1-45
I D
IS./
AS
SE
MB
LY
3. Remove the coupling shaft /A [1] and then
remove the coupling /A [2].
4. Remove 2 screws [3].
5. Remove the position adjusting plate /R [8].
6. Remove the stop ring [4] and then remove the
screw idler gear [5].
7. Remove 3 screws [6] (be careful not to remove
black screw.).
8. Remove the position adjusting plate /F [7].
9. Hold both ends of the drum [9] and raise it up for
removal.
Note:
• Be sure to reinstall the drum so that the cou-
pling side of the drum flange comes to the
rear side of the drum cartridge.
10. Reinstall the above parts following the removal
steps in reverse.
[1] [8][2]
[6]
[7] [5] [4][9]
[3]
8050ma3060
PROCESS UNIT CF5001 Field Service Ver.1.0 Sep 2003
1-46
I D
IS./
AS
SE
MB
LY
4.15 Replacing the developingunit
A. Periodically replaced parts/cycle
• Developing unit: Every 600,000 copies
B. Procedure
Note:
• Be careful not to fold the Teflon sheet posted
at the developing sleeve side of the develop-
ing unit upper cover.
• When cleaning the developing unit, be sure to
use Hydro-Wipe which is specified as a CE
tool. Using paper or cloth other than Hydro-
Wipe will cause the developing regulation
plate in the developing unit to be stuck with
dust and lint of the paper or cloth, thus result-
ing in white streaks on the images.
• The developing units are provided for the four
colors of yellow, magenta, cyan and black,
and they are all common. However, be sure to
avoid reusing a developing unit that was once
used for a color since it has been stuck with
the toner of that color.
1. Open the toner supply section. (See "5.1 Open-
ing and closing the toner supply section.")
2. Remove 2 screws [1] and then remove 4 devel-
oping support legs [3] provided inside the toner
supply unit [2].
Note:
• When placing the developing unit by itself, be
sure to set the developing support legs to the
body of the developing unit as a seat to pre-
vent the toner bristles section from getting in
touch with other sections.
3. Pull out the process unit. (See "4.4 Pulling out
the process unit.")
[2][3]
[3][1]
8050ma3062
CF5001 Field Service Ver.1.0 Sep 2003 PROCESS UNIT
1-47
I D
IS./
AS
SE
MB
LY
4. Remove the screws [1], 3 each, and then
remove 2 developing pressing blocks [2] while
sliding the upper side of the developing pressing
blocks.
5. Remove the relay connectors [1], 1 each, and
then remove 4 developing units [2] one at a time.
6. Reinstall the above parts following the removal
steps in reverse. Place an appropriate color
label supplied with the developing unit on the
new unit.
Note:
• Be careful not to open the developing unit
cover.
[1] [1]
[2] 8050ma3063
[1] [2] 8050ma3064
PROCESS UNIT CF5001 Field Service Ver.1.0 Sep 2003
1-48
I D
IS./
AS
SE
MB
LY
4.16 Replacing the developer
A. Periodically replaced parts/cycle
• Developer: Every 100,000 copies
B. Procedure
1. Remove the developing unit. (See "4.15 Replac-
ing the developing unit.")
2. Put the developing unit [1] on end and rotate its
upper end in drawing an arc to discharge devel-
oper. After discharging the developer, repeat
Steps 3 and 4 below to discharge all of the
developer.
3. Install the rotating jig [1] provided inside the
toner supply unit to the coupling [2] on the agita-
tor screw side and turn it in the arrow-marked
direction.
8050ma3149
[1] [2]
8050ma3150
CF5001 Field Service Ver.1.0 Sep 2003 PROCESS UNIT
1-49
I D
IS./
AS
SE
MB
LY
4. Install the rotating jig to the coupling [1] on the
developing sleeve side and turn it in the arrow-
marked direction.
Note:
• If the jig is turned in the reverse direction, it
sometimes occurs that the developer is not
discharged completely. Be careful not to turn
it in the reverse direction.
5. Charge a new developer. (See "7. 36 mode," "II .
Adjustment" in Field Service.)
[1]
8050ma3151
PROCESS UNIT CF5001 Field Service Ver.1.0 Sep 2003
1-50
I D
IS./
AS
SE
MB
LY
4.17 Replacing the belt separa-tion claw solenoid
A. Periodically replaced parts/cycle
• Developer: Every 1,500,000 copies
B. Procedure
1. Remove the transfer belt unit. (See "4.5 Remov-
ing and reinstalling the transfer belt unit.")
2. Remove the screw [1] and then remove the sole-
noid lever [2].
3. Remove the relay connector [3].
4. Remove the screw [4] and release the cable [6]
from the cable clamp [5].
5. Remove 2 screws [7] and then remove the SD1
(belt separation claw solenoid) [8].
6. Reinstall the above parts following the removal
steps in reverse.
Note:
• When having reinstalled the solenoid bar,
check to see if the shaft [9] of SD1 (belt sepa-
ration claw solenoid) moves smoothly while
sliding it.[7]
[8]
[4] [5] [6] [3] [2] [1] 8050ma3069
CF5001 Field Service Ver.1.0 Sep 2003 PROCESS UNIT
1-51
I D
IS./
AS
SE
MB
LY
4.18 Removing and reinstallingthe process unit
A. Procedure
1. Remove the transfer belt unit. (See "4.5 Remov-
ing and reinstalling the transfer belt unit.")
2. Remove all of the drum cartridges. (See "4.13
Replacing the drum cartridge.")
3. Remove all of the developing units. (See "4.15
Replacing the developing unit.")
4. Remove the screws [1], 2 each.
Note:
• When removing the process unit, be sure to
remove in advance the transfer belt unit, drum
cartridge and the developing unit.
• Be careful not to remove black screws.
5. Push back the process unit [6] until it becomes
possible to see the screw [5] through each hole
[4] of the guide rails /L [2] and /R [3].
6. Remove the screws [5], 1 each.
Note:
• Be careful not to remove black screws.
7. Pull out the process unit [6] again. Then remove
it from the guide rails /L [2] and /R [3] as
explained below:
The projection [7] on the guide rail /L is set into
the notch [8] of the process unit. The notch [10]
of the process unit is placed on the projection [9]
on the guide rail /R. Accordingly, slide the guide
rail /L a little against the process unit to remove
it from the guide rail /L, and then remove it from
the guide rail /R by raising the process unit.
8. Reinstall the above parts following the removal
steps in reverse.
[5]
[10] [9]
[3]
[4]
[1]
[6][8]
[1]
[7][6]
[4]
[5]
[2]
8050ma3070
PROCESS UNIT CF5001 Field Service Ver.1.0 Sep 2003
1-52
I D
IS./
AS
SE
MB
LY
4.19 Removing and reinstallingthe image correction unit
A. Procedure
1. Remove the process unit. (See "4.18 Removing
and reinstalling the process unit.")
2. Remove a relay connector [1].
3. Remove 2 screws and then remove the image
correction unit [3].
4. Reinstall the above parts following the removal
steps in reverse.
Note:
• When removing the image correction unit, be
sure to remove in advance the process unit.
• When removing the image correction unit, be
careful not to touch the drum drive shaft [4] of
each color. Otherwise, this may cause stress
to it.
[4]
[2]
[4][3] [1] 8050ma3071
CF5001 Field Service Ver.1.0 Sep 2003 TONER SUPPLY
1-53
I D
IS./
AS
SE
MB
LY
5. TONER SUPPLY
5.1 Opening and closing thetoner supply section
A. Procedure
1. Open the front door [1].
2. Loosen the screw [2] and open the toner supply
section [3].
Note:
• With the toner supply section left open, be
sure not to apply force to the toner supply
sections such as the operation board. If
applied, the hinge of the toner supply section
may be deformed.
• When closing the toner supply section,
tighten the screw with a hand before using a
driver to prevent stripping the thread.
3. Remove once the door lock [2] provided on the
inside of the toner supply section [1] and replace
it at a new position where it becomes a stopper.
4. Close the front door following the steps for
opening in reverse order.
Note:
• When the toner supply section is opened, be
sure to replace the door lock to a new position
where it becomes a stopper and prevent it
from getting in touch with the process unit
when being pulled out.
[1] [2] [3] 8050ma3072
[1]
[2]
[2]
[1]
8050ma3073
TONER SUPPLY CF5001 Field Service Ver.1.0 Sep 2003
1-54
I D
IS./
AS
SE
MB
LY
5.2 Replacing the charging dustfilter
A. Periodically replaced parts/cycle
• Charging dust filter: Every 600,000 copies
B. Procedure
1. Open the toner supply section. (See "5.1 Open-
ing and closing the toner supply section.")
2. Remove the charging dust filter [3] from the
charging suction assembly [2] provided on the
inside of the toner supply section [1].
3. Reinstall the above parts following the removal
steps in reverse.
[2]
[3] [1]
8050ma3074
CF5001 Field Service Ver.1.0 Sep 2003 PAPER FEED TRAYS /1 to /3
1-55
I D
IS./
AS
SE
MB
LY
6. PAPER FEED TRAYS /1 to /3
6.1 Removing and reinstallingthe paper feed unit
A. Procedure
Note:
• Since the composition of the paper feed trays
/1 to /3 is the same, the explanation here is
made of the steps for the paper feed tray /1.
1. Pull out the paper feed tray /1 [1].
2. Remove 4 screws [2] and then remove the
paper feed unit cover [3].
[2]
[1]
[2]
[3]
8050ma3160
PAPER FEED TRAYS /1 to /3 CF5001 Field Service Ver.1.0 Sep 2003
1-56
I D
IS./
AS
SE
MB
LY
3. Remove the connector [1].
4. Remove a screw [2] and loosen a hold-down
shaft screw [3].
5. After sliding the paper feed unit [4] to the rear
side, lift it up. Remove the connector [5] and
then remove the paper feed unit [4].
6. Reinstall the above parts following the removal
steps in reverse.
[1]
[2]
[4]
[5]
[3]
8050ma3161
CF5001 Field Service Ver.1.0 Sep 2003 PAPER FEED TRAYS /1 to /3
1-57
I D
IS./
AS
SE
MB
LY
6.2 Removing and reinstallingthe paper feed trays /1 to /3
A. Procedure
Note:
• Since the composition of the paper feed trays
/1 to /3 is the same, the explanation here is
made of the steps for the paper feed tray /1.
1. Pull out the paper feed tray /1.
2. Remove the paper feed unit.
3. Remove 4 screws [1] and lift up the paper feed
tray /1 [2] for removal.
4. Reinstall the above parts following the removal
steps in reverse.
[2][1]
[1]
8050ma3162
PAPER FEED TRAYS /1 to /3 CF5001 Field Service Ver.1.0 Sep 2003
1-58
I D
IS./
AS
SE
MB
LY
6.3 Replacing the paper feedroller and the feed rubber
A. Periodically replaced parts/cycle
• Paper feed roller: Every 2,500,000 copies (Every
800,000 copies in actual replacement count)
• Feed rubber: Every 400,000 copies (Every
125,000 copies in actual replacement count)
B. Procedure
Note:
• Since the composition of the paper feed trays
/1 to /3 is the same, the explanation here is
made of the steps for the paper feed tray /1.
1. Pull out the paper feed tray /1.
2. Remove the paper feed unit.
3. Remove 2 stop rings [1], slide 2 bearings [2] to
the outside and then remove the paper feed
roller assembly [3].
[2] [3]
[1]
8050ma3163
CF5001 Field Service Ver.1.0 Sep 2003 PAPER FEED TRAYS /1 to /3
1-59
I D
IS./
AS
SE
MB
LY
4. Remove a bearing [1].
5. Remove a stop ring [2] and then remove the
paper feed roller [3].
6. Remove a stop ring [4] and then remove the
feed roller [5].
7. Remove the feed rubber [6] from the feed roller
[5].
8. Reinstall the above parts following the removal
steps in reverse.
Note:
• Be sure to install the feed rubber [6] so that
the paint mark [7] turns in the arrow-marked
direction.
• Be sure to check that each roller is not stuck
with grease.
[6]
[7]
[5]
[4]
[1]
[2][3] 8050ma3164
PAPER FEED TRAYS /1 to /3 CF5001 Field Service Ver.1.0 Sep 2003
1-60
I D
IS./
AS
SE
MB
LY
6.4 Replacing the double feedprevention rubber
A. Periodically replaced parts/cycle
• Double feed prevention rubber: Every 400,000
copies (Every 125,000 copies in actual replace-
ment count)
B. Procedure
Note:
• Since the composition of the paper feed trays
/1 to /3 is the same, the explanation here is
made of the steps for the paper feed tray /1.
1. Pull out the paper feed tray /1.
2. Remove the paper feed unit.
3. Remove the paper feed roller assembly.
4. Remove a stop ring [1] and then remove the
double feed prevention roller [2].
5. Remove the gear [3] from the double feed pre-
vention roller [2].
6. Remove the double feed prevention rubber [4]
from the double feed prevention roller [2].
7. Reinstall the above parts following the removal
steps in reverse.
Note:
• Be sure to install the double feed prevention
rubber [4] so that the paint mark [5] turns in
the arrow-marked direction.
• Be sure to check that the double feed preven-
tion roller is not stuck with grease.
[5]
[1]
[2][4][3] 8050ma3165
CF5001 Field Service Ver.1.0 Sep 2003 PAPER FEED TRAYS /1 to /3
1-61
I D
IS./
AS
SE
MB
LY
6.5 Replacing the paper feedclutch and the pre-registra-tion clutch
A. Periodically replaced parts/cycle
• Paper feed clutches /1 to /3 (MC7, MC9, MC11):
Every 4,000,000 copies (Every 2,000,000 copies
in actual replacement count)
• Pre-registration clutches /1 to /3 (MC8, MC10,
MC13): Every 4,000,000 copies (Every
2,000,000 copies in actual replacement count)
B. Procedure
Note:
• Since the composition of the paper feed trays
/1 to /3 is the same, the explanation here is
made of the steps for the paper feed tray /1.
1. Pull out the paper feed tray /1.
2. Remove the paper feed unit.
3. Remove 2 connectors [1].
4. Remove a stop ring [2] and then remove the
MC7 [3].
5. Remove a stop ring [4] and then remove the
MC8 [5].
6. Reinstall the above parts following the removal
steps in reverse.
Note:
• When reinstalling the clutches, be sure to
check that the stopper [6] of each clutch is in
the specified position.
[5] [4]
[6]
8050ma3166
[3]
[2]
[1]
PAPER FEED TRAYS /1 to /3 CF5001 Field Service Ver.1.0 Sep 2003
1-62
I D
IS./
AS
SE
MB
LY
6.6 Removing and reinstallingthe tray up/down wire
Wire length:
• Up/down wire /A and up/down wire /C: 531mm
• Up/down wire /B and up/down wire /D: 160mm
A. Removing the wire
Note:
• Since the composition of the paper feed trays
/1 to /3 is the same, the explanation here is
made of the steps for the paper feed tray /1.
1. Pull out the paper feed tray /1.
2. Remove the paper feed unit.
3. Remove the paper feed tray /1.
4. Remove 3 screws [1] and then remove the wire
cover /FR [2].
5. Remove 2 screws [3] and then remove the wire
cover /FL [4].
6. Remove 3 screws [5] and then remove the wire
cover /RR [6].
7. Remove 2 screws [7] and then remove the wire
cover /RL [8].
[5][7] [6] [2]
8050ma3167
[1]
[3]
[4][8]
CF5001 Field Service Ver.1.0 Sep 2003 PAPER FEED TRAYS /1 to /3
1-63
I D
IS./
AS
SE
MB
LY
8. Remove an E-ring [1].
9. Slide the drive pulley [2] to the inside and
remove the wires /C [3] and /D [4].
10. After removing an E-ring [5], remove the pulley
[6] and release the wires /C [3] and /D [4] from
the wire restraining cover [7].
11. Remove a screw [8] from the bottom of the
paper feed tray /1 and then remove the wire /D
[4].
12. After removing an E-ring [9], remove the pulley
[10] and release the wire /C [3] from the wire
restraining cover [11].
13. Remove a screw [12] from the bottom of the
paper feed tray /1 and then remove the wire /C
[3].
14. Remove an E-ring [13].
15. Slide the drive pulley [14] to the inside and
remove the wires /A [15] and /B [16].
16. After removing an E-ring [17], remove the pulley
[18] and release the wires /A [15] and /B [16]
from the wire restraining cover [19].
17. Remove a screw [20] from the bottom of the
paper feed tray /1 and then remove the wire /B
[16].
18. After removing an E-ring [21], remove the pulley
[22] and release the wire /A [15] from the wire
restraining cover [23].
19. Remove a screw [24] from the bottom of the
paper feed tray /1 and then remove the wire /A
[15].
[13][14][24][15]
[3]
[10]
[11][7]
[6]
[5]
[8]
[1]
[16]
[15]
[21]
[9]
[2][12]
[19][22][23] [18]
[4]
[17]
[20]
[3]
8050ma3168
PAPER FEED TRAYS /1 to /3 CF5001 Field Service Ver.1.0 Sep 2003
1-64
I D
IS./
AS
SE
MB
LY
B. Attaching the wire
Note:
• Since the composition of the paper feed trays
/1 to /3 is the same, the explanation here is
made of the steps for the paper feed tray /1.
1. Install the wire /C [3] to the wire holding shaft [2]
with a screw [1] from the bottom side of the
paper feed tray.
2. After winding the wire /C [3] around the pulley
[4], insert it into the shaft [6] together with the
wire restraining cover [5] and fasten it with an E-
ring [7].
3. Install the wire /D [10] to the wire holding shaft
[9] with a screw [8] from the bottom side of the
paper feed tray.
4. After winding the wire /C [3] and the wire /D [10]
around the pulley [11], insert it into the shaft [13]
together with the wire restraining cover [12] and
fasten it with an E-ring [14].
Note:
• Be sure to wind the wires around the pulley
[11] so that the wire /C [3] comes to the out-
side and the wire /D [10] to the inside.
5. After sliding the drive pulley [15] to the outside
with the wire /C [3] and the wire /D [10] inserted
into the up/down drive shaft [14], fasten it with
an E-ring [16].
[17]
[3]
[4]
[5]
[12]
[11]
[13][4]
[8]
[9]
[16]
[18]
[17]
[7]
[6]
[15][14][1][2]
[10]
[3]
8050ma3169
CF5001 Field Service Ver.1.0 Sep 2003 PAPER FEED TRAYS /1 to /3
1-65
I D
IS./
AS
SE
MB
LY
Note:
• Be sure to wind the wires around the pulley
[14] so that the wire /C [3] comes to the out-
side and the wire /D [10] to the inside.
6. Install the wires /A [17] and /B [18] by following
Steps 1 to 5.
Note:
• After completion of attaching the wires, be
sure to rotate the up/down drive shaft by hand
to check to see if the up/down plate goes up
and down smoothly.
7. For the subsequent steps, reinstall the parts fol-
lowing the removal steps in reverse.
BY-PASS TRAY CF5001 Field Service Ver.1.0 Sep 2003
1-66
I D
IS./
AS
SE
MB
LY
7. BY-PASS TRAY
7.1 Replacing the paper feedroller and the feed roller
A. Periodically replaced parts/cycle
• Paper feed roller: Every 800,000 copies in actual
replacement count
• Feed roller: Every 125,000 copies in actual
replacement count
B. Procedure
1. Pull out the ADU. (See "10.1 Removing and
reinstalling the ADU.")
2. Remove 6 screws [1] and then remove the
paper feed solenoid cover [2].
3. Remove the stop ring [1].
4. Remove the bearing [2] and then remove the
paper feed roller unit [3].
[1][2]
[1]
8050ma3075
[3]
[1][2]
8050ma3076
CF5001 Field Service Ver.1.0 Sep 2003 BY-PASS TRAY
1-67
I D
IS./
AS
SE
MB
LY
5. After removing the stop ring [1], pull out the feed
shaft [2] and remove the paper feed gear
assembly [3].
6. Remove the paper feed roller [4] from the paper
feed gear assembly [3].
7. Remove the feed roller assembly [2] from the
by-pass drive shaft [1].
8. Remove the feed roller [3] from the feed roller
assembly [2].
Note:
• Be sure to install the feed roller [3] so that the
paint mark [4] turns in the direction shown in
the drawling.
9. Reinstall the above parts following the removal
steps in reverse.
Note:
• Be sure to install the paper feed roller unit [1]
so that the actuator section [2] coincides with
the detection section of the PS47 (no paper
sensor /BP) [3].
• Be sure to install the paper feed roller unit [1]
so that the tip end of the paper feed side of
the paper up/down lever comes into contact
with the inside of the top plate of the paper
feed roller unit [1].
[4] [1]
[3][2]
8050ma3077
[4]
8050ma3078[2] [1][3]
[1]
[3] [2][4]
8050ma3079
BY-PASS TRAY CF5001 Field Service Ver.1.0 Sep 2003
1-68
I D
IS./
AS
SE
MB
LY
7.2 Replacing the double feedprevention roller
A. Periodically replaced parts/cycle
• Double feed prevention roller: Every 125,000
copies in actual replacement count
B. Procedure
1. Remove the paper feed roller and the feed roller.
(See "Replacing the paper feed roller and the
feed roller.")
2. Remove 2 double feed pressure springs [1].
3. After removing the stop ring [2], pull out the dou-
ble feed prevention shaft [3] and remove the
flange [4] and the double feed prevention roller
assembly [5].
4. Remove the double feed prevention roller [6]
from the double feed prevention roller assembly
[5].
5. Reinstall the above parts following the removal
steps in reverse.
Note:
• Be sure to install the double feed prevention
roller [6] so that the paint mark [7] turns in the
direction shown in the drawing.
[7]
8050ma3080[6][4] [5]
[1]
[2][3][1]
CF5001 Field Service Ver.1.0 Sep 2003 BY-PASS TRAY
1-69
I D
IS./
AS
SE
MB
LY
7.3 Replacing the paper feedclutch /BP
A. Periodically replaced parts/cycle
• Paper feed clutch /BP (MC6): Every 2,000,000
copies in actual replacement count
B. Procedure
1. Open the toner supply section. (See "5.1 Open-
ing and closing the toner supply section.")
2. Pull out the ADU. (See "10.1 Removing and
reinstalling the ADU.")
3. Remove the fixing unit. (See "9.2 Removing and
reinstalling the fixing unit.")
4. Remove 4 screws [1]. (One of the screws is
installed on the underside of the ADU cover/R
[2].)
5. After pulling out the ADU cover /R [2] halfway,
remove 2 relay connectors [3] and then remove
the ADU cover /R [2].
6. Remove the screw [4] and then remove the
stand pulling lever [5].
7. Remove 2 screws [6] and then remove the ADU
cover /L [7].
[1]
[2]
8050ma3081
[1]
[3][5][6]
[7]
[4]
BY-PASS TRAY CF5001 Field Service Ver.1.0 Sep 2003
1-70
I D
IS./
AS
SE
MB
LY
8. Remove a relay connector [1].
9. Remove the stop ring [2] and then remove the
paper feed clutch /BP (MC6) [3].
10. Reinstall the above parts following the removal
steps in reverse.
Note:
• When reinstalling the paper feed clutch /BP
(MC6) [1], be sure to set the stopper in the
detente groove [2].
[1]
[2][3]
8050ma3082
[2]
[1]
8050ma3083
CF5001 Field Service Ver.1.0 Sep 2003 VERTICAL CONVEYANCE
1-71
I D
IS./
AS
SE
MB
LY
8. VERTICAL CONVEYANCE
8.1 Removing and reinstallingthe vertical conveyance
A. Procedure
1. Loosen 2 screws [1] and remove the side cover /
4 [2].
2. Loosen 2 screws [3] and remove the side cover /
5 [4].
[4]
8050ma3170
[2]
[1]
[3]
VERTICAL CONVEYANCE CF5001 Field Service Ver.1.0 Sep 2003
1-72
I D
IS./
AS
SE
MB
LY
3. Pull out the paper feed trays /1 [1], /2 [2] and /3
[3].
4. Loosen a screw [4].
5. Remove 3 screws [5].
6. Remove 2 screws [6] and then remove the side
cover /3 [7].
7. Push up the hooks [1] in 2 positions at both
sides, and separate the by-pass up/down cover
[2] from the vertical conveyance section [3].
[4]
[1]
[2]
[3]
[5]
[6] [7]
8050ma3171
8050ma3172
[3]
[1][2]
CF5001 Field Service Ver.1.0 Sep 2003 VERTICAL CONVEYANCE
1-73
I D
IS./
AS
SE
MB
LY
8. Remove 7 screws [1].
9. Pull out the vertical conveyance section [2],
remove a connector [3] and then remove the
vertical conveyance section [2].
10. Reinstall the above parts following the removal
steps in reverse.
Note:
• When installing the vertical conveyance sec-
tion, be sure to fasten it with screws with the
vertical conveyance door closed.
8050ma3173
[1]
[3]
[2]
[1]
VERTICAL CONVEYANCE CF5001 Field Service Ver.1.0 Sep 2003
1-74
I D
IS./
AS
SE
MB
LY
8.2 Replacing the intermediateconveyance clutch /1
A. Periodically replaced parts/cycle
• Intermediate conveyance clutch /1 (MC13):
Every 2,000,000 copies
B. Procedure
1. Remove the vertical conveyance section.
2. Remove a connector [1].
3. Remove an E-ring [2] and then remove the
spacer [3] and the gear [4].
4. Remove a stop ring [5] and then remove the
MC13 [6].
5. Reinstall the above parts following the removal
steps in reverse.
Note:
• When reinstalling the clutch, be sure to check
that the stopper [7] of the MC13 is in the spec-
ified position.
8050ma3174
[3]
[2]
[1]
[5][6]
[4]
[7]
CF5001 Field Service Ver.1.0 Sep 2003 FIXING
1-75
I D
IS./
AS
SE
MB
LY
9. FIXING
Caution:
• The fixing unit is very hot immediately after
turning off the main switch (SW2). In order to
avoid getting burnt, be sure to start operation
after the temperature goes down sufficiently.
9.1 Screws that must not beremoved
2 double nuts [1] are not allowed to be removed. Be
careful not to remove them. [1]
8050ma3153
FIXING CF5001 Field Service Ver.1.0 Sep 2003
1-76
I D
IS./
AS
SE
MB
LY
9.2 Removing and reinstallingthe fixing unit
A. Procedure
1. Open the front door.
2. Pull out the ADU.
3. Remove a screw [1] and then remove the fixing
knob [2].
4. Remove 2 screws [3] and then remove the fixing
cover /F [4].
5. Open the reverse section [1] and remove a
screw [1] and 3 connectors [3]. And then remove
the fixing unit [4].
Note:
• When removing or reinstalling the fixing unit,
slide it toward front and raise it while holding
both ends [5] at front and rear.
6. Reinstall the above parts following the removal
steps in reverse.
[4] [1][3] [2]
8050ma3098
[2] [3]
[4][5][5][1]
8050ma3099
CF5001 Field Service Ver.1.0 Sep 2003 FIXING
1-77
I D
IS./
AS
SE
MB
LY
9.3 Replacing the fixing upperheater lamps /1 and /2
A. Periodically replaced parts/cycle
• Fixing upper lamp /1 (L2): Every 2,500,000 cop-
ies
• Fixing upper lamp /2 (L3): Every 2,500,000 cop-
ies
B. Procedure
1. Remove the fixing unit.
2. Remove 2 screws [1] and then remove the fixing
cover /R [2].
Note:
• Be careful not to touch the glass section of
the fixing heater lamp with bare hands. This
may shorten the effective life of the heater
lamp.
• Be careful not to damage the surface of the
fixing heater lamp. Especially when removing
or reinstalling it, care should be taken not to
contact and damage the inner surface of the
fixing roller.
• When the installation is completed, check to
see if the fixing heater lamp is set securely to
the fixing plate and the faston terminal is
properly installed.
3. Remove the connector [1] and take out the web
motor wiring harness [3] from the clamps [2] at
the 3 places.
[1]
[2]
8050ma3100
[2]
[3]
[1] 8050ma3154
FIXING CF5001 Field Service Ver.1.0 Sep 2003
1-78
I D
IS./
AS
SE
MB
LY
4. Remove 2 screws [1] and open the fixing upper
unit [2].
Note:
• The screw [1] is a shoulder screw. When
attaching it, be sure to set the shoulder sec-
tion securely into the screw hole.
5. Remove 2 faston terminals [1] at the front, and a
clamp fixing screw [2], 2 faston terminals [3] and
a screw [4] at the rear. And then remove the fix-
ing plate [5] and pull out gently the fixing heater
lamps /1 and /2 [6] from the fixing roller /U [7] for
removal.
Note:
• When removing the faston terminal, be sure to
hold it at the connector.
6. Reinstall the above parts following the removal
steps in reverse.
Note:
• Be sure to reinstall the fixing heater lamp so
that the maker mark indication comes to the
rear.
• When reinstalling the fixing heater lamps,
please note that the lamp fitting holes on the
fixing plate are different.
[2]
[1][1]
8050ma3101
[4][5]
[3]
[2] [7]
[1]
[6]
8050ma3102
CF5001 Field Service Ver.1.0 Sep 2003 FIXING
1-79
I D
IS./
AS
SE
MB
LY
9.4 Replacing the fixing lowerheater lamp
A. Periodically replaced parts/cycle
• Fixing lower lamp (L4): Every 2,500,000 copies
B. Procedure
1. Remove the fixing unit.
2. Remove 2 screws [1] and then remove the fixing
cover /R [2].
Note:
• Be careful not to touch the glass section of
the fixing heater lamp with bare hands. This
may shorten the effective life of the heater
lamp.
• Be careful not to damage the surface of the
fixing heater lamp. Especially when removing
or reinstalling it, care should be taken not to
contact and damage the inner surface of the
fixing roller.
• When the installation is completed, check to
see if the fixing heater lamp is set securely to
the fixing plate and the faston terminal is
properly installed.
3. Remove the connector [1] and take out the web
motor wiring harness [3] from the clamps [2] at
the 3 places.
[1]
[2]
8050ma3103
[2]
[3]
[1] 8050ma3155
FIXING CF5001 Field Service Ver.1.0 Sep 2003
1-80
I D
IS./
AS
SE
MB
LY
4. Remove 2 screws [1] and open the fixing upper
unit [2].
Note:
• The screw [1] is a shoulder screw. When
attaching it, be sure to set the shoulder sec-
tion securely into the screw hole.
5. Remove the clamp fixing screw [1] and the con-
nector [2] at the front.
[2]
[1][1]
8050ma3104
[1]
[2] 8050ma3105
CF5001 Field Service Ver.1.0 Sep 2003 FIXING
1-81
I D
IS./
AS
SE
MB
LY
6. Remove a clamp screw [1], a connector [2] and
a screw [3] at the rear to remove the fixing plate
[4]. And then pull out gently the fixing heater
lamp [5] from the fixing roller /L [6] for removal.
7. Reinstall the above parts following the removal
steps in reverse.
Note:
• Be sure to reinstall the fixing heater lamp so
that the maker mark indication comes to the
rear.
[1][5][6]
[2]
[3]
[4]
8050ma3106
FIXING CF5001 Field Service Ver.1.0 Sep 2003
1-82
I D
IS./
AS
SE
MB
LY
9.5 Replacing the fixing roller /U,ball bearing /U and the heatinsulating sleeve /U
A. Periodically replaced parts/cycle
• Fixing roller /U: Every 100,000 copies
• Heat insulating sleeve /U: Every 600,000 copies
• Ball bearing /U: Every 600,000 copies
B. Procedure
1. Remove the fixing unit.
2. Remove 3 screws [1] and remove the fixing unit
upper cover.
Note:
• When removing the fixing unit upper cover,
raise it up without tilting it to avoid damage to
the fixing roller /U.
3. Remove the fixing upper heater lamps /1 and /2.
[1] [2]
8050ma3177
CF5001 Field Service Ver.1.0 Sep 2003 FIXING
1-83
I D
IS./
AS
SE
MB
LY
4. Remove the fixing upper lamps /1 and /2.
5. Remove the rear side O-ring [3].
Remove the heat insulating sleeve /U [4] and the
ball bearing [5] at the rear side, from the fixing
roller /U [6].
Note:
• Be careful not to damage the surface of the
fixing roller.
6. Remove the fixing roller /U [6].
7. Remove the O-ring [1] and then remove the fix-
ing gear [2].
8. After removing the O-ring [3] of front side,
remove the heat insulating sleeve /U [4] and the
ball bearings /U [5] from the fixing roller /U [6].
9. Reinstall the above parts following the removal
steps in reverse.
Note:
• After replacing the fixing roller, check whether
the fixing temperature sensor /3 is contacting
with the roller.
• When fixing temperature sensor /3 is soiled
with paper dust, clean the sensor with drum
cleaner and cleaning pad.
• When having replaced the fixing roller /U, be
sure to make adjustments by referring to the
36 mode "Adjustment item list." Otherwise,
poor images may result.
• Be sure to apply the inner and outer peripher-
ies of the heat insulating sleeve with Maltemp
FF-RM (or, Solvest 240) before reinstalling it.
• When reinstalling them, be sure to take note
of the directions of the ball bearing and the
flange of the heat insulating sleeve. Reinstall
them so that their upper surface turns to the
inside as seen in the picture in which they are
arranged after disassembly.
[6][5][4][3][5] [4] [3] [2]
[5] [4]
[5]
[4]
[3]
[3] [2] [1]
[1]
8050ma3108
FIXING CF5001 Field Service Ver.1.0 Sep 2003
1-84
I D
IS./
AS
SE
MB
LY
9.6 Replacing the fixing roller /L,ball bearing /L and the heatinsulating sleeve /L
A. Periodically replaced parts/cycle
• Fixing roller /L: Every 100,000 copies
• Heat insulating sleeve /L: Every 600,000 copies
• Ball bearing /L: Every 600,000 copies
B. Procedure
1. Remove the fixing unit.
2. Remove the fixing cover /R.
3. Open the fixing upper unit.
(See “9.4 Replacing the fixing lower heater
lamp.”
4. Remove the fixing lower heater lamp.
5. Remove 2 screws [1] and then remove the fixing
entrance plate /L [2].
Note:
• Be careful not to damage the paper passage
section of the entrance plate /L.
• Be careful not to damage the surface of the
fixing rollers /U and /L with the entrance plate
/L.
6. After loosening the stopper screw [1] once, open
the fixing paper exit guide [2] up to the turnout
position and retighten it temporarily and then
remove the fixing roller /L [3].
Note:
• Be careful not to damage the surface of the
fixing roller.
[2]
[1] 8050ma3109
[3] [2]
[1][1]
8050ma3110
CF5001 Field Service Ver.1.0 Sep 2003 FIXING
1-85
I D
IS./
AS
SE
MB
LY
7. Remove the ball bearings /L [1], 1 each at both
sides, and the heat insulating sleeves /L [2], 1
each at both sides, from the fixing roller /L.
8. Reinstall the above parts following the removal
steps in reverse.
Note:
• Be sure to apply the inner and outer peripher-
ies of the heat insulating sleeve with Multemp
FF-RM (or, Solvest 240) before reinstalling it.
• When reinstalling them, be sure to take note
of the directions of the ball bearing and the
flange of the heat insulating sleeve.
• After replacing the fixing roller/r, check
whether the fixing temperature sensor /4 is in
touch with the roller.
• When fixing temperature sensor /4 is soiled
with paper dust, clean the sensor with drum
cleaner and cleaning pad.
[3]
[2]
[1]
8050ma3111
FIXING CF5001 Field Service Ver.1.0 Sep 2003
1-86
I D
IS./
AS
SE
MB
LY
9.7 Replacing the fixing temper-ature sensor /3, and remov-ing and reinstalling the fixingtemperature sensor /1 andthe thermostat /1
Caution:
• After installing the fixing temperature sensor
/3, be sure to check that the sensor section is
in touch with the fixing roller. If not, the tem-
perature control may go abnormal or the fix-
ing temperature sensor /3 may detect the low
fixing temperature abnormality.
• Be sure to check that the wiring harness is
not in touch with the fixing roller.
Caution:
• The thermostat /1 is an essential safety part.
Be sure to follow the cautions and steps
given below when removing and reinstalling.
Caution:
• After completion of the installation of the
thermostat /1, be sure to check that the wiring
harness is not in touch with the fixing upper
roller.
• Be sure to fasten the thermostat /1 after posi-
tioning it properly with a positioning jig
(4969-1885-01). Be sure to apply screws with
screw lock paint. Also be sure to conduct this
adjustment under the pressure-released con-
dition and the temperature low condition of
the fixing roller /U.
A. Periodically replaced parts/cycle
• Fixing temperature sensor /3: Every 2,500,000
copies
CF5001 Field Service Ver.1.0 Sep 2003 FIXING
1-87
I D
IS./
AS
SE
MB
LY
B. Procedure (for replacing the fixing tempera-
ture sensor /3)
1. Remove the fixing unit.
2. Remove 3 screws [1] and then remove the fixing
upper cover [2].
3. Remove 2 clamp screws [1] and the connector
[2].
4. Remove a screw [1] and then remove the fixing
temperature sensor /3 [2].
Note:
• When reinstalling it, check that the sensor
section of the fixing temperature sensor is in
touch with the fixing roller.
5. Reinstall the above parts following the removal
steps in reverse.
[1] [2]
8050ma3112
[1] [2]
8050ma3113
[1][2]
8050ma3114
FIXING CF5001 Field Service Ver.1.0 Sep 2003
1-88
I D
IS./
AS
SE
MB
LY
C. Procedure (for removing and reinstalling the
fixing temperature sensor /1)
1. Remove a screw [1] and then remove the
mounting board [2] of the fixing temperature
sensor /1.
2. Remove a screw [1] and then remove the fixing
temperature sensor /1 [2].
Note:
• Be careful not to change the position of the
set screw of the fixing temperature sensor /1.
• Be careful not to damage the internal surface
of the sensor.
• A positioning jig is not used when reinstalling
it.
3. Reinstall the above parts following the removal
steps in reverse.
D. Procedure (for removing the thermostat /1)
1. Remove 2 faston terminals [1] and 2 screws [2]
of the thermostat /1 and then remove the ther-
mostat section.
[1][2]
8050ma3115
[2][1]
8050ma3139
[1]
[1] [2]
8050ma3116
CF5001 Field Service Ver.1.0 Sep 2003 FIXING
1-89
I D
IS./
AS
SE
MB
LY
2. Remove 2 screws [1] and then remove the ther-
mostat /1 [3] from the thermostat mounting
board [2].
E. Procedure (for reinstalling the thermostat)
1. Fasten the thermostat /1 [2] with 2 screws [1].
2. Fasten the thermostat mounting board [2] with 2
screws [1].
3. Connect 2 faston terminals [3] to the thermostat
/1.
8050ma3117[3]
[1] [2]
8050ma3118
[1]
[2]
[1][2]
[3]
8050ma3119
FIXING CF5001 Field Service Ver.1.0 Sep 2003
1-90
I D
IS./
AS
SE
MB
LY
4. With a thermostat positioning jig (4969-1885-01)
set between the thermostat /1 [1] and the fixing
upper roller [2], fasten the thermostat mounting
board with 2 screws so that the mounting board
becomes the same thickness as the positioning
jig.
• Specification: a = 3.1 ± 0.2mm
5. Apply 2 screws [1] of the thermostat section with
screw lock paint.
a
[2]
[1]
8050ma3120
[1] 8050ma3121
CF5001 Field Service Ver.1.0 Sep 2003 FIXING
1-91
I D
IS./
AS
SE
MB
LY
9.8 Replacing the fixing temper-ature sensor /4, and remov-ing and reinstalling the fixingtemperature sensor /2 andthe thermostat /L
Caution:
• After reinstalling the fixing temperature sen-sor /4, be sure to check that the sensor sec-tion is in touch with the fixing roller. If not, thetemperature control may go abnormal or thefixing temperature sensor /4 may detect thelow fixing temperature abnormality.
• Be sure to check that the wiring harness isnot in touch with the fixing roller.
Caution:
• The thermostat /L is an essential safety part.Be sure to follow the cautions and stepsgiven below when removing and reinstalling.
Caution:
• After completion of the installation of thethermostat /L, be sure to check that the wir-ing harness is not in touch with the fixinglower roller.
• Be sure to fasten the thermostat /L after posi-tioning it properly with a positioning jig(4969-1886-01). Be sure to apply screws withscrew lock paint. And also be sure to conductthis adjustment under the pressure-releasedcondition and the temperature low conditionof the fixing roller /L.
A. Periodically replaced parts/cycle
• Fixing temperature sensor /4: Every 2,500,000
copies
FIXING CF5001 Field Service Ver.1.0 Sep 2003
1-92
I D
IS./
AS
SE
MB
LY
B. Procedure (for replacing the fixing tempera-
ture sensor /4)
1. Remove the fixing unit.
2. Remove 2 screws [1] and then remove the fixing
entrance plate /L [2].
Note:
• Be careful not to damage the paper passage
section of the fixing admission plate /L [2].
3. Remove 2 clamp screws [1], connector [2] and a
screw [3], and then remove the fixing tempera-
ture sensor /4 [4].
Note:
• When reinstalling it, be sure to check that the
sensor section of the fixing temperature sen-
sor /4 is in touch with the fixing roller.
4. Reinstall the above parts following the removal
steps in reverse.
C. Procedure (for removing and reinstalling the
fixing temperature sensor /2)
1. Remove a clamp screw [1], connector [2] and 2
screws [3], and then remove the mounting board
[4] of the fixing temperature sensor /2.
[2]
[1] 8050ma3122
[3]
[4]
[2]
[1]
8050ma3123
[1]
[3] [2] 8050ma3124
CF5001 Field Service Ver.1.0 Sep 2003 FIXING
1-93
I D
IS./
AS
SE
MB
LY
2. Remove a screw [1] and then remove the fixing
temperature sensor /2 [2].
Note:
• Be careful not to change the position of the
set screw of the fixing temperature sensor /2.
• Be careful not to damage the internal surface
of the sensor.
• A positioning jig is not used when reinstalling
it.
3. Reinstall the above parts following the removal
steps in reverse.
D. Procedure (for removing the thermostat /L)
1. Remove 2 faston terminals [1] and 2 screws [2]
of the thermostat /L and then remove the ther-
mostat section.
[2][1] 8050ma3125
[2]
[1]
8050ma3126
FIXING CF5001 Field Service Ver.1.0 Sep 2003
1-94
I D
IS./
AS
SE
MB
LY
2. Remove 2 screws [1] and then remove the ther-
mostat /L [3] from the thermostat mounting
board /L [2].
E. Procedure (for reinstalling the thermostat /
L)
1. Fasten the thermostat /L [2] with 2 screws [1].
2. Fasten the thermostat mounting board /L [2]
with 2 screws [1].
3. Connect 2 faston terminals [4] to the thermostat
/L [3].
[1]
[2]
[3]
8050ma3127
[1]
[2]
8050ma3128
[4][3]
[2] [1] 8050ma3129
CF5001 Field Service Ver.1.0 Sep 2003 FIXING
1-95
I D
IS./
AS
SE
MB
LY
4. With a thermostat positioning jig (4969-1886-01)
set between the thermostat /L [1] and the fixing
lower roller [2], fasten the thermostat mounting
board /L with 2 screws so that the mounting
board becomes the same thickness as the posi-
tioning jig.
• Specification: a = 2.7 ± 0.2mm
5. Apply 2 screws [1] of the thermostat section with
screw lock paint.
a
[2]
[1]
8050ma3130
[1] 8050ma3131
FIXING CF5001 Field Service Ver.1.0 Sep 2003
1-96
I D
IS./
AS
SE
MB
LY
9.9 Replacing the fixing drivegear
A. Periodically replaced parts/cycle
• Fixing drive gear: Every 1,000,000 copies
B. Procedure
1. Remove the fixing unit.
2. Remove the connector [1] and a screw [2], and
then remove the PS16 (fixing pressure release
sensor) [3].
Note:
• Be careful not to damage the PS16 [3].
3. Remove the E-ring [4] and then remove the
actuator [5].
Note:
• Be sure to take note of the direction of the
actuator when reinstalling it.
4. Remove the connector [1] and take out the web
motor wiring harness [3] from the clamps [2] at
the 3 places.
[4][5][2]
[3] [1] 8050ma3132
[2]
[3]
[1] 8050ma3155
CF5001 Field Service Ver.1.0 Sep 2003 FIXING
1-97
I D
IS./
AS
SE
MB
LY
5. Remove 3 screws [1] and the connector [2], and
then remove the fixing drive panel assembly [3].
6. Remove 3 screws [1] and then remove the fixing
drive gear [2].
7. Reinstall the above parts following the removal
steps in reverse.
Note:
• When installing the fixing drive gear, apply
Multemp FF-RM (or, Solvest 240) on it.
[3]
[1]
[2]
[1]
8050ma3133
[1]
[2]
8050ma3134
FIXING CF5001 Field Service Ver.1.0 Sep 2003
1-98
I D
IS./
AS
SE
MB
LY
9.10 Replacing the fixing cleaningunit
A. Periodically replaced parts/cycle
• Fixing cleaning unit: Every 200,000 copies
B. Procedure
1. Remove the fixing unit.
2. Remove 3 screws [1] and then the remove the
fixing upper cover [2].
Note:
• When removing the fixing upper cover, raise it
up without tilting it to avoid damage to the fix-
ing roller /U.
3. Remove 2 screws [1] and then remove the fixing
cleaning unit [2].
Note:
• Be sure to turn the web drive gear [3] to take
up the slack of the cleaning web before rein-
stalling it to the fixing unit.
[1] [2]
8050ma3156
[2]
[1] [3] 8050ma3157
CF5001 Field Service Ver.1.0 Sep 2003 FIXING
1-99
I D
IS./
AS
SE
MB
LY
• When reinstalling it to the fixing unit, be sure
to press it against the paper exit side [2] hori-
zontally while being careful that the paper
entrance prevention plate [1] does not get in
touch with the roller. This is because the
paper entrance prevention plate may cause
damage to the roller.
4. Reinstall the above parts following the removal
steps in reverse.
Note:
• After replacing the fixing cleaning unit, be
sure to reset the count of the fixing cleaning
unit in accordance with the 25 mode "Parts
counter - Count of special parts."
If not, a problem such as image smudge may
arise because the web feed amount becomes
less than the set value or the machine dis-
plays the message "The fixing cleaning unit is
require to be replaced. Contact the service
manager or the authorized distributor” and is
disabled to copy or print.
[1][2]
8050ma3158
FIXING CF5001 Field Service Ver.1.0 Sep 2003
1-100
I D
IS./
AS
SE
MB
LY
9.11 Replacing the fixing torquelimiter
A. Periodically replaced part/cycle
• Fixing torque limiter: Every 600,000 copies
B. Procedure
1. Remove the fixing unit.
2. Place it gently on an even table with its paper
feed side down.
3. Remove the E-ring [1].
4. Slide the shaft [1] to the rear side, and pull it out
with the notch [2] of the shaft aligned with the
panel.
[1] 8050ma3144
[2] [1]
8050ma3145
CF5001 Field Service Ver.1.0 Sep 2003 FIXING
1-101
I D
IS./
AS
SE
MB
LY
5. Remove the E-ring [1].
6. Remove the gear [1] and the fixing torque limiter
[2] and replace the fixing torque limiter with a
new one.
Note:
• The shaft [3] contains a pin [4]. Be careful that
the pin does not get lost.
7. Reinstall the above parts following the removal
steps in reverse.
[1] 8050ma3146
[1][2][3][4] 8050ma3147
REGISTRATION/ADU/REVERSE/PAPER EXIT CF5001 Field Service Ver.1.0 Sep 2003
1-102
I D
IS./
AS
SE
MB
LY
10.REGISTRATION/ADU/REVERSE/PAPER EXIT
10.1 Removing and reinstallingthe ADU
Note:
• In order to prevent the main body from falling
down, the process unit and the ADU are pro-
vided with a safety mechanism so that they
cannot be pulled out at the same time.
• If the process unit has been pulled out when
pulling out the ADU, be sure to put the pro-
cess unit back into the main body.
A. Procedure
1. Open the toner supply section. (See "5.1 Open-
ing and closing the toner supply section.")
2. Release the lock and pull down the ADU release
lever [1] counterclockwise and pull out the ADU
[2].
3. Remove the fixing unit. (See "9.2 Removing and
reinstalling the fixing unit.")
4. Remove the ADU cover /R, ADU release lever
and the ADU cover /L. (See "7.3 Replacing the
paper feed clutch /BP").
5. Remove the paper feed solenoid cover. (See
"7.1 Replacing the paper feed roller and the feed
roller.")[1] [2] 8050ma3084
CF5001 Field Service Ver.1.0 Sep 2003 REGISTRATION/ADU/REVERSE/PAPER EXIT
1-103
I D
IS./
AS
SE
MB
LY
6. Remove 2 relay connectors [1].
7. Remove the screw [2] and then release the fix-
ing of the ADU wiring harness assembly [3].
8. Remove 4 screws [1].9. Remove the screw [2].10. Push back the ADU [6] so that each of the
screws [5] can be seen through the holes [4] inthe guide rail /L [3], and then remove the screws[5] one at a time.
Note:• Be careful not to remove black screws.
11. Pull out the ADU [6] once again and move theguide pin [8] of the guide rail /R [7] into the turn-out place of the oblong hole [9].
12. Remove the ADU [6] from the guide rails /L [3]and /R [7].
Note:• When removing the ADU [6], please note that
this work requires two persons, with one per-son at the paper feed side and the other at thepaper exit side.
• When removing the ADU [6], a person at thepaper feed side must hold the ADU handle /R[10].
• When removing the ADU [6], a person at thepaper exit side must hold the handle providedat the center of the fixing positioning rail [11].
13. Reinstall the above parts following the removalsteps in reverse.
[1]
[3]
[2]
8050ma3085
[9]
[8]
[7]
[6]
[3][2][5][4]
[10]
[11]
[1]
8050ma3086
REGISTRATION/ADU/REVERSE/PAPER EXIT CF5001 Field Service Ver.1.0 Sep 2003
1-104
I D
IS./
AS
SE
MB
LY
10.2 Replacing the registrationcleaning sheet
A. Periodically replaced parts/cycle
• Registration cleaning sheet: Every 600,000 cop-
ies
B. Procedure
1. Open the toner supply section. (See "5.1 Open-
ing and closing the toner supply section.")
2. Pull out the ADU. (See "10.1 Removing and
reinstalling the ADU.")
3. Remove 2 screws [1] and then remove the regis-
tration cleaning sheet [2].
4. Reinstall the above parts following the removal
steps in reverse.
[1]
[2]
8050ma3087
CF5001 Field Service Ver.1.0 Sep 2003 REGISTRATION/ADU/REVERSE/PAPER EXIT
1-105
I D
IS./
AS
SE
MB
LY
10.3 Replacing the separationdischarging plate unit
A. Periodically replaced parts/cycle
• Separation discharging plate unit: Every 100,000
copies
B. Procedure
1. Open the toner supply section. (See "5.1 Open-
ing and closing the toner supply section.")
2. Pull out the ADU. (See "10.1 Removing and
reinstalling the ADU.")
3. Remove the fixing unit. (See "9.2 Removing and
reinstalling the fixing unit.")
4. Remove 2 screws [1] and remove the transfer
release cover.
5. Remove 2 separation fitting screws [2].
6. Raise the separation discharging plate unit [2]
once, remove a faston [3] and then remove the
separation discharging plate unit [2].
Note:
• When removing the faston from the separa-
tion discharging plate unit, be sure to pull out
straight the faston cover section.
7. Reinstall the above parts following the removal
steps in reverse.
Note:
• When reinstalling the separation discharging
plate unit, be sure to fasten in advance the
separation fitting screw on the front side for
positioning.
8050ma3176[1]
[2]
[1]
[3][2]
8050ma3088
REGISTRATION/ADU/REVERSE/PAPER EXIT CF5001 Field Service Ver.1.0 Sep 2003
1-106
I D
IS./
AS
SE
MB
LY
10.4 Replacing the transferground plate unit and the2nd transfer roller /L
A. Periodically replaced parts/cycle
• Transfer ground plate unit: Every 1,000,000 cop-
ies
• 2nd transfer roller /L: Every 200,000 copies
B. Procedure
1. Remove the separation discharging plate unit
[1]. (See "10.3 Replacing the separation dis-
charging plate unit.")
2. Remove the screw [2] and then remove the
transfer ground plate unit [3].
3. Remove 2 stop rings [5].
4. Slide each of 2 bearings [6] to the outside and
remove the 2nd transfer roller /L [4].
5. Remove 2 bearings [6] from the 2nd transfer
roller /L [4].
6. Reinstall the above parts following the removal
steps in reverse.
Note:
• Be careful not to touch with bare hands the
2nd transfer roller /L [4] on any sections other
than the shaft section.
• When installing the 2nd transfer roller /L,
install it with the dent on the roller shaft
comes to the rear of the machine (instead of
coming to the side contacting with the trans-
fer earth plate).
[1]
[4]
[6]
[5][6]
[5][3][2] 8050ma3089
CF5001 Field Service Ver.1.0 Sep 2003 REGISTRATION/ADU/REVERSE/PAPER EXIT
1-107
I D
IS./
AS
SE
MB
LY
10.5 Replacing the registrationroller
A. Periodically replaced parts/cycle
• Registration roller: Every 1,500,000 copies
B. Procedure
1. Remove the registration cleaning sheet. (See
"10.2 Replacing the registration cleaning
sheet.")
2. Remove the ADU cover /R, ADU release lever
and the ADU cover /L. (See "7.3 Replacing the
paper feed clutch /BP.")
3. Remove 2 screws [1] and then remove the gear
cover [2].
4. Remove a relay connector [3].
5. Remove the stop rings [4], 1 each, and then
remove the bearings [5], 1 each at front and
rear.
6. Remove 2 screws [6] and then remove the regis-
tration unit [7].
Note:
• When removing the registration unit [7], open
the conveyance guide plate /U [8] and slide
the registration unit toward the rear of the
ADU to pull out the shaft of the front side from
the ADU panel, and then remove the registra-
tion unit.
[7]
[3] [6] [1][2] [8]
[6]
[4][5]
[4][5] 8050ma3090
REGISTRATION/ADU/REVERSE/PAPER EXIT CF5001 Field Service Ver.1.0 Sep 2003
1-108
I D
IS./
AS
SE
MB
LY
7. Remove the E-ring [1] and then remove the reg-
istration gear [2] and the pin [3].
Note:
• When reinstalling the registration gear [2], be
sure to attach the pin [3] without fail.
8. Remove 2 registration pressure springs [4].
9. Remove 2 E-rings [5] and 2 bearings [6] and
then remove the registration roller [7].
10. Reinstall the above parts following the removal
steps in reverse.
Note:
• When reinstalling the registration unit, be
careful not to damage the paper passage of
the guide plate.
• Make sure to replace the registration pressure
springs to the original position.
[1] [2]
[3]
[5] [4]
[6]
[7][4]
[5][6]
8050ma3091
CF5001 Field Service Ver.1.0 Sep 2003 REGISTRATION/ADU/REVERSE/PAPER EXIT
1-109
I D
IS./
AS
SE
MB
LY
10.6 Replacing the intermediateconveyance clutches /2 and /3
A. Periodically replaced parts/cycle
• Intermediate conveyance clutch /2 (MC4):
Every 2,000,000 copies
• Intermediate conveyance clutch /3 (MC5):
Every 2,000,000 copies
B. Procedure
1. Remove the ADU cover /R. (See "7.3 Replacing
the paper feed clutch /BP.")
2. Remove a relay connector [1].
3. Remove the stop ring [2] and then remove the
intermediate conveyance clutch /2 (MC4) [3].
4. Remove a relay connector [4].
5. Remove the stop ring [5] and then remove the
intermediate conveyance clutch /3 (MC5) [6].
6. Reinstall the above parts following the removal
steps in reverse.
Note:
• When reinstalling the MC4 and MC5, be sure
to take note of the position of the stopper.
[4] [1][2] [3]
[5] [6]
8050ma3092
REGISTRATION/ADU/REVERSE/PAPER EXIT CF5001 Field Service Ver.1.0 Sep 2003
1-110
I D
IS./
AS
SE
MB
LY
10.7 Replacing the ADU convey-ance clutches /1 and /2
A. Periodically replaced parts/cycle
• ADU conveyance clutch /2 (MC1):
Every 2,000,000 copies
• ADU pre-registration clutch (MC2):
Every 2,000,000 copies
B. Procedure
1. Remove the ADU release lever and the ADU
cover /L (See "7.3 Replacing the paper feed
clutch /BP").
2. Remove a relay connector [1].
3. Remove the stop ring [2] and then remove the
ADU conveyance clutch /2 (MC1) [3].
4. Remove a relay connector [4].
5. Remove the stop ring [5] and then remove the
ADU conveyance clutch /1 (MC2) [6].
6. Reinstall the above parts following the removal
steps in reverse.
Note:
• When reinstalling the MC1 and MC2, be sure
to take note of the position of the stopper.
[2][4][3]
[1][6][5]
8050ma3093
CF5001 Field Service Ver.1.0 Sep 2003 REGISTRATION/ADU/REVERSE/PAPER EXIT
1-111
I D
IS./
AS
SE
MB
LY
10.8 Replacing the ADU pre-regis-tration clutch
A. Periodically replaced parts/cycle
• ADU pre-registration clutch (MC3):
Every 2,000,000 copies
B. Procedure
1. Remove the ADU cover /R, ADU release lever
and the ADU cover /L. (See "7.3 Replacing the
paper feed clutch /BP.")
2. Remove two relay connectors [1].
3. Remove 3 screws [2] and then remove the ADU
lock section [3].
4. Remove the stop ring [1] and then remove the
ADU pre-registration clutch (MC3) [2].
5. Reinstall the above parts following the removal
steps in reverse.
Note:
• When reinstalling the ADU lock section, be
sure to take note of the stopper position of the
the MC3.
[2]
[1][3]
8050ma3094
[2]
[1]
8050ma3095
REGISTRATION/ADU/REVERSE/PAPER EXIT CF5001 Field Service Ver.1.0 Sep 2003
1-112
I D
IS./
AS
SE
MB
LY
10.9 Replacing the decurler roller
A. Periodically replaced parts/cycle
• Decurler roller: Every 100,000 copies
B. Procedure
1. Pull out the ADU. (See "10.1 Removing and
reinstalling the ADU.")
2. Remove the fixing unit. (See "9.2 Removing and
reinstalling the fixing unit.")
3. Remove the paper exit drive belt /1 [1].
4. Remove 3 screws [2] and the screw [3], and the
remove the paper exit guide plate /4 assembly
[4].
Note:
• The screw [2] and the screw [3] are different in
length. Be sure to take note of the position of
the screw [3] when reintalling the assembly.
[2]
[4] [3]
[2]
[1]
8050ma3096
CF5001 Field Service Ver.1.0 Sep 2003 REGISTRATION/ADU/REVERSE/PAPER EXIT
1-113
I D
IS./
AS
SE
MB
LY
5. Remove the screw [1] and then remove the knob
[2].
6. Remove the paper exit mounting plate /F [3] and
the paper exit open/close spring /F [4].
7. Remove two screw [5] and then remove the
bearing [6].
8. Remove the E-ring [7] and then remove the
paper exit drive pulley /1 [8] and the pin [9].
9. Remove the E-ring [10] and then remove the
paper exit drive gear /4 [11] and the pin [12].
10. Remove the bearing [13], paper exit mounting
plate /R [14], curler /1 [15] and the paper exit
open/close spring /R [16].
11. Slide the bearing [17] to the inside and remove
the decurler [18].
12. Reinstall the above parts following the removal
steps in reverse.
Note:
• When reinstalling the paper exit drive pulley /1
[8], be sure to take note of the direction of the
belt guide.
• When the decurler roller is replaced, reset "5.
Parts counter" and "1. Count of special
parts." If not, the fixing jam may occur.
[1][2] [3]
[17][9]
[7][8][10][11][14][15]
[12][13][16]
[4]
[18][5][6][5]
8050ma3097
OTHER CF5001 Field Service Ver.1.0 Sep 2003
1-114
I D
IS./
AS
SE
MB
LY
11.OTHER
11.1 Installation of the KeyCounter Socket (OPTION)
A. Procedure
1. Remove the Filter Cover.
See 1.1 Replacing the dust filter /2.
2. Remove the Hinge cover and Scanner cover /R.
See 1.5 Removing and reinstalling the main
board unit.
3. Remove the Key Counter Cover from the Scan-
ner cover /R..
4. Remove two screws and the Cover.
5. Use two screws, secure the Key Counter
Socket.
6. Remove dummy connector.
Connect the Key Counter Socket connector.
Note:
• When the Key Counter Socket is mounted, Set
to the Software DIP Switches.
*25mode: DipSW No.4 Bit.4
Key counter removal recovery.
*25mode: DipSW No.9 Bit.3 - 0
Operation at the counter removal.
Key Counter Cover
Scanner cover /R.
4969D510aa
4969D511aa
4969D512aa
4969D513aa
CF5001 Field Service Ver.1.0 Sep 2003 OTHER
1-115
I D
IS./
AS
SE
MB
LY
11.2 Installation / Remove of theMemory Unit (OPTION)
Note: Handling
• Precautions against static electricity.
Keep the memory unit in an antistatic bag
while transporting or storing.
Discharge electricity from your body by
touching somewhere metallic portion before
handling, when working on the place where
static electricity tend to generate such as on a
carpet.
• Do not touch the gilded pins of memory unit
directly with hands. Direct touch may cause
malcontinuity.
• Do not give the mechanical shock to the mem-
ory unit by dropping or bending and so on.
A. Procedure
1. Remove the Platen cover to Main Board unit.
See 1.5 Removing and reinstalling the main
board unit.
2. Pull it out toward you to remove it from the main
body.
Note:
• When pulling out the main board assembly, be
careful that the memory board doesn’t touch
the stay.
3. If the HDD-7 is installed, remove it.
4. Memory unit into the memory slots (4 places) of
the Image processing board.
5. To mount the memory unit successfully.
a Insert the memory unit into the memory slot
while being careful to ensure the direction is as
shown in the picture.
b Fit the slot pins into the holes at both ends of
the memory unit, and then push it down so that
the claws at both ends of the slot secure the
memory unit.
6. When demounting the memory unit.
a Release the claws at both ends of the slot.
b Raise the memory unit gently to remove it.
7. Reinstall the above parts following the removal
steps in reverse.
4 places
Image processing board (IPB) 4969D514aa
4969D515aa
a
b
4969D516aa
b
a
a
OTHER CF5001 Field Service Ver.1.0 Sep 2003
1-116
I D
IS./
AS
SE
MB
LY
Blank page
AFR-20 Ver.1.0 Sep. 2003 EXTERIOR
1-117
I D
IS./
AS
SE
MB
LYAFR-20 DISASSEMBLY/ASSEMBLY
1. EXTERIOR
1.1 RADF hinge opening/clos-ing angle adjustment
A. Replacing 70-degree and 40-degree fixtures
1. Untighten 4 screws [1] and remove 2 hinge
opening/closing angle adjusting fixtures [2].
Fixtures are for 70 or 40-degree use and can be
distinguished by the stamp on them.
2. Install 2 hinge opening/closing angle adjusting
fixtures [2] and retighten 4 screws [2] positively.
[2]
[1]
df3193001
EXTERIOR AFR-20 Ver.1.0 Sep. 2003
1-118
I D
IS./
AS
SE
MB
LY
B. Fixing the fixture at 90 degrees
Note:
• When removing RADF or when opening RADF
to remove the scanner components, the fix-
ture should be fixed at an degree of 90°. If not,
the RADF installing metal plate may be
deformed.
1. Fix the hinge opening/closing angle adjusting
fixture at an angle of 90° by either one of the fol-
lowing methods. Two types of fixtures, 70° and
40-degree use, are installed. They can be dis-
tinguished by the mark on them.
70-degree hinge opening/closing angle adjust-
ing fixture: As shown in the drawing right,
untighten 4 screws [1], slide down 2 adjusting
fixtures [2] and retighten 4 screws [2] positively.
40-degree hinge opening/closing angle adjust-
ing fixture: Untighten 4 screws [1], install 2
adjusting fixtures [2] changing their upper and
lower positions and retighten 4 screws [2] posi-
tively.
2. After completion of required process, return
them to the original positions.
[2]
[2] [1][1]
df3193002
AFR-20 Ver.1.0 Sep. 2003 EXTERIOR
1-119
I D
IS./
AS
SE
MB
LY
1.2 Removing and reinstallingthe front cover
1. Open the paper feed cover [1] and paper exit
cover [2].
2. Untighten 2 screws [3] and remove the front
cover [4].
3. Install the removed components in the steps
reverse to removal.
[4] [1] [2]
[3][3]
df3193003
EXTERIOR AFR-20 Ver.1.0 Sep. 2003
1-120
I D
IS./
AS
SE
MB
LY
1.3 Removing and reinstallingthe rear cover
1. Open the paper feed cover [1] and paper exit
cover [2].
2. Untighten 2 screws [3] and remove the rear
cover [4].
3. Install the removed components in the steps
reverse to removal.
[2]
[1] [3] [4] [3]
df3193004
AFR-20 Ver.1.0 Sep. 2003 EXTERIOR
1-121
I D
IS./
AS
SE
MB
LY
1.4 Removing and reinstallingthe registration roller cover
1. Open the paper feed cover [1].
2. Pull up the paper feed tray [2].
3. Unscrew 4 screws [3] and remove the registra-
tion roller cover [4].
4. Reinstall the above parts following the removal
steps in reverse.
[2]
[3]
[1][4]
[3]
df3193005
PAPER FEED AFR-20 Ver.1.0 Sep. 2003
1-122
I D
IS./
AS
SE
MB
LY
2. PAPER FEED
2.1 Cleaning the no paper sen-sor
1. Remove the registration roller cover. (See "1.4
Removing and reinstalling the registration roller
cover.")
2. Clean the no paper sensor (PS304) [1] with a
brush, etc. [1]
df3193006
AFR-20 Ver.1.0 Sep. 2003 PAPER FEED
1-123
I D
IS./
AS
SE
MB
LY
2.2 Removing and reinstallingthe paper feed unit
1. Open the paper feed cover [1].
2. Push 2 claw locks [2] at both ends of the paper
feed cover [1] to release and remove the paper
feed guide [3].
[2]
[1] [3]
[2]
df3193007
PAPER FEED AFR-20 Ver.1.0 Sep. 2003
1-124
I D
IS./
AS
SE
MB
LY
3. Untighten 1 screw [1] and remove the shaft fix-
ing plate [2].
4. Remove 2 snap rings [3].
5. Pushing 2 bearings [4] inward, remove the
paper feed unit [5].
6. Reinstall the above parts following the removal
steps in reverse.
[1]
[2][5]
[4] [3] [3] [4] df3193008
AFR-20 Ver.1.0 Sep. 2003 PAPER FEED
1-125
I D
IS./
AS
SE
MB
LY
2.3 Replacing the paper feedroller and the feed roller
A. Periodically replaced parts/cycle
• Feed roller: Every 1,800,000 copies (every
625,000 copies for actual durable count)
• Paper feed roller: Every 1,800,000 copies (every
625,000 copies for actual durable count)
B. Procedure
1. Remove the paper feed unit. (See "1.4 Remov-
ing and reinstalling the paper feed unit.")
2. Remove 1 bearing [1].
3. Remove 1 snap ring [2] and remove 1 pin [3].
4. Remove the gear [4] and remove the belt [5].
5. Remove the black snap ring [6] and remove 1
pin [7] (long pin) and gear [8].
6. Remove the plastic arm [9] and remove 1 pin
[10].
7. Remove 1 snap ring [11] and remove the paper
feed roller assembly [13] from the arm [12].
df3193009
[5] [3] [4] [2] [9] [13]
[6][1] [8] [7] [10] [12] [11]
df3193010
PAPER FEED AFR-20 Ver.1.0 Sep. 2003
1-126
I D
IS./
AS
SE
MB
LY
8. Remove 1 snap ring [1].
9. Remove 1 feed roller [2] and replace with new
one.
10. Remove 1 snap ring [3] and remove 1 pin [4].
11. Remove 2 paper feed rollers [5] and replace
with new ones.
12. Reinstall the above parts following the removal
steps in reverse.
Note:
• Be careful not to lose the paper feed roller and
feed roller fixing pins.
[5][1]
[4]
[3][2]
df3193011
AFR-20 Ver.1.0 Sep. 2003 PAPER FEED
1-127
I D
IS./
AS
SE
MB
LY
2.4 Replacing the double feedprevention roller
A. Periodically replaced parts/cycle
• Double feed prevention roller: Every 1,800,000
copies (every 625,000 copies for actual durable
count)
B. Procedure
1. Open the paper feed cover [1].
2. Release the claw lock of the double feed preven-
tion unit cover [2] and remove the cover.
[2]
[1]
[2]
df3193012
PAPER FEED AFR-20 Ver.1.0 Sep. 2003
1-128
I D
IS./
AS
SE
MB
LY
3. Holding both edges of the roller shaft, stand the
double feed prevention roller [1].
4. Remove the double feed prevention unit [1] and
replace with new one.
5. Reinstall the above parts following the removal
steps in reverse.
[1]
df3193013
[1]
df3193014
AFR-20 Ver.1.0 Sep. 2003 PAPER FEED
1-129
I D
IS./
AS
SE
MB
LY
3. PAPER FEED
3.1 Cleaning the registrationroller
1. Remove the registration roller cover. (See "1.4
Removing and reinstalling the registration roller
cover.")
2. Moisten cloth with alcohol and wipe 3 registra-
tion rollers [1] with the cloth. [1]
df3193015
PAPER FEED AFR-20 Ver.1.0 Sep. 2003
1-130
I D
IS./
AS
SE
MB
LY
3.2 Cleaning the registrationsensor
1. Remove the registration roller cover. (See "1.4
Removing and reinstalling the registration roller
cover.")
2. Clean PS301 (registration sensor) [1] with a
blower brush, etc. [1]
df3193016
AFR-20 Ver.1.0 Sep. 2003 PAPER FEED
1-131
I D
IS./
AS
SE
MB
LY
3.3 Removing and reinstallingthe conveyance belt
Note:
• Be careful not to touch the belt roller or avoid
damage or crease on it. If touching it by hand,
hold at the area of 20mm from the edges in
the width direction.
1. Fix the hinge opening/closing angle adjusting
fixture at an angle of 90 degrees.
2. Open RADF [1] vertically.
3. Slide 2 stoppers [3] in the upper part of the con-
veyance belt [2] rightward and loosen.
4. Remove the drive interlocking belt [4] on the left
lower inside of the conveyance belt [2].
5. Remove the conveyance belt unit.
Note:
• When reinstalling, fit the drive interlocking
belt to the conveyance belt unit securely.
[3][1] [2][3]
[4] df3193017
PAPER FEED AFR-20 Ver.1.0 Sep. 2003
1-132
I D
IS./
AS
SE
MB
LY
6. Remove 2 screws [1] and stand the roller.
7. Remove the conveyance belt.
8. Reinstall the above parts following the removal
steps in reverse.
[1]
[1]
df3193018
AFR-20 Ver.1.0 Sep. 2003 REVERSE/PAPER EXIT
1-133
I D
IS./
AS
SE
MB
LY
4. REVERSE/PAPER EXIT
4.1 Cleaning the paper exitroller/the paper exit sensor
1. Open the paper exit cover [1].
2. Moisten the cloth with alcohol and wipe 4 paper
exit rollers [2] with the cloth.
3. Clean the paper exit sensor (PS306) [3] with a
brush, etc.
4.2 Cleaning the reverse roller
1. Open the paper exit cover [1].
2. Open the reverse guide [2].
3. Moisten the cloth with alcohol and wipe 5
reverse rollers [1] with the cloth.
[2] [1]
[3] df3193019
[2] [1]
df3193020
[1]
df3193021
REMOVING AND REINSTALLING RADF AFR-20 Ver.1.0 Sep. 2003
1-134
I D
IS./
AS
SE
MB
LY
5. REMOVING AND REINSTALLING RADF
Note:
• Before removing RADF, fix the RADF hinge
opening/closing angle at 90 degrees. Fix the
fixture also at 90 degrees when opening RADF
and removing parts of the scanner section. If
not, RADF installing metal plate may be
deformed.
1. Remove the connector [1].
2. Fix 2 hinge opening/closing angle adjusting fix-
tures [2] at an angle of 90 degrees.
Two types of fixtures, 70 and 40-degree use, are
installed. They can be distinguished by the
mark on them.
70-degree hinge opening/closing angle adjust-
ing fixture: Untighten 4 screws [3], slide down 2
adjusting fixtures [2] and retighten 4 screws [3]
positively.
40-degree hinge opening/closing angle adjust-
ing fixture: Untighten 4 screws [3], install 2
adjusting fixtures [2] changing their upper and
lower positions and retighten 4 screws [3] posi-
tively.
3. Open RADF [1] vertically.
4. Remove 3 screws [2] and 2 fixtures [3].
5. Raise and remove RADF [1].
6. Reinstall the above parts following the removal
steps in reverse.
Note:
• After installing RADF, perform the 36-mode
"RADF installing position adjustment".
[3] [1] [3]
[2]
df3193023
[3][1][3]
[2][2] df3193024
C-208 Ver.1.0 Sep 2003 EXTERIOR
1-135
I D
IS./
AS
SE
MB
LYC-208 DISASSEMBLY/ASSEMBLY
Caution:
• Make sure the power cord of the copier is
unplugged from the power outlet before dis-
assembly or assembly.
1. EXTERIOR
1.1 Removing and reinstallingthe front cover
1. Remove the LCT from the main body.
2. Open the top cover [1], remove 4 screws [2] and
then remove the right side cover [3]. [1]
[3]
[2] lt2113004
EXTERIOR C-208 Ver.1.0 Sep 2003
1-136
I D
IS./
AS
SE
MB
LY
3. Open the front door [1] and remove 3 screws [2]
provided on the side inside the door.
4. Remove a screw [3] on the upper face.
5. Remove 2 screws [4] on the right side and then
remove the front cover [5].
[1]
[3]
[5]
[4]
[2]
lt2113005
C-208 Ver.1.0 Sep 2003 EXTERIOR
1-137
I D
IS./
AS
SE
MB
LY
1.2 Removing and reinstallingthe clutch replacement coverand the rear cover
1. Remove the right side cover.
2. Remove 4 screws [1] and then remove the
clutch replacement cover [2].
3. Remove 12 screws [1] and then remove the rear
cover [2].
4. Reinstall the above parts following the removal
steps in reverse.
[2]
[1]
[1] lt2113007
[1][2]
[1]
[1]
[1]
lt2113008
EXTERIOR C-208 Ver.1.0 Sep 2003
1-138
I D
IS./
AS
SE
MB
LY
1.3 Removing and reinstallingthe paper feed pick-up cover
1. Remove the LCT from the main body.
2. Open the top cover [1].
3. Remove the spring [3] from the paper feed unit
[2].
4. Remove 4 screws [4].
5. Pull out the paper feed pick-up cover /B [5] to
the right side and remove it.
6. Reinstall the above parts following the removal
steps in reverse.
Note:
• Be sure to fit the spring that connects the top
cover to the paper supply unit without fail.
[3][4]
[1]
[4]
[5]
[2]
lt2113009
C-208 Ver.1.0 Sep 2003 PAPER FEED
1-139
I D
IS./
AS
SE
MB
LY
2. PAPER FEED
2.1 Cleaning the paper dustremoving brush
1. Remove the LCT from the main body.
2. Remove the paper feed pick-up cover /B.
3. Close the top cover [1].
4. Clean the paper dust removing brush [2] with
the blower brush.
5. Reinstall the above parts following the removal
steps in reverse.
Note:
• Be sure to fit the spring that connects the top
cover to the paper supply unit without fail.
[1]
[2] lt2113010
PAPER FEED C-208 Ver.1.0 Sep 2003
1-140
I D
IS./
AS
SE
MB
LY
2.2 Removing and reinstallingthe paper feed unit
1. Remove the LCT from the main body.
2. Remove the paper feed pick-up cover /B.
3. Remove 2 stop rings [1].
4. Slide 2 bearings [2] to the outside and remove
the paper feed unit [3].
5. Reinstall the above parts following the removal
steps in reverse.
Note:
• Be sure to fit the spring that connects the top
cover to the paper supply unit without fail.
[2] [3] [2] [1]
[1] lt2113011
C-208 Ver.1.0 Sep 2003 PAPER FEED
1-141
I D
IS./
AS
SE
MB
LY
2.3 Replacing the paper feedroller and the feed roller
A. Periodically replaced parts/cycle
• Paper feed roller: Every 600,000 copies (Every
500,000 copies in actual replacement count)
• Feed roller: Every 600,000 copies (Every
500,000 copies in actual replacement count)
B. Procedure
1. Remove the LCT from the main body.
2. Remove the paper feed pick-up cover /B.
3. Remove the paper feed unit [1].
4. Remove the bearing [1].
5. Remove 2 stop rings [2] and then remove the
arm [3].
6. Remove the holder plate [4].
7. Remove a stop ring [5].
8. Remove the feed roller [6] and replace it with a
new one.
9. Remove the paper feed roller [7] and replace it
with a new one.
10. Reinstall the above parts following the removal
steps in reverse.
[1] lt2113012
[6]
[7] [4][5][3][2][1]
lt2113013
PAPER FEED C-208 Ver.1.0 Sep 2003
1-142
I D
IS./
AS
SE
MB
LY
2.4 Replacing the double feedprevention roller
A. Periodically replaced parts/cycle
• Double feed prevention roller: Every 600,000
copies (Every 500,000 copies in actual replace-
ment count)
B. Procedure
Note:
• Be sure to lower the up/down plate to its lower
most position in advance by pressing the tray
down switch (SW100) with electricity sup-
plied.
1. Remove the LCT from the main body.
2. Open the top cover [1].
3. Remove 2 screws [2] and then remove the pro-
tective cover [3].
4. Remove 2 screws [1] and then remove the dou-
ble feed prevention unit [2].
[1]
[2][3] lt2113014
[1][2] lt2113015
C-208 Ver.1.0 Sep 2003 PAPER FEED
1-143
I D
IS./
AS
SE
MB
LY
5. Remove 2 stop rings [1].
6. With the "D" cuts [2] of the shaft and the fixture
attached together, remove the double feed pre-
vention roller [3].
7. Remove the double feed prevention roller rubber
[2] from the shaft [1] and replace it with a new
one.
8. Reinstall the above parts following the removal
steps in reverse.
Note:
• Be sure to install the double feed prevention
roller rubber [2] so that the paint mark [3]
turns in the arrow-marked direction.
• Be sure to check to see if the PET sheet for
the drive gear cover is not damaged.
• Be sure to check that the double feed preven-
tion roller is not smeared with grease.
[1]
[2]
[1] [3]
lt2113016
[2]
[1]
[3]
lt2113017
PAPER FEED C-208 Ver.1.0 Sep 2003
1-144
I D
IS./
AS
SE
MB
LY
2.5 Replacing the paper feedclutch and the pre-registra-tion clutch
A. Periodically replaced parts/cycle
• Paper feed clutch (MC101): Every 2,500,000
copies (Every 2,000,000 copies in actural
replacement count)
• Pre-registration clutch (MC102): Every
2,500,000 copies (Every 2,000,000 copies in
actural replacement count)
B. Procedure
1. Remove the LCT from the main body.
2. Open the top cover [1].
3. Remove 4 screws [2] and then remove the
clutch replacement cover [3].
4. Remove 2 relay connectors [1].
5. Remove 2 stop rings [2].
6. Remove 2 clutches [3] and replace them with
new ones.
7. Reinstall the above parts following the removal
steps in reverse.
Note:
• When reinstalling them, be sure to check that
a stopper for each clutch is in its specified
position.
[3]
[2] [1]
[2] lt2113018
[2]
[1]
[3]
[2]
[1]
[3]
lt2113019
C-208 Ver.1.0 Sep 2003 TRAY UP/DOWN
1-145
I D
IS./
AS
SE
MB
LY
3. TRAY UP/DOWN
3.1 Removing and reinstallingthe rear drive
A. Removing the cover
Note:
• Be sure to lower the up/down plate to its lower
most position in advance by pressing the tray
down switch (SW100) with electricity sup-
plied.
1. Remove the LCT from the main body.
2. Remove the right side cover and the front cover.
3. Remove the clutch replacement cover and the
rear cover.
B. Removing the paper feed drive
1. Remove 9 connectors [1] provided on the rear
left side.
2. Remove the paper feed clutch (MC101) and the
pre-registration clutch (MC102) [1]. See ("2.5
Replacing the paper feed clutch and the pre-
registration clutch").
3. Remove an E-ring [2].
[1]
[1]
[1] lt2113020
[1][2]
lt2113021
TRAY UP/DOWN C-208 Ver.1.0 Sep 2003
1-146
I D
IS./
AS
SE
MB
LY
4. Remove 6 screws [1], remove then a bearing [2]
and the LCT drive unit [3].
5. Remove 2 connectors [4] provided on the back
of the LCT drive unit [3] and then remove the
LCT drive unit [3].
C. Removing the up/down drive
1. Remove 6 connectors [1] provided on the lower
back side.
[3] [2] [1]
[1]
[4]
lt2113022
[1]
[1]
lt2113023
C-208 Ver.1.0 Sep 2003 TRAY UP/DOWN
1-147
I D
IS./
AS
SE
MB
LY
2. Remove an E-ring [1].
3. Remove 5 screws [2].
4. Remove 2 bearing [3] and then remove the
guide plate [4].
5. Remove the gear [1].
Note:
• When reinstalling this gear, be sure to make
the positioning adjustments of the remaining
paper detection gear at this step. For posi-
tioning adjustments, see "D. Reinstalling the
rear drive."
6. Remove an E-ring [2] and a pin [3] and then
remove the gear [4].
7. Remove an E-ring [1], and then remove a bear-
ing [2], the gear [3] and a bearing [4].
8. Remove an E-ring [5] and then remove the gear
[6] and a pin [7].
[2]
[2] [3][1] [4]
lt2113024
[3] [2][4][1] lt2113025
[2]
[3]
[1]
[4]
[5] [6][7] lt2113026
TRAY UP/DOWN C-208 Ver.1.0 Sep 2003
1-148
I D
IS./
AS
SE
MB
LY
9. Remove an E-ring [1] and then remove a bear-
ing [2].
10. Remove 6 screws [1] and then remove the up/
down motor unit [2].
[1][2] lt2113027
[1]
[1][2]
[1] lt2113028
C-208 Ver.1.0 Sep 2003 TRAY UP/DOWN
1-149
I D
IS./
AS
SE
MB
LY
D. Reinstalling the rear drive
Note:
• Reinstall the rear drive following the removal
steps in reverse, but be sure to make position-
ing adjustments of the remaining paper detec-
tion gear at "C. Removing the up/down drive."
1. Conduct in reverse the steps 10 to 6 of "C.
Removing the up/down drive."
2. With the up/down plate at its lower most posi-
tion, stop the actuator of the remaining paper
detection gear [1] at the position where it
detects the remaining paper sensor /4 (PS105)
[2] and install the gear [3].
3. Conduct in reverse the steps 1 of "C. Removing
the up/down drive."
lt2113030[1]
[2]
[3]
[2]
lt2113031
TRAY UP/DOWN C-208 Ver.1.0 Sep 2003
1-150
I D
IS./
AS
SE
MB
LY
3.2 Removing and reinstallingthe up/down wire
A. Wire length:
• Up/down wire /A: 1450mm (4 wires)
• Assist wire /C: 1240mm
• Assist wire /D: 820mm
B. Removing the wire
Note:
• Be sure to lower the up/down plate to its lower
most position in advance by pressing the tray
down switch (SW100) with electricity sup-
plied.
1. Remove the LCT from the main body.
2. Remove the right side cover, front cover, clutch
replacement cover, and the rear cover.
3. Remove the rear drive.
4. Rotate the up/down drive shaft [1] clockwise as
seen from the rear side to lift the up/down plate
[2] up to its upper most position.
Note:
• When the springs [3] and [4] are removed in
the succeeding steps, the up/down plate [2]
comes down. For this reason, be sure to sup-
port the up/down plate [2] by hands. (This
work requires two persons.)
5. Remove the spring [3] and then remove the
assist wire /C [5] from the guide pulleys [6] and
[7].
6. After releasing the winding of the assist wire /C
[5] around the drive pulley [8], remove the E-ring
[9] and then remove the drive pulley [8].
7. Remove the assist wire /C [5] from the up/down
drive shaft [1].
8. Remove the spring [4] and then remove the
assist wire /D [10] from the guide pulleys [11],
[12] and [13].
9. After releasing the winding of the assist wire /D
[10] around the drive pulley [14], remove the E-
ring [15] and then remove the drive pulley [14].
10. Remove the assist wire /D [10] from the up/
down drive shaft [1].
11. Bring down the up/drive plate [2].
[2]
[3]
[7]
[6]
[12]
[1]
[1]
[5]
[1][8]
[5]
[15]
[14]
[10]
[13]
[9]
[10]
[4][11]
lt2113032
C-208 Ver.1.0 Sep 2003 TRAY UP/DOWN
1-151
I D
IS./
AS
SE
MB
LY
12. Remove the E-ring [1] and then remove the
drive pulley [3] while releasing the winding of the
up/down wire /A [2].
13. Remove the up/down wire /A [2] from the up/
down drive shaft [4].
14. Remove the up/down wire /A [2] from the guide
pulleys [5], [6] and [7].
Note:
• When removing the up/down wire /A [2]
installed onto the guide pulleys [5], [6] and [7],
be sure to pull out the wire from a notch [8]
provided on the side of each pulley to move
the wire cover [9] of each pulley to the loca-
tion where the notch [8] can be avoided.
15. Remove a screw [10] and then remove the up/
down wire protective cover [11].
16. Pull out the up/down wire /A [2] from the upper
surface [12] of the LCT main body to remove it.
[3]
[10][11]
[12]
[6]
[7]
[5]
[2]
[2]
[2]
[3]
[4]
[4]
[1]
[9]
[8][2]
[9][8]
[2]
lt2113034
TRAY UP/DOWN C-208 Ver.1.0 Sep 2003
1-152
I D
IS./
AS
SE
MB
LY
17. Remove the E-ring [1] and then remove the
drive pulley [3] while releasing the winding of the
up/down wire /A [2].
18. Remove the up/down wire /A [2] from the up/
down drive shaft [4].
19. Remove the up/down wire /A [2] from the guide
pulleys [5], [6] and [7].
Note:
• When removing the up/down wire /A [2]
installed onto the guide pulleys [5], [6] and [7],
be sure to pull out the wire from a notch [8]
provided on the side of each pulley to move
the wire cover [9] of each pulley to the loca-
tion where the notch [8] can be avoided.
20. Remove a screw [10] and then remove the up/
down wire protective cover [11].
21. Pull out the up/down wire /A [2] from the upper
surface [12] of the LCT main body to remove it.
22. In the same manner as Steps 12 to 16, remove
the up/down wire /A [1] on the rear side.
23. In the same manner as Steps 17 to 21, remove
the up/down wire /A [2] on the rear side.
[9][8]
[2]
[10][11]
[12][2]
[9]
[8]
[2]
[6]
[4]
[2][3]
[3]
[1]
[5][2]
[7]
[4]
lt2113035
[1]
[2]
lt2113037
C-208 Ver.1.0 Sep 2003 TRAY UP/DOWN
1-153
I D
IS./
AS
SE
MB
LY
C. Reinstalling the wire
1. Insert the up/down wire /A [2] into the hole [1]
provided on the upper surface of the LCT main
body.
2. Reinstall the up/down wire /A [2] onto the guide
pulleys [3], [4] and [5] in this order.
Note:
• When reinstalling the up/down wire /A [2] onto
the guide pulleys [3], [4] and [5], be sure to
insert the wire into the pulley through the
notch [6] provided on the side of each pulley
and then move the wire cover [7] of each pul-
ley to the wire that has been already inserted.
When moving the wire cover [7], move it first
to the position where the notch [6] can be
avoided and then move the wire in the notch
[6] into each pulley.
3. Insert the up/down wire /A [2] into the wire
installation hole [9] provided inside the up/down
drive shaft [8].
Note:
• The up/down drive shaft [8] is provided with 3
wire installation holes each on the front side
and the rear side. In this step, the inner-most
wire installation hole is used.
4. Insert the drive pulley [10] into the up/down
drive shaft [8] so that the notch [11] of the drive
pulley [10] comes to the position in which the up/
down wire /A [2] is put.
5. Fit the E-ring [12] and fasten the drive pulley
[10].
[2][11]
[10]
[12]
[8]
[9]
[4]
[8]
[10]
[5][2]
[3]
[2]
[1]
lt2113039
[7]
[6][2]
[7][6]
[2]
TRAY UP/DOWN C-208 Ver.1.0 Sep 2003
1-154
I D
IS./
AS
SE
MB
LY
6. Insert the up/down wire /A [2] into the hole [1]
provided on the upper surface of the LCT main
body.
7. Reinstall the up/down wire /A [2] onto the guide
pulleys [3], [4] and [5] in this order.
Note:
• When reinstalling the up/down wire /A [2] onto
the guide pulleys [3], [4] and [5], be sure to
insert the wire into the pulley through the
notch [6] provided on the side of each pulley
and then move the wire cover [7] of each pul-
ley to the wire that has been already inserted.
When moving the wire cover [7], move it first
to the position where the notch [6] can be
avoided and then move the wire in the notch
[6] into each pulley.
8. Insert the up/down wire /A [2] into the wire
installation hole [9] provided at the middle of the
up/down drive shaft [8].
Note:
• The up/down drive shaft [8] is provided with 3
wire installation holes each on the front side
and the rear side. In this step, the wire instal-
lation hole at the middle is to be used. Since
the inner-most wire installation hole has been
already used, however, only two wire installa-
tion holes can be confirmed for this steps. As
a result, the one near to the drive pulley that
has been already installed is the wire installa-
tion hole [9] at the middle.
9. Insert the drive pulley [10] into the up/down pul-
ley shaft [8] so that the notch [11] of the drive
pulley [10] comes to the position into which the
up/down wire /A [2] is put.
10. Fit the E-ring [12] to fasten the drive pulley [10].
[2]
[1]
[7]
[6][2]
[7][6]
[2]
[10] [11]
[12]
[10]
[4]
[3]
[5][2]
[8]
lt2113040
[2]
[8][9]
C-208 Ver.1.0 Sep 2003 TRAY UP/DOWN
1-155
I D
IS./
AS
SE
MB
LY
11. In the same manner as Steps 1 to 5, reinstall the
up/down wire /A [1] on the rear side.
12. In the same manner as Steps 17 to 21, reinstall
the up/down wire /A [2] on the rear side.
13. Rotate the up/down drive shaft [1] clockwise as
seen from the rear side to lift the up/down plate
[2] up to its upper most position.
Note:
• Be sure to wind up the up/down wire /A form
inside to outside in each drive pulley.
• The up/down plate [2] comes down by its own
weight if the installation of the assist wire /C
[3] and the assist wire /D [4] have not been
completed. For this reason, be sure to sup-
port the up/down plate [2] by hands until the
installation of Step 23 is completed. (This
work requires two persons.)
14. Insert the assist wire /C [3] into the wire installa-
tion hole [5] provided outside the up/down drive
shaft [1].
Note:
• The up/down drive shaft [1] is provided with 3
wire installation holes each on the front side
and the rear side. However, since the wire
installation holes on the inside and at the mid-
dle have been already used, only the wire
installation hole on the outside can be con-
firmed for this steps.
15. Insert the drive pulley [6] into the up/down drive
shaft [1] so that the notch [7] of the drive pulley
[6] comes to the position into which the assist
wire /C [3] is put.
[1]
[2]
lt2113041
[3] [4]
[9] [17]
[2]
[9]
[7]
[8]
[15]
[1]
[1]
[3]
[1][6]
[7]
[5]
[3]
[18]
[12][11]
[13][4]
[14]
[10]
[4]
[17]
[16]
lt2113043
TRAY UP/DOWN C-208 Ver.1.0 Sep 2003
1-156
I D
IS./
AS
SE
MB
LY
16. Wind the assist wire /C [3] around the drive pul-
ley [6] one turn counterclockwise as seen from
the front side.
Note:
• Be sure to wind the assist wire /C [3] from
inside to outside in the drive pulley [6].
17. Reinstall the assist wire /C [3] onto the guide
pulleys [7] and [8] in this order and then fasten
them with the springs [9].
Note:
• Be sure to take note of the direction of the
spring [9] when reinstalling it.
18. Fit the E-ring [10] to fasten the drive pulley [6].
19. Insert the assist wire /D [4] into the wire installa-
tion hole [11] provided outside the up/down
drive shaft [1].
20. Insert the drive pulley [12] into the up/down
drive pulley [1] so that the notch [13] of the drive
pulley [12] comes to the position into which the
assist wire /D [4] is put.
21. Wind the assist wire /D [4] around the drive pul-
ley [12] one turn clockwise as seen from the rear
side.
Note:
• Be sure to wind the assist wire /D [4] from
inside to outside in the drive pulley [12].
22. Reinstall the assist wire /D [4] onto the guide
pulleys [14], [15] and [16] in this order and then
fasten them with the spring [17].
Note:
• Be sure to take note of the direction of the
spring [17] when reinstalling it.
23. Fit the E-ring [18] to fasten the drive pulley [12].
[3] [4]
[9] [17]
[2]
[9]
[7]
[8]
[15]
[1]
[1]
[3]
[1][6]
[7]
[5]
[3]
[18]
[12][11]
[13][4]
[14]
[10]
[4]
[17]
[16]
lt2113046
Note:
• The up/down drive shaft [1] is provided
with 3 wire installation holes each on the
front side and the rear side. However, since
the wire installation holes on the inside
and at the middle have been already used,
only the wire installation hole on the out-
side can be confirmed for this steps.
C-208 Ver.1.0 Sep 2003 TRAY UP/DOWN
1-157
I D
IS./
AS
SE
MB
LY
24. Reinstall 4 up/down wire protective covers [2]
with a screw [1] for each.
25. Rotate the up/down drive shaft [3] counterclock-
wise as seen from the rear side to bring down
the up/down plate [4].
26. Reinstall the rear drive.
27. Reinstall the rear cover, clutch replacement
cover, front cover and the right side cover.
[1] [2][1]
[2]
lt2113045
[4]
[3]
TRAY UP/DOWN C-208 Ver.1.0 Sep 2003
1-158
I D
IS./
AS
SE
MB
LY
Blank page
FN-9/FN120 Ver.1.0 Sep 2003
1-159
I D
IS./
AS
SE
MB
LYFN-9/FN120 DISASSEMBLY/ASSEMBLY
Caution:
• Make sure the power cord of the copier is
unplugged from the power outlet before dis-
assembly or assembly.
1. EXTERIOR
1.1 Removing and reinstalling ofthe booklet tray (FN-9 only)
A. Procedure
1. Remove 2 screws [1], and then remove the
booklet tray [2].
2. Reinstall the above parts following the removal
steps in reverse.
[1]
[2]
fs2153001
FN-9/FN120 Ver.1.0 Sep 2003
1-160
I D
IS./
AS
SE
MB
LY
1.2 Removing and reinstalling ofthe top cover /1
A. Procedure
1. Remove 2 caps [1].
2. Open the finisher door [2] and remove 5 screws
[3]. And then remove the top cover /1 [4].
3. Reinstall the above parts following the removal
steps in reverse.
1.3 Removing and reinstalling ofthe top cover /2
Note:
• When an optional PI has been installed, be
sure to remove it.
A. Procedure
1. Remove the top cover /1.
2. Open the finisher door [1].
3. After removing 2 screws [2], pull out the sub-tray
[3] and remove the top cover /2 [4].
4. Reinstall the above parts following the removal
steps in reverse.
[3]
[1]
[2]
[3]
[4]
fs2153002
[4][3]
[1]
[2] fs2153003
FN-9/FN120 Ver.1.0 Sep 2003
1-161
I D
IS./
AS
SE
MB
LY
1.4 Removing and reinstalling ofthe side cover
A. Procedure
1. Open the finisher door.
2. Remove 3 screws [1] and then remove the side
cover [2].
3. Reinstall the above parts following the removal
steps in reverse.
1.5 Removing and reinstalling ofthe finisher door
A. Procedure
1. Open the finisher door [1].
2. Remove 2 screws [3] from the lower hinge [2]
and remove the finisher door [1].
3. Reinstall the above parts following the removal
steps in reverse.
[1]
[2] fs2153004
[1]
[3]
[2]
fs2153005
FN-9/FN120 Ver.1.0 Sep 2003
1-162
I D
IS./
AS
SE
MB
LY
1.6 Removing and reinstalling ofthe rear cover
A. Procedure
1. Remove 6 screws [1], and then remove the rear
cover [2].
2. Reinstall the above parts following the removal
steps in reverse.
[2]
[1]
fs2153006
FN-9/FN120 Ver.1.0 Sep 2003
1-163
I D
IS./
AS
SE
MB
LY
1.7 Removing and reinstalling ofthe main tray
Caution:
• After you have lowered the main tray, be sure
to unplug the power cord of the main body
from the power outlet.
A. Procedure
1. Push up the actuator [1] of the tray upper limit
sensor (PS702) with your finger, and lower the
main tray [2].
2. Turn off the main switch (SW2) of the main body
and unplug the power cord from the power out-
let.
3. Remove 2 screws [1].
4. With the main tray [2] raised up, unhook the up/
down stay [3] and remove the main tray [2].
5. Reinstall the above parts following the removal
steps in reverse.
[1]
[2]
fs2153007
[2]
[3]
[1]
fs2153008
FN-9/FN120 Ver.1.0 Sep 2003
1-164
I D
IS./
AS
SE
MB
LY
1.8 Removing and reinstalling ofthe main paper exit openingcover
A. Procedure
1. Remove the following parts:
• Top cover /1, or an optional PI-installed machine
(PI)
• Top cover /2
• Side cover
• Rear cover
• Main tray
2. Remove 4 screws [1], and then remove the main
paper exit opening cover [2].
3. Reinstall the above parts following the removal
steps in reverse.
1.9 Removing and reinstalling ofthe booklet paper exit open-ing cover (FN-9 only)
A. Procedure
1. Remove the booklet tray.
2. Remove 2 screws [1] and then remove the book-
let paper exit opening cover [2].
3. Reinstall the above parts following the removal
steps in reverse.
[2]
[1]
fs2153009
[2]
[1]
fs2153010
FN-9/FN120 Ver.1.0 Sep 2003
1-165
I D
IS./
AS
SE
MB
LY
2. CONVEYANCE
2.1 Replacing the paper exitroller /A (sponge roller)
Caution:
• After you have lowered the main tray, be sure
to unplug the power cord of the main body
from the power outlet.
A. Periodically replaced parts/cycle
• Paper exit roller /A (sponge roller): Every
250,000 copies.
Note:
• When replacing the sponge rollers, all of the 5
pairs (10 components) must be replaced.
B. Procedure
1. Push up the actuator [1] of the tray upper limit
sensor (PS702) with your finger, and lower the
main tray [2].
2. Turn off the main switch (SW2) of the main body
and unplug the power cord of the main body
from the power outlet.
[1]
[2] fs2153011
FN-9/FN120 Ver.1.0 Sep 2003
1-166
I D
IS./
AS
SE
MB
LY
3. With a driver inserted into the groove of the
sponge roller [1], prize it open to remove the
sponge roller.
4. With a new sponge roller and the shaft put
together at their respective concave sections [1],
install the sponge roller securely to the shaft by
pressing it down until a click sound is heard.
5. Reinstall the above parts following the removal
steps in reverse.
fs2153012
[1]
[1]
[1]
fs2153013
FN-9/FN120 Ver.1.0 Sep 2003
1-167
I D
IS./
AS
SE
MB
LY
2.2 Replacing the intermediateconveyance roller (spongeroller)
A. Periodically replaced parts/cycle
• Intermediate conveyance roller (sponge roller):
Every 250,000 copies.
Note:
• When replacing the intermediate conveyance
rollers, all of the 2 pairs (4 components) must
be replaced.
B. Procedure
1. Open the finisher door.
2. Remove 2 screws [1] and a bearing [2], and
then remove the intermediate conveyance roller
[3].
3. With a driver inserted into the groove of the
sponge roller [1], prize it open to remove the
sponge roller.
[3]
[1]
[2]
fs2153014
[1]
fs2153015
FN-9/FN120 Ver.1.0 Sep 2003
1-168
I D
IS./
AS
SE
MB
LY
4. With a new sponge roller and the shaft put
together at their respective concave sections [1],
install the sponge roller securely to the shaft by
pressing it down until a click sound is heard.
5. Reinstall the above parts following the removal
steps in reverse.
Note:
• When reinstalling, be sure to insert the pin at
the rear of the intermediate conveyance roller
securely into the receiving groove.
2.3 Removing and reinstalling ofthe paper exit opening unit
A. Procedure
1. Remove the following parts:
• Top cover /1, or an optional PI-installed machine
(PI)
• Top cover /2
• Side cover
• Rear cover
• Main tray
• Main paper exit opening cover
2. Remove a screw [3] of the paper exit open/close
link [2] of the paper exit opening unit [1].
[1]
[1]
fs2153016
[2]
[1] [3]
fs2153017
FN-9/FN120 Ver.1.0 Sep 2003
1-169
I D
IS./
AS
SE
MB
LY
3. Remove 3 clamp screws [1], a ground screw [2],
the paper exit opening solenoid (SD704) con-
nector [3] and the main tray paper exit sensor
(PS706) connector [4].
4. Remove E-rings [1] and bearings [2], two each,
provided at front and rear, and then remove the
paper exit opening unit [3].
5. Reinstall the above parts following the removal
steps in reverse.
[2]
[4]
[3]
[1]
fs2153018
[1]
[1]
[3]
[2]
[2]
fs2153019
FN-9/FN120 Ver.1.0 Sep 2003
1-170
I D
IS./
AS
SE
MB
LY
3. MAIN TRAY
3.1 Replacing the tray up/downmotor
Caution:
• When removing the tray up/down motor, be
sure to hold the main tray to prevent it from
falling.
A. Periodically replaced parts/cycle
• Tray up/down motor (M703): Every 2,500,000
copies
B. Procedure
1. Remove the rear cover.
2. After removing a connector [1], remove 2 screws
[3] while supporting the main tray [2] with your
hand, and then remove the tray up/down motor
(M703) [4].
3. Reinstall the above parts following the removal
steps in reverse.
fs2153020
[3]
[1]
[4]
[2]
FN-9/FN120 Ver.1.0 Sep 2003
1-171
I D
IS./
AS
SE
MB
LY
3.2 Removing and reinstalling ofthe up/down wire
Caution:
• When removing the tray up/down motor, be
sure to hold the main tray to prevent it from
falling.
Note:
• The wire replacement steps shown below
refer to those taken on the rear side. The
shape and the winding of wire on the front
side are symmetrically the same as those on
the rear side.
• The wire brackets of the up/down wire is
stamped with "F" for the front side and "R" for
the rear side. When reinstalling, be careful not
to mix up the front with the rear.
A. Procedure
1. Remove the following parts:
• Side cover
• Finisher door
• Rear cover
• Tray up/down motor (M703)
• Main tray
2. Remove 5 screws [1], and then remove the up/
down gear cover [2] and the gear [3].
fs2153021
[3]
[2]
[1]
FN-9/FN120 Ver.1.0 Sep 2003
1-172
I D
IS./
AS
SE
MB
LY
3. After removing 2 screws [1], remove the wire
bracket [3] of the up/down wire [2] on the rear
side from the up/down stay [4].
4. Loosen 2 screws [2] of the belt tensioner [1].
5. Remove an E-ring [1], the gear [2] and the up/
down pulley /L [3], and then remove the up/down
wire [4].
Note:
• When removing the up/down pulley /L, be
careful not to drop the pins [5]. Otherwise,
they may get lost.
fs2153022
[1]
[4][3]
[2]
fs2153023
[2]
[1]
[1] [2]
[4]
[5][3]
fs2153024
FN-9/FN120 Ver.1.0 Sep 2003
1-173
I D
IS./
AS
SE
MB
LY
6. Fasten the wire bracket [1] tentatively to the up/
down stay [2] with 2 screws [3].
Note:
• Be sure to set the up/down wire [4] with the
shorter section [5] up and the longer section
[6] down.
7. With a new up/down wire fastened to the wire
end [2] of the up/down pulley /L [1], wind the
wire a little less than 5 turns from inside toward
outside around the pulley without getting loos-
ened and set the up/down pulley /L [1] to the
shaft so that it is in tune with the pin [3].
8. After putting the up/down wire on the up/down
pulley /U [1], wind it 2 turns from inside toward
outside around the up/down pulley /L [2] without
getting loosened and fasten it to the wire end
[3].
fs2153025[5]
[1]
[3]
[2][6]
[4]
fs2153026
[2]
[1][3]
fs2153027
[1]
[3]
[2]
FN-9/FN120 Ver.1.0 Sep 2003
1-174
I D
IS./
AS
SE
MB
LY
9. Set the pin [1] and the gear [2] to the shaft and
fasten it with the E-ring [3].
10. Using a tension gauge or spring balance, pull
the belt tensioner [1] to the specified force "A"
and tighten it with 2 screws [2].
Specified value: A = 2.5 ± 0.25 kg
11. Loosen 2 screws [2] of the wire bracket [1] on
the front side. Press down the up/down stay [3]
to make it level, and tighten screws [5] of the
wire bracket [4] on the rear side and screws (4
screws in all).
Note:
• Be sure to check if the up/down stay [3] is
level. If it is out of the level, an undesirable
load may be imposed on the tray up/down
motor (M703) or the gear, causing damage to
it.
12. Reinstall the above parts following the removal
steps in reverse.
fs2153028
[1][2]
[3]
fs2153029[1]
[2]
fs2153030
[3]
[1]
[2]
[5][4]
FN-9/FN120 Ver.1.0 Sep 2003
1-175
I D
IS./
AS
SE
MB
LY
4. STACKER
4.1 Replacing the stackingassist roller
A. Periodically replaced parts/cycle
• Stacking assist roller: Every 400,000 copies
B. Procedure
1. Open the finisher door.
2. Pull out the stacker unit.
3. Open the stacking assist section [1] and lift up
the stacking assist roller [2].
4. Remove the stop ring [3], and then remove the
stacking assist roller [2].
5. Reinstall the above parts following the removal
steps in reverse.
4.2 Removing and reinstalling ofthe stacker unit cover
A. Procedure
1. Open the finisher door.
2. Remove 5 screws [1] and then remove the
stacker unit cover [2].
3. Reinstall the above parts following the removal
steps in reverse.
[1]
[2][3]
fs2153031
[1]
[2]
fs2153032
FN-9/FN120 Ver.1.0 Sep 2003
1-176
I D
IS./
AS
SE
MB
LY
4.3 Removing and reinstalling ofthe stacker unit
Caution:
• We recommend that at least two people per-
form this service.
• Be careful when you detach the FNS from the
main body. If you pull out the stacker unit, the
FNS may fall. This may cause injury.
A. Procedure
1. Remove the following parts:
• Booklet tray
• Side cover
• Finisher door
• Rear cover
2. Detach the FNS from the main body.
3. Pull out the stacker unit.
4. Remove 3 connectors [1] (CN1, CN2, CN3) from
the relay board (RB) [2].
(For FS-115, two connectors (CN1, CN2) are
provided.)
5. Remove each cable from the wiring harness
guide.
[1]
[2]
fs2153033
FN-9/FN120 Ver.1.0 Sep 2003
1-177
I D
IS./
AS
SE
MB
LY
6. After removing an E-ring [1] and the shaft [2],
detach the connecting arm [3].
7. Remove 2 rail stopper screws [1] and pull out
the stacker unit [2].
Note:
• To prevent the FNS from falling down, be sure
to put a support [3] under the stacker unit.
[1]
[3]
[2]
fs2153034
[3]
[2]
[1]
[1]
fs2153035
FN-9/FN120 Ver.1.0 Sep 2003
1-178
I D
IS./
AS
SE
MB
LY
8. Remove 2 screws [1] and raise the stacker unit
[2] to remove the guide rail [3].
Caution:
• When removing the guide rail, be careful not
to hurt your hip by taking an appropriate pos-
ture.
9. Reinstall the above parts following the removal
steps in reverse.
Note:
• When reinstalling the stacker unit [2] to the
guide rail [3], be sure to check to see if the
hook [4] is set securely into the fitting hole [5].
fs2153036
[2]
[1]
[5]
[4][3]
[1]
[3]
[4]
[5]
FN-9/FN120 Ver.1.0 Sep 2003
1-179
I D
IS./
AS
SE
MB
LY
5. STAPLER
5.1 Removing and reinstalling ofthe stapler unit cover
Caution:
• Be careful when you detach the FNS from the
main body. If you pull out the stacker unit, the
FNS may fall. This may cause injury.
A. Procedure
1. Open the finisher door.
2. Pull out the stacker unit [1].
3. Remove 2 rail stopper screws [1] and pull out
the stacker unit [2].
Note:
• To prevent the FNS from falling down, be sure
to put a support [3] under the stacker unit.
fs2153037[1]
[1]
[1]
[3]
[2]
fs2153038
FN-9/FN120 Ver.1.0 Sep 2003
1-180
I D
IS./
AS
SE
MB
LY
4. Remove 5 screws [1] and then remove the sta-
pler unit cover [2].
5. Reinstall the above parts following the removal
steps in reverse.
5.2 Replacing the clincher
Note:
• Do not use hands to move clincher units to
horizontal direction.
Otherwise the belt and the gear teeth skipping
may occur.
• After reinstalling the clincher, be sure to con-
duct the "vertical adjustment of the FNS sta-
pler." (See "ADJUSTMENT.")
A. Periodically replaced parts/cycle
• Clincher: Every 200,000 staples
B. Procedure
1. Open the finisher door.
2. Pull out the stacker unit and remove the stapler
unit cover.
3. Remove a ground screw [1], and then remove
the ground [2] and the clamp [3].
4. After removing 4 screws [4], remove the clincher
/F [5] and then remove the connector [6].
[2]
[1]
fs2153039
[3] [2][1]
[4]
[5]
[6]
fs2153040
FN-9/FN120 Ver.1.0 Sep 2003
1-181
I D
IS./
AS
SE
MB
LY
5. Remove 4 screws [2] of the clincher /R [1] and
the ground [3].
6. After removing 2 screws [1] and the ball bearing
spring mounting bracket [2], rotate the clincher /
R [3] to the position in which it can be easily
taken out, and then remove the connector [4].
Note:
• Be careful not to lose the bearing spring [5]
and the ball.
7. Reinstall the above parts following the removal
steps in reverse.
fs2153041
[1]
[2]
[3]
[3]
[4]
[1]
[2]
[5]
fs2153042
FN-9/FN120 Ver.1.0 Sep 2003
1-182
I D
IS./
AS
SE
MB
LY
5.3 Replacing the stapler
A. Periodically replaced parts/cycle
• Stapler: Every 200,000 staples
Note:
• Do not use hands to move stapler units to
horizontal direction.
Otherwise the belt and the gear teeth skipping
may occur.
• After reinstalling the clincher, be sure to con-
duct the "vertical adjustment of the FNS sta-
pler." (See "ADJUSTMENT.")
B. Procedure
1. Open the finisher door.
2. Pull out the stacker unit.
3. Remove the cartridge from the stapler.
4. After removing 4 screws [2] of the stapler /F [1]
and a ground screw [3], take out the stapler /F
[1] and remove the connector [4].
[2]
[1]
[2]
[4][3] fs2153043
FN-9/FN120 Ver.1.0 Sep 2003
1-183
I D
IS./
AS
SE
MB
LY
5. After removing 2 screws [3] of the sensor cover
[2] of the stapler /F [1] and 3 clamps [4], remove
a ground screw [5] and the connector [6].
Note:
• When reinstalling the sensor cover [2], be
careful that the wiring harness does not inter-
fere with the stapler rotation HP sensor
(PS713) [7] or get caught by the gear.
6. After removing 4 screws [1], take out the stapler
/R [2] and remove the connector [3].
Note:
• When taking out the stapler /R [2], be careful
not to damage PS713 [4].
7. Reinstall the above parts following the removal
steps in reverse.
fs2153044
[1]
[2][4]
[3] [5] [7]
[6]
[3]
[2]
[1]
[4]
[1]
fs2153045
FN-9/FN120 Ver.1.0 Sep 2003
1-184
I D
IS./
AS
SE
MB
LY
Blank page
PK-5 Ver.1.0 Sep 2003 PUNCH SECTION
1-185
I D
IS./
AS
SE
MB
LYPK-5 DISASSEMBLY/ASSEMBLY
Caution:
• Make sure the power cord of the copier is
unplugged from the power outlet before dis-
assembly or assembly.
1. PUNCH SECTION
Note:
• The following screws should not be removed.
If you do, punching cannot be done as
designed.
1.1 Replacing the Punch unitA. Procedure
1. Remove cap on the top cover.
Punch unit
Screws that should not be removed
Punch scraps box
PUNCH SECTION PK-5 Ver.1.0 Sep 2003
1-186
I D
IS./
AS
SE
MB
LY
2. Remove the punch drive board cover by remov-
ing one screw.
3. Disconnect two connectors (CN65, 68) and one
relay connector (CN531) from the punch drive
board (PKDB).
Screw
punch drive board cover
Connector (CN68)
Punch drive board (PKDB)
Relay connector (CN531)
Connector (CN65)
PK-5 Ver.1.0 Sep 2003 PUNCH SECTION
1-187
I D
IS./
AS
SE
MB
LY
4. Remove three screws to remove the punch unit
cover.
5. Disconnect two connectors (CN158, 505).
6. Remove the punch unit from FNS by removing
four screws.
7. Reinstall the above parts following the removal
steps in reverse
Screws
punch unit cover
21 1
16 5
3
1. Screws2. Punch unit3. Connector (CN505)4. Connector (CN158)5. Punch shift motor (M802)6. Punch shift HP PS (PS803)
PUNCH SECTION PK-5 Ver.1.0 Sep 2003
1-188
I D
IS./
AS
SE
MB
LY
1.2 Cleaning the Punch Edgesand Punch Scraps Full PS(PS802)
A. Procedure
1. Remove the punch unit.
2. Use a blower brush to remove paper dust and
punch scraps from the punch edges and punch
scraps full PS (PS802).
3. Reinstall the above parts following the removal
steps in reverse
Punch edges
Punch scraps full PS (PS802)
Cover Inserter D Ver.1.0 Sep 2003 External Section
1-189
I D
IS./
AS
SE
MB
LYCover Inserter D DISASSEMBLY/ASSEMBLY
Caution:
• Make sure the power cord of the copier is
unplugged from the power outlet before dis-
assembly or assembly.
1. External Section
1.1 Removing / Re-installing theExternal covers
A. Procedure
1. Remove cap on the top cover.
2. Remove four screws to detach the top cover.
3. Remove one screw to detach the connector
cover.
4. Remove three screws to detach the lower cover.
Top cover
Screws
Cap
Lower cover
Connecting coverScrew
Screws
External Section Cover Inserter D Ver.1.0 Sep 2003
1-190
I D
IS./
AS
SE
MB
LY
5. Remove two screws, disconnect the relay con-
nector (CN232), and detach the operation panel
cover.
6. Reinstall the above parts following the removal
steps in reverse.
Screw
Operation panel cover
ScrewRelay connector (CN232)
Cover Inserter D Ver.1.0 Sep 2003 Paper feed unit
1-191
I D
IS./
AS
SE
MB
LY
2. Paper feed unit
2.1 Replacing the Paper feedroller and Feed roller
A. Procedure
1. When replacing the paper feed roller and feed
roller for the upper tray, detach the top cover.
2. Remove the two stop rings, then shift the left
and right bearings outside, and remove the feed
roller unit.
3. Remove actuator, three stop rings, three bear-
ings of the feed roller unit, then slide the roller
shaft in the direction of the allow to remove each
roller.
Paper feed roller unit
Stopring
Bearing Stop ring
Bearing
Feed roller
Feed roller
Stop ring
Stoprings
Bearing
Bearing
Rubber
Rubber
Paint mark
Feed drive belt
Actuator
Paper feed unit Cover Inserter D Ver.1.0 Sep 2003
1-192
I D
IS./
AS
SE
MB
LY
4. When replacing the paper feed roller and feed
roller for the lower tray, open the upper tray and
perform the steps 2 and 3.
5. Reinstall the above parts following the removal
steps in reverse.
Note:
• Ensure that the mounting direction of each
roller and rubber is correct.
2.2 Replacing the Double feedprevent roller and Torquelimiter
A. Procedure
1. When replacing the double feed prevent roller
and the torque limiter for the upper tray, detach
the top cover.
2. Detach the paper feed roller unit.
3. Release the hooks on both sides, remove the
double feed prevention roller assembly by lifting
up, then pull out the shaft, and remove the dou-
ble-feed-prevention roller together with the feed-
reverse gear.
4. Separate the double feed prevention roller and
the torque limiter from the double feed preven-
tion roller assembly.
5. When replacing the double feed prevention
roller and the torque limiter for the lower tray,
open the upper unit and perform the steps 2 and
3.
6. Reinstall the above parts following the removal
steps in reverse.
Note:
• Ensure that the mounting direction of each
roller and rubber is correct.
Top coverRelease lever
Double-feed prevention roller
Hooks
Double feed prevention rollerStop rings
Torque limiter
Notch
TMG-3 Ver.1.0 Sep 2003 TRIMMER
1-193
I D
IS./
AS
SE
MB
LYTMG-3 DISASSEMBLY/ASSEMBLY
Caution:
• Make sure the power cord of the copier is
unplugged from the power outlet before dis-
assembly or assembly.
• Trimming knives (upper and lower) are used
in this machine. Be extremely careful in han-
dling these knives to avoid injuries.
1. TRIMMER
1.1 Replacing the trimmer knife /U and trimmer knife /L
A. Periodically replaced parts/cycle
• Trimmer knife /U: Every 4,000,000 copies (Every
500,000 copies for actual durable count)
• Trimmer knife /L: Every 4,000,000 copies (Every
500,000 copies for actual durable count)
B. Procedure
1. Open the front door [1] and conveyance door [2].
2. Untighten 4 fixing screws [3] and remove the top
plate [4].
3. Untighten 1 nylon clamp screw fixing the power
cord and remove the power plug.
[4]
[2][1]
[3]
tu1093001
TRIMMER TMG-3 Ver.1.0 Sep 2003
1-194
I D
IS./
AS
SE
MB
LY
4. Untighten 4 fixing screws [1] and 3 fixing screws
[2] and remove the rear cover [3].
5. Untighten 3 fixing screws [1] and remove the
roller cover [2].
6. Disconnect 1 relay connector [3] and remove the
wiring harness [5] from the cable clamp [4].
7. Untighten 2 front and rear fixing screws [6]
respectively and remove the entrance convey-
ance roller unit [7].
8. Remove 1 front and rear E-ring [1] and bearing
[2] respectively and remove the trimmer
entrance driven roller [3].
[2]
[3][1] tu1093002
[3] [4]
[5]
[6]
[2]
[7][1][6] tu1093003
[3]
[1] [2]tu1093004
TMG-3 Ver.1.0 Sep 2003 TRIMMER
1-195
I D
IS./
AS
SE
MB
LY
9. Remove 4 hexagon socket head bolts [1] and
remove the trimmer knife /U [3] holding the
replacing handle [2] at 2 positions.
Note:
• When removing the trimmer knife /U [3], be
sure to hold the replacing handle [2]. Never
touch the knife blade.
• Be careful not to drop the trimmer knife /U or
hit it against some object; its edge may be
nicked.
10. After pulling down the conveyance guide plate
[1], insert a screw (M4 x 16 or more) or the like
[2] into the stopper hole [3] to avoid the convey-
ance guide plate [1] from returning to the origi-
nal position.
Note:
• Do not remove 2 screws [4] and 1 screw [5]
that should not be removed.
[1]
[2]
[3] tu1093005
tu1093006[3]
[1]
[2]
[4]
[5]
TRIMMER TMG-3 Ver.1.0 Sep 2003
1-196
I D
IS./
AS
SE
MB
LY
11. Remove 4 hexagon socket head bolts [1] and
remove the trimmer knife /L [2] holding the front
fixture [3] and inner corner [4].
Note:
• Never touch the blade of the trimmer knife /L
[2].
• Be careful not to drop the trimmer knife /L or
hit it against some hard object; its edge may
be nicked.
• When installing, align the bottom of the trim-
mer knife /L [2] with the hexagon socket head
bolt [5] and insert into the guide pin [6].
12. Reinstall the above parts following the removal
steps in reverse.
[5]
[3]
[6]
[1]
[2] [4]
tu1093007
CF5001 Field Service Ver.1.0 Sep 2003 HOW TO USE THE ADJUSTMENT SECTION
2-1
II A
DJ
US
TM
EN
T
II ADJUSTMENT
1. HOW TO USE THE ADJUSTMENT SECTION
1.1 Composition
This part "Adjustment" describes items to be
adjusted and their method of adjustment that are
required by this machine and gives detailed expla-
nations.
A. Checking before starting work
When conducting claims in the field, it is necessary
to check in advance the following:
1. Are the power source and voltage secured in
accordance with the specifications?
2. Is the power source properly grounded?
3. Is any equipment that consumes repeatedly a
lot of electricity connected to the same power
source? (e.g.: Electric noise sources such as
elevator and air conditioner)
4. Are environmental conditions suitable for the
machine?
• High temperature and high humidity, direct sun-light, ventilation, etc.
• Levelness of the location on which the machineis installed.
5. Does the cause of poor images lie in the original
itself?
6. Is density selected properly?
7. Is the original glass stained?
8. Is proper paper used for copy?
9. Are copy materials replaced with new ones at
their life? (e.g.: Developer, drum, cleaning blade,
etc.)
10. Is toner filled?
B. Checkpoints when conducting on-site ser-
vice
Due attention should be paid to the following when
repairing the machine.
1. In this machine, when the reset switch (SW1) is
turned off, only one side of the AC line is shut
off. So, be sure to unplug the power cord from
the power outlet. Also, when operating the
machine with the power supplied, be careful of
the scan of the exposure unit and be sure not to
get caught by the gear.
2. The fixing section may be very hot. Be careful
not to get burnt when handling it.
3. The developing unit is strongly magnetized. Be
careful not to bring a watch and instrument near
to the unit.
4. Be careful not to damage the drum with a tool.
5. Be careful not to touch IC directly with bare
hands.
2. ADJUSTMENTS WHEN REPLACING PARTS
Adjustments and setting are required when there
occurs a claim for poor image quality. However,
these adjustments (including checking) and setting
are also required when a part is replaced with a new
one.
[How to use the tables]
Each item represents the following:
1. Mode
Shows which mode is used for adjustments.
"25": 25 mode
"36": 36 mode
"47": 47 mode
2. A circle " " in the table
, ................. : Shows that the order of
priority has been speci-
fied for adjustments
(including checking) and
setting.
(Empty circle) : Shows that adjustments
(including checking) and
setting can be done
independently.
LIST OF ADJUSTMENT ITEMS CF5001 Field Service Ver.1.0 Sep 2003
2-2
II A
DJ
US
TM
EN
T
3. LIST OF ADJUSTMENT ITEMS
• This table shows the list of adjustment itemswhen replacing a part. Items are numbered in" " by the priority if there is any.
*1 After replacing the developer, be sure that you do not make any copies until you have first performedthe L detection adjustment.
*2 When replacing memory board (MB), be sure to replace the developer, 1st transfer roller /Y, M, C, K,and fixing cleaning unit.
*3 When adjust the belt line speed adjustment, be sure to adjust the fixing line speed adjustment.
Adjustment items
Replacement parts
Mod
e
Dru
m c
artr
idge
(dr
um)
/Y, M
, C, K
PM countPM counter resetting
25
PM cycle set
Parts counter Count of special parts
1st transfer roller /Y, M, C, KFixing cleaning unitDeveloper /Y, M, C, KDecurler roller
ISWBoard change mode
Process adjust-ment Drum peculiarity adjustment
Blade setting mode
36
LD bias adjustmentAutomatic gamma adjustment (0) 4Automatic developer chargeL detection initial auto. adjustmentInitial drum rotation 1
Image adjustment
Magnification adjustment
Printer vertical mag. adjustmentPrinter horizontal mag. adjustmentBelt line speed adjustmentFixing line speed adjustment
Timing adjustment
Printer lead edge timing adj.Writing unit skew initial adj.Auto. color registration adj. 2Color registration manual adjustment 3
Image quality adjustment
Scanner gamma adjustment
Printer gamma adjustmentPrinter gamma offset adj.Printer gamma sensor adj.Printer screen gradation adj.
Sharpness adjustment
Image judge adjustmentDot detect adjustmentColor text adjustment
ACS adjustmentOther adjustment FNS stapler position adjustment
CF5001 Field Service Ver.1.0 Sep 2003
2-3
II A
DJ
US
TM
EN
T
• When replacing the overall control board (OACB) due to the OACB being damaged, the memory board(MB) that was installed on the damaged OACB should be used on the new OACB. Contact the servicesection of the authorized distributor if it is considered that the MB is also damaged. Never perform the 47mode - 92 (output).
Dev
elop
er *
1
Tran
sfer
bel
t
Bel
t cle
anin
g bl
ade
1st t
rans
fer
rolle
r /Y
, M, C
, K
Imag
e co
rrec
tion
unit
Cha
rgin
g co
rona
/Y, M
, C, K
Fix
ing
rolle
r /U
, L
Fix
ing
clea
ning
uni
t
Dec
urle
r ro
ller
Writ
e un
it /K
Writ
e un
it /Y
, M, C
Dus
t-pr
oof g
lass
/Y, M
, C, K
CC
D u
nit
Eac
h sc
anne
r m
irror
Exp
osur
e la
mp
(L1)
Orig
inal
gla
ss
Ove
rall
cont
rol b
oard
(O
AC
B)
Pri
nter
con
trol
boa
rd (
PR
CB
)
Imag
e pr
oces
sing
boa
rd (
IPB
)
Ope
ratio
n bo
ard
/1 (
OB
1)
Mem
ory
boar
d (M
B)
*2
Reg
istr
atio
n ro
ller
RA
DF
con
trol
boa
rd (
DF
CB
)
FN
S c
ontr
ol b
oard
(F
NS
CB
)
Sta
pler
uni
t
1
1 1 12 2 2 1
11 2
3 6 2 3 7 7 4 3 1 112
12 1
2*3 3*3 3*3
3 4 4
14 1 5 5 2 1 25 2 6 6 3 2 3
7 6 4 46 5 3 3
4 5 4 2 2
MODE CHANGE MENU CF5001 Field Service Ver.1.0 Sep 2003
2-4
II A
DJ
US
TM
EN
T
4. MODE CHANGE MENU
4.1 Setting method
From this screen, the following modes can be
selected without turning off/on the power.
"1 Basic screen"
"2 36 mode"
"3 25 mode"
"4 Key operator mode"
"5 47 mode"
A. Procedure
1. Turn ON the reset switch (SW1) and the main
switch (SW2).
2. Press the P button and wait until "Enter 4-digit
password to change mode" appears.
3. Input 9272 as the password and press the
START button. (The password is fixed and can-
not be changed.) "Mode changing menu
screen" is displayed.
4. Press any desired key.
5. To return to the "Mode changing menu
screen," press the P button and wait until the
"Mode changing menu screen" appears.
6. After completion of adjustment, press the [Exit]
key to return to the basic screen.
CF5001 Field Service Ver.1.0 Sep 2003 MODE CHANGE MENU
2-5
II A
DJ
US
TM
EN
T
4.2 Display transition of 36 modes
36 mode 1/2
1 Process adjustment2 Image adjustment 3 Image quality adjustment4 Running test mode 5 Test pattern output mode6 Test pattern density setting 7 Finisher adjustment8 List output mode
3-6 Modus / Adjustment mode
1 High voltage adjustment2 Drum peculiarity adjustment 3 Sensor output check4 Exclusive paper setting 5 Recall standard data
Process adjustment mode menu
High voltage adjustment mode menu
1 1st transfer manual adjustment2 2nd transfer manual adjustment3 HV adjustment (Separation-AC)4 HV adjustment (Separation-DC) 5 Pre-transfer guide HV check
Drum peculiarity adjustment mode menu
1 Blade setting mode2 Automatic drum potential adjustment x3 Automatic gamma adjustment4 LD bias adjustment5 Automatic developer charge 6 L detect initial automatic adjustment 7 Initial drun rotation
1 Magnification adjustment2 Timing adjustment 3 EDH adjustment4 Centering adjustment5 Non-image area erase check 6 Recall standerd data
Image adjustment mode menu
Magnification adjustment mode menu
Timing adjustment mode menu
1 Printer restart timing adjustment2 Printer resist loop adjustment3 Printer pre-resist adjustment4 Printer lead edge timing adjustment5 Scanner restart timing adjustment6 EDH restart timing adjustment7 EDH resist loop adjustment
1 EDH density adjustment2 EDH original size adjustment3 EDH Incline offset adjustment
EDH adjustment mode menu
1 Printer centring adjustment2 Scanner centring adjustment3 EDH centring adjustment
Centering adjustment mode menu
x : Factory exclusive use. Service is not used.
1 Printer drum clock adjustment2 Printer horizontal adjustment3 Scanner drum clock adjustment 4 EDH drum clock adjustment
1 Surface potential sensor output2 MAX. density sensor output3 Gamma sensor output
Sensor output check mode menu
MODE CHANGE MENU CF5001 Field Service Ver.1.0 Sep 2003
2-6
II A
DJ
US
TM
EN
T
36 mode 2/2
1 Process adjustment2 Image adjustment 3 Image quality adjustment4 Running test mode 5 Test pattern output mode6 Test pattern density setting 7 Finisher adjustment8 List output mode
3-6 Modus / Adjustment mode
1 Intermittent copy mode2 Paperless running mode3 Paperless mode4 Paperless endless mode 5 Running mode
Running test mode menu
Finisher adjustment mode menu
1 Stitch & Fold stopper adjustment2 Fold stopper adjustment3 Cover sheet tray size adjustment4 Trimming stopper adjustment5 Punch adjustment6 Three Folding position adjustment 7 2 Positions staple pitch adjustm.
1 Machine management list 12 Adjustment data list3 Page fill data list 4 Machine management list 2 5 Parameter list 6 Memory dump list 7 Font pattern
List output mode menu
1 Punch vertical position adjustment2 Punch horizontal position adjustment3 Punch resist loop adjustment
Punch adjustment mode menu
Image quality adjustment mode menu
1 Scanner gamma adjustment2 Printer gamma adjustment3 Sharpness adjustment4 Contrast adjustment5 Image judge adjustment6 ACS adjustment 7 Density adjustment 8 Tone adjustment9 Recall standard data
1 Printer gamma offset adjustment2 Printer gamma sensor adjustment3 Printer screen gradation adjustment
Printer gamma adjustment mode menu
1 Dot detect adjustment2 Color text adjustment 3 Dot/Text area adjustment
Image judge adjustment mode menu
1 AE adjustment2 Copy density adjustment 3 Background adjustment
Density adjustment mode menu
1 Red adjustment2 Green adjustment 3 Blue adjustment
Tone adjustment mode menu
CF5001 Field Service Ver.1.0 Sep 2003 MODE CHANGE MENU
2-7
II A
DJ
US
TM
EN
T
4.3 Display transition of 25 modes
2-5 Modus /Memory setting mode
10 RD mode setting11 ISW 12 Setting date input 13 Board change mode
1 Software SW setting2 Paper size setting3 PM count4 Data collection5 Parts counter6 Password setting7 Telephone number setting8 M/C serial number setting9 Indication of ROM version
1 Total count of each setting2 Copy count of each paper size3 Print count of each paper size4 RADF count5 Page fill of each section6 JAM date of time series 7 JAM count8 Count of each copy mode9 SC count
Collecting data mode menu
1 Count of special parts 2 Count of each parts
Copy count mode menu
10 JAM count of each section11 SC count of each section
1 Count reset 2 Change setting
PM count mode menu
1 Key operator password2 E.K.C. master key cord *1 3 Weekly timer password
Password setting mode menu
1 Main body2 Option tray3 RADF4 Finisher
M/C serial number setting menu
*1 Name of systemE.K.C : Except USA areaE.C.M : USA area only
MODE CHANGE MENU CF5001 Field Service Ver.1.0 Sep 2003
2-8
II A
DJ
US
TM
EN
T
4.4 Display transition of Key Operation modes
Key Operation mode
Key operator mode menu
10 Control panel adjustment11 Tray auto select setting12 Power save setting13 Memory switch setting 14 Machine management list print15 * Not use Minolta!16 Finisher adjustment17 Front & Back Density setting18 Scanner transmission setting19 Non-image area erase setting20 AES adjustment 21 Execute adjust operation 22 Magnification adjustment23 Timing adjustment 24 Centring adjustment 25 Printer gamma sensor adj.
1 System initial setting2 Copier initial setting 3 User setting mode4 E.K.C function setting *15 Lock / delete program memory6 Paper type / Special size set7 Panel contrast / Key sound adj. 8 Key operator data setting9 Weekly timer
1 Date & Time setting2 Language select setting3 IP address setting / Tandem4 E-mail transmission setting
System initial setting menu
Finisher adjustment mode menu
1 Stitch & Fold stopper adjustment2 Fold stopper adjustment3 Trim stopper adjustment4 Punch adjustment5 Z-Fold position adjustment6 2-Positions staple pitch adjustment 7 Finisher output limit
1 Weekly timer ON/OFF setting2 Timer setting3 Timer action ON/OFF setting4 Lunch hour off setting5 Timer interrupt password set
Weekly timer setting menu
1 Job memory list2 User management list3 E.K.C. management list4 Font pattern list
Management list print mode menu
1 Printer vertical mag. adj.2 Printer horizontal mag. adj. 3 Scanner vertical mag. adj.
Magnification mode menu
1 Printer lead edge timing adj.2 Printer registration loop adj.3 Printer pre-registration adj.4 Printer erasure amount adj.5 Scanner re-start timing adj.6 RADF registration loop adj.
Timing adjustment mode menu
1 Printer centring adjustment 2 Scanner centring adjustment 3 RADF centring adjustment
Centring adjustment mode menu
> Next page
*1 Name of systemE.K.C : Except USA areaE.C.M : USA area only
CF5001 Field Service Ver.1.0 Sep 2003 MODE CHANGE MENU
2-9
II A
DJ
US
TM
EN
T
Key Operation mode
No.13 Memory Switch Setting
10 Platen APS11 RADF APS12 Platen AMS13 RADF AMS14 Select tray when APS cancel15 Platen original size detect16 RADF original size detect17 Platen original size detect (SMALL)18 Rotation19 Staple mode reset function20 Job offset operating21 Continuation print22 Key click sound23 1 Shot indication time24 Power save screen25 Start Key latch function26 Stop Key function27 Auto select of booklet copy28 E.K.C. Password *129 Arrow key change [Image shift]30 An interruption suspended way
1 Auto reset timer2 Auto reset key function3 RADF-Original effect4 Job memory auto recall -30-5 Finisher mode by Full-Auto6 Initial by Key Counter insert7 Erasure outside area of original8 RADF frame erasure selection9 Automatic tray switching
No15 - Memory switch menu
31 E.K.C. password input timing *132 Sound (No paper, toner/ JAM)33 Reserve copy function34 Change page no. Pos. (booklet)35 Trimmer (STD./ Non STD size)36 Timer which prohibits print37 Bookmark function38 Delete of overlay image39 Orig. direction/ Binding mode40 Screen (Line Screen)41 Screen (Dot Screen)42 Side 2 drum clock adjust mode 43 Screen (Full Colour-Text/ Photo) 44 Screen (Full Colour-Photo) 45 Screen (Monochrome-Text/ Photo) 46 Screen (Monochrome-Photo) 47 Screen (Mono Colour-Text/ Photo) 48 Screen (Mono Colour-Photo) 49 Colour gamut
*1 Name of systemE.K.C : Except USA areaE.C.M : USA area only
CHECKING BY THE P FUNCTION CF5001 Field Service Ver.1.0 Sep 2003
2-10
II A
DJ
US
TM
EN
T
5.CHECKING BY THE P FUNCTION
The P function is a function that allows you to con-
firm the following various numeric values by using
the P button.
[1] Total counter
[2] Full color counter
[3] Mono color counter
[4] Monochrome counter
[5] Copier counter
[6] Printer counter
5.1 Checking method of theP function
A. Procedure
1. Turn ON the reset switch (SW1) and the main
switch (SW2).
2. Press the P button.
3. "Counter list screen" appears.
4. Press the ! button in "Counter list screen," and
the PM counter is displayed.
5. To output the counter value list, press the
[Counter list output] key.
6. Pressing the [Exit] key, or the stop or clear but-
ton returns to the basic screen.
CF5001 Field Service Ver.1.0 Sep 2003 25 MODE
2-11
II A
DJ
US
TM
EN
T
6. 25 MODE
6.1 List of adjustment items for25 mode
Adjustment item menu Remarks
1. Software SW setting See the "List of software DIPSW".
2. Paper size setting LCT paper size setting
3. PM count 1. Count reset
2. Change setting
4. Data collection 1. Total count of each paper setting
2. Copy count of each paper size
3. Print count of each paper size
4. RADF count
5. Page fill of each section
6. JAM data of time series
7. JAM count
8. Count of each copy mode
9. SC count
10. JAM count of each section
11. SC count of each section
5.Parts counter1. Count of special parts
2. Count of each parts
6. Password setting 1. Key operator password 4 digits
2. E.K.C. master key code 8 digits
3. Weekly timer password 4 digits
7.Telephone number setting1. Service centre Telephone number 16 digits
2. Service centre FAX number 16 digits
8. M/C serial number setting 1. Main body
2. Option tray
3. RADF
4. Finisher
9. Indication of ROM version
10. RD mode setting
11. ISW
12. Setting date input
13. Board change mode
25 MODE CF5001 Field Service Ver.1.0 Sep 2003
2-12
II A
DJ
US
TM
EN
T
6.2 Setting method
This machine is provided with the 25 mode as an
adjustment method. This mode is used when the
memory board (MB) is rewritten or various settings
are made.
A. Procedure
6.3 Setting software DIPSW
A. Setting method
The software DIPSW is set on "Software SW setting
screen."
Note:
• Please note that DIPSW bits are written into
the memory board (MB) each time a change is
made.
B. Meaning of the values displayed on the
screen
C. Procedure
• For each function of the DIPSW, see "List of soft-ware DIPSW."
1. Turn OFF the main switch (SW2) with the reset
switch (SW1) left ON.
2. While pressing the numeric keys 2 and 5 at the
same time, turn on the SW2. the "25 mode
menu screen" appears.
At this point, the machine enters the 25 mode
with normal copy operations unavailable.
3. Press the item keys on the liquid crystal dis-
play (LCD). A setting screen corresponding to
each item appears.
4. Confirm the input data on the setting screen of
each item.
5. Turn off the SW2 to release the 25 mode.
6. New data will be effective after restarting.
[1] DIPSW number
[2] Bit number (0 to 7)
[3] Bit data : 1:ON, 0:OFF
[4] 8-bit switch values in indicated in hexadeci-mals from 00 to FF.
1. Enter the 25 mode.
2. "25 mode menu screen"
Press the [1. Software SW setting] key.
3. "Software SW setting screen"
Select a DIPSW number by using the arrow
key on the left.
4. Select a bit number of the DIPSW by using the
arrow key on the right.
5. Select the ON (1) or OFF (0) of the DIPSW by
using the [ON] or [OFF] key.
6. Press the [PREVIOUS SCREEN] key to return
to the "25 mode menu screen".
8050fs1026e[2][1] [3] [4]
CF5001 Field Service Ver.1.0 Sep 2003 25 MODE
2-13
II A
DJ
US
TM
EN
T
List of software DIPSW
Note:
• Be sure not to change bits with no particular reference made of the function.
DIPSW
No.
Bit Functions 0 1 Default values
Japan Inch Metric
DIPSW1 0 — — — 1 1 1
1 — — — 0 0 0
2 Print stop method after toner sup-ply or waste toner full display
*1 *1 1 1 1
3 *1 *1 0 0 0
4 Prohibition of printing when the PM count is reached
Not prohibited Prohibited 0 0 0
5 Print number setting until printing is prohibited after PM is displayed
*2 *2 0 0 0
6 *2 *2 0 0 0
7 *2 *2 0 0 0
DIPSW2 0 Hard disk connection Disconnected Connected 0 0 0
1 — — — 0 0 0
2 — — — 0 0 0
3 — — — 0 0 0
4 Control of the LT paper feed assist fan
*3 *3 0 0 0
5 *3 *3 0 0 0
6 Switchover of the rotational speed of the polygon motor
*4 *4 1 1 1
7 *4 *4 0 0 0
DIPSW3 0 — — — 0 0 0
1 SC latch (SC34/35/36) Unlatched Latched 0 0 0
2 Password request for 25, 36, 47 mode (password: 9272)
Not requested Requested 0 0 0
3 — — — 0 0 0
4 — — — 0 0 0
5 — — — 0 0 0
6 47 mode 15-01, 02 counter clear Disabled Enabled 0 0 0
7 — — — 0 0 0
DIPSW4 0 — — — 0 0 0
1 — — — 0 0 0
2 — — — 0 1 0
3 — — — 0 0 1
4 Recovery from removal of the key counter
Disabled Enabled 0 1 0
5 APS when change magnification Enabled Disabled 0 1 0
6 Change of fixed magnifications set-ting in key operator mode
Enabled Disabled 1 0 0
7 Large size paper counting method (Other than PM counter)
Count as 1 Count as 2 0 0 0
25 MODE CF5001 Field Service Ver.1.0 Sep 2003
2-14
II A
DJ
US
TM
EN
T
DIPSW5 0 — — — 0 0 0
1 — — — 0 0 0
2 — — — 0 0 0
3 — — — 0 0 0
4 — — — 0 0 0
5 Change of the size of the large size paper
B4, 8.5 x 14 or
larger
A3, 11 x 17 or
larger
0 0 0
6 — — — 0 0 0
7 — — — 0 0 0
DIPSW6 0 — — — 0 0 0
1 — — — 0 0 0
2 — — — 0 0 0
3 — — — 0 0 0
4 — — — 0 0 0
5 — — — 0 0 0
6 — — — 0 0 0
7 — — — 0 0 0
DIPSW7 0 — — — 0 0 0
1 — — — 0 0 0
2 — — — 0 0 0
3 — — — 0 0 0
4 — — — 0 0 0
5 — — — 0 0 0
6 — — — 0 0 0
7 — — — 0 0 0
DIPSW8 0 — — — 0 0 0
1 — — — 0 0 0
2 — — — 0 0 0
3 — — — 0 0 0
4 — — — 0 0 0
5 — — — 0 0 0
6 Large size paper PM counting method
Count as 1 Count as 2 0 0 0
7 — — — 0 0 0
DIPSW9 0 Operation when the key counter is removed (copier)
Same as
the stop button
Immediate stop
jam
0 0 0
1 Operation when the key counter is removed (IP)
Ignored Same as
DIPSW9-0
0 0 0
2 Message switchover *5 *5 0 0 0
3 *5 *5 0 0 0
4 Copy quantity limit selection *6 *6 0 0 0
5 *6 *6 0 0 0
6 *6 *6 0 0 0
7 *6 *6 0 0 0
DIPSW
No.
Bit Functions 0 1 Default values
Japan Inch Metric
CF5001 Field Service Ver.1.0 Sep 2003 25 MODE
2-15
II A
DJ
US
TM
EN
T
DIPSW10 0 Page memory reservation at power on
No reservation 94MB (177MB when Expan-sion memory is installed)
0 0 0
1 — — — 0 0 0
2 — — — 0 0 0
3 — — — 0 0 0
4 — — — 0 0 0
5 — — — 0 0 0
6 — — — 0 0 0
7 — — — 0 0 0
DIPSW11 0 — — — 0 0 0
1 — — — 0 0 0
2 — — — 0 0 0
3 — — — 0 0 0
4 Filter for jagged edges on slanting lines
Disabled Enabled 0 0 0
5 — — — 0 0 0
6 — — — 0 0 0
7 Jam code display Disabled Enabled 0 0 0
DIPSW12 0 — — — 0 0 0
1 Adjustment of the image quality in the key operator mode
Disabled Enabled 0 0 0
2 — — — 0 0 0
3 — — — 0 0 0
4 — — — 0 0 0
5 — — — 0 0 0
6 Black text screen with overlay func-tion
*7 Screen *7 Nonscreen 0 0 0
7 — — — 0 0 0
DIPSW13 0 Size detection switchover 1 A5, A4R 5.5 x 8.5, 8.5x11R 0 1 0
1 Size detection switchover 2 A6R Post card 1 0 0
2 Size detection switchover 3 8.5 x 14 F4 0 0 1
3 Size detection switchover 4 *8 *8 0 0 0
4 *8 *8 0 1 0
5 F4 size setting *9 *9 0 0 0
6 *9 *9 0 0 0
7 — — — 0 0 0
DIPSW
No.
Bit Functions 0 1 Default values
Japan Inch Metric
25 MODE CF5001 Field Service Ver.1.0 Sep 2003
2-16
II A
DJ
US
TM
EN
T
DIPSW14 0 Size detection switchover 5 (main body)
B4, 11 x 17 / B5,
8.5 x 11 / B5R
8K / 16K / 16KR 0 0 0
1 — — — 0 0 0
2 — — — 0 0 0
3 Size detection switchover 5 (by-pass)
B4, 11 x 17 / B5,
8.5 x 11 / B5R
8K / 16K / 16KR 0 0 0
4 Size detection switchover 5 (platen)
B4, 11 x 17 / B5,
8.5 x 11/B5R
8K / 16K / 16KR 0 0 0
5 Size detection switchover 5 (ADF) B4, 11 x 17 / B5,
8.5 x 11 / B5R
8K/16K / 16KR 0 0 0
6 Size detection switchover 5 (PI) B4, 11 x 17 / B5,
8.5 x 11 / B5R
8K / 16K / 16KR 0 0 0
7 0 0 0
DIPSW15 0 Selection of the RD mode type Telephone line E-mail 0 0 0
1 — — — 0 0 0
2 — — — 0 0 0
3 FNS alarm stop method *10 *10 0 0 0
4 *10 *10 0 0 0
5 RD mode connection Disconnected Connected 0 0 0
6 — — — 0 0 0
7 — — — 0 0 0
DIPSW16 0 — — — 0 0 0
1 Recognizing the copy reservation function/coin vendor
Copy reservation
function enabled
Coin vendor disabled
Copy reservation
function prohibited
Coin vendor enabled
0 0 0
2 Coin vendor type Parallel
communication
Serial
communication
0 0 0
3 Counting of the key counter in the printer mode (IP)
Not counted Counted 0 0 0
4 Display of the total count start date (P function)
Displayed Not displayed 0 0 0
5 — — — 0 0 0
6 — — — 0 0 0
7 NIC selection for E-Mail RD-mode IP NIC Copier NIC 0 0 0
DIPSW17 0 Summer time setting *11 *11 0 0 0
1 *11 *11 1 1 1
2 *11 *11 1 1 1
3 *11 *11 0 0 0
4 Density selection at scanning the tabed paper
*12 *12 0 0 0
5 *12 *12 0 0 0
6 *12 *12 0 0 0
7 — — — 0 0 0
DIPSW
No.
Bit Functions 0 1 Default values
Japan Inch Metric
CF5001 Field Service Ver.1.0 Sep 2003 25 MODE
2-17
II A
DJ
US
TM
EN
T
DIPSW18 0 Tray 1 faulty part isolation Normal Unavailable 0 0 0
1 Tray 2 faulty part isolation Normal Unavailable 0 0 0
2 Tray 3 faulty part isolation Normal Unavailable 0 0 0
3 Tray 4 (LCT) faulty part isolation Normal Unavailable 0 0 0
4 — — — 0 0 0
5 Folding, stitch & folding, tri-fold, trimmer faulty part isolation
Normal Unavailable 0 0 0
6 PI faulty part isolation Normal Unavailable 0 0 0
7 HDD faulty part isolation Normal Unavailable 0 0 0
DIPSW19 0 — — — 0 0 1
1 Fixing temperature selection *13 *13 1 1 1
2 *13 *13 1 1 1
3 *13 *13 0 0 0
4 — — — 0 0 0
5 PK faulty part isolation Normal Unavailable 0 0 0
6 Default resolution of the IP scanner *14 *14 0 0 0
7 *14 *14 0 0 0
DIPSW20 0 Group stapling mode Disabled Enabled 0 0 0
1 Image scanning area with shift function
*15 Normal * 15 Original priority 0 0 0
2 Selection of the stamped page number
Based on
original
Based on
transfer paper
0 0 0
3 Keyboard layout ABC layout QWERTY layout 0 0 0
4 — — — 0 0 0
5 — — — 0 0 0
6 — — — 0 0 0
7 — — — 0 0 0
DIPSW21 0 — — — 0 0 0
1 LCT size setting in the key operator mode
Disabled Enabled 1 1 1
2 Display of the original count Displayed Not displayed 0 0 0
3 — — — 0 0 0
4 — — — 0 0 0
5 — — — 0 0 0
6 Selection of the index paper with APS
Disabled Enabled 0 0 0
7 — — — 0 0 0
DIPSW
No.
Bit Functions 0 1 Default values
Japan Inch Metric
25 MODE CF5001 Field Service Ver.1.0 Sep 2003
2-18
II A
DJ
US
TM
EN
T
DIPSW22 0 IP address setting Disabled Enabled 1 1 1
1 Number of punch holes *16 *16 0 1 0
2 *16 *16 0 0 1
3 Image reference position for the non-standard size original
Based on user
selection
Based on APS at
ADF
0 0 0
4 Function of the power save button Enabled Disabled 0 0 0
5 — — — 0 0 0
6 Operation when FNS runs out of staple
Staple supply
request
Selecting between staple supply or staple release
0 0 0
7 — — — 0 0 0
DIPSW23 0 — — — 0 0 0
1 Output when EKC (ECM) user ID is unmatched (IP)
Enabled (counted as the other user)
Disabled (regis-tered in JOB list)
0 0 0
2 Precision of the color registration automatic correction (periodical correction)
*17 Normal *17 Fine 0 0 0
3 Control of the color registration automatic correction (periodical correction)
*18 Enabled *18 Disabled 0 0 0
4 Main scan correction of the color registration automatic correction (periodic correction)
*19 Enabled *19 Disabled 0 0 0
5 IP gamma correction *20 Enabled *20 Disabled 0 0 0
6 Job memory registration of the special paper setting on the by-pass tray
Disabled Enabled 0 0 0
7 — — — 0 0 0
DIPSW24 0 — — — 0 0 0
1 Vs/Vp switch control *21 Disabled *21 Enabled 0 0 0
2 Image stabilization control timing *22 *22 0 0 0
3 *22 *22 1 1 1
4 — — — 0 0 0
5 — — — 0 0 0
6 — — — 0 0 0
7 — — — 0 0 0
DIPSW25 0 — — — 0 0 0
1 — — — 0 0 0
2 — — — 0 0 0
3 Color registration correction control *23 *23 0 0 0
4 *23 *23 0 0 0
5 Color registration fine correction Yes No 0 0 0
6 — — — 0 0 0
7 De-humid heater ON OFF 0 0 0
DIPSW
No.
Bit Functions 0 1 Default values
Japan Inch Metric
CF5001 Field Service Ver.1.0 Sep 2003 25 MODE
2-19
II A
DJ
US
TM
EN
T
DIPSW26 0 — — — 0 0 0
1 — — — 0 0 0
2 — — — 0 0 0
3 — — — 0 0 0
4 — — — 0 0 0
5 — — — 0 0 0
6 — — — 0 0 0
7 — — — 0 0 0
DIPSW27 0 — — — 0 0 0
1 — — — 0 0 0
2 — — — 0 0 0
3 — — — 0 0 0
4 — — — 0 0 0
5 — — — 0 0 0
6 — — — 0 0 0
7 — — — 0 0 0
DIPSW28 0 — — — 0 0 0
1 — — — 0 0 0
2 Toner refresh mode (at job end) *24 Disabled *24 Enabled 0 0 0
3 Toner refresh mode (periodical) *24 Disabled *24 Enabled 0 0 0
4 Printer gamma offset adjustment *25 Only high
light
*25 Whole area 0 0 0
5 PK punch mode restriction Enabled Disabled 0 0 0
6 — — — 0 0 0
7 Toner refresh mode switchover(Key operator mode)
*26 Y,M,C,K *26 M,C 1 1 1
DIPSW29 0 — — — 0 0 0
1 — — — 0 0 0
2 — — — 0 0 0
3 Include of proof copy to the set copy quantity
Not included Included 0 0 0
4 — — — 0 0 0
5 — — — 0 0 0
6 — — — 0 0 0
7 — — — 0 0 0
DIPSW30 0 — — — 0 0 0
1 Restriction of the display of the 25 mode data correction
Restricted Not restricted 0 0 0
2 — — — 0 0 0
3 — — — 1 1 1
4 — — — 0 0 0
5 — — — 0 0 0
6 — — — 0 0 0
7 — — — 0 0 0
DIPSW
No.
Bit Functions 0 1 Default values
Japan Inch Metric
25 MODE CF5001 Field Service Ver.1.0 Sep 2003
2-20
II A
DJ
US
TM
EN
T
*1 Print stop method after toner supply or wastetoner full display
*2 Print number setting until printing is prohibitedafter PM is displayed
*3 Control of the LT paper feed assist fan
*4 Switchover of the rotational speed of the poly-gon motor
5 Message switchover
*6 Copy quantity limit selection
DIPSW31 0 — — — 1 1 1
1 — — — 0 0 0
2 — — — 0 0 0
3 — — — 0 0 0
4 — — — 0 0 0
5 — — — 0 0 0
6 — — — 0 0 0
7 — — — 0 0 0
DIPSW
No.
Bit Functions 0 1 Default values
Japan Inch Metric
Mode 1-3 1-2
Stops after ejecting paper in the machine
0 0
Stops at a break between copy set
0 1
Stops at the end of the current job
1 0
Does not stop 1 1
Mode 1-7 1-6 1-5
1,000 prints 0 0 0
2,000 prints 0 0 1
3,000 prints 0 1 0
4,000 prints 1 1 0
5,000 prints 0 0 1
1,000 prints 1 0 1
1,000 prints 0 1 1
1,000 prints 1 1 1
Mode 2-5 2-4
ON for coated paper only 0 0
ON for all types of paper 0 1
ON for all types of paper 1 0
OFF at all times 1 1
Mode 2-7 2-6
1/1 speed 0 0
1/1 speed 0 1
2/3 speed 1 0
1/2 speed 1 1
Mode 9-3 9-2
Please insert key counter 0 0
Please insert copy card 0 1
Please insert coin 1 0
Please insert key counter 1 1
Mode 9-7 9-6 9-5 9-4
No limit 0 0 0 0
1 sheet 0 0 0 1
3 sheets 0 0 1 0
5 sheets 0 0 1 1
9 sheets 0 1 0 0
10 sheets 0 1 0 1
20 sheets 0 1 1 0
30 sheets 0 1 1 1
50 sheets 1 0 0 0
99 sheets 1 0 0 1
No limit 1 0 1 0
No limit 1 0 1 1
No limit 1 1 0 0
No limit 1 1 1 0
No limit 1 1 1 1
CF5001 Field Service Ver.1.0 Sep 2003 25 MODE
2-21
II A
DJ
US
TM
EN
T
*7 Black text screen with overlay functionWhen using the overlay of the applied func-tion, the image creation method of black char-acters is switched between the error diffusionand the screen.
*8 Size detection switchover 4
*9 F4 size setting
*10 FNS alarm stop method
This setting is used to determine when to stop
if a FNS full alarm is detected.
Functions detected are;
Lower limit of the FNS tray, the number of the
FNS trays, FNS booklet tray, PK punch
scraps, TU scraps and TU stacker
*11 Summer time setting
*12 Density selection when scanning the tabed
paper
Mode 12-6
Screen 0
Error diffusion 1
Mode 13-4 13-3
A5R 0 0
B6R 0 1
5.5 x 8.5R 1 0
— 1 1
Mode 13-6 13-5
8 x 13 0 0
8.25 x 13 0 1
8.125 x 13.25 1 0
8.5 x 13 1 1
Mode 15-4 15-3
Stops immediately after detection
0 0
Stops at a break between copy set after detection
0 1
Does not stop while in printing
1 0
Does not stop while in printing
1 1
Mode 17-3 17-2 17-1 17-0
0 minute 0 0 0 0
10 minutes 0 0 0 1
20 minutes 0 0 1 0
30 minutes 0 0 1 1
40 minutes 0 1 0 0
50 minutes 0 1 0 1
60 minutes 0 1 1 0
70 minutes 0 1 1 1
80 minutes 1 0 0 0
90 minutes 1 0 0 1
100 minutes 1 0 1 0
110 minutes 1 0 1 1
120 minutes 1 1 0 0
130 minutes 1 1 0 1
140 minutes 1 1 1 0
150 minutes 1 1 1 1
Mode 17-6 17-5 17-4
80 0 0 0
40 (most lighter) 0 0 1
60 0 1 0
100 0 1 1
120 1 0 0
160 1 0 1
200 1 1 0
255 (most darker) 1 1 1
25 MODE CF5001 Field Service Ver.1.0 Sep 2003
2-22
II A
DJ
US
TM
EN
T
*13 Fixing temperature selection
Temperature up: Decrease a insufficient
fixing or fixing winding
jam
Temperature down: Decrease paper exit curl-
ing or waving
*14 Default resolution of the IP scanner
*15 Image scanning area with shift functionNormal: Compare the original size and the
transfer paper size and the smaller
one is to be the image area.
Original priority:
Original size is to be the image
area.
*16 Number of punch holes
*17 Precision of the color registration automaticcorrection (periodical correction)"Fine" is used when the precision of the colorregistration correction that is periodically con-ducted is increased with the amount of errorreduced. However, it takes about 2 minuteslonger for correction.
*18 Color registration auto correction control (peri-odical correction)Down time while in the continuous printing isreduced with the color registration correctionomitted that is periodically performed (colorregistration correction at power ON is notomitted).
*19 Main scan correction of the color registrationauto correction (periodical correction)The color registration corrections, in the mainscanning direction that are periodically per-formed can be omitted. This is used temporar-ily when there is a registration error along themain scan as a result of a trouble around thetransfer belt unit, or when separating faultypoints.
*20 IP gamma correctionIn order to separate defective items whenthere is poor images sent from IP. The gammacorrection can be omitted. The gamma correc-tion table is stored in the IP.
Mode 19-3 19-2 19-1
Upper roller, lower roller: -30°C
0 0 0
Upper roller, lower roller: -20°C
0 0 1
Upper roller, lower roller: -10°C
0 1 0
Standard 0 1 1
Upper roller, lower roller: +10°C
1 0 0
Upper roller: +10°CLower roller: +20°C
1 0 1
Standard 0 1 1
— 1 1 1
Mode 19-7 19-6
400dpi 0 0
600 dpi 0 1
200 dpi 1 0
300 dpi 1 1
Mode 20-1
Normal 0
Original priority 1
Mode 22-2 22-1
2 holes (for Japan) 0 0
3 holes (for inch area) 0 1
4 holes (for metric area) 1 0
— 1 1
Mode 23-2
Normal 0
Fine 1
Mode 23-3
Enabled 0
Disabled 1
Mode 23-4
Enabled 0
Disabled 1
Mode 23-5
Enabled 0
Disabled 1
CF5001 Field Service Ver.1.0 Sep 2003 25 MODE
2-23
II A
DJ
US
TM
EN
T
*21 Vs/Vp switch controlThis Vs/Vp switch control is used when thereis an image erasure around a solid image inthe half-tone section in early stage after thechange of developer.
*22 Image stabilization control timingCorrection made:
Correction is performed by sus-
pending print at specified print.
No correction made:
Correction is omitted temporarily to
reduce down time when the
machine cannot be used with SC
due to the malfunction of the drum
potential sensor or gamma sensor.
No correction while in printing:
Correction that is performed by
suspending print at every specified
print is performed after the print job
to reduce down time.
*23 Color registration correction controlCorrection made:
Correction is performed by sus-
pending print at specified print.
No correction made:
Correction is omitted temporarily to
reduce down time when the
machine cannot be used with SC
due to malfunctions around the
color registration sensor.
No correction while in printing:
Correction that is performed by sus-
pending print at every specified
print is performed after the print job
to reduce down time.
Mode 24-1
Disabled 0
Enabled 1
Mode 24-3 24-2
Correction made 0 0
Correction not made 0 1
No correction while in printing
1 0
— 1 1
Mode 25-4 25-3
Correction made 0 0
Correction not made 0 1
No correction while in printing
1 0
— 1 1
25 MODE CF5001 Field Service Ver.1.0 Sep 2003
2-24
II A
DJ
US
TM
EN
T
*24 Toner refresh mode (at Job end)Toner refresh mode (periodical)When printing coverage is low (5% or less ofeach color), rough image, white spot or tonerspillage tend to occur due to toner deteriora-tion. The effective measure against these are asfollows.•Toner refresh mode in key operator mode
It is performed by a user's decision when aproblem occurs. Amount of toner equivalent of 8-sheet A3solid is developed for all Y, M, C, K. (It needs to change setting by DIPSW 28-7)
•DIPSW 28-2For the colors of which print coverage ofthe previous job is 5% or less (convert intoA4), solid toner of the difference amountfrom the 5% is developed to consumetoner.
•PIPSW 28-3Check the average print coverage for eachcolor at prescribed distance of developingsleeve drive developes the toner amountequivalent of 8-sheet A3 solid for the colorof which the average print coverage is 5%or less (convert into A4).
*25 Printer gamma offset adjustmentChange the area in which the printer gammaoffset of the 36 mode can be adjusted.0: High light area only
1: Possible in whole area
*26 Toner refresh mode switchover Switch over the toner refresh mode function inthe key operator mode.0: Amount of toner equivalent of 8 sheets A3
solid is developed for all Y, M, C and K to
consume toner.
•This setting is effective for rough image,white spot and toner spillage.
•This setting is not so effective for whiteline (paper feeding direction).
1: Amount of toner equivalent of 10 sheets
A3 half-tone is developed for M and C to
consume toner.
•This setting is effective for white line(paper feeding direction).
•This setting is effective for rough image,white spot and toner spillage formagenta and cyan only. (It has noeffect for yellow and black.)
Mode 28-2
Disabled 0
Enabled 1
Mode 28-3
Disabled 0
Enabled 1
Mode 28-4
High light area only 0
Possible in whole area 1
Mode 28-7
Y,M,C,K 0
M,C 1
CF5001 Field Service Ver.1.0 Sep 2003 25 MODE
2-25
II A
DJ
US
TM
EN
T
6.4 Paper size setting
Conduct this setting when changing the paper size
of the LCT.
The paper size is available in the standard size,
non-standard size and wide paper.
6.4.1 Standard size setting
A. Procedure
6.4.2 Non-standard size setting
A. Procedure
6.4.3 Wide paper setting
A. Procedure1. Enter the 25 mode.
2. "25 mode menu screen"
Press the [2. Paper size setting] key.
3. "Paper size setting screen"
Press the [Standard size] key.
4. Press the arrow key to select the paper size.
5. Press the [OK] key to return to "25 Mode menu
screen."
To invalidate the setting that you have
changed, press the [Cancel] key and return to
"25 mode menu screen."
1. Enter the 25 mode.
2. "25 mode menu screen"
Press the [2. Paper size setting] key.
3. "Paper size setting screen"
Press the [Non-standard size] key.
4. Press the main scan direction key and enter
the paper size using the arrow keys or numeric
keys.
5. Press the sub-scan direction key and enter the
paper size using the arrow keys or numeric
keys.
6. Press the [OK] key to return to "25 Mode menu
screen."
To invalidate the setting that you have
changed, press the [CANCEL] key and return
to "25 mode menu screen."
1. Enter the 25 mode.
2. "25 mode menu screen"
Press the [2. Paper size setting] key.
3. "Paper size setting screen"
Press the [Wide paper] key.
4. Press the arrow keys and select the standard
size of the wide paper.
5. Press the [Enter size] key.
6. Press the main scan direction key and enter
the paper size using the arrow keys or numeric
keys.
7. Press the sub-scan direction key and enter the
paper size using the arrow keys or numeric
keys.
8. Press the [OK] key to return to "25 Mode menu
screen."
To invalidate the setting that you have
changed, press the [CANCEL] key and return
to "25 mode menu screen."
25 MODE CF5001 Field Service Ver.1.0 Sep 2003
2-26
II A
DJ
US
TM
EN
T
6.5 PM count setting
Reset the PM count after implementation of the PM
and set and/or change the PM cycle.
The selection of the PM cycle is available in the
total count and the distance in operation of the
developing unit /K. In default, the total count is set.
6.5.1 Count reset
A. Procedure
6.5.2 Change setting
A. Procedure
1. Enter the 25 mode.
2. "25 mode menu screen"
Press the [3. PM count] key.
3. "PM count/cycle screen"
Press the [Count reset] key.
4. "PM count reset confirmation screen"
Press the [YES] key when resetting the PM
count. The PM count is reset and the starting
date of the PM count is automatically entered.
When the [NO] key is pressed, the PM count is
not reset and return to "PM count/cycle
screen."
1. Enter the 25 mode.
2. "25 mode menu screen"
Press the [3. PM count] key.
3. "PM count/cycle screen"
Press the [Page] or [Distance] key.
4. Enter a cycle value through the numeric keys.
Only the upper three digits can be entered.
5. Press the [OK] key to return to "25 Mode menu
screen."
To invalidate the setting that you have
changed, press the [CANCEL] key and return
to "25 mode menu screen."
CF5001 Field Service Ver.1.0 Sep 2003 25 MODE
2-27
II A
DJ
US
TM
EN
T
6.6 Data collection
It is possible to confirm various data held in the
machine. It is also possible to confirm collected data
by the list output and the mail remote notification
system.
A. Data that can be confirmed
1. Total count of each paper size
2. Copy count of each paper size
3. Print count of each paper size
4. RADF count
5. Page fill of each section
6. JAM data of time series
7. JAM count
8. Count of each copy mode
•Count of each copy mode (1)•Count of each copy mode (2)
9. SC count
10. JAM count of each section
11. SC count of each section
Note:
• When setting DIPSW30-1 to 1, 6 to 11 can be
confirmed.
B. Data collection confirmation method
(1) Procedure
Note:
• The [Count reset] key is shown in the individ-
ual data confirmation screen of the [10. JAM
count of each section] and the [11. SC count
of each section].
When pressing the [COUNT RESET] key,
"Count reset confirmation screen" is shown,
and when pressing the [YES] key, the section
data is reset.
Pressing the [NO] key returns to "Individual
data confirmation screen" with the interval
data not reset.
Reset these data while in the PM implementa-
tion to confirm the jam or SC occurrence
count after it was visited last time.
1. Enter the 25 mode.
2. "25 mode menu screen"
Press the [4. Data collection] key.
3. "Data collection menu screen"
Press the key of a data collection item that you
want to confirm.
To select any succeeding key to the key 11,
press the arrow key.
4. "Individual data confirmation screen"
Press the arrow key to scroll the screen.
5. Press the [PREVIOUS SCREEN] key to return
to "25 mode menu screen."
25 MODE CF5001 Field Service Ver.1.0 Sep 2003
2-28
II A
DJ
US
TM
EN
T
C. Details of the data collection
(1) Data collection No. 1 to 3: Total, copy and
printer counts of each paper size
• Maximum count: 99,999,999• 1 count is made for paper of All types regardless
of the paper size.• All sheets of paper that do not come under the
size of No. 1 to No. 9 are counted as special.However, SEL and LEF are counted as the samesize.
• The non-standard and the wide paper arecounted as special.
NO For Remark
Japan Inch Metric
1 A2 17 x 22 A2 Not used
2 A3 11 x 17 A3
3 B4 8.5 x 14 B4 (8K)
4 A4 8.5 x 11 A4
5 B5 5.5 x 8.5 B5 (16K)
6 A5 — A5
7 B6 — F4
8 8.5 x 14 — —
9 8.5 x 11 A4 —
10 Special Special Special
CF5001 Field Service Ver.1.0 Sep 2003 25 MODE
2-29
II A
DJ
US
TM
EN
T
(2) Data collection No. 4: RADF count
• Maximum count: 99,999,999
(3) Data collection No. 5: Page fill of each sec-
tion
It is possible to confirm the average pixel ratio of
5,000 print sheets of the latest 30 data for each of
Y, M, C and K.
This pixel ratio is a calculated value based on the
dot area of pixels and the transfer paper area, and
is different from the print ratio when actually printed.
(4) Data collection No. 6: JAM date of time
series
With respect to the latest 100 jam data, it is possible
to confirm originating jam code, total count, date of
occurrence, time of occurrence, tray, paper size
and magnification.
NO Item Remark
1 No. of originals fed in ADF mode
2 No. of originals fed in RADF mode
3 No. of originals fed in RDH mode
Not used
4 No. of originals fed in RRDH mode
5 No. of originals fed in LDH mode
6 No. of originals fed in CFF mode
7 No. of 1 sided SDF original fed
8 No. of mix originals fed in ADF mode
9 No. of mix originals fed in RADF mode
10 No. of originals fed in 2 in 1 mode Not used
11 No. of 1 sided z-folded original fed
12 No. of 2 sided z-folded original fed
13 No. of 2 sided SDF original fed Not used
14 —
25 MODE CF5001 Field Service Ver.1.0 Sep 2003
2-30
II A
DJ
US
TM
EN
T
(5) Data collection No. 7: Jam count / No. 10.
JAM count of each section
NO Jam code is shown on the LCD display when
DIPSW11-7 is set to 1
Section
1 J10-01
By-pass2 J10-02
3 J10-03
4 J11-01 Tray 1
5 J12-01 Tray 2
6 J13-01 Tray 3
7 J14-01 LCT
8 J17-01
Paper feed
9 J17-02
10 J17-03
11 J17-04
12 J17-05
13 J17-06
14 J17-07
15 J17-08
16 J17-09
17 J31-02
Reversed paper exit
18 J32-08
19 J32-04
20 J32-01
21 J32-05
22 J32-07
23 J32-02
24 J32-03
25 J92-01
ADU26 J93-01
27 J94-02
28 J19-01 Vertical conveyance
29 J19-02 LCT
30 J51-01 Main body
31 J71-01 FNS
32 J71-02 TU
33 J72-16
FNS
34 J72-17
35 J72-18
36 J72-19
37 J72-20
38 J72-21
39 J72-22
40 J72-23
41 J72-24
42 J72-25
43 J72-26
44 J72-28
45 J72-29
46 J72-30
47 J72-32
TU48 J72-33
49 J72-34
50 J72-35 PI
51 J72-38
Not used
52 J72-39
53 J72-40
54 J72-41
55 J72-42
56 J72-43 PK
57 J72-44
Not used58 J72-45
59 J72-46
60 J72-47
61 J72-48 FNS
62 J72-49
PI63 J72-50
64 J72-51
65 J72-60
Not used
66 J72-61
67 J72-62
68 J72-63
69 J72-64
70 J72-80 PK
71 J72-81
FNS72 J72-82
73 J72-83
74 J72-90
NO Jam code is shown on the LCD display when
DIPSW11-7 is set to 1
Section
CF5001 Field Service Ver.1.0 Sep 2003 25 MODE
2-31
II A
DJ
US
TM
EN
T
• Maximum count: 99,999,999
75 J61-01
DF
76 J61-02
77 J61-03
78 J62-01
79 J62-02
80 J62-03
81 J62-04
82 J62-05
83 J62-06
84 J62-07
85 J17-10 LCT
86 —
Not used
87
88
89
90
NO Jam code is shown on the LCD display when
DIPSW11-7 is set to 1
Section
25 MODE CF5001 Field Service Ver.1.0 Sep 2003
2-32
II A
DJ
US
TM
EN
T
(6) Data collection No. 8-1: Count of each copy mode (1)
NO Item Count conditions
1 1-1 mode
2 1-2 mode
3 2-1 mode
4 2-2 mode
5 ADF 1-1 mode
6 ADF 1-2 mode
7 Mixed original mode
8 Tab original mode
9 Z-folded original mode
10 LEF: Portrait/SEF: Landscape(Reg.)
11 LEF: Landscape/SEF: Portrait(Reg.)
12 LEF: Portrait/SEF: Landscape(Rev.)
13 LEF: Landscape/SEF: Portrait(Rev.)
14 Enhance Mode: text/photo
15 Enhance Mode: Text
16 Enhance Mode: Photo
17 Enhance Mode: Map
18 Non STD size
19 1 oblique staple(Upper left)
20 1 oblique staple(Upper right)
21 2 parallel staples(Left binding)
22 2 parallel staples(Upper binding)
23 Left binding
24 Right binding
25 Upper binding
26 Three-Folding
27 Stapling & Folding
28 Folding
29 Main tray: Group
30 Main tray: Sort
31 Main tray: Non sort
32 Subtray: Group (FACE DOWN)
33 Subtray: Group (FACE UP)
34 Subtray: Sort (FACE DOWN)
35 Subtray: Sort (FACE UP)
36 Subtray: Non sort (FACE DOWN)
37 Subtray: Non sort (FACE UP)
38 Cover sheet
39 Trimmer
40 Real size copy
41 Preset magnification E4
42 Preset magnification E3
43 Preset magnification E2
44 Preset magnification E1
45 Preset magnification R4
CF5001 Field Service Ver.1.0 Sep 2003 25 MODE
2-33
II A
DJ
US
TM
EN
T
46 Preset magnification R3
47 Preset magnification R2
48 Preset magnification R1
49 User lens mode 1
50 User lens mode 2
51 User lens mode 3
52 Zoom
53 Vertical/Horizontal zoom
54 Maximum zoom
55 Minimum zoom
56 APS
57 AMS
58 AE (AES)
59 User density level 1 (Not used)
60 User density level 2 (Not used)
61 Interrupted copy
62 Auto image rotation cancellation
63 Sheet insertion
64 Chapter control
65 Combination
66 Booklet copy
67 OHP interleave (copy) (Not used)
68 OHP interleave (blank) (Not used)
69 Image insert
70 Book copy
71 Program job
72 Non-image area erase
73 Reverse image
74 Auto repeat
75 Manual repeat
76 STD size repeat
77 Frame erasure
78 Fold erasure
79 Auto layout
80 All-image area (Not used)
81 Image Shift
82 Reduction shift
83 Overlay
84 Water mark
85 Stamp
86 Date/Time
87 Page
88 Numbering
89 Set quantity 1
90 Set quantity 2-5
91 Set quantity 6-10
NO Item Count conditions
25 MODE CF5001 Field Service Ver.1.0 Sep 2003
2-34
II A
DJ
US
TM
EN
T
92 Set quantity 11 or more
93 Time while power remote 1 is ON Accumulation of time during which the overall control board is powered
94 Time while power remote 2 is ON Accumulation of time during which the remote power 1 is on (in minutes)
95 Time while power remote 3 is ON Accumulation of time during which the remote power 2 is on (in minutes)
96 Time while power remote 4 is ON Accumulation of time during which the built-in controller operates (in minutes)
97 Time during Low Power mode Accumulation of time in the low power mode (1 count for each minute)
98 Time during warm up time Accumulation of warm-up time (in minutes)
99 Time during front door open Accumulation of time during which the front door is open (in minutes)
100 Ope. Time in 1side straight exit Accumulation of time from the start of print to the end of print (in minutes)Down time due to jam omitted101 Ope. Time in 1side reverse exit
102 Operation time in 2 side print
103 Operation time in ADF mode Accumulation of time during which ADF oper-ates (in minutes)
104 Morning Correction count (Not used)
105 Time during APS sensor ON Accumulation of time during which the APS sen-sor is on (in minutes)
106 N of main tray used jobs
107 N of subtray used jobs
108 N of stapling & folding used jobs
109 N of folding used jobs
110 N of ADF NF occurred
111 N of ADF special error1 occurred Wrong detection of original size
112 N of ADF special error2 occurred Next original information error
113 N of ADF special error3 occurred Error in size for which mixed paper is not allowed
114 N of scanner scanned No. of scans in platen mode
115 N of electrode cleaned (Not used)
116 N of memory overflow
117 N of fixing alarm occurred (Not used)
118 N of no toner stop occurred (Not used)
119 N of AGC retry (Not used)
120 N of sub scan beam correct error (Not used)
121 N of mis-centering correct error (Not used)
122 N of distortion adjust error (Not used)
123 N of ADF distortion data error (Not used)
124 Compression memory overflow
125 Page memory overflow (scan)
126 Page memory overflow (print)
127 FNS alarm (tray/trimming)
128 FNS alarm (staple)
129 —
130 N of ADF special error4 occurred (Not used)
131 Store for HDD (Sync. With Copying) (Not used)
NO Item Count conditions
CF5001 Field Service Ver.1.0 Sep 2003 25 MODE
2-35
II A
DJ
US
TM
EN
T
• Maximum count: 99,999,999
132 Store for HDD (SRVmode Scan → HDD) (Not used)
133 Store for PC (SRVmode Scan → PC) (Not used)
134 Store for PC (SRVmode HDD → PC) (Not used)
135 Recall from HDD (SRVmode HDD) (Not used)
136 Recall from PC (SRVmode PC) (Not used)
137 Image edit count by SRV
138 Wide paper count (A3W) or (11 x 17R)
139 Wide paper count (A4W) or (8.5 x 11W)
140 Wide paper count (A4WR) or (8.5 x 11RW)
141 Wide paper count (A5W) or (5.5 x 8.5W)
142 Wide paper count (Others)
143 Punch
144 Z-Folding (Not used)
145 ADF original-thick
146 MixPlex (1 side)
147 MixPlex (2 side)
148 ADF original-thin
149
150
151
152
153
154
155
156
157
158
159
160
NO Item Count conditions
25 MODE CF5001 Field Service Ver.1.0 Sep 2003
2-36
II A
DJ
US
TM
EN
T
(7) Data collection No. 8-2: Count of each copy mode (2)
NO Item Count conditions
1 ACS
2 Full color
3 Monochrome
4 Mono color (Y)
5 Mono color (M)
6 Mono color (C)
7 Mono color (R)
8 Mono color (G)
9 Mono color (B)
10 DF thick paper
11 DF thin paper
12 Original type: Printed paper
13 Original type: Photo paper
14 Original type: Copied paper
15 Original type: Inkjet paper
16 Original type: Pencil
17 Original type: Newspaper
18 Screen : Line screen/Smooth tone
19 Screen : Line screen/High resolution
20 Screen : Dot screen/Smooth tone
21 Screen : Dot screen/High resolution
22 Screen : High compression
23 Gloss mode
24 Density shift
25 Background adjustment
26 Red adjust
27 Green adjust
28 Blue adjust
29 Hue adjustment
30 Saturation adjustment
31 Brightness adjustment
32 Color balance adjustment
33 Sharpness adjustment
34 Contrast adjustment
35 Image judge adjustment
36 Paper Type: Normal paper
37 Paper Type: Recycle paper
38 Paper Type: Color paper
39 Paper Type: High quality paper
40 Paper Type: Coated paper
41 Paper Type: Tab paper
42 Paper Type: Color specific paper
43 Paper Type: Exclusive paper A
44 Paper Type: Exclusive paper B
45 Paper Type: Exclusive paper C
CF5001 Field Service Ver.1.0 Sep 2003 25 MODE
2-37
II A
DJ
US
TM
EN
T
• Maximum count: 99,999,999
46 Paper Type: Exclusive paper D
47 Paper Weight: 1
48 Paper Weight: 2
49 Paper Weight: 3
50 Paper Weight: 4
51 Paper Weight: 5
52 Paper Weight: 6
53 Multi page enlargement
54 Main Tray: Face up
55 N of no toner stop occurred (Y)
56 N of no toner stop occurred (M)
57 N of no toner stop occurred (C)
58 N of no toner stop occurred (K)
59 N of toner recovery box is full
60 N of color regist. auto. adj. Counts 1 per every correction operation
61 N of auto stability control Counts 1 per every correction operation
62 —
63 —
64 —
65 OFF mode time Sum of the OFF mode time (unit: minute)
66 ON time of heater (Main body) Sum of the time the heater is on (unit: minute)
67 ON time of heater (tray 4) Sum of the time the LCT heater is on (unit: minute)
68 Polygon motor operation time Sum of the time the polygon motor is on (unit: minute)
69 Develop motor ope. time (color) Sum of the time the developing motor (color) operates (unit: minute)
70 Develop motor ope. time (black) Sum of the time the developing motor (black) operates (unit: minute)
71 ON time of PCL (color) Sum of the time the PCL (color) is on (unit: minute)
72 ON time of PCL (black) Sum of the time the PCL (black) is on (unit: minute)
73 Operation time in Scanner motor Sum of the time the scanner motor operates (unit: minute)
74 Time while power (ADF) Sum of the time the 24V is applied to the ADF (unit: minute)
75
76
77
78
79
80
NO Item Count conditions
25 MODE CF5001 Field Service Ver.1.0 Sep 2003
2-38
II A
DJ
US
TM
EN
T
(8) Data collection No. 9: SC occurrence count/
No. 11: Sectional SC occurrence count
NO SC code Section
1 SC10-10 Communication abnormality
2 SC13-01 Paper feed motor abnormality
3 SC13-02
4 SC18-01 Paper feed tray abnormality
5 SC18-02
6 SC18-03
7 SC18-04
8 SC18-50 LT abnormality
9 SC18-51
10 SC18-60
11 SC18-61
12 SC18-70
13 SC18-71
14 SC20-10 Communication abnormality
15 SC20-11
16 SC20-12
17 SC21-01 PCL abnormality
18 SC21-02
19 SC21-03
20 SC21-04
21 SC23-01 Developing motor abnormality
22 SC23-02
23 SC23-03
24 SC23-04
25 SC23-05 Drum motor abnormality26 SC23-06
27 SC23-07
28 SC23-08
29 SC23-09 Transfer belt section abnormality30 SC23-10
31 SC23-11 Toner supply abnormality
32 SC27-01 L-detection abnormality
33 SC27-02 L-detection abnormality
34 SC27-03
35 SC27-04
36 SC28-01 High voltage abnormality
37 SC28-02
38 SC28-03
39 SC28-04
40 SC29-01
41 SC29-02
42 SC29-03
43 SC29-04
44 SC29-06 Process abnormality
45 SC29-07
46 SC29-08
47 SC29-09
48 SC29-10
49 SC29-11
50 SC29-12
51 SC29-13
52 SC29-14
53 SC29-15
54 SC29-16
55 SC29-17
56 SC29-18
57 SC29-19
58 SC29-20
59 SC29-21
60 SC29-22
61 SC29-23
62 SC30-01
63 SC30-02
64 SC30-10 Communication abnormality
65 SC32-01 Fan abnormality
66 SC32-02
67 SC32-03
68 SC32-04
69 SC32-05
70 SC32-06
71 SC33-01 Motor abnormality72 SC33-02
73 SC33-03
74 SC33-04
75 SC34-01 High fixing temperature abnor-mality76 SC34-02
77 SC34-03
78 SC34-04
79 SC34-05
80 SC34-06
81 SC34-07
82 SC34-08
83 SC35-01 Low fixing temperature abnor-mality84 SC35-02
85 SC35-03
86 SC35-04
87 SC35-05
88 SC35-06
NO SC code Section
CF5001 Field Service Ver.1.0 Sep 2003 25 MODE
2-39
II A
DJ
US
TM
EN
T
89 SC36-02 Fixing sensor abnormality
90 SC36-04
91 SC36-05
92 SC36-06
93 SC36-07
94 SC36-08
95 SC36-09
96 SC36-10
97 SC36-11
98 SC36-12
99 SC38-02
100 SC38-03
101 SC39-01
102 SC41-01 Scanner abnormality
103 SC41-02 Write abnormality104 SC41-03
105 SC41-04
106 SC41-05
107 SC41-06 Scanner abnormality
108 SC41-07 Write abnormality109 SC41-08
110 SC41-09
111 SC41-10
112 SC41-11
113 SC42-01 Fan abnormality
114 SC42-02
NO SC code Section
115 SC45-01 Color registration abnormality
116 SC45-03
117 SC45-07
118 SC45-08
119 SC45-09
120 SC45-10
121 SC45-11
122 SC45-12
123 SC45-20
124 SC46-01 Image processing abnormality125 SC46-02
126 SC46-03
127 SC46-05
128 SC46-06
129 SC46-07
130 SC46-08
131 SC46-09
132 SC46-11
133 SC46-12
134 SC46-13
135 SC46-14
136 SC46-15
137 SC46-16
138 SC46-17
139 SC46-18
140 SC46-19
141 SC46-21
142 SC46-23
143 SC46-24
144 SC46-25
145 SC46-26
146 SC46-31
147 SC46-32
148 SC46-35
149 SC46-40
150 SC46-41
151 SC46-42
152 SC46-43
153 SC46-58
154 SC46-59
155 SC46-62
156 SC46-63
157 SC46-64
158 SC46-66
NO SC code Section
25 MODE CF5001 Field Service Ver.1.0 Sep 2003
2-40
II A
DJ
US
TM
EN
T
159 SC46-80 Image processing abnormality160 SC46-81
161 SC46-82
162 SC46-83
163 SC46-90
164 SC46-91
165 SC46-98
166 SC46-99
167 SC49-00 Communication abnormality
168 SC49-01
169 SC49-02
170 SC50-01
171 SC50-02
172 SC50-03
173 SC50-04
174 SC50-05
175 SC50-10
176 SC50-11
177 SC52-01 Fan abnormality
178 SC52-02
179 SC52-03
180 SC56-02 Operation board abnormality
181 SC56-11
182 SC56-12
183 SC56-13
184 SC60-01 DF abnormality
185 SC61-01
186 SC61-02
187 SC61-03
188 SC61-04
189 SC61-05
190 SC61-06
191 SC61-07
192 SC61-08
193 SC61-09
194 SC61-10
195 SC70-01
196 SC77-01
NO SC code Section
197 SC77-02 FNS abnormality
198 SC77-03
199 SC77-04
200 SC77-05
201 SC77-06
202 SC77-07
203 SC77-08
204 SC77-11
205 SC77-12
206 SC77-13
207 SC77-14
208 SC77-21
209 SC77-22
210 SC77-25
211 SC77-26
212 SC77-31 TU abnormality
213 SC77-32
214 SC77-33
215 SC77-34
216 SC77-35
217 SC77-36
218 SC37-37
219 SC77-41 PI abnormality
220 SC77-42
221 SC77-43
222 SC77-44 PK abnormality
223 SC77-45 Not used
224 SC77-46
225 SC77-47 PK abnormality
226 SC77-52 Not used
227 SC77-53
228 SC77-54 PK abnormality
229 SC77-55 Not used
230 SC77-56
231 SC77-57
232 SC77-81 FNS abnormality
233 SC77-91
234 SC77-92
235 SC77-98
236 SC77-99
237 SC80-01 Communication abnormality
238 SC80-02
239 SC80-03
240 SC80-11 ISW abnormality
241 SC80-21
242 SC80-30
NO SC code Section
CF5001 Field Service Ver.1.0 Sep 2003 25 MODE
2-41
II A
DJ
US
TM
EN
T
• Maximum count: 99,999,999
243 SC80-31
244 SC80-32
245 SC80-40 Main body abnormality
246 SC89-01
247 SC89-02
248 SC89-03
249 SC89-04
250 —
251 —
252
253
254
255
256
257
258
259
260
262
263
264
265
266
267
268
269
270
NO SC code Section
25 MODE CF5001 Field Service Ver.1.0 Sep 2003
2-42
II A
DJ
US
TM
EN
T
6.7 Parts counter
The following are conducted with respect to each
replacement part: display of copy count used, reset-
ting of count, setting of limit value, and new registra-
tion of replacement parts.
The copy count by parts that need to be replaced
includes the following:
• Count of special parts• Count of each parts
6.7.1 Count of special parts
When a periodically replaced part is replaced, reset
the counter of the part that has been replaced.
Display the name, part number and the copy count
of a replacement part that has been registered, and
reset the count.
A. Procedure
1. Enter the 25 mode.
2. "25 mode menu screen"
Press the [5. Parts counter] key.
3. "Parts counter menu screen"
Press the [1. Count of special parts] key.
4. "Parts counter (fixed) screen"
Press the arrow key to select a part that you
want to reset.
5. Press the [Count reset] key.
6. "Parts count reset screen"
Press the [YES] key when resetting the part
count. The part count is reset.
Pressing the [NO] key returns to "Parts counter
menu screen" with the part count not reset.
CF5001 Field Service Ver.1.0 Sep 2003 25 MODE
2-43
II A
DJ
US
TM
EN
T
B. Count of special parts list
NO Parts name Count conditions
1 Toner collection box *1
2 Ozone filter /1 (Right side)
3 Deodorant filter (Rear side)
4 Dust-proof filter /1 (Right side)
5 Dust-proof filter /2 (Rear side)
6 Charging dust proof filter
7 Drum cartridge /Y *2
8 Drum /Y
9 Drum cleaning blade /Y
10 Lubricant applying unit /Y
11 —
12 Drum cartridge /M
13 Drum /M
14 Drum cleaning blade /M
15 Lubricant applying unit /M
16 —
17 Drum cartridge /C *2
18 Drum /C
19 Drum cleaning blade /C
20 Lubricant applying unit /C
21 —
22 Drum cartridge /K *1
23 Drum /K
24 Drum cleaning blade /K
25 Lubricant applying unit /K
26 —
27 Charging corona /Y *2
28 Charging wire assy /Y
29 Charging grid plate /Y
30 Charging corona /M
31 Charging wire assy /M
32 Charging grid plate /M
33 Charging corona /C
34 Charging wire assy /C
35 Charging grid plate /C
36 Charging corona /K *1
37 Charging wire assy /K
38 Charging grid plate /K
39 Transfer belt unit
40 Transfer belt
41 1st transfer roller /Y *2
42 1st transfer roller /M
43 1st transfer roller /C
25 MODE CF5001 Field Service Ver.1.0 Sep 2003
2-44
II A
DJ
US
TM
EN
T
44 1st transfer roller /K *1
45 2nd transfer roller /U
46 Transfer belt separation claw
47 Transfer belt cleaning unit
48 Belt cleaning brush unit
49 Toner collection sheet /1
50 Belt cleaning blade
51 2nd transfer roller /L
52 Separation discharging unit
53 Fixing cleaning unit
54 Fixing roller /U
55 Fixing roller /L
56 Developer /Y (Page) *2
57 Developer /Y (Page)
58 Developer /C (Page)
59 Developer /K (Page) *1
60 Developing unit /Y *2
61 Developing unit /M
62 Developing unit /C
63 Developing unit /K *1
64 Developer /Y (Distance) Displays developing sleeve travel distance (in meters)
65 Developer /M (Distance)
66 Developer /C (Distance)
67 Developer /K (Distance)
68 — —
69 FNS tray up/down motor 1 count for each FNS main tray paper exit1 count for each 1 paper exit in staple mode
70 FNS stapler /F 1 count for each paper exit in each of the 1-staple at front, 2-staple and the stitch-and-fold modes
71 FNS stapler /R 1 count for each paper exit in each of the 1-staple at front, 2-staple and the stitch-and-fold modes
72 FNS shift motor 1 count for each paper exit at even number of copies in the sort mode
73 FNS exit opening motor 1 count for starting the job of "large size" (A4R/8.5 x 11R or larger) in the staple mode, and 1 count for each paper exit1 count for starting each of the stitch-and-fold and folding jobs
74 FNS folding knife motor 1 count for each copy exit in each of the stitch-and-fold and folding and the three-folding modes
75 By-pass gate solenoid 1 count for each A4 / B5 / 8.5 x 11 / 16K copy exit in the staple mode
76 Tri-folding gate SD 1 count for each copy exit in the three-folding mode
77 Pl conveyance clutch /U 1 count for each paper feed in PI upper stand
78 Pl feed roller /A /U
79 Pl feed roller /B /U
80 Pl reverse roller /U 1 count for each paper feed in PI upper stand
81 Pl torque limiter /U
NO Parts name Count conditions
CF5001 Field Service Ver.1.0 Sep 2003 25 MODE
2-45
II A
DJ
US
TM
EN
T
82 Pl conveyance clutch /L 1 count for each paper feed in PI lower stand
83 Pl feed roller /A /L
84 Pl feed roller /B /L
85 Pl reverse roller /L
86 Pl torque limiter /L
87 Trimmer blade 1 count for each cutter operation
88 PK punching unit (2 hole) 1 count for each punch operation
89 PK punching unit (3 hole)
90 PK punching unit (4 hole)
91 — —
92 ADF paper feed roller Original passage count in all modes
93 ADF feed roller
94 —
95 ADF feed prevention roller Original passage count in all modes
96 ADF exit solenoid 1 count for each original passage in the double side copy mode and the mixing original mode
97 ADF Dfeed clutch Single side copy mode: 1 count for each originalDouble side copy mode: 3 counts for each original
98 ADF reversal solenoid 1 count for each original passage in the double side copy mode and the mixing original mode
99 — —
100 Exposure ON time Accumulation of on-time (in : minute
101 Sub power switch 1 count each time the main switch turns off the power
102 Door SW 1 count each time the front door is opened
103 Toner supply door switch 1 count each time the toner supply door is opened
104 Main power SW 1 count each time the reset switch turns off the power
105 Pl regist clutch 1 count each time PI feeds a sheet
106 Punch motor 1 count for each punch operation
107 — —
108 Paper exit roller /A 1 count for each FNS main tray paper exit
109 Intermediate conveyance roller 1 count for each sheet in each of the FNS flat stapling, stitch-and-fold, folding and three-folding modes110 Stacking assist roller
111 — —
112 Fixing torque limiter *1
113 Registration cleaning sheet 1 count for each paper exit in the single side copy mode2 counts in the double side copy mode
114 Ball bearing /U *1
115 Heat insulating sleeve /U
116 Intermediate convery. clutch /1 1 count for each paper exit in the single side copy mode1 counts in the double side copy mode117 Intermediate convery. clutch /2
118 Intermediate convery. clutch /3
119 Feed/Dfeed rubber (Tray-1) 1 count for each paper exit of paper supplied from the tray 1
120 Feed/Dfeed rubber (Tray-2) 1 count for each paper exit of paper supplied from the tray 2
121 Feed/Dfeed rubber (Tray-3) 1 count for each paper exit of paper supplied from the tray 3
122 Feed/Dfeed rubber (By-pass) 1 count for each paper exit of paper supplied from the by-pass tray
NO Parts name Count conditions
25 MODE CF5001 Field Service Ver.1.0 Sep 2003
2-46
II A
DJ
US
TM
EN
T
• Maximum count: 99,999,999
*1 Count in all color modes25DIPSW8-6 = 0: 1 count for each paper exitin the single side copy mode, and 2 counts inthe double side copy mode= 1: 2 counts for each large size paper exit inthe single side copy mode, and 4 counts in thedouble side copy mode
*2 Count only in full color or single color mode25DIPSW8-6 = 0: 1 count for each paper exitin the single side copy mode, and 2 counts inthe double side copy mode= 1: 2 counts for each large size paper exit inthe single side copy mode, and 4 counts in thedouble side copy mode
123 Registration roller 1 count for each paper exit in the single side copy mode2 counts in the double side copy mode124 Separation claw solenoid
125 Fixing upper lamp /1 1 count for each paper exit of paper supplied from the tray 1
126 Fixing upper lamp /2 *1
127 Fixing lower lamp
128 Fixing temp. sensor /3
129 Fixing temp. sensor /4
130 Paper feed roller (Tray-1) 1 count for each paper exit of paper supplied from the tray 1
131 Paper feed roller (Tray-2) 1 count for each paper exit of paper supplied from the tray 2
132 Paper feed roller ((Tray-3) 1 count for each paper exit of paper supplied from the tray 3
133 Paper feed roller (By-pass) 1 count for each paper exit of paper supplied from the by-pass tray
134 ADU conveyance clutch /1 1 count for each paper exit in the double side copy mode (no count is made in the single side copy mode)135 ADU conveyance clutch /2
136 ADU pre-registration clutch
137 Ball bearing /L *1
138 Heat insulating sleeve /L
139 Fixing drive gear
140 Decurler roller 1 count for each paper exit in the single side copy mode2 counts in the double side copy mode
141 LCT paper feed roller 1 count for each paper exit of paper supplied from the LCT
142 LCT feed/Dfeed roller
143 LCT feed clutch
144 LCT pre-registration clutch
145 Paper feed clutch (Tray-1) 1 count for each paper exit of paper supplied from the tray 1
146 Pre-regist. clutch (Tray-1)
147 Paper feed clutch (Tray-2) 1 count for each paper exit of paper supplied from the tray 2
148 Pre-regist. clutch (Tray-2)
149 Paper feed clutch (Tray-3) 1 count for each paper exit of paper supplied from the tray 3
150 Pre-regist. clutch (Tray-3)
151 Paper feed clutch (By-pass) 1 count for each paper exit of paper supplied from the by-pass tray
152 Transfer earth plate unit 1 count for each paper exit in the single side copy mode2 counts in the double side copy mode
153 Center fixing temp. sensor/U *1
154 Center fixing temp. sensor/L
NO Parts name Count conditions
CF5001 Field Service Ver.1.0 Sep 2003 25 MODE
2-47
II A
DJ
US
TM
EN
T
6.7.2 Count of each parts
This is used when you want to control the part
counter.
Set the part name, part number and the limit value,
and display and reset the copy count.
Up to 30 data from No. 01 to No. 30 can be set. A
count is taken for each passage of paper, regard-
less of the paper size.
Reference:
• When the copy count is in excess of a limit
value, an asterisk [*] is shown to the left of No.
A. Setting of each replacement part and dis-
play of the copy count
(1) Procedure
B. Resetting of each replacement part
(1) Procedure
1. Enter the 25 mode.
2. "25 mode menu screen"
Press the [5. Parts counter] key.
3. "Parts counter menu screen"
Press the [2. Count of each parts] key.
4. "Copy count of each part screen"
Press the arrow key to select a number you
want to set or change.
5. Press one of the [Parts name setting], [P/N
setting] and [Limit setting] key.
6. Press an item you want to set or change out of
the [Parts name setting], [P/N setting] and
[Limit setting] key, and enter it with the alpha-
numeric keys.
• [Part name setting]: Enter a part name (8 digitsin alphanumeric)
• [P/N setting]: Enter a part number (9 digits inalphanumeric)
• [Limit setting]: Limit value (8 digits in numeric)
7. Press the [OK] key to update the data.
To invalidate the setting that you have
changed, press the [CANCEL] key.
1. Enter the 25 mode.
2. "25 mode menu screen"
Press the [5. Parts counter] key.
3. "Parts counter menu screen"
Press the [2. Count of each parts] key.
4. "Count of each part screen"
Press the arrow key to select a number you
want to set or change.
5. Press the [COUNT RESET] key.
6. "Parts count reset screen"
Press the [YES] key when resetting a part
count. This resets the part counter.
Pressing the [NO] key returns to "Count of
each part" with the part count not reset.
25 MODE CF5001 Field Service Ver.1.0 Sep 2003
2-48
II A
DJ
US
TM
EN
T
6.8 Password setting
Set the following passwords.
• Key operator password (4 digits): Password usedto enter the key operator mode.
• EKC master key code (8 digits): Passwordrequired when entering various EKC settingmodes.
• Weekly timer password (4 digits): Passwordrequired when entering various weekly timer set-ting modes.Note:
•A password can be set only when the setting
for use of the weekly timer is set to "Use" in
the key operator mode.
A. Procedure
Note:
• Setting "0000" for the key operator password
and the weekly timer password allows you to
use each mode with no password.
6.9 Telephone number setting
Set the customer support center telephone and
FAX numbers that are used in an emergency for a
service call and shown on the basic screen for help.
A. Procedure
Note:
• When a number is less than 16 digits, be sure
to use hyphens to fill up the blanks.
1. Enter the 25 mode.
2. "25 mode menu screen"
Press the [6. Password setting] key.
3. "Password setting mode screen"
Press the key of an item you want to set.
• Key operator password (4 digits)• EKC master key code (8 digits)• Weekly timer password (4 digits)
4. Enter a new password through the numeric
keys.
5. Press the [OK] key to update the data.
To invalidate the setting that you have
changed, press the [CANCEL] key.
1. Enter the 25 mode.
2. "25 mode menu screen"
Press the [7. Telephone number setting] key.
3. "Customer support TEL/FAX setting screen"
Press either of the [Service centre Telephone
number (16 digits)] and [Service centre FAX
number (16)] keys that you want to set.
4. Enter a TEL or FAX number through the
numeric keys.
5. Press the [OK] key to update the data.
To invalidate the setting that you have
changed, press the [CANCEL] key.
CF5001 Field Service Ver.1.0 Sep 2003 25 MODE
2-49
II A
DJ
US
TM
EN
T
6.10 M/C serial number setting
Display and set the serial numbers of the main body
and options.
A. Procedure
Note:
• The serial number of the main body cannot be
changed.
6.11 Indication of ROM version
Display the ROM version of the main body and
options.
A. Procedure
6.12 ISW
See chapter "Service tools."
1. Enter the 25 mode.
2. "25 mode menu screen"
Press the [8. M/C serial number setting] key.
3. "Serial number setting mode screen"
Press the key of an item you want to set and
enter a serial number through the alphanu-
meric keys.
4. Press the [OK] key to update the data.
5. To invalidate the setting that you have
changed, press the [CANCEL] key.
1. Enter the 25 mode.
2. "25 mode menu screen"
Press the [9. Indication of ROM version] key.
3. "Indication of ROM version screen"
Each ROM version is displayed.
4. Press the [PREVIOUS SCREEN] key to return
to "25 mode menu screen."
25 MODE CF5001 Field Service Ver.1.0 Sep 2003
2-50
II A
DJ
US
TM
EN
T
6.13 Setting date input
Set the starting date of the total counter that is dis-
played on the LCD in the P function.
A. Procedure
6.14 Board change mode
When changing any of the following four types of
boards, be sure to set the serial number of the main
body in this setting.
• OPERATION (operation board /1)• OVERALL CB (overall control board)• NVRAM (memory board)• PRINTER (printer control board)
Note:
• The number of boards that can be replaced at
the same time is restricted only to two boards.
A. Procedure
1. Enter the 25 mode.
2. "25 mode menu screen"
Press the [12.Setting date input] key.
3. "Setting date input screen"
Enter an installation date through the numeric
keys.
4. Press the [OK] key to update the data.
5. To invalidate the setting that you have
changed, press the [CANCEL] key.
1. Enter the 25 mode.
2. "25 mode menu screen"
Press the [13. Board change mode] key.
3. "Board change mode screen"
Select a key of the board that you have
replaced a part.
4. "Serial number input screen"
Enter the serial number of the main body
through the alphanumeric keys.
5. Press the [OK] key to update the data.
To invalidate the setting that you have
changed, press the [CANCEL] key.
CF5001 Field Service Ver.1.0 Sep 2003 36 MODE
2-51
II A
DJ
US
TM
EN
T
7. 36 MODE
7.1 Setting method
This machine is provided with the 36 mode to make
various adjustment in this mode.
A. Procedure
7.2 Process adjustment
Make various adjustments around the process.
A. Procedure
1. With the reset switch (SW1) left ON, turn OFF
the main switch (SW2).
2. Turn ON the SW2 while pressing the numeric
buttons 3 and 6 at the same time. The "36
mode menu screen" is shown.
At this point, the machine enters the 36 mode
with the normal copy operation unavailable.
3. Press the item key on the liquid crystal display
(LCD) to show a setting screen of each item.
4. Confirm the details of input in the setting
screen of each item.
5. Turn OFF the SW2 to release the 36 mode.
6. New data will be effective after restarting.
1. Enter the 36 mode.
2. "36 mode menu screen"
Press the [1. Process adjustment] key.
3. "Process adjustment mode menu screen"
For the process adjustment, there are the fol-
lowing items provided:
[1. High voltage adjustment]
[2. Drum peculiarity adjustment]
[3. Sensor output adjustment]
[4. Exclusive paper setting]
[5. Recall standard data]
4. Press the key of an item you want to adjust.
5. Press the [PREVIOUS SCREEN] key to return
from each of the adjustment screen to the
"Process adjustment menu screen."
36 MODE CF5001 Field Service Ver.1.0 Sep 2003
2-52
II A
DJ
US
TM
EN
T
7.2.1 High voltage adjustment
For the high voltage adjustment, the following items
are provided. However, be sure not to conduct a
high voltage adjustment in the field.
[1. 1st transfer manual adj.]
[2. 2nd transfer manual adj.]
[3. HV adjustment (Separation AC)]
[4. HV adjustment (Separation DC)]
[5. Pre-transfer guide HV check]
7.2.2 Drum peculiarity adjustment
Conduct the blade setting, charging potential cor-
rection, gamma, developer charge, L-detection
adjustment and the initial drum rotation.
A. Procedure
(1) Blade setting mode
Perform this adjustment when changing the belt
cleaning blade or the transfer belt. In this mode,
apply toner onto the transfer belt then clean with the
belt cleaning blade. This prevents the damages of
the transfer belt and the belt cleaning blade.
a. Procedure
1. Enter the 36 mode.
2. "36 mode menu screen"
Press the [1. Process adjustment] key.
3. "Process adjustment menu screen"
Press the [2. Drum peculiarity adjustment] key.
4. "Drum peculiarity adjustment menu screen"
For the drum peculiarity adjustment, the follow-
ing items are provided:
[1. Blade setting mode]
[2. Automatic drum potential adj.]
[3. Automatic gamma adjustment]
[4. LD bias adjustment]
[5. Automatic developer charge]
[6. L-detect initial auto. adj.]
[7. Initial drum rotation]
5. Press the key of an item you want to adjust.
6. Press the [PREVIOUS SCREEN] key to return
from each of the adjustment screens to the
"Drum peculiarity adjustment menu screen.
1. Enter the 36 mode.
2. "36 mode menu screen"
Press the [1. Process adjustment] key.
3. "Process adjustment menu screen"
Press the [2. Drum peculiarity adjustment] key.
4. "Drum peculiarity adjustment menu screen"
Press [1. Blade setting mode] key.
5. "Blade setting mode screen"
Press the [Start] key. This process completes
in about 15 seconds and complete message is
shown on the screen.
6. Press the [PREVIOUS SCREEN] key to return
to the "Drum peculiarity adjustment menu
screen."
CF5001 Field Service Ver.1.0 Sep 2003 36 MODE
2-53
II A
DJ
US
TM
EN
T
(2) Automatic drum potential adjustment
Measure the charging potential of each drum of Y,
M, C and K to adjust automatically the developing
bias value and the charging voltage.
This adjustment is not necessary because of the
automatic gamma adjustment contain this adjust-
ment.
a. Procedure
(3) Automatic gamma adjustment
The gamma adjustment is performed automatically.
This adjustment can be shown in the key operator
mode by setting DIPSW12-1 to 1.
a. Procedure
1. Enter the 36 mode.
2. "36 mode menu screen"
Press the [1. Process adjustment] key.
3. "Process adjustment menu screen"
Press the [2. Drum peculiarity adjustment] key.
4. "Drum peculiarity adjustment menu screen"
Press [2. Automatic drum potential adjustment]
key.
5. "Automatic drum potential adjustment screen"
Press the [Start] key. This process completes
in about 20 seconds and the charging potential
is displayed for each line speed (1/1 speed, 1/2
speed and 1/3 speed) and for each color (Y, M,
C and K) on the screen, with an exit message
shown.
6. Press the [PREVIOUS SCREEN] key to return
to the "Drum peculiarity adjustment menu
screen."
1. Enter the 36 mode.
2. "36 mode menu screen"
Press the [1. Process adjustment] key.
3. "Process adjustment menu screen"
Press the [2. Drum peculiarity adjustment] key.
4. "Drum peculiarity adjustment menu screen"
Press the [3. Automatic gamma adjustment]
key.
5. "Automatic gamma adjustment 0 screen"
There are 8 kinds of the gamma adjustment (0
to 7). However, conduct "Gamma auto adjust-
ment 0" in the field.
"Automatic gamma adjustment 0": Perform the
Dmax density adjustment, dot diameter adjust-
ment, automatic drum potential adjustment,
and the gamma adjustment. The developing
bias value is shown for each line speed (1/1
speed, 1/2 speed and 1/3 speed) and for each
color (Y, M, C and K) with a complete mes-
sage.
Press the [Start] key. This process completes
in about 2.5 minutes and the developing bias
value is displayed for each line speed (1/1
speed, 1/ 2 speed and 1/3 speed) and for each
color (Y, M, C and K) on the screen with a com-
plete message.
6. Press the [PREVIOUS SCREEN] key to return
to the "Drum peculiarity adjustment menu
screen."
36 MODE CF5001 Field Service Ver.1.0 Sep 2003
2-54
II A
DJ
US
TM
EN
T
(4) LD bias adjustment
Perform this adjustment when replacing the write
unit.
Note:
• Do not perform this adjustment except when
replacing the write unit.
a. Procedure
1. Read the numeric value on the bar code
labeled [1] on the replacing write unit.
2. Enter the 36 mode.
3. "36 mode menu screen"
Press the [1. Process adjustment] key.
4. "Process adjustment menu screen"
Press the [2. Drum peculiarity adjustment] key.
5. "Drum peculiarity adjustment menu screen"
Press the [4. LD bias adjustment] key.
8050fs1025[1]
6. "LD bias adjustment Y (LS 1/1) screen"
For the LD bias adjustment, the following items
are provided. Press the arrow key to select the
color of the write unit you just replaced.
• "LD bias adjustment Y (LS 1/1)"• "LD bias adjustment Y (LS 1/2)"• "LD bias adjustment Y (LS 1/3)"• "LD bias adjustment M (LS 1/1)"• "LD bias adjustment M (LS 1/2)"• "LD bias adjustment M (LS 1/3)"• "LD bias adjustment C (LS 1/1)"• "LD bias adjustment C (LS 1/2)"• "LD bias adjustment C (LS 1/3)"• "LD bias adjustment K (LS 1/1)"• "LD bias adjustment K (LS 1/2)"• "LD bias adjustment K (LS 1/3)"
7. Enter the numeric value on the bar code
labeled on the replacing write unit through the
numeric keys and press the [SET] key.
Note:
• Be sure to enter the same numeric value in
LS 1/1, LS 1/2, and LS 1/3.
8. Press the [PREVIOUS SCREEN] key to return
to the "Drum peculiarity adjustment menu
screen."
CF5001 Field Service Ver.1.0 Sep 2003 36 MODE
2-55
II A
DJ
US
TM
EN
T
(5) Automatic developer charge
In this mode, after discharging developer from the
developing unit manually, a new developer is auto-
matically charged.
Note:
• Do not open the upper cover of the develop-
ing unit. Otherwise, dust gets in the unit caus-
ing image failure.
a. Procedure
1. Open the toner supply section.
2. Remove 2 screws [1] and then remove the
developer charging plate [3] provided inside
the toner supply section [2]. Remove 2 screws
[4] and then remove the developer charging
funnel /L [5].
[2]
[3] [5]
[4][1]
8050fs1002
3. Set the developer charging plate /L [2] to the
shoulder screws [1] provided above the devel-
oping unit of a color the developer of which is
changed.
[2]
[1]
[2]
[1]
8050fs1003
36 MODE CF5001 Field Service Ver.1.0 Sep 2003
2-56
II A
DJ
US
TM
EN
T
4. Set the developer charging funnel /L [2] to the
developer charging plate [1].
Note:
• Be sure to attach the tip of the developer
charging funnel /L [2] securely to the toner
supply opening [3].
5. Set the developer charging funnel /U [2] pack-
aged together with developer to the developer
charging funnel /L [1].
Note:
• The developer charge funnel /U [2] is pack-
aged together with each developer. So, be
sure to avoid its reuse.
6. Enter the 36 mode.
[1]
[3] [2] 8050fs1004
[1] [2] 8050fs1005
7. "36 mode menu screen"
Press the [1. Process adjustment] key.
8. "Process adjustment menu screen"
Press the [2. Drum peculiarity adjustment] key.
9. "Drum peculiarity adjustment menu screen"
Press the [5. Automatic developer charge] key.
10. "Automatic developer charge Y screen"
Press the arrow key to select the color of
developer you want to charge.
For the automatic developer charge, the follow-
ing items are provided:
• Automatic developer charge Y• Automatic developer charge M• Automatic developer charge C• Automatic developer charge K
11. Press the [Start] key to introduce a new devel-
oper into the developer charging funnel /U.
12. Make sure that the developer has been
charged successfully before pressing the
[CANCEL] key.
13. When charging another developer, repeat
steps 3 to 11.
14. Press the [PREVIOUS SCREEN] key to return
to the "Drum peculiarity adjustment menu
screen."
15. Return the installed parts back to their original
positions.
Note:
• After completion of this adjustment, be sure
to perform the L-detect initial auto. adjust-
ment. If printing is started without perform-
ing the L-detect initial auto. adjustment, a
proper image density cannot be obtained,
thus resulting in the change of developer
again.
CF5001 Field Service Ver.1.0 Sep 2003 36 MODE
2-57
II A
DJ
US
TM
EN
T
(6) L-detect initial automatic adjustment
Be sure to conduct this adjustment after a new
developer is charged.
Note:
• Do not print without conducting the L-detect
initial auto. adjustment. Otherwise, a proper
image density cannot be obtained, thus
resulting in the change of developer again.
a. Procedure
(7) Initial drum rotation
When remove the drum cartridge, be sure to con-
duct this operation to securely set the drum cou-
pling.
a. Procedure
1. Enter the 36 mode.
2. "36 mode menu screen"
Press the [1. Process adjustment] key.
3. "Process adjustment menu screen"
Press the [2. Drum peculiarity adjustment] key.
4. "Drum peculiarity adjustment menu screen"
Press the [6. L-detect initial auto. adjustment]
key.
5. "L-detect initial auto. adj. ALL screen"
Press the arrow key to select the color of a
developer that has been newly charged, and
then press the [Start] key.
For the L-detect initial auto. adj., the following
items are provided:
• L-detect initial auto. adj. All: Conduct all colorsof Y, M,C and K.
• L-detect initial auto. adj. YMC: Conduct Y, Mand C only.
• L-detect initial auto. adj. K: Conduct K only.• L-detect initial auto. adj. Y: Conduct Y only.• L-detect initial auto. adj. M: Conduct M only.• L-detect initial auto. adj. C: Conduct C only.
6. A message "Completed" is displayed.
7. Press the [PREVIOUS SCREEN] key to return
to the "Drum peculiarity adjustment menu
screen."
1. Enter the 36 mode.
2. "36 mode menu screen"
Press the [1. Process adjustment] key.
3. "Process adjustment menu screen"
Press the [2. Drum peculiarity adjustment] key.
4. "Drum peculiarity adjustment menu screen"
Press the [7. Initial drum rotation] key.
5. "Initial drum rotation screen"
Press the [Start] key. This process completes
in about 10 seconds and complete message is
shown on the screen.
6. Press the [PREVIOUS SCREEN] key to return
to the "Drum peculiarity adjustment menu
screen."
36 MODE CF5001 Field Service Ver.1.0 Sep 2003
2-58
II A
DJ
US
TM
EN
T
7.2.3 Sensor output check
For the sensor output check, the following items are
provided; however, do not conduct them in the field:
[1. Surface potential sensor output]
[2. Max. density sensor output]
[3. Gamma sensor output]
7.2.4 Exclusive paper setting
This setting is used when the user cannot obtain the
satisfactory results of transfer, separation or fixing
with the standard setting due to a special paper
being used.
This setting is applicable when [Exclusive paper A
to D] is selected in the key operator mode [Paper
type/ Special paper size set].
In default, the following paper data is entered for
each destination area.
• For Japan: 80 g/m2 color specified paper• For inch area: 105 g/m2 color specified paper• For metric area: 90 g/m2 color specified paper
Note:
• When setting data, be sure to follow the
instructions given by Minolta Technology
Support Center.
A. Procedure
1. Enter the 36 mode.
2. "36 mode menu screen"
Press the [1. Process adjustment] key.
3. "Process adjustment menu screen"
Press the [4. Exclusive paper setting] key.
4. "User paper setting menu screen"
For the user paper setting menu, the following
items are provided which correspond to the
setting key of the same name in the key opera-
tor mode.
[1. Exclusive paper A setting]
[2. Exclusive paper B setting]
[3. Exclusive paper C setting]
[4. Exclusive paper D setting]
5. For setting, press the key of an item you want
to set. Set the following 12 types of setting for
each exclusive paper A to D.
• 2nd transfer offset Side 1• 2nd transfer offset Side 2• 2nd separation AC offset Side 1• 2nd separation AC offset Side 2• 2nd separation DC offset Side 1• 2nd separation DC offset Side 2• Fixing (U) roller temp (idle)• Fixing (U) roller temp (print)• Fixing (L) roller temp (idle)• Fixing (L) roller temp (print)• Fixing (U and L) roller temp. difference• Compulsion off (upper heater) paper width
<261mm• Compulsion off (upper heater) paper width
>=261mm• Line speed
6. Press the [PREVIOUS SCREEN] key to return
to the "User paper setting menu screen."
CF5001 Field Service Ver.1.0 Sep 2003 36 MODE
2-59
II A
DJ
US
TM
EN
T
7.2.5 Recall standard data
Reset the adjusted set values of process adjust-
ment to the standard data. (factory default data)
Note:
• Data for automatic drum potential, automatic
gamma, L-detect initial auto. and exclusive
paper setting adjustment cannot be reset to
the standard data.
A. Procedure
1. Enter the 36 mode.
2. "36 mode menu screen"
Press the [1. Process adjustment] key.
3. "Process adjustment menu screen"
Press the [5. Recall standard data] key.
4. "Recall standard data: Process adjustment
screen"
Press the [YES] key when recalling the stan-
dard data. Pressing the [NO] key or the [PRE-
VIOUS SCREEN] key returns to the "Process
adjustment menu screen" without recalling the
standard data.
36 MODE CF5001 Field Service Ver.1.0 Sep 2003
2-60
II A
DJ
US
TM
EN
T
7.3 Image adjustment
Conduct various image adjustments.
A. Procedure
7.3.1 Magnification adjustment
Adjust various magnifications.
A. Procedure
1. Enter the 36 mode.
2. "36 mode menu screen"
Press the [2. Image adjustment] key.
3. "Image adjustment menu screen"
For the image adjustment, the following items
are provided:
[1. Magnification adjustment]
[2. Timing adjustment]
[3. RADF adjustment]
[4. Centring adjustment]
[5. Non-image area erase check]
[6. Recall standard data]
4. Press the key of an item you want to adjust.
5. Press the [PREVIOUS SCREEN] key to return
from each of the adjustment screens to the
"Image adjustment menu screen."
1. Enter the 36 mode.
2. "36 mode menu screen"
Press the [2. Image adjustment] key.
3. "Image adjustment menu screen"
Press the [1. Magnification adjustment] key.
4. "Magnification adjustment menu screen"
For the magnification adjustment, the following
items are provided:
[1. Printer vertical mag.adj.]
[2. Printer horizontal mag.adj.]
[3. Scanner vertical mag.adj.]
[4. Belt line speed adjustment]
[5. Fixing line speed adjustment]
5. Press the key of an item you want to adjust.
6. Press the [PREVIOUS SCREEN] key to return
from each of the adjustment screens to the
"Magnification adjustment menu screen."
CF5001 Field Service Ver.1.0 Sep 2003 36 MODE
2-61
II A
DJ
US
TM
EN
T
(1) Printer vertical magnification adjustment
Adjust the vertical magnification of the printer sys-
tem.
This adjustment changes the line speed of the reg-
istration roller, drum, transfer belt and the fixing.
This adjustment can be shown in the key operator
mode by setting the DIPSW12-1 to 1.
Note:
• For the printer vertical magnification adjust-
ment, the following two methods are available.
Be sure to take care when an adjustment is
made.
(1) Printer vertical magnification adjustment
Used when the vertical magnification has
been changed due to the wear of the regis-
tration roller or the heat shrinkage of
paper.
(2) Belt line speed adjustment
Used when the vertical magnification has
been changed due to causes other than
the above.
• In default, the printer vertical magnification
adjustment on side 2 is not reflected to the
image. When adjusting the vertical magnifica-
tion on side 2, use the memory switch in the
key operator mode to turn ON side 2 drum
clock adjustment mode. However, since the
line speed is switched for each image creation
process on side 1 and side 2, the print speed
is reduced to about 1/4.
a. Procedure
1. Enter the 36 mode.
2. "36 mode menu screen"
Press the [2. Image adjustment] key.
3. "Image adjustment menu screen"
Press the [1. Magnification adjustment] key.
4. "Magnification adjustment menu screen"
Press the [1. Printer vertical mag. adj.] key.
5. "Printer vertical mag. adjustment screen"
Press the [COPY SCREEN] key.
6. Select the A3 or 11 x 17 paper and press the
START button to output a test pattern (No. 16).
7. Measure the vertical magnification with a scale.
• Standard value: 0.5% or less (when in life-size)Within ± 1mm against 205.7 mm
8. When the value is not within the standard,
press the C button while pressing the P button.
9. "Printer vertical magnification adjustment
screen"
For the printer vertical magnification adjustment, the
following items are provided. Press the [NEXT
ADJUSTMENT] key or [PREVIOUS ADJUSTMENT]
key to select an item you want to adjust.
• "Printer vertical mag. adjustment": Side 1 andside 2 are adjusted at the same time.
Setting range: -300 to +300, 1 step = 0.01%
• "Tray 1 offset (ADU)": Tray 1 side 2 adjustmentSetting range: -100 to +100, 1 step = 0.01%
• "Tray 2 offset (ADU)": Tray 2 side 2 adjustmentSetting range: -100 to +100, 1 step = 0.01%
• "Tray 3 offset (ADU)": Tray 3 side 2 adjustmentSetting range: -100 to +100, 1 step = 0.01%
• "By-pass tray offset (ADU)": By-pass tray side 2adjustment
Setting range: -100 to +100, 1 step = 0.01%
• "Back tray 4 offset": LCT side 2 adjustmentSetting range: -100 to +100, 1 step = 0.01%
10. Enter a numeric value through the numeric
keys and press the [SET] key.
11. Repeat steps 5 to 10 until the standard value
can be obtained.
12. Press the [PREVIOUS SCREEN] key to return
to the "Magnification adjustment menu
screen."
205.7 1
8050fs1006
36 MODE CF5001 Field Service Ver.1.0 Sep 2003
2-62
II A
DJ
US
TM
EN
T
(2) Printer horizontal magnification adjustment
Adjust the horizontal magnification of the printer
system.
This adjustment changes the horizontal magnifica-
tion in image processing prior to the laser exposure.
This adjustment can be shown in the key operator
mode by setting the DIPSW12-1 to 1.
a. Procedure
1. Enter the 36 mode.
2. "36 mode menu screen"
Press the [2. Image adjustment] key.
3. "Image adjustment menu screen"
Press the [1. Magnification adjustment] key.
4. "Magnification adjustment menu screen"
Press the [2. Printer horizontal magnification
adjustment] key.
5. "Printer horizontal magnification adjustment
screen"
Press the [COPY SCREEN] key.
6. Select the A3 or 11 x 17 paper and press the
START button to output a test pattern (No. 16).
7. Measure the horizontal magnification with a
scale.
• Standard value: 0.5% or less (when in life-size)Within ± 1 mm against 190 mm
8. When the value is not within the standard,
press the C button while pressing the P button.
190 8050fs1007
9. "Printer horizontal magnification adjustment
screen"
For the printer horizontal magnification adjust-
ment, the following items are provided. Press
the [NEXT ADJUSTMENT] key or [PREVIOUS
ADJUSTMENT] key to select an item you want
to adjust.
• "Printer horizontal magnification adjustment":Side 1 and side 2 are adjusted at the sametime.
Setting range: -100 to +100, 1 step = 0.01%
• "Tray 1 offset (ADU)": Tray 1 side 2 adjustmentSetting range: -100 to +100, 1 step = 0.01%
• "Tray 2 offset (ADU)": Tray 2 side 2 adjustmentSetting range: -100 to +100, 1 step = 0.01%
• "Tray 3 offset (ADU)": Tray 3 side 2 adjustmentSetting range: -100 to +100, 1 step = 0.01%
• "By-pass tray offset (ADU)": By-pass tray side 2adjustment
Setting range: -100 to +100, 1 step = 0.01%
• "Tray 4 offset (ADU)": LCT side 2 adjustmentSetting range: -100 to +100, 1 step = 0.01%
10. Enter a numeric value through the numeric
keys and press the [SET] key.
11. Repeat steps 5 to 10 until the standard value
can be obtained.
12. Press the [PREVIOUS SCREEN] key to return
to the "Magnification adjustment menu
screen."
CF5001 Field Service Ver.1.0 Sep 2003 36 MODE
2-63
II A
DJ
US
TM
EN
T
(3) Scanner vertical magnification adjustment
Adjust the vertical magnification of the scanner sys-
tem.
This adjustment changes the scan speed.
This adjustment can be shown in the key operator
mode by setting the DIPSW12-1 to 1.
a. Procedure
1. Enter the 36 mode.
2. "36 mode menu screen"
Press the [2. Image adjustment] key.
3. "Image adjustment menu screen"
Press the [1. Magnification adjustment] key.
4. "Magnification adjustment menu screen"
Press the [3. Scanner vertical mag. adj.] key.
5. "Scanner vertical mag. adjustment screen"
Press the [COPY SCREEN] key.
6. Select the A3 or 11 x 17 paper and press the
START button with a test chart set to the origi-
nal glass.
7. Measure the vertical magnification with a
scale.
• Standard value: 0.5% or less (when in life-size)Within ± 1 mm against 200 mm
200 8050fs1008
8. When the value is not within to the standard,
press the C button while pressing the P button.
9. "Scanner vertical mag. adjustment screen"
Enter a numeric value through the numeric
keys and press the [SET] key.
• Setting range: -40 to +40, 1 step = 0.05%
10. Repeat steps 5 to 9 until the standard value
can be obtained.
11. Press the [PREVIOUS SCREEN] key to return
to the "Magnification adjustment menu
screen."
36 MODE CF5001 Field Service Ver.1.0 Sep 2003
2-64
II A
DJ
US
TM
EN
T
(4) Belt line speed adjustment
Adjust the vertical magnification of the printer sys-
tem.
This adjustment charges line speed of the transfer
belt.
Note:
• For the printer vertical magnification adjust-
ment, the following two methods are available.
Be sure to take care when an adjustment is
made.
(1) Printer vertical magnification adjustment
Used when the vertical magnification has
been changed due to the wear of the regis-
tration roller or the heat shrinkage of
paper.
(2) Belt line speed adjustment
Used when the vertical magnification has
been changed due to causes other than
the above.
a. Procedure
1. Enter the 36 mode.
2. "36 mode menu screen"
Press the [2. Image adjustment] key.
3. "Image adjustment menu screen"
Press the [1. Magnification adjustment] key.
4. "Magnification adjustment menu screen"
Press the [4. Belt line speed adjustment] key.
5. "Belt line speed adjustment screen"
Press the [COPY SCREEN] key.
6. Select the A3 or 11 x 17 paper and press the
START button to output a test pattern (No. 16).
7. Measure the vertical magnification with a
scale.
• Standard value: 0.5% or less (when in life-size)Within ± 1 mm against 205.7 mm
8. If the specification is not satisfied, press the C
button while pressing the P button.
9. "Belt line speed adjustment screen"
Enter a numeric value through the numeric
keys and press the [SET] key.
• Setting range: -100 to +100, 1 step = 0.01%
10. Repeat steps 5 to 9 until the standard value
can be obtained.
11. Press the [PREVIOUS SCREEN] key to return
to the "Magnification adjustment menu
screen."
205.7 1
8050fs1006
CF5001 Field Service Ver.1.0 Sep 2003 36 MODE
2-65
II A
DJ
US
TM
EN
T
(5) Fixing line speed adjustment
When replacing the fixing roller/U, /L and transfer
belt, use this adjustment method to adjust the fixing
roller line speed.
When the fixing line speed is faster than the transfer
belt, this results in an increased vertical magnifica-
tion or transfer jittering. And when the fixing line
speed is slower than the transfer belt, this results in
the trailing edge of the image will be soiled.
Note:
• When adjusting it, be sure to use the "paper
for fixing speed adjustment" (P/N 65AA-991*).
Otherwise, the fixing line speed cannot be
accurately adjusted.
a. Procedure
1. Enter the 36 mode.
2. "36 mode menu screen"
Press the [2. Image adjustment] key.
3. "Image adjustment menu screen"
Press the [1. Magnification adjustment] key.
4. "Magnification adjustment menu screen"
Press the [5. Fixing line speed adjustment] key.
5. "Set the cyan density screen"
Press the [DENSITY] key.
6. With the fixing adjustment paper set to the by-
pass tray, press the START button to output a
test pattern.
Based on a cyan half-tone, a test pattern is
output.
Note:
• When adjusting it, be sure to use the "paper
for fixing speed adjustment." Otherwise, it
cannot be accurately adjusted.
7. Compare the fixing adjustment density patches
(upper and lower limit samples of density that
are packed with the "paper for fixing speed
adjustment") with the cyan density of the out-
putted paper, and check to see if the cyan den-
sity of the output paper is within the limit of the
fixing density standard patches.
8. When it is not within the limit, press the C but-
ton while pressing the P button.
9. "Set the cyan density screen"
Enter a numeric value through the numeric
keys and press the [SET] key.
• Setting range: 0 to 255
10. Repeat steps 5 to 9 until the density ges inside
the limit.
11. "Set the cyan density screen"
Press the [NEXT ADJUSTMENT] key.
12. "Push [Sample] and print 8 sheets screen"
Press the [8 SAMPLES] key.
13. With 8 sheets of the fixing adjustment paper
set to the by-pass tray, press the START button
to output a test pattern.
Note:
• Be sure to conduct this operation with the
copy count set to 1.
14. With the image formation line speed variable
automatically at intervals of about 25 seconds,
8 sheets of test patterns based on cyan half-
tone are output.
15. With a pen, write serial numbers from 1 to 8 on
the output sheets in order of the paper exit
(bottom to top).
36 MODE CF5001 Field Service Ver.1.0 Sep 2003
2-66
II A
DJ
US
TM
EN
T
7.3.2 Timing adjustment
Adjust various timings.
A. Procedure
16. Comparing the output image on the first sheet
with the remaining 7 output sheets, find out an
output sheet in which the distance between the
magenta line at the lead edge and the first
black line at the trail edge (10 lines at intervals
of 1 mm) gets 1 mm stretched.
Note:
• The image does not stretch gradually for
each output sheet. It suddenly stretches at a
certain sheet. Therefore, be sure to measure
each sheet in order of output.
17. Press the C button while pressing the P button.
18. "Set the cyan density screen"
Enter the number of the output sheet that
stretches 1 mm through the numeric keys and
press the [SET] key.
19. Press the [PREVIOUS SCREEN] key to return
to the "Magnification adjustment menu
screen."
8050fs1009
1. Enter the 36 mode.
2. "36 mode menu screen"
Press the [2. Image adjustment] key.
3. "Image adjustment menu screen"
Press the [2. Timing adjustment] key.
4. "Timing adjustment menu screen"
For the timing adjustment, the following items
are provided:
[1. Printer lead edge timing adj.]
[2. Printer registration loop adj.]
[3. Printer pre-registration adj.]
[4. Printer erasure amount adj.]
[5. Scanner re-start timing adj.]
[6. RADF registration loop adj.]
[7. Writing unit skew initial adj.]
[8. Auto. color registration adj.]
[9. Color registration manual adj.]
5. Press the key of an item you want to adjust.
6. Press the [PREVIOUS SCREEN] key to return
from each of the adjustment screens to the
"Timing adjustment menu screen."
CF5001 Field Service Ver.1.0 Sep 2003 36 MODE
2-67
II A
DJ
US
TM
EN
T
(1) Printer lead edge timing adjustment
Adjust the lead edge timing.
This adjustment changes the paper restart timing
from the registration roller.
This adjustment can be shown in the key operator
mode by setting DIPSW12-1 to 1.
Note:
• Be sure the printer vertical magnification has
been adjusted.
a. Procedure
1. Enter the 36 mode.
2. "36 mode menu screen"
Press the [2. Image adjustment] key.
3. "Image adjustment menu screen"
Press the [2. Timing adjustment] key.
4. "Timing adjustment mode menu screen"
Press the [1. Printer lead edge timing adj.] key.
5. "Lead edge timing (Tray 1) screen"
For the printer lead edge timing adjustment,
the following items are provided. Press the
[NEXT ADJUSTMENT] key or [PREVIOUS
ADJUSTMENT] key to select an item you want
to adjust.
• "Lead edge timing (Tray 1)"• "Lead edge timing (Tray 2)"• "Lead edge timing (Tray 3)"• "Lead edge timing (Bypass)"• "Lead edge timing (Tray 4)"• "Lead edge timing (ADU)"• "Tray large size normal paper offset"• "Tray large size thick paper offset"• "Tray small size normal paper offset"• "Tray small size thick paper offset"• "Bypass large size normal paper offset"• "Bypass large size thick paper offset"• "Bypass small size normal paper offset"• "Bypass small size thick paper offset"• "Large size normal paper offset (ADU)"• "Large size thick paper offset (ADU)"• "Small size normal paper offset (ADU)"• "Small size thick paper offset (ADU)"
Note:
• Large size: 300 mm or more in length in the
paper feed direction
• Small size: 300 mm or less in length in the
paper feed direction
• Thick Paper: 106 g/m2 or more
6. Enter a numeric value through the numeric
keys and press the [SET] key.
7. Press the [COPY SCREEN] key.
8. Set the copy setting according to the item
adjusted and press the START button to output
a test pattern (No. 16).
9. Measure the lead edge timing with a scale.
• Standard value: 20 mm ± 0.5 mm
10. When the value is not within the standard,
press the C button while pressing the P button.
11. "Printer lead edge timing screen"
Enter a numeric value through the numeric
keys and press the [SET] key.
• Setting range: -100 to +100, 1 step = 0.1 mm
12. Repeat steps 6 to 10 until the standard value is
obtained.
13. Press the [PREVIOUS SCREEN] key to return
to the "Timing adjustment mode menu screen."
20
8050fs1010
36 MODE CF5001 Field Service Ver.1.0 Sep 2003
2-68
II A
DJ
US
TM
EN
T
(2) Printer registration loop adjustment
Adjust the paper loop amount in the registration
roller section to remove paper skew and wrinkle, or
paper jamming in the registration section.
This adjustment can be shown in the key operator
mode by setting the DIPSW12-1 to 1.
a. Procedure
1. Enter the 36 mode.
2. "36 mode menu screen"
Press the [2. Image adjustment] key.
3. "Image adjustment menu screen"
Press the [2. Timing adjustment] key.
4. "Timing adjustment mode menu screen"
Press the [2. Printer registration loop adj.] key.
5. "Printer registration loop adjustment screen
(Tray 1)"
For the printer registration loop adjustment, the
following items are provided. Press the [NEXT
ADJUSTMENT] key or [PREVIOUS ADJUST-
MENT] key to select an item you want to
adjust.
• "Printer registration loop adjustment (Tray 1 L)"• "Printer registration loop adjustment (Tray 1 S)"• "Printer registration loop adjustment (Tray 2 L)"• "Printer registration loop adjustment (Tray 2 S)"• "Printer registration loop adjustment (Tray 3 L)"• "Printer registration loop adjustment (Tray 3 S)"• "Printer registration loop adjustment
(Bypass L)"• "Printer registration loop adjustment
(Bypass S)"• "Printer registration loop adjustment (Tray 4 L)"• "Printer registration loop adjustment (Tray 4 S)"• "Printer registration loop adjustment (ADU L)"• "Printer registration loop adjustment (ADU S)"• "Printer registration loop adjustment (Thick)"
Note:
• Large size: 300 mm or more in length in the
paper feed direction
• Small size: 300 mm or less in length in the
paper feed direction
• Thick Paper: 106 g/m2 or more
6. Enter a numeric value through the numeric
keys and press the [SET] key.
7. Press the [COPY SCREEN] key.
8. Set the copy according to the item that has
been adjusted and press the START button to
output a test pattern (No. 16).
9. If the printer registration loop amount is not
appropriate, press the C button while pressing
the P button.
10. "Printer registration loop adj. screen"
Enter a numeric value through the numeric
keys and press the [SET] key.
• Setting range: -99 to +99, 1 step = 0.1 mm
11. Repeat steps 6 to 10 until the standard value is
obtained.
12. Press the [PREVIOUS SCREEN] key to return
to the "Timing adjustment mode menu screen."
CF5001 Field Service Ver.1.0 Sep 2003 36 MODE
2-69
II A
DJ
US
TM
EN
T
(3) Printer pre-registration adjustment
Adjust the paper loop amount in each tray and the
ADU pre-registration roller section to remove paper
skew and wrinkle, or paper jamming in the pre-reg-
istration section.
This adjustment can be shown in the key operator
mode by setting the DIPSW12-1 to 1.
a. Procedure(4) Printer erasure amount adjustment
Conduct an erasure amount adjustment.
This adjustment can be shown in the key operator
mode by setting the DIPSW12-1 to 1.
a. Procedure
1. Enter the 36 mode.
2. "36 mode menu screen"
Press the [2. Image adjustment] key.
3. "Image adjustment menu screen"
Press the [2. Timing adjustment] key.
4. "Timing adjustment mode menu screen"
Press the [3. Printer pre-registration adj.] key.
5. "Printer pre-registration adj. screen (Tray 1)"
For the printer pre-registration adjustment, the
following items are provided. Press the [NEXT
ADJUSTMENT] key or [PREVIOUS ADJUST-
MENT] key to select an item you want to
adjust.
• "Printer pre-registration adj. (Tray 1)"• "Printer pre-registration adj. (Tray 2)"• "Printer pre-registration adj. (Tray 3)"• "Printer pre-registration adj. (Tray 4)"• "Printer pre-registration adj. (ADU)"
6. Enter a numeric value through the numeric
keys and press the [SET] key.
7. Press the [COPY SCREEN] key.
8. Select the A3 or 11 x 17 paper and press the
START button to output a test pattern (No. 16).
9. When the printer pre-registration amount is not
appropriate, press the C button while pressing
the P button.
10. "Printer pre-registration adj. screen"
Enter a numeric value through the numeric
keys and press the [SET] key.
• Setting range: -99 to +99, 1 step = 0.1 mm
11. Repeat steps 6 to 10 until the standard value is
obtained.
12. Press the [PREVIOUS SCREEN] key to return
to the "Timing adjustment mode menu screen."
1. Enter the 36 mode.
2. "36 mode menu screen"
Press the [2. Image adjustment] key.
3. "Image adjustment menu screen"
Press the [2. Timing adjustment] key.
4. "Timing adjustment mode menu screen"
Press the [4. Printer erasure amount adj.] key.
5. "Printer erasure amount adjustment screen"
Press the [COPY SCREEN] key.
6. Select the A3 or 11 x 17 paper and press the
START button with a test chart set to the origi-
nal glass.
7. Check the printer erasure amount.
• Standard value: 3mm or less
8. When the value is not within the standard,
press the C button while pressing the P button.
9. "Printer erasure amount adjustment screen"
Enter a numeric value through the numeric
keys and press the [SET] key.
• Setting range: -20 to +40, 1 step = 0.1 mm
10. Repeat steps 6 to 9 until the standard value is
obtained.
11. Press the [PREVIOUS SCREEN] key to return
to the "Timing adjustment mode menu screen."
36 MODE CF5001 Field Service Ver.1.0 Sep 2003
2-70
II A
DJ
US
TM
EN
T
(5) Scanner re-start timing adjustment
Adjust re-start timing of original scanning.
In this adjustment, the starting position for reading
while in the original scanning mode is adjusted.
This adjustment can be shown in the key operator
mode by setting the DIPSW12-1 to 1.
Note:
• Make sure that the printer timing adjustment
has been completed.
a. Procedure
(6) RADF registration loop adjustment
Adjust the original loop amount in the RADF regis-
tration roller section to remove paper skew and
wrinkle, or paper jamming in the registration sec-
tion.
This adjustment can be shown in the key operator
mode by setting the DIPSW12-1 to 1.
a. Procedure
1. Enter the 36 mode.
2. "36 mode menu screen"
Press the [2. Image adjustment] key.
3. "Image adjustment menu screen"
Press the [2. Timing adjustment] key.
4. "Timing adjustment mode menu screen"
Press the [5. Scanner re-start timing adj.] key.
5. "Scanner re-start timing adjustment screen"
Press the [COPY SCREEN] key.
6. Select the A3 or 11 x 17 paper and press the
START button with a test chart set to the origi-
nal glass.
7. Check the scanner re-start timing.
• Standard value: 3mm or less
8. When the value is not within the standard,
press the C button while pressing the P button.
9. "Scanner re-start timing adjustment screen"
Enter a numeric value through the numeric
keys and press the [SET] key.
• Setting range: -10 to +20, 1 step = 0.1mm
10. Repeat steps 6 to 9 until the standard value is
obtained.
11. Press the [PREVIOUS SCREEN] key to return
to the "Timing adjustment mode menu screen."
1. Enter the 36 mode.
2. "36 mode menu screen"
Press the [2. Image adjustment] key.
3. "Image adjustment menu screen"
Press the [2. Timing adjustment] key.
4. "Timing adjustment mode menu screen"
Press the [6. RADF registration loop adj.] key.
5. "RADF registration loop adjustment screen"
Press the [COPY SCREEN] key.
6. Select the A3 paper and press the START but-
ton with a test chart set to the original glass.
7. If the RADF registration loop amount is not
appropriate, press the C button while pressing
the P button.
8. "RADF registration loop adjustment screen"
Enter a numeric value through the numeric
keys and press the [SET] key.
• Setting range: -7 to +7, 1 step = 0.5mm
9. Repeat steps 5 to 8 until the standard value is
obtained.
10. Press the [PREVIOUS SCREEN] key to return
to the "Timing adjustment mode menu screen."
CF5001 Field Service Ver.1.0 Sep 2003 36 MODE
2-71
II A
DJ
US
TM
EN
T
(7) Writing unit skew initial adjustment
Store a skew correction position data along the
main scan of a new write unit (Y, M and C only) in
the memory board (MB).
The data is updated automatically by the auto. color
registration adjustment.
Note:
• When any of the write units Y, M and C is
replaced, be sure to start the main body in the
36 mode for this adjustment.
a. Procedure
(8) Auto. color registration adjustment
Make this adjustment when there is a color registra-
tion error. The main scan, sub-scan, horizontal
magnification and the skew of color registration
error are automatically adjusted.
This adjustment can be shown in the key operator
mode by setting the DIPSW12-1 to 1.
Note:
• This auto. color registration adjustment has a
larger correction area than that of the color
registration auto correction in the user mode.
So, be sure to perform this adjustment when a
SC45-20 occurs.
a. Procedure
1. Enter the 36 mode.
2. "36 mode menu screen"
Press the [2. Image adjustment] key.
3. "Image adjustment mode menu screen"
Press the [2. Timing adjustment] key.
4. "Timing adjustment menu screen"
Press the [7. Writing unit skew initial adj.] key.
5. "Writing unit skew int. adj. screen"
Press the [Start] key.
6. Adjustment starts for all the write units Y, M
and C at the same time, and a message "Com-
plete" is shown in about a minute.
7. Press the [PREVIOUS SCREEN] key to return
to the "Timing adjustment mode menu screen."
1. Enter the 36 mode.
2. "36 mode menu screen"
Press the [2. Image adjustment] key.
3. "Image adjustment mode menu screen"
Press the [2. Timing adjustment] key.
4. "Timing adjustment menu screen"
Press the [8. Auto. color registration adj.] key.
5. "Color registration adj. screen"
Press the [Start] key.
6. The color registration adjustment starts and a
message "Complete" is shown in about 2 min-
utes.
When the error message appears, perform an
error correction referring to the below.
• Error 1: It does not converge within the stan-dard value. The patch density may be too light.Check around the drum unit and per-form the gamma automatic adjustment(0). Then perform this adjustment.
• Error 2: The difference of the color registrationis too much.
• Error 3: The other errorSC other than the color registrationautomatic adjustment may occur.Restart the main body in the normalmode to check for SC code.
7. "Color registration adj. screen"
When pressing the [LIST] key, the main scan,
sub-scan, horizontal magnification and the
skew of Y, M and C compared based on K after
adjustment are shown.
8. Press the [PREVIOUS SCREEN] key to return
to the "Timing adjustment mode menu screen."
36 MODE CF5001 Field Service Ver.1.0 Sep 2003
2-72
II A
DJ
US
TM
EN
T
(9) Color registration manual adjustment (par-
tial horizontal adjustment)
With respect to the main scan, entire horizontal
magnification, partial horizontal magnification, sub-
scan, inclination and the scan inclination, the regis-
tration error amount of Y, M and C compared based
on K is shown on the operation panel. The partial
horizontal magnification that cannot be corrected
automatically is manually adjusted.
Note:
• Be sure that the printer vertical and horizontal
magnifications have been complete.
• Make sure that the auto. color registration
adjustment has been completed.
a. Procedure
1. Enter the 36 mode.
2. "36 mode menu screen"
Press the [2. Image adjustment] key.
3. "Image adjustment menu screen"
Press the [2. Timing adjustment] key.
4. "Timing adjustment mode menu screen"
Press the [9. Color registration manual adj.]
key.
5. "Color registration manual adj. screen"
Press the [COPY SCREEN] key.
6. Select the A3 or 11 x 17 paper and press the
START button to output a test pattern.
Place the test pattern [1] outputted securely
against the original positioning plate /L [2] and
the original positioning plate /R [3] to set it to
the original glass, and close the DF or platen
cover.
Note:
• When setting the test pattern to the original
glass, be sure to take check of the setting
direction and position.
• Check that the settings for all colors (Y, M, C,
K) in the [Test pattern density setting] of 36
mode is set to 255. If not, it results in an
error.
7. Press the C button while pressing the P button.
8. "Color registration manual adj. screen"
Press the [SCAN] key to scan the test pattern.
9. The amount of error of the "MainScan" (main
scan), "Mag(ALL)" (entire horizontal magnifica-
tion), "Mag(PART)" (partial horizontal magnifi-
cation), "SubScan" (sub-scan), "Incline"
(inclination) and the "ScanBend" (scan incline)
of Y, M and C are compared based on K and
result are shown at "Rest" section on the oper-
ation panel (unit is pixel).
8050fs1011[1]
[3]
[2]
CF5001 Field Service Ver.1.0 Sep 2003 36 MODE
2-73
II A
DJ
US
TM
EN
T
10. Make sure that "OK" is displayed for all the
items.
When any item is not within the standard, an
error code is displayed for each cause together
with an NG. Make an error correction referring
to the below:
When a "NG" occurs in the "MainScan",
"Mag(ALL)", "SubScan" or "Incline," perform
the auto. color registration adjustment again.
• Error 1: A chart pattern cannot be detected.Improper positioning of the chart.
• Error 2: The setting direction of a chart isupside down.Improper positioning of the chart.
• Error 3: A chart pattern cannot be detected.A different type of chart.
• Error 4: Adjustment is impossible.Software bugged.
• Error 5: Not within the standard value.Re-adjust it.
• Error 6: Nonvolatile data abnormality.Check the installation of memoryboard.
• Error 7: Memory other than those specified isaccessed.Software bugged.
• Error 8: Memory related error.Software bugged.
• Error 9: Program error.Software bugged.
• Error 10: The chart is skew.Improper positioning of the chart.
• Error 11: Image header information read error.Software bugged.
• Error 12: An argument set error.Software bugged.
• Error 13: A measurement error.Improper positioning of the chart, or adefective chart.
11. When a "NG" occurs in the "MainScan",
"Mag(ALL)" or "Mag(PART)," open the toner
supply section and loosen 2 screws [1] pro-
vided near the developing unit of a color from
which an "NG" is displayed. Then, slide the
adjustment plate [2] up and down to adjust the
partial horizontal magnification. Moving the
adjustment plate [2] upward reduces the partial
horizontal magnification data (minus) and mov-
ing the plate downward increases it (plus).
• Adjustment targetMove the adjustment plate [2] by referring to the"Rest" of "Mag(PART)" (partial horizontal mag-nification) (unit: pixel) displayed at the operationpanel. The scale of the adjustment plate [2]changes about 0.5 pixel per notch.
12. Press the [PREVIOUS SCREEN] key to return
to the "Timing adjustment menu screen."
13. Conduct the color registration adjustment
referring to (8) Auto. color registration adjust-
ment.
14. Repeat steps 4 to 13 until "OK" is displayed.
15. Press the [PREVIOUS SCREEN] key to return
to the "Timing adjustment mode menu screen."
[1]
[2]
8050fs1012
36 MODE CF5001 Field Service Ver.1.0 Sep 2003
2-74
II A
DJ
US
TM
EN
T
7.3.3 RADF adjustment
Conduct the original size adjustment, original stop
position adjustment and the sensor adjustment of
the RADF.
A. Procedure
(1) RADF original size adjustment
Conduct this adjustment when the RADF original
size is not properly detected.
a. Procedure
1. Enter the 36 mode.
2. "36 mode menu screen"
Press the [2. Image adjustment] key.
3. "Image adjustment mode menu screen"
Press the [3. RADF adjustment] key.
4. "RADF adjustment menu screen"
For the RADF adjustment, the following items
are provided:
[1. RADF original size adjustment]
[2. RADF orig. stop position adj.]
[3. RADF sensor adjustment]
5. Press the key of an item you want to adjust.
6. Press the [PREVIOUS SCREEN] key to return
from each of the adjustment screens to the
"RADF adjustment menu screen."
1. Enter the 36 mode.
2. "36 mode menu screen"
Press the [2. Image adjustment] key.
3. "Image adjustment mode menu screen"
Press the [3. RADF adjustment] key.
4. "RADF adjustment menu screen"
Press the [1. RADF original size adjustment]
key.
5. "RADF original size adjustment (A4) or (8.5 x
11) screen"
With the A4 (for metric machine) or 8.5 x 11
(for inch machine) paper set to the RADF,
press the [Start] key.
6. After confirmation of a message "Complete,"
press the [NEXT ADJUSTMENT] key.
7. "RADF original size adjustment (A5R) or (5.5 x
8.5R) screen"
With the A5R (for metric machine) or 5.5 x
8.5R (for inch machine) paper set to the RADF,
press the [Start] key.
8. After confirmation of a message "Complete,"
press the [NEXT ADJUSTMENT] key.
9. "RADF original size adjustment (A4R) or (8.5 x
11R) screen"
With the A4R (for metric machine) or 8.5 x 11R
(for inch machine) paper set to the RADF,
press the [Start] key.
10. After confirmation of a message "Complete,"
press the [COPY SCREEN] key.
11. Make sure that the RADF original size is prop-
erly detected.
12. Press the C button while pressing P button.
13. Press the [PREVIOUS SCREEN] key to return
to the "RADF adjustment menu screen."
CF5001 Field Service Ver.1.0 Sep 2003 36 MODE
2-75
II A
DJ
US
TM
EN
T
(2) RADF original stop position adjustment
Conduct the original stop position leading edge tim-
ing (leading edge timing) adjustment of the RADF.
Note:
• Make sure that the printer lead edge timing
adjustment and the scanner re-start timing
adjustment have been completed.
a. Procedure
(3) RADF sensor adjustment
Conduct this adjustment when malfunction occurs
in the reflective type sensors.
a. Procedure
1. Enter the 36 mode.
2. "36 mode menu screen"
Press the [2. Image adjustment] key.
3. "Image adjustment mode menu screen"
Press the [3. RADF adjustment] key.
4. "RADF adjustment menu screen"
Press the [2. RADF orig. stop position] key.
5. "Front plain paper/thick paper screen"
For the RADF orig. stop position adj., the fol-
lowing items are provided. Press the [NEXT
ADJUSTMENT] key or [PREVIOUS ADJUST-MENT] key to select an item you want to
adjust.
[Normal & Thick paper (Front side)]
[Thin paper (Front side)]
[Normal & Thick paper (Back side)][Thin paper (Back side)]
6. Press the [COPY SCREEN] key.
7. With the original setting set to the copy mode
according to an item you want to adjust, set the
test chart to the RADF. And select the A3
paper and press the START button.
8. Check the RADF leading edge timing.
• Standard value: 3 mm or less
9. When the value is not within the standard,
press the C button while pressing the P button.
10. Enter a numeric value through the numeric
keys and press the [SET] key.
• Setting range: -14 to +14, 1 step = 0.5 mm
11. Repeat steps 6 to 10 until the standard value
can be obtained.
12. Press the [PREVIOUS SCREEN] key to return
to the "RADF adjustment mode menu screen."
1. Enter the 36 mode.
2. "36 mode menu screen"
Press the [2. Image adjustment] key.
3. "Image adjustment mode menu screen"
Press the [3. RADF adjustment] key.
4. "RADF adjustment menu screen"
Press the [3. RADF sensor adjustment] key.
5. "RADF sensor adjustment screen"
Close the RADF and press the [Start] key.
The sensitivity of the RADF sensors are auto-
matically adjusted.
6. Press the [PREVIOUS SCREEN] key to return
to the "RADF adjustment mode menu screen."
36 MODE CF5001 Field Service Ver.1.0 Sep 2003
2-76
II A
DJ
US
TM
EN
T
7.3.4 Centring adjustment
Adjust the mis-centering of images vertical to the
paper feed direction.
A. Procedure
(1) Printer centring adjustment
This adjustment changes the laser writing start tim-
ing.
This adjustment can be shown in the key operator
mode by setting the DIPSW12-1 to 1.
Note:
• Be sure that the printer horizontal magnifica-
tion has been completed.
a. Procedure
1. Enter the 36 mode.
2. "36 mode menu screen"
Press the [2. Image adjustment] key.
3. "Image adjustment mode menu screen"
Press the [4. Centring adjustment] key.
4. "Centring adjustment mode menu screen"
For the centering adjustment, the following
items are provided:
[1. Printer centring adjustment]
[2. Scanner centring adjustment]
[3. RADF centring adjustment]
5. Press the key of an item you want to adjust.
6. Press the [PREVIOUS SCREEN] key to return
from each of the adjustment screens to the
"Centring adjustment mode menu screen."
1. Enter the 36 mode.
2. "36 mode menu screen"
Press the [2. Image adjustment] key.
3. "Image adjustment mode menu screen"
Press the [4. Centring adjustment] key.
4. "Centring adjustment mode menu screen"
Press the [1. Printer centring adjustment] key.
5. "Printer centring adj. (Tray 1) screen"
For the printer centering adjustment, the fol-
lowing items are provided. Press the [NEXT
ADJUSTMENT] key or [PREVIOUS ADJUST-
MENT] key to select an item you want to
adjust.
• "Printer centring adj. (Tray 1)"• "Printer centring adj. (Tray 2)"• "Printer centring adj. (Tray 3)"• "Printer centring adj. (Bypass)"• "Printer centring adj. (Tray 4)"• "Printer centring adj. (ADU)"• "Large size offset (Tray 1)"• "Small size offset (Tray 1)"• "8.5 x 5.5 offset (Tray 1)"• "Large size offset (Tray 2)"• "Small size offset (Tray 2)"• "8.5 x 5.5 offset (Tray 2)"• "Large size offset (Tray 3)"• "Small size offset (Tray 3)"• "8.5 x 5.5 offset (Tray 3)"• "Large size offset (Bypass)"• "Small size offset (Bypass)"• "8.5 x 5.5 offset (Bypass)"• "Large size offset (Tray 4)"• "Small size offset (Tray 4)"• "Large size normal paper offset (ADU)"• "Large size thick paper offset (ADU)"• "Small size normal paper offset (ADU)"• "Small size thick paper offset (ADU)"• "8.5 x 5.5 normal paper offset (ADU)"• "8.5 x 5.5 thick paper offset (ADU)"
Note:
• Large size: 300mm or more in length in the
paper feed direction
• Small size: 300mm or less in length in the
paper feed direction
• Thick Paper: 106g/m2 or more
6. Press the [COPY SCREEN] key.
7. Select the paper size and the type of paper
according to an item you want to adjust, and
press the START button to output a test pattern
(No. 16).
CF5001 Field Service Ver.1.0 Sep 2003 36 MODE
2-77
II A
DJ
US
TM
EN
T
(2) Scanner centring adjustment
Adjust the centring when scanning the platen origi-
nal.
This adjustment changes the reading timing of the
CCD.
This adjustment can be shown in the key operator
mode by setting the DIPSW12-1 to 1.
Note:
• Make sure that the printer centering adjust-
ment has been completed.
a. Procedure
8. Fold the outputted paper in the paper feed
direction and check the amount of error of the
lines on both sides.
• Standard value: Within ± 2mm
9. When the value is not within the standard,
press the C button while pressing the P button.
10. Enter a numeric value through the numeric
keys and press the [SET] key.
• Setting range: -40 to +40, 1 step = 0.1mm
11. Repeat steps 6 to 10 until the standard value
can be obtained.
12. Press the [PREVIOUS SCREEN] key to return
to the "Centring adjustment mode menu
screen."
1. Enter the 36 mode.
2. "36 mode menu screen"
Press the [2. Image adjustment] key.
3. "Image adjustment mode menu screen"
Press the [4. Centring adjustment] key.
4. "Centring adjustment mode menu screen"
Press the [2. Scanner centring adjustment]
key.
5. "Scanner (platen) centring adjustment screen"
Press the [COPY SCREEN] key.
6. Select the A3 or 11 x 17 paper and press the
START button with a test chart set to the origi-
nal glass.
7. Fold the outputted paper in the paper feed
direction and check the amount of error of the
lines on both sides.
• Standard value: Within ± 2mm
8. When the value is not within the standard,
press the C button while pressing the P button.
9. Enter a numeric value through the numeric
keys and press the [SET] key.
• Setting range: -30 to +30, 1 step = 0.1mm
10. Repeat steps 6 to 9 until the standard value is
obtained.
11. Press the [PREVIOUS SCREEN] key to return
to the "Centring adjustment mode menu
screen."
36 MODE CF5001 Field Service Ver.1.0 Sep 2003
2-78
II A
DJ
US
TM
EN
T
(3) RADF centring adjustment
Adjusts the centring when scanning the RADF origi-
nal.
This adjustment changes the reading timing of the
CCD.
This adjustment can be shown in the key operator
mode by setting the DIPSW12-1 to 1.
Note:
• Make sure that the printer centering and scan-
ner centring adjustment has been completed.
a. Procedure
1. Enter the 36 mode.
2. "36 mode menu screen"
Press the [2. Image adjustment] key.
3. "Image adjustment mode menu screen"
Press the [4. Centring adjustment] key.
4. "Centring adjustment menu screen"
Press the [3. RADF centring adjustment] key.
5. "RADF centring adjustment (Front) screen"
For the RADF centering adjustment, the follow-
ing items are provided. Press the [NEXT
ADJUSTMENT] key or [PREVIOUS ADJUST-
MENT] key to select an item you want to
adjust.
• "RADF centring adjustment (Front)"• "RADF centring adjustment (Back)"
Press the [COPY SCREEN] key.
6. Select the A3 or 11 x 17 paper and press the
START button with a test chart set to the origi-
nal glass.
7. Fold the outputted paper in the paper feed
direction and check the amount of error of the
lines on both sides.
• Standard value: Within ± 2mm
8. When the value is not within the standard,
press the C button while pressing the P button.
9. Enter a numeric value through the numeric
keys and press the [SET] key.
• Setting range: -30 to +30, 1 step = 0.1mm
10. Repeat steps 6 to 9 until the standard value is
obtained.
11. Press the [PREVIOUS SCREEN] key to return
to the "Centring adjustment mode menu
screen."
CF5001 Field Service Ver.1.0 Sep 2003 36 MODE
2-79
II A
DJ
US
TM
EN
T
7.3.5 Non-image area erase check
When installing the copier or moving its installation
location, check to see if the "non-image area erase"
function of the copy application functions works sat-
isfactorily.
Preparations made in advance:
• Open fully the RADF or platen cover.• There should not be anything on the original
glass.• Clean the original glass.
A. Procedure
B. Error message and Handling
If the error is detected while perform the "non-image
area erase check" mode, following error message
will be displayed on the operation panel.
(1) Error message 1
Adjust for Moderate Brightness.
The Non-image area erase function may not oper-
ate correctly with dark (density) originals.
Please confirm "adjustment" - "36 MODE", columns
of Service manual.
Handling 1
When the "non-image area erase" function is not
used very frequently, or when copy originals that
have a dark background are not copied very fre-
quently in the "non-image area erase," the copier
can be used in the current installation location.
However, when copy originals that have a dark
background are frequently copied, install the copier
in a location or in a direction where less external
light get in (darker) than the present installation
location, and check the "non-image area erase
check mode" again.
(2) Error message 2
Adjust for Extreme Brightness.
In many case, the non-image area erase function
will not operate correctly.
Please confirm "adjustment" - "36 MODE", columns
of Service manual.
Handling 2
When the "non-image area erase" function is not
used very frequently, the copier can be used in the
current installation location. However, the outside-
original erasure function is frequently used, install
the copier in a location or in a direction where less
external light get in (darker) than the present instal-
lation location, and check the "non-image area
erase check mode" again. At this time, when there
is a bright light source such as a fluorescent light
installed directly above the copier, reconsider the
installation location or direction, or take some mea-
sures to shield the light source and check the "non-
image area erase check mode" again.
1. Enter the 36 mode.
2. "36 mode menu screen"
Press the [2. Image adjustment] key.
3. "Image adjustment mode menu screen"
Press the [5. Non-image area erase check]
key.
4. "Non-image area erase check screen"
Press the [Start] key.
5. Make sure that a message "Normal adjustment
selected ..." is shown on the operation panel.
When a message "Does not function satisfac-
torily ..." is shown, refer to "B. Error message
and Handling," to conduct the non-image area
erase check again.
6. Press the [PREVIOUS SCREEN] key to return
to the "Image adjustment menu screen."
36 MODE CF5001 Field Service Ver.1.0 Sep 2003
2-80
II A
DJ
US
TM
EN
T
7.3.6 Recall standard data
Reset the adjustment values of image adjustment to
the standard data. (factory default data)
Note:
• Data for the printer vertical magnification,
RADF registration loop, auto. color registra-
tion, color registration manual, RADF original
size, RADF original stop position and RADF
sensor adjustment cannot be reset to stan-
dard data.
A. Procedure
1. Enter the 36 mode.
2. "36 mode menu screen"
Press the [2. Image adjustment] key.
3. "Image adjustment menu screen"
Press the [5. Recall standard data] key.
4. "Recall standard data (image adjustment data)
screen"
Press the [YES] key when recalling the stan-
dard data. Pressing the [NO] key or [PREVI-
OUS SCREEN] key returns to the "Image
adjustment menu screen" without recalling the
standard data.
CF5001 Field Service Ver.1.0 Sep 2003 36 MODE
2-81
II A
DJ
US
TM
EN
T
7.4 Image quality adjustment
Conduct various image quality adjustments.
A. Procedure
7.4.1 Scanner gamma adjustment
Conduct the gradation correction of the scanner.
When color reproduction is in a poor condition, usu-
ally conduct the printer gamma correction.
When changing the CCD unit, exposure lamp (L1),
original glass or each scanner mirror, conduct this
adjustment.
Note:
• Scanner gamma has been adjusted for each
machine. Please be noted that the scanner
gamma data is rewritten to the mean value if
the [Adj. data reset] key in the "Scanner
gamma adjustment screen" is pressed.
A. Procedure
1. Enter the 36 mode.
2. "36 mode menu screen"
Press the [3. Image quality adjustment] key.
3. "Image quality mode menu screen"
For the image quality adjustment, the following
items are provided:
[1. Scanner gamma adjustment]
[2. Printer gamma adjustment]
[3. Sharpness adjustment]
[4. Contrast adjustment]
[5. Image judge adjustment]
[6. ACS adjustment]
[7. Density adjustment]
[8. Tone adjustment]
[9. Recall standard data]
4. Press the key of an item you want to adjust.
5. Press the [PREVIOUS SCREEN] key to return
from each of the adjustment screen to the
"Image quality mode menu screen."
1. After replacing a part, place a test chart on the
original glass, select A3 or 11 x 17 paper, and
press the START button.
2. Check for the foggy background or color bal-
ance.
3. If there is abnormality, enter the 36 mode.
4. "36 mode menu screen"
Press the [3. Image quality adjustment] key.
5. "Image quality mode menu screen"
Press the [1. Scanner gamma adjustment] key.
6. "Scanner gamma adjustment screen"
Press the [Adj. data reset] key.
Press the [YES] key when rewriting the scan-
ner gamma mean value. Press the [NO] to
return to the "Scanner gamma adjustment
screen" without rewriting.
7. Press the [PREVIOUS SCREEN] key to return
to the "Image quality mode menu screen."
36 MODE CF5001 Field Service Ver.1.0 Sep 2003
2-82
II A
DJ
US
TM
EN
T
7.4.2 Printer gamma adjustment
When the color reproduction is in poor condition,
conduct this adjustment to correct gradation.
A. Procedure
(1) Printer gamma offset adjustment
Conduct this adjustment when the color reproduc-
tion varies with copy modes to correct the gradation
in a high light density section and adjust the density
in the background.
Note:
• For the printer gamma offset adjustment,
adjustment methods of 0 to 5 are available for
each screen type. It is possible to divide the
gradation in 256 into 6 parts of 0 to 5 and
adjust the entire ranges from "0: Low density
section" to "5: High density section."
• In default, adjustment is limited only to "0 (low
density section)." When setting DIPSW 28-4 to
1, adjustment can be made on the entire
ranges of 0 to 5.
a. Procedure
1. Enter the 36 mode.
2. "36 mode menu screen"
Press the [3. Image quality adjustment] key.
3. "Image quality mode menu screen"
Press the [2. Printer gamma adjustment] key.
4. For the printer gamma adjustment, the follow-
ing items are provided:
[1. Printer gamma offset adj.]
[2. Printer gamma sensor adj.]
[3. Printer screen gradation adj.]
5. Press the key of an item you want to adjust.
6. Press the [PREVIOUS SCREEN] key to return
from each of adjustment screen to the "Printer
gamma adjustment menu screen."
1. Enter the 36 mode.
2. "36 mode menu screen"
Press the [3. Image quality adjustment] key.
3. "Image quality mode menu screen"
Press the [2. Printer gamma adjustment] key.
4. "Printer gamma adjustment menu screen"
Press the [1. Printer gamma offset adj.] key.
CF5001 Field Service Ver.1.0 Sep 2003 36 MODE
2-83
II A
DJ
US
TM
EN
T
5. "Printer gamma offset adj. (LS200) (0) screen"
For the printer gamma offset adjustment, the
following items are provided. Press the [NEXT
ADJUSTMENT] key or [PREVIOUS ADJUST-
MENT] key to select an item you want to
adjust.
• "Printer gamma offset adj. (LS200) (0 to 5)"• "Printer gamma offset adj. (LS150) (0 to 5)"• "Printer gamma offset adj. (DS200) (0 to 5)"• "Printer gamma offset adj. (DS150) (0 to 5)"• "Printer gamma offset adj. (ED-8) (0 to 5)"• "Printer gamma offset adj. (ED-2) (0 to 5)"
The following shows the copy mode to which
each adjustment is reflected.
(LS200): Line screen/High resolution
(LS150): Line screen/Smooth tone
(DS200): Dot screen/High resolution
(DS150): Dot screen/Smooth tone
(ED-8):Text section to be used together with
the screens above.
(ED-2): High compression
6. Press the [COPY SCREEN] key.
7. Set A4 or 8.5 x 11 paper in the by-pass tray
and press the START button to print a test pat-
tern.
8. Check the test pattern that has been outputted.
• Make sure that the high light density startingsection of C and K is uniform, and evenbetween the gray reference lines [1].
9. When they are not even, press the C button
while pressing the P button.
8050fs1015
YM
[1]
CK
10. "Printer gamma offset adjustment screen"
Press the key of a color (C or K) you want to
adjust, enter a numeric value through the
numeric keys and press the [SET] key.
• Setting range: -128 (lighter) to +127 (darker)
Note:
• There are three keys: [1/1], [1/2] and [1/3]
provided for each line speed. Be sure to use
the key [1/1] for adjustment. A value entered
by the key [1/1] is automatically inputted into
keys [1/2] and [1/3].
11. Repeat steps 6 to 10 until the standard value is
obtained.
12. Take notice of the gray gradation pattern [1]
created in C, M and Y, make sure that the gray
balance at the square marks line [2] and [3] is
the same.
8050fs1016
YM
[1]
[6]
[3][2][4][5]
CK
36 MODE CF5001 Field Service Ver.1.0 Sep 2003
2-84
II A
DJ
US
TM
EN
T
(2) Printer gamma sensor adjustment
When a poor color reproduction results even after
the automatic gamma adjustment, conduct this
adjustment to correct gradation.
The printer gamma correction that is carried out
automatically and periodically uses a gamma sen-
sor to read patterns on the transfer belt. So, there is
a possibility of the gamma sensor not being accu-
rately adjusted due to the change in characteristic
of the gamma sensor. This adjustment use the
scanner to correct the gamma sensor for accurate
printer gamma adjustment.
This adjustment can be shown in the key operator
mode by setting the DIPSW12-1 to 1.
a. Procedure
13. When the gray balance is not the same, press
the key of a color (Y or M) you want to adjust,
enter a numeric value through the numeric
keys and press the [SET] key.
• Setting range: -128 (lighter) to +127 (darker)
Note:
• There are three keys: [1/1], [1/2] and [1/3]
provided for each line speed. Be sure to use
the key [1/1] for adjustment. A value entered
by the key [1/1] is automatically inputted into
keys [1/2] and [1/3].
• How to match the gray balanceTake notice of the gray patches [4] made up of49 colors of C, M and Y. In the 49 patches, Mgets darker as going right to left. And Y getsdarker as going down from up. However, C isfixed. The patch [5] at the center is the samecolor as the gray [2]. The patches [6] positionedat the four corners of the patch [5] is the samecolor as the gray [3]. Out of the 49 patches,select a gray of the same gray balance as thegray [6]. e.g.) When a patch on the lower right side ismore suitable than the patch [5] at the center:Adjust M and Y in the positive direction.When a patch on the upper left side is moresuitable than the patch [5] at the center: AdjustM and Y in the negative direction.
14. Press the [COPY SCREEN] key.
15. Set A4 or 8.5 x 11 paper in the by-pass tray
and press the START button to print a test pat-
tern.
16. Repeat steps 13 to 15 until you can get a satis-
factory result.
17. Press the [PREVIOUS SCREEN] key to return
to the "Printer gamma adjustment menu
screen."
1. Enter the 36 mode.
2. "36 mode menu screen"
Press the [3. Image quality adjustment] key.
3. "Image quality mode menu screen"
Press the [2. Printer gamma adjustment] key.
4. "Printer gamma adjustment menu screen"
Press the [2. Printer gamma sensor adj.] key.
CF5001 Field Service Ver.1.0 Sep 2003 36 MODE
2-85
II A
DJ
US
TM
EN
T
5. "Printer gamma sensor adj. (LS200) screen"
For the printer gamma sensor adjustment, the
following items are provided. Press the [NEXT
ADJUSTMENT] key or [PREVIOUS ADJUST-
MENT] key to select an item you want to
adjust.
• "Printer gamma sensor adjustment (LS200)"• "Printer gamma sensor adjustment (LS150)"• "Printer gamma sensor adjustment (DS200)"• "Printer gamma sensor adjustment (DS150)"• "Printer gamma sensor adjustment
(CONTONE)"• "Printer gamma sensor adjustment (ED)"
The following shows the copy mode to whicheach adjustment is reflected:(LS200): Line screen/High resolution(LS150): Line screen/Smooth tone(DS200): Dot screen/High resolution(DS150): Dot screen/Smooth tone(CONTONE): Text section to be used together
with the screens above.
(ED): High compression
Note:
• A screen in which the screen selection is
turned off by the key operator mode-memory
switch is not displayed.
6. Press the [COPY SCREEN] key.
7. With the A4 (for metric machine) or 8.5 x 11
(for inch machine) paper set in the by-pass
tray, press the START button to output a test
pattern.
8. "Please load output paper ... screen"
After completion of the test pattern output, the
display returns automatically to the adjustment
scren.
The outputted test pattern [1] pressed securely
against the original positioning plate /L [3] and
the original positioning plate /R [4], set it to the
original glass.
Note:
Put the green triangular mark [2] on the left
side.
9. With 10 sheets of copy paper (white) placed on
the test chart, close the RADF or platen cover.
Note:
• Be sure to use white copy paper. Otherwise,
the printer gradation cannot be corrected
properly.
10. Press the [Start] key.
Note:
• Start cannot be made when paper is not set
in the by-pass tray.
11. When the chart is scanned with no problem
found, the gamma sensor is adjusted, the
printer gamma correction is made and a mes-
sage "Complete" is displayed.
8050fs1017
[3]
[2]
[4]
[1]
36 MODE CF5001 Field Service Ver.1.0 Sep 2003
2-86
II A
DJ
US
TM
EN
T
(3) Printer screen gradation adjustment
Adjust a tone jump (in which gradation is not contin-
uous).
a. Procedure
12. If any trouble should be found, an error code is
displayed for each cause. Repair the error
referring to the below.
• Error 1: Improper positioning of the chart.• Error 2: The setting direction of a chart is
upside down.Improper positioning of the chart.
• Error 3: A chart pattern cannot be detected.A different type of chart.
• Error 4: Adjustment is impossible.Software bugged.
• Error 5: Not within the standard value.Re-adjust it.
• Error 6: Nonvolatile data abnormality.Check the installation of memoryboard.
• Error 7: Memory other than those specified isaccessed.Software bugged.
• Error 8: Memory related error.Software bugged.
• Error 9: Program error—Software bugged.• Error 10: The chart is skew.
Improper positioning of the chart.• Error 11: Image header information read error.
Software bugged.• Error 12: RGB data abnormality.
Chart is wrong, or software is bugged.• Error 13: Argument set error.
Software bugged.• Error 31: Sensor value abnormality - Re-adjust
it.• Error 51: Regression calculation abnormality -
Re-adjust it.• Error 52: Array number overflow - Software
bugged.• Error 53: Regression order abnormality - Soft-
ware bugged.• Error 54: Selected screen information abnor-
mality - Software bugged.• Error 55: Color information abnormality - Soft-
ware bugged.
13. "Printer gamma sensor adj. screen"
Press the [Adj. data reset] key if you want to
return to the factory default data.
Press the [YES] key to reset the adjusted
printer gamma sensor data and return to the
factory default data.
Press the [NO] key to return to the "Printer
gamma sensor adj. screen" without data reset.
14. Press the [PREVIOUS SCREEN] key to return
to the "Printer gamma adjustment menu
screen."
1. Enter the 36 mode.
2. "36 mode menu screen"
Press the [3. Image quality adjustment] key.
3. "Image quality adjustment menu screen"
Press the [2. Printer gamma adjustment] key.
4. "Printer gamma adjustment menu screen"
Press the [3. Printer screen gradation adj.] key.
5. "Printer screen gradation adj. (Y) screen"
For the printer screen gradation adjustment,
the following items are provided.
"Printer screen gradation adj. (Y)"
"Printer screen gradation adj. (M)"
"Printer screen gradation adj. (C)"
"Printer screen gradation adj. (K)"
6. Press the [COPY SCREEN] key.
7. Set the A4 or 8.5 x 11 paper in the by-pass tray
and press the START button to output a test
pattern.
8. Five sheets of test pattern are automatically
outputted. Check them to see if there is a tone
jump found in them.
9. When a tone jump is found in them, press the
C button while pressing the P button.
10. "Printer screen gradation adj."
Press the [NEXT ADJUSTMENT] key or [PRE-
VIOUS ADJUSTMENT] key to select a color in
which a tone jump has occurred.
CF5001 Field Service Ver.1.0 Sep 2003 36 MODE
2-87
II A
DJ
US
TM
EN
T
7.4.3 Sharpness adjustment
Conduct the sharpness adjustment or, this is car-
ried out when moire reproduced.
Use this adjustment for changing the center value
for the sharpness adjustment in the user mode.
A. Procedure
11. Enter one less numeric value than the current
and press the [SET] key.
• Setting range: -3 to +1
12. Repeat steps 6 to 11 until the tone jump disap-
pears.
13. Press the [PREVIOUS SCREEN] key to return
to the "Printer gamma adjustment menu
screen."1. Enter the 36 mode.
2. "36 mode menu screen"
Press the [3. Image quality adjustment] key.
3. "Image quality mode menu screen"
Press the [3. Sharpness adjustment] key.
4. "Sharpness adjustment menu screen"
Press the [COPY SCREEN] key.
5. Select the A3 or 11 x 17 paper and press the
START button with a test chart set to the origi-
nal glass.
6. Press the C button while pressing the P button.
7. Enter a numeric value through the numeric
keys as necessary, and press the [SET] key.
• Setting range: -5 (soft/less moire) to +5 (sharp/more moire)
8. Repeat steps 4 to 7 until it becomes suitable.
9. Press the [PREVIOUS SCREEN] key to return
to the "Image quality mode menu screen."
36 MODE CF5001 Field Service Ver.1.0 Sep 2003
2-88
II A
DJ
US
TM
EN
T
7.4.4 Contrast adjustment
Adjust the contrast.
Use this adjustment for changing the center value
for the contrast adjustment in the user mode.
A. Procedure
7.4.5 Image judge adjustment
Adjust the threshold value of the original image
judgement.
A. Procedure
(1) Dot detect adjustment
Adjust the dot discrimination threshold value of the
original image.
a. Procedure
1. Enter the 36 mode.
2. "36 mode menu screen"
Press the [3. Image quality adjustment] key.
3. "Image quality mode menu screen"
Press the [4. Contrast adjustment] key.
4. "Contrast adjustment menu screen"
Press the [COPY SCREEN] key.
5. Select the A3 or 11 x 17 paper and press the
START button with a test chart set to the origi-
nal glass.
6. Press the C button while pressing the P button.
7. Enter a numeric value through the numeric
keys as necessary, and press the [SET] key.
• Setting range: -5 (contrast increased) to +5(contrast reduced)
8. Repeat steps 4 to 7 until it becomes suitable.
9. Press the [PREVIOUS SCREEN] key to return
to the "Image quality mode menu screen."
1. Enter the 36 mode.
2. "36 mode menu screen"
Press the [3. Image quality adjustment] key.
3. "Image quality mode menu screen"
Press the [5. Image judge adjustment] key.
4. "Image judge adjustment mode menu screen"
For the image judge adjustment, the following
items are provided:
[1. Dot detect adjustment]
[2. Color text adjustment]
[3. Dot/Text area adjustment]
5. Press the key of an item you want to adjust.
6. Press the [PREVIOUS SCREEN] key to return
from each of the adjustment screens to the
"Image judge adjustment mode menu screen."
1. Enter the 36 mode.
2. "36 mode menu screen"
Press the [3. Image quality adjustment] key.
3. "Image quality mode menu screen"
Press the [5. Image judge adjustment] key.
4. "Image judge adjustment menu screen"
Press the [1. Dot detect adjustment] key.
5. "Dot detect adjustment R screen"
Press the [COPY SCREEN] key.
CF5001 Field Service Ver.1.0 Sep 2003 36 MODE
2-89
II A
DJ
US
TM
EN
T
(2) Color text adjustment
Adjust the color text discrimination threshold value
of the original image.
Use this adjustment for changing the center value
for the color text adjustment in the user mode.
a. Procedure
6. Select the A3 or 11 x 17 paper and press the
START button with a test chart set to the origi-
nal glass.
7. A dot detection pattern is outputted.
This output pattern shows how the original
image is discriminated as an image.
• Cyan section: Discriminated as a dot.• White section: Discriminated as a picture.• Black section: Discriminated as a black text.• Magenta section: Discriminated as a color text.
8. Press the C button while pressing the P button.
9. "Dot detect adjustment R screen"
For the dot detection adjustment, the following
items are provided:
[Dot detect adjustment R]
[Dot detect adjustment G]
[Dot detect adjustment B]
10. Select a color you want to adjust as necessary,
enter a numeric value through the numeric
keys, and press the [SET] key.
• Setting range: -5 (dot area reduced) to +5 (dotarea increased)
11. Repeat steps 5 to 10 until it becomes suitable.
12. Press the [PREVIOUS SCREEN] key to return
to the "Image judge adjustment mode menu
screen."
1. Enter the 36 mode.
2. "36 mode menu screen"
Press the [3. Image quality adjustment] key.
3. "Image quality mode menu screen"
Press the [5. Image judge adjustment] key.
4. "Image judge adjustment menu screen"
Press the [2. Color text adjustment] key.
5. "Color text screen"
Press the [COPY SCREEN] key.
6. Select the A3 or 11 x 17 paper and press the
START button with a test chart set to the origi-
nal glass.
7. A color text detection pattern is outputted.
This output pattern shows how the original
image is discriminated as an image.
• Black section: Discriminated as a black text.• Magenta section: Discriminated as a color text.
8. Press the C button while pressing the P button.
9. "Color text screen"
Enter a numeric value through the numeric
keys as necessary, and press the [SET] key.
• Setting range: -5 (color text area reduced) to +5(color text area increased)
10. Repeat steps 5 to 9 until it becomes suitable.
11. Press the [PREVIOUS SCREEN] key to return
to the "Image judge adjustment menu screen."
36 MODE CF5001 Field Service Ver.1.0 Sep 2003
2-90
II A
DJ
US
TM
EN
T
(3) Dot/Text area adjustment
Adjust the dot discrimination and text discrimination
threshold values of the original image.
Use this adjustment for changing the center value
for the letter adjustment in the user mode.
a. Procedure
7.4.6 ACS adjustment
Conduct this adjustment when the ACS (Auto color
selection) does not function properly.
A. Procedure
1. Enter the 36 mode.
2. "36 mode menu screen"
Press the [3. Image quality adjustment] key.
3. "Image quality mode menu screen"
Press the [5. Image judge adjustment] key.
4. "Image judge adjustment mode menu screen"
Press the [3. Dot/Text adjustment] key.
5. "Dot/Text adjustment screen"
Press the [COPY SCREEN] key.
6. Select the A3 paper and press the START but-
ton with a test chart set to the original glass.
7. A dot and text detection pattern is outputted.
This output pattern shows how the original
image is discriminated as an image.
• Cyan section: Discriminated as a dot.• White section: Discriminated as a picture.• Black section: Discriminated as a black text.• Magenta section: Discriminated as a color text.
8. Press the C button while pressing the P button.
9. "Dot/Text area adjustment screen"
10. Enter a numeric value through the numeric
keys as necessary, and press the [SET] key.
• Setting range: -5 (dot area and text areaincreased) to +5 (dot area increased and textarea reduced)
11. Repeat steps 5 to 10 until it becomes suitable.
12. Press the [PREVIOUS SCREEN] key to return
to the "Image judge adjustment menu screen."
1. Enter the 36 mode.
2. "36 mode menu screen"
Press the [3. Image quality adjustment] key.
3. "Image quality adjustment menu screen"
Press the [6. ACS adjustment] key.
4. "Set the chart and push [SCAN] screen"
With an original in which the ACS does not
function properly set to the original glass,
press the [SCAN] key.
5. In the "JUDGE," the result of the ACS is shown
as "COLOR" or "MONOCHROME."
6. Enter a numeric value through the numeric
keys as necessary, and press the [SET] key.
• Setting range: -5 (MONOCHROME) to +5(COLOR)
7. Repeat steps 4 to 6 until it becomes suitable.
8. Press the [PREVIOUS SCREEN] key to return
to the "Image quality mode menu screen."
CF5001 Field Service Ver.1.0 Sep 2003 36 MODE
2-91
II A
DJ
US
TM
EN
T
7.4.7 Density adjustment
Adjust the AE (AES) density, copy density and the
background density.
A. Procedure
(1) AE (AES) adjustment
Conduct this adjustment when you want to change
the center value selected by the AE (Auto density
selection) in the user mode.
a. Procedure
(2) Copy density adjustment
Adjust the copy density.
Use this adjustment for changing the center value
for the density shift function in the user mode.
a. Procedure
1. Enter the 36 mode.
2. "36 mode menu screen"
Press the [3. Image quality adjustment] key.
3. "Image quality mode menu screen"
Press the [7. Density adjustment] key.
4. "Density adjustment mode menu screen"
For the density adjustment, the following items
are provided:
[1. AE (AES) adjustment]
[2. Copy density adjustment]
[3. Background adjustment]
5. Press the key of an item you want to adjust.
6. Press the [PREVIOUS SCREEN] key to return
from each of the adjustment screens to the
"Density adjustment mode menu screen."
1. Enter the 36 mode.
2. "36 mode menu screen"
Press the [3. Image quality adjustment] key.
3. "Image quality mode menu screen"
Press the [7. Density adjustment] key.
4. "Density adjustment mode menu screen"
Press the [1. AE (AES) adjustment] key.
5. With a chart in which you want to change the
AE density set to the original glass, press the
[SCAN] key.
6. A numeric value is shown in the "RESULT."
7. When the adjustment result is other than 0,
enter a numeric value through the numeric
keys and press the [SET] key (e.g.: if the
adjustment result is 2, input -2).
• Setting range: -5 to +5
8. Repeat steps 5 to 7 until the adjustment result
becomes 0.
9. Press the [PREVIOUS SCREEN] key to return
to the "Density adjustment mode menu
screen."
1. Enter the 36 mode.
2. "36 mode menu screen"
Press the [3. Image quality adjustment] key.
3. "Image quality mode menu screen"
Press the [7. Density adjustment] key.
4. "Density adjustment mode menu screen"
Press the [2. Copy density adjustment] key.
5. "Copy density adjustment screen"
For the copy density adjustment, the following
items are provided. Press the arrow key to
select an item you want to adjust.
• "Text/Photo (Full color)"• "Photo (Full color)"• "Text (Full color)"• "Map (Full color)"• "Text/Photo (Mono color)"• "Photo (Mono color)"• "Text (Mono color)"• "Map (Mono color)"• "Text/Photo (Monochrome)"• "Photo (Monochrome)"• "Text (Monochrome)"• "Map (Monochrome)"
36 MODE CF5001 Field Service Ver.1.0 Sep 2003
2-92
II A
DJ
US
TM
EN
T
(3) Background adjustment
Adjust the copy background density.
The background adjustment in the user mode only
supports the batch adjustment. It is not possible to
adjust the background for each color mode or origi-
nal mode.
a. Procedure6. Press the [COPY SCREEN] key.
7. Select a mode you want to adjust and then
select the A3 or 11 x 17 paper. With the test
chart set to the original glass, press the START
button.
8. Press the C button while pressing the P button.
9. Enter a numeric value through the numeric
keys as necessary, and press the [SET] key.
• Setting range: -5 (lighter) to +5 (darker)
10. Repeat steps 6 to 9 until it becomes suitable.
11. Press the [PREVIOUS SCREEN] key to return
to the "Density adjustment mode menu
screen."
1. Enter the 36 mode.
2. "36 mode menu screen"
Press the [3. Image quality adjustment] key.
3. "Image quality mode menu screen"
Press the [7. Density adjustment] key.
4. "Density adjustment mode menu screen"
Press the [3. Background adjustment] key.
5. "Background adjustment screen"
For the background adjustment, the following
items are provided. Press the arrow key to
select an item you want to adjust.
• "Text/Photo (Full color)"• "Photo (Full color)"• "Text (Full color)"• "Map (Full color)"• "Text/Photo (Mono color)"• "Photo (Mono color)"• "Text (Mono color)"• "Map (Mono color)"• "Text/Photo (Monochrome)"• "Photo (Monochrome)"• "Text (Monochrome)"• "Map (Monochrome)"
6. Press the [COPY SCREEN] key.
7. Select a mode you want to adjust and then
select the A3 or 11 x 17 paper. With the test
chart set to the original glass, press the START
button.
8. Press the C button while pressing the P button.
9. Enter a numeric value through the numeric
keys as necessary, and press the [SET] key.
• Setting range: -5 (lighter) to +5 (darker)
10. Repeat steps 6 to 9 until it becomes suitable.
11. Press the [PREVIOUS SCREEN] key to return
to the "Density adjustment mode menu
screen."
CF5001 Field Service Ver.1.0 Sep 2003 36 MODE
2-93
II A
DJ
US
TM
EN
T
7.4.8 Tone adjustment
Conduct the tone adjustment of red, green or blue.
Use this adjustment for changing the center value
for the tone adjustment in the user mode.
A. Procedure
(1) Red adjustment
Adjust the density of red.
This adjustment is not reflected to the IP.
a. Procedure
(2) Green adjustment
Adjust the density of green.
a. Procedure
1. Enter the 36 mode.
2. "36 mode menu screen"
Press the [3. Image quality adjustment] key.
3. "Image quality mode menu screen"
Press the [8. Tone adjustment] key.
4. "Tone adjustment mode menu screen"
For the tone adjustment, the following items
are provided:
[1. Red adjustment]
[2. Green adjustment]
[3. Blue adjustment]
5. Press the key of an item you want to adjust.
6. Press the [PREVIOUS SCREEN] key to return
from each of the adjustment screen to the
"Image quality mode menu screen."
1. Enter the 36 mode.
2. "36 mode menu screen"
Press the [3. Image quality adjustment] key.
3. "Image quality mode menu screen"
Press the [8. Tone adjustment] key.
4. "Tone adjustment mode menu screen"
Press the [1. Red adjustment] key.
5. Press the [COPY SCREEN] key.
6. Select the A3 or 11 x 17 paper and press the
START button with a test chart set to the origi-
nal glass.
7. Press the C button while pressing the P button.
8. Enter a numeric value through the numeric
keys as necessary, and press the [SET] key.
• Setting range: -5 (lighter) to +5 (darker)
9. Repeat steps 6 to 8 until it becomes suitable.
10. Press the [PREVIOUS SCREEN] key to return
to the "Image quality adjustment menu
screen."
1. Enter the 36 mode.
2. "36 mode menu screen"
Press the [3. Image quality adjustment] key.
3. "Image quality mode menu screen"
Press the [8. Tone adjustment] key.
4. "Tone adjustment mode menu screen"
Press the [2. Green adjustment] key.
5. Press the [COPY SCREEN] key.
6. Select the A3 or 11 x 17 paper and press the
START button with a test chart set to the origi-
nal glass.
7. Press the C button while pressing the P button.
8. Enter a numeric value through the numeric
keys as necessary, and press the [SET] key.
• Setting range: -5 (lighter) to +5 (darker)
9. Repeat steps 6 to 8 until it becomes suitable.
10. Press the [PREVIOUS SCREEN] key to return
to the "Image quality mode menu screen."
36 MODE CF5001 Field Service Ver.1.0 Sep 2003
2-94
II A
DJ
US
TM
EN
T
(3) Blue adjustment
Adjust the density of blue.
a. Procedure
7.4.9 Recall standard data
Reset the adjustment values of image quality
adjustment to the standard data. (factory default
data)
Note:
• Data for the scanner gamma adjustment and
the printer gamma sensor adjustment cannot
be reset to standard data.
A. Procedure
1. Enter the 36 mode.
2. "36 mode menu screen"
Press the [3. Image quality adjustment] key.
3. "Image quality mode menu screen"
Press the [8. Tone adjustment] key.
4. "Tone adjustment mode menu screen"
Press the [3. Blue adjustment] key.
5. Press the [COPY SCREEN] key.
6. Select the A3 or 11 x 17 paper and press the
START button with a test chart set to the origi-
nal glass.
7. Press the C button while pressing the P button.
8. Enter a numeric value through the numeric
keys as necessary, and press the [SET] key.
• Setting range: -5 (lighter) to +5 (darker)
9. Repeat steps 6 to 8 until it becomes suitable.
10. Press the [PREVIOUS SCREEN] key to return
to the "Image quality mode menu screen."
1. Enter the 36 mode.
2. "36 mode menu screen"
Press the [3. Image quality adjustment] key.
3. "Image quality mode menu screen"
Press the [9. Recall standard data] key.
4. "Recall standard data: Image quality adj.
screen"
Press the [YES] key when recalling the stan-
dard date. Pressing the [NO] key or [PREVI-
OUS SCREEN] key returns to the [Image
quality mode menu screen] without recalling
the standard data.
CF5001 Field Service Ver.1.0 Sep 2003 36 MODE
2-95
II A
DJ
US
TM
EN
T
7.5 Running test mode
Conduct a test while in the continuous copy opera-
tion.
Select [4. Running test mode] in the 36 mode menu
screen to show the running mode menu screen.
For this adjustment, the following items can be
selected:
A. Intermittent copy mode
After completion of the copy operation for the set
copy count, the copier changes into the copy ready
state and waits for 0.5 sec. before resuming the
same operation.
B. Paperless running mode
Without detecting paper or jam, the copy operation
is made nearly at the same timing as the normal
copy operation. In the same manner as the intermit-
tent copy mode, after completion of the copy opera-
tion for the set copy count, the copier changes into
the copy ready state and waits for 0.5 sec. before
resuming the same operation.
C. Paperless mode
Without detecting paper or jam, the copy operation
is made nearly at the same timing as the normal
copy operation.
D. Paperless endless mode
The copier operates with the copy count infinitely
set automatically. In the same manner as the paper-
less mode, without detecting paper or jam, the copy
operation is made nearly at the same timing as the
normal copy operation.
E. Running mode
The copy operation is made in the paperless end-
less mode plus the scanner each-time scan and the
auto paper feed tray switching.
7.5.1 Setting method
A. Procedure
1. Enter the 36 mode.
2. "36 mode menu screen"
Press the [4. Running test mode] key.
3. "Running test mode menu screen"
Press the mode key of one of the modes 1 to 5.
4. "Basic screen"
Press the [Start] key.
5. After confirmation of the copy operation, press
the STOP button and turn OFF the main switch
(SW2).
36 MODE CF5001 Field Service Ver.1.0 Sep 2003
2-96
II A
DJ
US
TM
EN
T
7.6 Test pattern output mode
Output various test patterns to separate abnormali-
ties. Select [5. Test pattern output mode] in the 36
mode screen to show "Test pattern output mode
screen."
Note:
• As for modes specifically not given in the
SHB, be sure not to output test patterns.
A. Procedure
1. Enter the 36 mode.
2. "36 mode menu screen"
Press the [5. Test pattern output mode] key.
3. "Test pattern output mode screen"
After entering an output pattern number
through the numeric keys, press the [SET] key.
4. Press the [COPY SCREEN] key.
5. "Basic screen"
Select the A3 or 11 x 17 paper, and press the
START button to output a test pattern.
6. When outputting another test pattern, repeat
steps 3 to 5 while pressing the C button with
the P button being pressed at the same time.
7. Press the [PREVIOUS SCREEN] to return to
the "36 mode menu screen."
CF5001 Field Service Ver.1.0 Sep 2003 36 MODE
2-97
II A
DJ
US
TM
EN
T
No.1 Overall halftone
[Check Items]• When the density is set to 70 (halftone)
When there are image stripes or uneven density found, check the printer system for any abnormality.[Recommended checkpoints]: Developing unit, cleaning unit and transfer belt unit.
• When the density is set to 0 (white)When there is image foggy back ground, check the printer system for any abnormality.[Recommended checkpoints]: Charging corona, and high voltage contact.
• When the density is set at 255 (Y, M, C, K)When the density is light, check the printer system for any abnormality.[Recommended check point]: Write unit
* For information about setting the density, see "7.7 Test pattern density setting."
Test Pattern
When the density is set to 70 When the density is set to 0 When the density is set to 255
8050fs1019
36 MODE CF5001 Field Service Ver.1.0 Sep 2003
2-98
II A
DJ
US
TM
EN
T
No.11 Beam check
[Check Items 1]• For development and analysis of the write unit
[Check Items 2]• Check the solid black pattern [1] to see if there is uneven density found in the main scanning and sub-
scanning directions.[Recommended checkpoints]: Charging corona, developing unit, transfer belt unit, and 2nd transfer unit
[Check Items 3]• Check to see if there is any image repelling in the gradation pattern [2] at the leading/trailing edge of the
test pattern in the feed direction.[Recommended checkpoint]: Transfer/separation corona unit
Test Pattern
[1] Solid black pattern [2] Gradation pattern
[2]
[1]
8050fs1020
CF5001 Field Service Ver.1.0 Sep 2003 36 MODE
2-99
II A
DJ
US
TM
EN
T
No.16 Linearity evaluation pattern
[Check Items]
Judge from this test pattern which of the scanner system and the printer system is abnormal.Items that can be checked include horizontal magnification, vertical magnification, skew, and leading edge timing, etc. of the printer system. If the copy image is defective despite no abnormality being visible on the test pattern, the scanner system is defective.
Test Pattern
[1] Edge of paper
30mm 237mm
190mm
20m
m190m
m190m
m
280m
m
280mm
205.7
mm
[1]
[1]
8050fs1021
36 MODE CF5001 Field Service Ver.1.0 Sep 2003
2-100
II A
DJ
US
TM
EN
T
7.7 Test pattern density setting
Set the density of the test pattern.
A. Procedure
7.8 Finisher adjustment
Adjusting the FNS, PI, PK, TU.
A. Procedure
1. Enter the 36 mode.
2. "36 mode menu screen"
Press the [6. Test pattern density setting] key.
3. "Test pattern density setting-Y screen"
Press the [NEXT ADJUSTMENT] key or [PRE-
VIOUS ADJUSTMENT] key to select one of
the colors: "Y, M, C and K" that you want to
adjust.
4. Enter a numeric value through the numeric
keys and press the [SET] key.
• Setting range: 0 (lighter) to 255 (darker)
5. Press the [COPY SCREEN] key.
6. "Basic screen"
Select the paper size and press the START
button to output a test pattern.
7. When outputting another test pattern, repeat
steps 3 to 5 while pressing the C button with
the P button being pressed at the same time.
8. Press the [PREVIOUS SCREEN] to return to
the "36 mode menu screen."
1. Enter the 36 mode.
2. "36 menu screen"
Press the [7. Finisher adjustment] key.
3. "Finisher adjustment mode menu screen"
[1. Stitch & Fold stopper adj.]
[2. Fold stopper adjustment]
[3. Cover sheet tray size adj.]
[4. Trimming stopper adjustment]
[5. Punch adjustment]
[6. Three-Fold position adj.]
[7. 2 positions staple pitch adj.]
4. Press the key of an item you want to adjust.
5. Press the [PREVIOUS SCREEN] key to return
from each of the adjustment screen to the "Fin-
isher adjustment mode menu screen."
CF5001 Field Service Ver.1.0 Sep 2003 36 MODE
2-101
II A
DJ
US
TM
EN
T
7.8.1 Stitch and fold stopper adjustment (FN-9
only)
Adjusting the stapling position when stitch and fold
mode.
A. Procedure
7.8.2 Fold stopper adjustment (FN-9 only)
Adjusting the fold position when stitch and fold or
folding mode.
A. Procedure
1. Enter the 36 mode.
2. "36 mode menu screen"
Press the [7. Finisher adjustment] key.
3. "Finisher adjustment mode menu screen"
Press the [1. Stitch and Fold stopper adj.] key.
4. "Stitch and Fold stopper adj. (A3) screen"
Press the [COPY SCREEN] key.
5. Set paper in the tray, set originals on RADF,
and press the START button.
6. Check the paper center and stapling position.
• Standard value: ± 1mm
7. When the value is not within the standard,
press the C button while pressing the P button.
8. "Stitch and Fold stopper adj. screen"
Press the [NEXT ADJUSTMENT] or [PREVI-
OUS ADJUSTMENT] key to select a desired
paper size.
9. Enter a numeric value through the numeric
keys and press the [SET] key.
• Setting range: -128 to +127, 1 step = 0.1 mm
10. Repeat steps 4 to 9 until the standard value is
obtained.
11. Press the [PREVIOUS SCREEN] key to return
to the "Finisher adjustment mode menu
screen."
1. Enter the 36 mode.
2. "36 mode menu screen"
Press the [7. Finisher adjustment] key.
3. "Finisher adjustment mode menu screen"
Press the [2. Fold stopper adjustment] key.
4. "Fold stopper adjustment (A3) screen"
Press the [COPY SCREEN] key.
5. Set paper in the tray, set originals on RADF,
and press the START button.
6. Check the paper center and folding position.
• Standard value: ± 1mm
7. When the value is not within the standard,
press the C button while pressing the P button.
8. "Fold stopper adjustment screen"
Press the [NEXT ADJUSTMENT] or [PREVI-
OUS ADJUSTMENT] key to select a desired
paper size.
9. Enter a numeric value through the numeric
keys and press the [SET] key.
• Setting range: -128 to +127, 1 step = 0.1 mm
10. Repeat steps 4 to 9 until the standard value is
obtained.
11. Press the [PREVIOUS SCREEN] key to return
to the "Finisher adjustment mode menu
screen."
36 MODE CF5001 Field Service Ver.1.0 Sep 2003
2-102
II A
DJ
US
TM
EN
T
7.8.3 Cover sheet tray size adjustment (Cover
Inserter D only)
This adjustment should be performed when the
cover sheet tray size cannot be detected properly
and when centring adjustment for cover sheet tray
is performed.
A. Procedure
7.8.4 Trimming stopper adjustment (TMG-3 only)
Adjusting the trimming amount.
A. Procedure
1. Enter the 36 mode.
2. "36 mode menu screen"
Press the [7. Finisher adjustment] key.
3. "Finisher adjustment mode menu screen"
Press the [3. Cover sheet tray size adj.] key.
4. Set a A4R (for metric machine) or 8.5 x 11R
(for inch machine) paper on the cover sheet
tray (upper/lower) [1] and press the [Start] key.
A complete message appears on the screen.
5. Press the [PREVIOUS SCREEN] key to return
to the "Finisher adjustment menu screen."
8050fs1022
[1]
1. Enter the 36 mode.
2. "36 mode menu screen"
Press the [7. Finisher adjustment] key.
3. "Finisher adjustment mode menu screen"
Press the [4. Trimming stopper adjustment]
key.
4. "Trimming stopper adjustment (A3) screen"
Press the [COPY SCREEN] key.
5. Set paper in the tray, set originals on RADF
and press the START button.
6. Check the trimming amount.
• Standard value: 2.5 to 4.5 mmNote:
•Setting a trimming amount of 2.5mm or
less may cause a trimming error.
7. When the value is not within the standard,
press the C button while pressing the P button.
8. "Trimming stopper adjustment screen"
Press the [NEXT ADJUSTMENT] or [PREVI-
OUS ADJUSTMENT] key to select a desired
paper size.
9. Enter a numeric value through the numeric
keys and press the [SET] key.
• Setting range: -128 to +127, 1 step = 0.1 mm
10. Repeat steps 4 to 9 until the standard value is
obtained.
11. Press the [PREVIOUS SCREEN] key to return
to the "Finisher adjustment menu mode
screen."
CF5001 Field Service Ver.1.0 Sep 2003 36 MODE
2-103
II A
DJ
US
TM
EN
T
7.8.5 Punch adjustment (PK-5 only)
This adjusts the punch vertical positions, punch hor-
izontal positions, and punch registration loop
amount.
A. Procedure
(1) Punch kit vertical position adjustment (PK-5
only)
Adjusting the punch vertical position.
a. Procedure
1. Enter the 36 mode.
2. "36 mode menu screen"
Press the [5. Punch adjustment] key.
3. "Punch adjustment mode menu screen"
Punch adjustment includes the following items:
[1. Punch kit vertical pos. adj.]
[2. Punch kit horizontal pos. adj.]
[5. Punch registration loop adj.]
4. Press the key of an item you want to adjust.
5. Press the [PREVIOUS SCREEN] key to return
each adjustment screen to the "Finisher
adjustment mode menu screen."
1. Enter the 36 mode.
2. "36 mode menu screen"
Press the [7. Finisher adjustment] key.
3. "Finisher adjustment mode menu screen"
Press the [5. Punch adjustment] key.
4. "Punch adjustment mode menu screen"
Press the [1. Punch kit vertical pos. adj.] key.
5. "Punch kit ver. pos. adj. (A3) screen"
Press the [COPY SCREEN] key.
6. Set paper in the tray, set originals on RADF,
and press the START button.
7. Check the punch vertical position.
8. When the value is not appropriate, press the C
button while pressing down the P button.
9. "Punch kit ver. pos. adj. screen"
Press the [NEXT ADJUSTMENT] or [PREVI-
OUS ADJUSTMENT] key to select a desired
paper size.
10. Enter a numeric value through the numeric
keys and press the [SET] key.
• Setting range: -50 to +50, 1 step = 0.1mm
11. Repeat steps 5 to 10 until the value is appro-
priate.
12. Press the [PREVIOUS SCREEN] key to return
to the "Punch adjustment mode menu screen."
36 MODE CF5001 Field Service Ver.1.0 Sep 2003
2-104
II A
DJ
US
TM
EN
T
(2) Punch kit horizontal position adjustment
(PK-5 only)
Adjusting the punch horizontal position.
a. Procedure
(3) Punch registration loop adjustment
Adjusting the registration loop amount for the
reversed paper exit, the ADU paper exit (straight
exit) and cover sheet upper/lower.
a. Procedure1. Enter the 36 mode.
2. "36 mode menu screen"
Press the [7. Finisher adjustment] key.
3. "Finisher adjustment mode menu screen"
Press the [5. Punch adjustment] key.
4. "Punch adjustment mode menu screen"
Press the [2. Punch kit Horizontal pos. adj.]
key.
5. "Punch kit horizontal position adj. screen"
Press the [COPY SCREEN] key.
6. Set paper in the tray, set originals on RADF,
and press the START button.
7. Check the position of punch holes.
• Specification (Length between the edge ofpaper and the center of punch hole): 10.5mm(2 holes/4 holes/swedish 4 holes), 9.5mm (3holes/inch 2 holes)
8. When the value is not within the standard,
press the C button while pressing the P button.
9. "Punch kit horizontal position adj. screen"
Press the [NEXT ADJUSTMENT] or [PREVI-
OUS ADJUSTMENT] key to select a desired
paper size.
10. Enter a numeric value through the numeric
keys and press the [SET] key.
• Setting range: -50 to +50, 1 step = 0.1mm
11. Repeat steps 5 to 9 until the value is obtained.
12. Press the [PREVIOUS SCREEN] key to return
to the "Punch adjustment mode menu screen."
1. Enter the 36 mode.
2. "36 mode menu screen"
Press the [7. Finisher adjustment] key.
3. "Finisher adjustment mode menu screen"
Press the [5. Punch adjustment] key.
4. "Punch adjustment mode menu screen"
Press the [5. Punch registration loop adj.] key.
5. Press [1. Punch registration loop adj. (main
body)] key. or [2. Punch registration loop adj.
(PI)] key.
6. "Punch registration loop adj. menu screen"
Press the [NEXT ADJUSTMENT] or [PREVI-
OUS ADJUSTMENT] key to select the item to
be adjusted.
The screen changes as follows; reverse →ADU or upper tray → lower tray.
7. Press the [COPY SCREEN] key.
8. Press the START button to make a copy.
9. Check the punch registration loop amount.
10. When the value is not appropriate, press the C
button while pressing the P button.
11. "Punch registration loop adj. screen"
Enter a numeric value through the numeric
keys and press the [SET] key.
• Setting range: -20 to +20, 1 step = 0.8mm
12. Repeat steps 6 to 11 until the value is appro-
priate.
13. Press the [PREVIOUS SCREEN] key to return
to the "Punch registration loop adj. menu
screen."
CF5001 Field Service Ver.1.0 Sep 2003 36 MODE
2-105
II A
DJ
US
TM
EN
T
7.8.6 Three-folding adjustment (FN-9 only)
Adjusting the folding positions during the three-
folded copy.
a. Procedure
1. Enter the 36 mode.
2. "36 mode menu screen"
Press the [7. Finisher adjustment] key.
3. "Finisher adjustment mode menu screen"
Press the [6. Three-fold position adj.] key.
4. "Three-Fold adjustment screen"
Press the [COPY SCREEN] key.
5. Set paper in the tray, set originals on RADF,
and press the START button.
6. Check the three-folded position "a."
7. When the value is not within the standard,
press the C button while pressing the P button.
8050fs1023
a
b
c
Folded
positions
Standard value Specification
A4R 8.5 x 11R
a 95 mm 89.4 mm ± 2 mm
b 101 mm 95 mm ± 2 mm
c 101 mm 95 mm ± 2 mm
8. "Three-Fold adjustment screen"
Press the [NEXT ADJUSTMENT] or [PREVI-
OUS ADJUSTMENT] key to select a desired
paper size.
9. Enter a numeric value through the numeric
keys and press the [SET] key.
• Setting range: -128 to +127, 1 step = 0.1mm
10. Repeat steps 4 to 9 until the standard value is
obtained.
Note:
• See "9. OTHER ADJUSTMENTS" to adjust
the folded positions "b" and "c."
11. Press the [PREVIOUS SCREEN] key to return
to the "Finisher adjustment mode menu
screen."
36 MODE CF5001 Field Service Ver.1.0 Sep 2003
2-106
II A
DJ
US
TM
EN
T
7.8.7 2 positions staple pitch adjustment
Adjusting the pitch of the 2 positions staple.
A. Procedure
7.9 List output mode
Output a variety of data.
A. Procedure
1. Enter the 36 mode.
2. "36 mode menu screen"
Press the [7. Finisher adjustment] key.
3. "Finisher adjustment mode menu screen"
Press the [7. 2 positions staple pitch adj.] key.
4. "2 positions staple pitch adjustment screen"
Press the [COPY SCREEN] key.
5. Set paper in the tray, set originals on RADF,
and press the START button.
6. Check the pitch of the 2 positions staple.
7. When changing the dimension A, press the C
button while pressing the P button.
8. "2 positions staple pitch adjustment screen"
Enter a value with numeric keys and press the
[SET] key.
• Setting range: 120 to 160, 1 step: 1mm
9. Repeat steps 4 to 8 until the dimension A is
appropriate.
10. Press the [PREVIOUS SCREEN] key to return
to the "Finisher adjustment mode menu
screen."
A
8050fs1024
1. Enter the 36 mode.
2. "36 mode menu screen"
Press the [8. List output mode] key.
3. "List output mode menu screen"
List output mode items are as follows:
[1. Machine management list 1]
[2. Adjustment data list]
[3. Page fill data list]
[4. Machine management list 2]
[5. Parameter list]
[6. Memory dump list]
[7. Font pattern]
Note:
• Setting DPSW 30-1 to 1, [4. Machine manage-
ment list 2] and later appear.
4. Press the key of an item you want to output.
5. Select A4 or 8.5 x 11 paper and press the
START button.
6. Press the C button while pressing the P button.
7. Press the [PREVIOUS SCREEN] key to return
to the "36 mode menu screen."
CF5001 Field Service Ver.1.0 Sep 2003 47 MODE
2-107
II A
DJ
US
TM
EN
T
8. 47 MODE
8.1 47 mode/multi mode settingmethod
A. 47 Mode
This mode provides self-diagnostic functions (input/
output check function) to check and adjust the vari-
ous signals and loads.
B. Operation method for 47 mode
(1) Starting 47 mode
a. Turn off the main switch (SW2).
b. Turn on the SW2 while holding down 4 and 7
of the numeric keys.
c. The 47 mode is activated if the moment "I/O
check mode" is displayed in the message
display area at the center of the screen.
"47 mode menu screen"
(2) Input check method
Follow the following procedure.
a. Procedure
(3) Output check method
Follow the following procedure.
a. Procedure
(4) Exiting from the 47 mode
Turn off the SW2 to exit from the 47 mode.
[1] Input/Output check code
[2] Multi code
[3] Input check
[4] Output check
1. Enter the 47 mode.
2. "47 mode menu screen"
Enter the input check code with the numeric
keys. *1
3. Press the P button when using the multi mode.
4. Enter the multi code with the numeric keys. *1
8050fs1001[1][2]
[3] [4]
5. Input check result will appear in the input
check result display area.
6. Repeat steps 2 to 5 to perform the other signal
input check.
*1 See "8.5 Input check list".
1. Enter the 47 mode.
2. "47 mode menu screen"
Enter the output check code with the numeric
keys. *2
3. Press the P button when using the multi mode.
4. Enter the multi code with the numeric keys.* 2
5. Press the [Start] key to perform the output
check.
6. Press the [STOP] key to exit from the output
check.
7. Repeat steps 2 to 6 to check other signal out-
put check.
*2 See "8.6 Output check list".
47 MODE CF5001 Field Service Ver.1.0 Sep 2003
2-108
II A
DJ
US
TM
EN
T
8.2 Adjustment data display
Lists the adjustment values of the machine (factory-
set values and current values).
No adjustment value can be changed in this mode.
A. Procedure
Note:
• Turn off the SW2 to exit from the 47 mode.
8.3 Hard disk check
Perform this operation if you want to check the HDD
total capacity, the HDD remaining capacity, and the
error code related to HDD.
A. Procedure
Note:
• The operation can not be canceled during the
HDD bad sectors check and recovery (the
[STOP] button or the [Change Mode] key are
disabled).
• The hard disk is vulnerable to vibrations and
physical shocks. Be sure to remove the hard
disk when you move the main body.
1. Enter the 47 mode.
2. "47 mode menu screen"
Press "94" with the numeric keys. Check that
"94-00" appears in the message display area.
3. Press the [Start] key.
4. Press the [STOP] key at the lower right corner
of the screen.
5. Turn off the main switch (SW2) to exit from the
47 mode.
1. Enter the 47 mode.
2. "47 mode menu screen"
Press "99" with the numeric keys. Check that
"99-00" appears in the message display area.
3. Press the P button.
4. Enter one of the followings with the numeric
keys. Check that "99-xx" (xx represents the
input number) appears in the message display
area.
01: HDD total capacity check
02: HDD remaining capacity check
03: HDD bad sectors check and recovery
5. Press the [Start] key.
At checking the total capacity: the total capac-
ity is displayed
At checking the remaining capacity: the
remaining capacity is displayed
At checking and recovering the bad sectors:
During the operation-"NOW" appears
The operation succeeded-"OK" appears
The operation failed-"NG" appears
Press the [Start] key to perform the HDD bad
sectors check and recovery again when "NG"
appears.
6. Press the [STOP] key to exit from the output
check.
7. Turn off the SW2 to exit from the 47 mode.
CF5001 Field Service Ver.1.0 Sep 2003 47 MODE
2-109
II A
DJ
US
TM
EN
T
8.4 Input check list
Classification Symbol Code Multi
code
Name Display and signal source
001 000
High voltage, analog signal
TEMP/
HUM
00 0 Temp/humidity sensor (machine-inside humidity)
0 to 255
TEMP/
HUM
1 Temp/humidity sensor (machine-inside temperature)
— 2 — — —
TDB 3 Temp detection board 0 to 255
TLD Y 01 4 Remaining toner detection sensor /Y Toner No toner
TLD M 5 Remaining toner detection sensor /M
TLD C 6 Remaining toner detection sensor /C
TLD K 7 Remaining toner detection sensor /K
PS53 8 Waste toner door sensor Box No box
PS52 9 Waste toner full sensor FULL EMPTY
HV1 02 0 High voltage unit /1 (charging /Y) Abnormal Normal
1 High voltage unit /1 (charging /M)
2 High voltage unit /1 (charging /C)
3 High voltage unit /1 (charging /K)
4 High voltage unit /1 (charging /Y)
5 High voltage unit /1 (charging /M)
6 High voltage unit /1 (charging /C)
7 High voltage unit /1 (charging /K)
HV2 03 0 High voltage unit /2 (1st transfer Y) Abnormal Normal
1 High voltage unit /2 (1st transfer M)
2 High voltage unit /2 (1st transfer C)
3 High voltage unit /2 (1st transfer K)
4 High voltage unit /2 (1st transfer Y, M, C, K) One or more color is
abnormal
Normal
5 High voltage unit /2 (1st transfer Y, M, C, K)
6 High voltage unit /2 (1st transfer Y, M, C, K)
7 High voltage unit /2 (1st transfer K) Abnormal Normal
8 High voltage unit /2 (1st transfer Y)
9 High voltage unit /2 (1st transfer M)
10 High voltage unit /2 (1st transfer C)
11 High voltage unit /2 (1st transfer K)
12 High voltage unit /2 (1st transfer K)
HV2 04 0 High voltage unit/2 (separation) Abnormal Normal
1 High voltage unit/2 (separation)
PS11 05 2 Gamma sensor 0 to 255
6 Gamma sensor
DRPS Y 06 0 Drum potential sensor /Y
DRPS M 1 Drum potential sensor /M
DRPS C 2 Drum potential sensor /C
DRPS K 3 Drum potential sensor /K
47 MODE CF5001 Field Service Ver.1.0 Sep 2003
2-110
II A
DJ
US
TM
EN
T
High voltage, analog signal
HV2 07 4 High voltage unit /2 (guide plate) Abnormal Normal
5
6
7
HV2 08 0 High voltage unit/2 (2nd transfer) Abnormal Normal
1
2
3
4
HV1 09 0 High voltage unit /1 (developing bias /Y) Abnormal Normal
1 High voltage unit /1 (developing bias /M)
2 High voltage unit /1 (developing bias /C)
3 High voltage unit /1 (developing bias /K)
Paper feed, conveyance
PS31 11 0 No paper sensor /1 Paper No paper
PS37 1 No paper sensor /2
PS43 2 No paper sensor /3
PS47 3 No paper sensor /BP
PS108 4 No paper sensor (C-208)
PS32 12 0 Remaining paper sensor /1 Paper No paper
PS38 1 Remaining paper sensor /2
PS44 2 Remaining paper sensor /3
PS102 to
105
3 Remaining paper sensor /1 to /4 (C-208) 0 to 7
PS33 13 0 Paper size /S1 Paper No paper
PS34 1 Paper size /L1
PS39 2 Paper size /S2
PS40 3 Paper size /L2
PS45 4 Paper size /S3
PS46 5 Paper size /L3
PS48 6 Paper size /SBP
PS49 7 Paper size /LBP
VR1 14 0 Paper sizeVR /1 0 to 255
VR2 1 Paper sizeVR /2
VR3 2 Paper sizeVR /3
VR4 3 Paper sizeVR /BP
PS30 16 0 Tray upper limit sensor /1 Upper limit Not at upper limitPS36 1 Tray upper limit sensor /2
PS42 2 Tray upper limit sensor /3
PS25 3 Tray upper limit sensor /BP
PS109 4 Upper limit sensor (C-208) Upper:1, lower:2, middle:0
— 17 0 Tray set detection /1 Yes No
— 1 Tray set detection /2
— 2 Tray set detection /3
Classification Symbol Code Multi
code
Name Display and signal source
001 000
CF5001 Field Service Ver.1.0 Sep 2003 47 MODE
2-111
II A
DJ
US
TM
EN
T
Paper feed, conveyance
PS29 19 0 Pre-registration sensor /1 Paper No paper
PS35 1 Pre-registration sensor /2
PS41 2 Pre-registration sensor /3
PS26 3 By-pass conveyance sensor
PS106 4 Feed sensor (C-208)
PS107 20 0 Paper feed sensor (C-208) Paper No paper
PS23 1 ADU pre-registration sensor
PS20 2 ADU conveyance sensor
PS27 3 Intermediate conveyance sensor /1
PS28 4 Intermediate conveyance sensor /2
— 5 — — —
PS22 6 Registration sensor Paper No paper
PS50 7 Vertical conveyance sensor
PS13 8 Paper exit sensor
PS19 9 Reverse paper exit sensor
PS21 10 ADU paper reverse sensor
PS12 11 Paper exit full sensor Full Other than full
PS30 23 0 Tray upper limit sensor /1 Upper limit Other than upper limit
PS36 1 Tray upper limit sensor /2
PS41 2 Tray upper limit sensor /3
PS25 3 Tray upper limit sensor /BP
4
PS101,
PS109
5 Lower limit sensor (C-208)Upper limit sensor (C-208)
Upper limit:1, lower limit:2, middle:06
PS24 24 0 2nd transfer HP sensor Home position
Other than home posi-
tion1
2
PS18 25 0 Front door open/close sensor Open Close
PS51 1 Vertical conveyance door open/close sen-sor
PS54 2 Toner supply door open/close sensor
PS14 3 Toner supply unit open/close sensor
— 4 Fixing unit set detection Installed Not installed
PS100 5 Top cover open/close sensor1 (C-208) Open Close
PS115 6 Front door open/close sensor (C-208)
SW100 7 Tray down switch (C-208) ON OFF
M41 28 0 Paper feed motor Abnormal Normal
Classification Symbol Code Multi
code
Name Display and signal source
001 000
47 MODE CF5001 Field Service Ver.1.0 Sep 2003
2-112
II A
DJ
US
TM
EN
T
Light PS1 30 0 Scanner HP sensor Home position
Other than home posi-
tion
PS3 1 APS detection sensor /S Paper No paper
PS4 2 APS detection sensor /L
PS2 3 APS timing sensor OPEN CLOSE
M3 32 0 Polygon motor /Y (abnormal rotation detection)
Abnormal Normal
M4 1 Polygon motor /M (abnormal rotation detection)
M5 2 Polygon motor /C (abnormal rotation detection)
M6 3 Polygon motor /K (abnormal rotation detection)
M3, M4,
M5, M6
4 Polygon motor /Y, /M, /C, /K (abnormal rotation detection)
One or more colors are abnormal
Normal
M3 5 Polygon motor /Y (abnormal temperature detection)
Abnormal Normal
M4 6 Polygon motor /M(abnormal temperature detection)
M5 7 Polygon motor /C (abnormal temperature detection)
M6 8 Polygon motor /K (abnormal temperature detection)
M3, M4,
M5, M6
9 Polygon motor /Y, /M, /C, /K (abnormal temperature detection)
One or more colors are abnormal
Normal
INDX SB
Y
33 0 Index sensor /Y Abnormal Normal
INDX SB
M
1 Index sensor /M
INDX SB
C
2 Index sensor /C
INDX SB
B
3 Index sensor /K
INDX SB
Y, M, C,
K
4 Index sensor /Y, /M, /C, /K One or more colors are abnormal
Normal
5
PS5,
PS6,
PS7
35 0 Laser correction HP sensor /Y, /M, /C Edge detected
from one or more color
Edge undetected
PS5 1 Laser correction HP sensor /Y Edge detected
Edge undetectedPS6 2 Laser correction HP sensor /M
PS7 3 Laser correction HP sensor /C
Classification Symbol Code Multi
code
Name Display and signal source
001 000
CF5001 Field Service Ver.1.0 Sep 2003 47 MODE
2-113
II A
DJ
US
TM
EN
T
Light PS5,
PS6,
PS7
35 4 Laser correction HP sensor /Y, /M, /C Edge detected
from one or more color
Edge undetected
PS5 5 Laser correction HP sensor /Y Edge detected
Edge undetectedPS6 6 Laser correction HP sensor /M
PS7 7 Laser correction HP sensor /C
PS5,
PS6,
PS7
8 Laser correction HP sensor /Y, /M, /C Edge detected
from one or more color
Edge undetected
PS5 9 Laser correction HP sensor /Y Edge detected
Edge undetectedPS6 10 Laser correction HP sensor /M
PS7 11 Laser correction HP sensor /C
PS8 36 3 Color registration sensor /F 0 to 255
PS9 4 Color registration sensor /R
LDB Y 37 1 Laser drive board /Y 0 to 255
LDB M 2 Laser drive board /M
LDB C 3 Laser drive board /C
LDB K 4 Laser drive board /K
PS1 38 5 Scanner HP sensor Home position
Other than home posi-
tion
Main body PS60,
PS61
41 0 Encoder sensor /Y1, /Y2 Abnormal Normal
1
2
PS62,
PS63
3 Encoder sensor /M1, /M2
4
5
PS64,
PS65
6 Encoder sensor /C1, /C2
7
8
PS66,
PS67
9 Encoder sensor /K1, /K2
10
11
PS69,
PS68
12 Encoder sensor /belt 1, /belt 2
13
14
PS15 15 1st transfer HP sensor Home position
Other than home posi-
tion16
17
18
Classification Symbol Code Multi
code
Name Display and signal source
001 000
47 MODE CF5001 Field Service Ver.1.0 Sep 2003
2-114
II A
DJ
US
TM
EN
T
Main body M2 42 0 Scanner cooling fan Abnormal Normal
M42 2 DCPS cooling fan
M10 3 Fixing cooling fan /1
M48 4 Charger intake fan
M47 5 Drum unit fan
M43,
M44,
M45,
M46
6 Writing intake fan /1, /2, Writing exhaust fan /1, /2
M24 7 IP cooling fan
M28,
M27,
M26
8 Paper exit fan /F, /M, /R
M12,
M13
9 Drum cooling fan /1, /2
M11 10 Transfer belt cooling fan
M25 11 ICP cooling fan
DCPS1 43 0 DC power supply unit /1 (12VDC) Abnormal Normal
DCPS2 1 DC power supply unit /2 (24VDC)
2 DC power supply unit /2 (24VDC)
3 DC power supply unit /2 (24VDC)
4 DC power supply unit /2 (24VDC)
C (T) 5 Total counter Yes No
C (K) 6 Checking to see if the key counter-equipped machine is provided with a key counter or not.
Yes No
TH1 45 0 Fixing temperature sensor /1 0 to 255
TH3 1 Fixing temperature sensor /3
TH2 2 Fixing temperature sensor /2
TH4 3 Fixing temperature sensor /4
TH1 4 Fixing temperature sensor /1
TH1 5 Fixing temperature sensor /1
TH2 6 Fixing temperature sensor /2
— 7 TH1 correction temperature
— 8 TH2 correction temperature
— 9 TH1 correction temperature
M29 47 0 Fixing motor Abnormal Normal
1
2
PS16 3 Fixing pressure release sensor Home position
Other than home posi-
tion4
5
M29 9 Fixing motor Abnormal Normal
10
11
Classification Symbol Code Multi
code
Name Display and signal source
001 000
CF5001 Field Service Ver.1.0 Sep 2003 47 MODE
2-115
II A
DJ
US
TM
EN
T
Main body PS15 48 0 1st transfer HP sensor Home position
Other than home posi-
tion1
2
3
PRCB 49 Printer control board (drum motor control) Displays abnormal code
Intrinsic functions
M20 50 0 Developing motor /Y Abnormal Normal
1
2
M21 3 Developing motor /M
4
5
M22 6 Developing motor /C
7
8
M23 9 Developing motor /K
10
11
TDS Y 12 Toner density sensor /Y 0 to 255
TDS M 13 Toner density sensor /M
TDS C 14 Toner density sensor /C
TDS K 15 Toner density sensor /K
PCL Y 51 4 Pre-charging lamp /Y Abnormal Normal
PCL M 5 Pre-charging lamp /M
PCL C 6 Pre-charging lamp /C
PCL K 7 Pre-charging lamp /K
TDS Y 54 0 Toner density sensor /Y 0 to 255
1
2
TDS M 3 Toner density sensor /M
4
5
TDS C 6 Toner density sensor /C
7
8
TDS K 9 Toner density sensor /K
10
11
— 57 0 FN-120, FN-9 Connected Uncon-nected— 1 C-208
— 2 AFR-20
TDS Y 58 0 Toner density sensor /Y 0 to 255
TDS M 1 Toner density sensor /M
TDS C 2 Toner density sensor /C
TDS K 3 Toner density sensor /K
Classification Symbol Code Multi
code
Name Display and signal source
001 000
47 MODE CF5001 Field Service Ver.1.0 Sep 2003
2-116
II A
DJ
US
TM
EN
T
Intrinsic functions
PS17 59 3 Fixing paper exit sensor Paper No paper
AFR-20 PS304 60 1 No paper sensor Paper No paper
PS301 2 Registration sensor
PS302 3 Timing sensor
PS305 4 Reverse sensor
PS306 5 Paper exit sensor
PS303 6 Paper feed cover sensor Open Close
PS308 7 Paper feed tray sensor
PS307 8 Paper exit cover sensor
RS1 9 AFR-20 open/close sensor
FN-120, PS701 76 0 Sub-tray paper exit sensor Paper No paper
FN-9 PS702 1 Tray upper limit sensor Upper limit Other than upper limit
PS703 2 Tray lower limit sensor Lower limit Other than lower limit
PS704 3 FNS entrance sensor No paper Paper
PS705 4 Stacker entrance sensor Paper No paper
PS706 5 Main tray paper exit sensor
PS707 6 Stapler paper exit upper limit sensor Other than standby position
Standby position
PS708 7 Alignment HP sensor /U Home position
Other than home posi-
tion
PS709 8 Paper exit belt HP sensor Other than home posi-
tion
Home position
PS713 9 Stapler rotation HP sensor Home position
Other than home posi-
tionPS711 10 Stapler movement HP sensor
PS712 11 Paper exit opening HP sensor Other than close posi-
tion
Close position
PS714 12 Clincher rotation HP sensor Home position
Other than home posi-
tion
PS715 13 Counter reset sensor Paper No paper
PS718 14 Shift HP sensor Other than home posi-
tion
Home position
PS720 15 Stacker no paper sensor Paper No paper
SW702 16 Staple switch /R No staple Staple
PS730 17 Stapler HP sensor /R Other than home posi-
tion
Home position
SW701 18 Cartridge switch /R No cartridge Cartridge
Classification Symbol Code Multi
code
Name Display and signal source
001 000
CF5001 Field Service Ver.1.0 Sep 2003 47 MODE
2-117
II A
DJ
US
TM
EN
T
FN-120, FN-9
M710 76 19 Clincher motor /R Other than start
Start
— 20 — — —
PS732 21 Clincher HP sensor /R Other than home posi-
tion
Home position
PS719 22 Sub-tray full sensor Full Other than full
MS701 23 FNS interlock switch Front door opened
Front door closed
SW704 24 Staple switch /F No staple Staple
PS731 25 Stapler HP sensor /F Other than home posi-
tion
Home position
SW703 26 Cartridge switch /F No cartridge Cartridge
M715 27 Clincher motor /F Other than start
Start
— 28 — — —
PS733 29 Clincher HP sensor /F Other than home posi-
tion
Home position
M707 30 Paper exit roller motor lock detection Other than control speed
Control speed
— 31 FNS connection detection Connected Uncon-nected
PS722 32 Folding knife HP sensor Home position
Other than home posi-
tionPS723 33 Stopper HP sensor
PS724 34 Alignment HP sensor /L Other than home posi-
tion
Home position
PS725 35 Folding exit sensor Paper No paper
PS726 36 Folding passage sensor
PS729 37 Folding full sensor Full Other than full
— 38 — — —
M720 39 Folding conveyance motor Other than control speed
Control speed
— 40 — — —
— 41 — — —
— 42 — — —
— 43 — — —
Classification Symbol Code Multi
code
Name Display and signal source
001 000
47 MODE CF5001 Field Service Ver.1.0 Sep 2003
2-118
II A
DJ
US
TM
EN
T
Cover Inserter D
M203 76 44 PI conveyance motor Other than control speed
Control speed
— 45 DIPSW0 Other than single oper-
ation
Single oper-ation
— 46 — — —
— 47 — — —
— 48 — — —
— 49 — — —
— 50 — — —
— 51 — — —
PS201 52 PI passage sensor /U Paper No paper
PS206 53 PI passage sensor /L
— 54 — — —
— 55 — — —
— 56 — — —
— 57 — — —
— 58 — — —
FN-120, FN-9
— 59 Folding connection detection Uncon-nected
Connected
— 60 — — —
PS716 61 Gate HP sensor
Cover Inserter D
— 62 — — —
— 63 — — —
PS202 64 No sheet sensor /U No paper Paper
PS203 65 Sheet set sensor /U
PS205 66 Tray lower limit sensor /U Lower limit Other than lower limit
PS204 67 Tray upper limit sensor /U Upper limit Other than upper limit
— 68 Sheet feeder manual start/clear switch Switch OFF Switch ON
— 69 Sheet feeder manual punch button switch
— 70 Sheet feeder manual function selection but-ton switch
MS201 71 PI interlock switch Open Close
PS207 72 No sheet sensor /L No paper Paper
PS208 73 Sheet set sensor /L
PS210 74 Tray lower limit sensor /L Lower limit Other than lower limit
PS209 75 Tray upper limit sensor /L Upper limit Other than upper limit
— 76 — — —
PS212 77 Sheet size sensor /L
— 78 — — —
Classification Symbol Code Multi
code
Name Display and signal source
001 000
CF5001 Field Service Ver.1.0 Sep 2003 47 MODE
2-119
II A
DJ
US
TM
EN
T
Cover Inserter D
— 76 79 PI connection detection Uncon-nected
Connected
— 80 — — —
— 81 — — —
— 82 — — —
PK-5 PS801 83 Punch HP sensor Other than home posi-
tion
Home position
— 84 — — —
— 85 — — —
PS802 86 Punch scraps full sensor Other than full
Full
PS804 87 Punch scraps box set sensor Set Other than set
— 88 PK rocking End face detection 1 No paper Paper
89 PK rocking End face detection 2
90 PK rocking End face detection 3
91 PK rocking End face detection 4
92 PK rocking End face detection 5
PS803 93 PK rocking Punch movement home posi-tion
Home position
Other than home posi-
tion
— 94 PK connection detection Uncon-nected
Connected
— 95 — — —
Classification Symbol Code Multi
code
Name Display and signal source
001 000
47 MODE CF5001 Field Service Ver.1.0 Sep 2003
2-120
II A
DJ
US
TM
EN
T
TMG-3 PS101 77 0 Cutting entrance detection Paper No paper
PS102 1 Cutting conveyance detection
PS103 2 Cutting end stopper HP detection Home position
Other than home posi-
tionPS104 3 Cutting clear HP detection
PS105 4 Cutting press HP detectin Other than home posi-
tion
Home position
PS106 5 Cutting knife upper limit HP detection Home position
Other than home posi-
tion
PS108 6 Cutting booklet discharge Paper No paper
PS110 7 Holder board of upper limit detection Other than upper limit
Upper limit
PS111 8 Holder board of lower limit detection Lower limit Other than lower limit
PS112 9 Pusher HP Home position
Other than home posi-
tion
PS114 10 Cutting stacker cover detection 24 V Open Close
MS2 11 Cutting front door detection 24 V
— 12 Cutting conveyance M lock signal under operation
Locked Unlocked
— 13 — — —
— 14 — — —
— 15 — — —
PS107 16 Cutting end scraps box set detection Not set Other than set
PS109 17 Cutting end scraps box full detection Other than full
Full
PS113 18 Cutting stucker full detection No paper Paper
— 19 TU connection detection Uncon-nected
Connected
— 20 — — —
— 21 — — —
— 22 — — —
— 23 — — —
Classification Symbol Code Multi
code
Name Display and signal source
001 000
CF5001 Field Service Ver.1.0 Sep 2003 47 MODE
2-121
II A
DJ
US
TM
EN
T
8.5 Output check list
Note:
• Do not output items which cannot be set or
changed in the field and codes which are not
described in the output check list."
• Do not output items with "x" in the "Cannot be
set or change in the field" column. These
items are only for the developping/manufuct-
ing process.
Outputs of them may damage the machine.
Classification Symbol Code Multi
code
Name Cannot be set or
changed in the field
High voltage, analog signal
L1 00 0 Exposure lamp
M53,
MC14
01 0 Toner bottle motor (low speed), toner bottle clutch /Y
1 Toner bottle motor (high speed), toner bottle clutch /Y
2 Toner bottle motor (nonvolatile value), toner bot-tle clutch /Y
M53,
MC15
3 Toner bottle motor (low speed), toner bottle clutch /M
4 Toner bottle motor (high speed), toner bottle clutch /M
5 Toner bottle motor (nonvolatile value), toner bot-tle clutch /M
M53,
MC16
6 Toner bottle motor (low speed), toner bottle clutch /C
7 Toner bottle motor (high speed), toner bottle clutch /C
8 Toner bottle motor (nonvolatile value), toner bot-tle clutch /C
M53,
MC17
9 Toner bottle motor (low speed), toner bottle clutch /K
10 Toner bottle motor (high speed), toner bottle clutch /K
11 Toner bottle motor (nonvolatile value), toner bot-tle clutch /K
HV1 02 0 High voltage unit /1 (charging /Y) x
1 High voltage unit /1 (charging /M) x
2 High voltage unit /1 (charging /C) x
3 High voltage unit /1 (charging /K) x
4 High voltage unit /1 (charging /Y: for current measurement)
x
5 High voltage unit /1 (charging /M: for current measurement)
x
6 High voltage unit /1 (charging /C: for current measurement)
x
7 High voltage unit /1 (charging /K: for current measurement)
x
47 MODE CF5001 Field Service Ver.1.0 Sep 2003
2-122
II A
DJ
US
TM
EN
T
High voltage, analog signal
HV2 03 0 High voltage unit /2 (1st transfer /Y) x
1 High voltage unit /2 (1st transfer /M) x
2 High voltage unit /2 (1st transfer /C) x
3 High voltage unit /2 (1st transfer /K) x
4 High voltage unit /2 (1st transfer /Y, /M, /C, /K) x
5
6
7 High voltage unit /2 (1st transfer /K) x
8 High voltage unit /2 (1st transfer /Y: for current measurement)
x
9 High voltage unit /2 (1st transfer /M: for current measurement)
x
L1 10 High voltage unit /2 (1st transfer /C: for current measurement)
x
11 High voltage unit /2 (1st transfer /K: for current measurement at color mode)
x
12 High voltage unit /2 (1st transfer /K: for current measurement at color mode)
x
HV2 04 0 High voltage unit/2 (separation) x
1 High voltage unit /2 (separation, measurement) x
PS11 06 2 Gamma sensor
6 Gamma sensor (for individual check) x
DRPS Y 0 Drum potential sensor /Y
DRPS M 1 Drum potential sensor /M
DRPS C 2 Drum potential sensor /C
DRPS K 3 Drum potential sensor /K
HV2 07 4 High voltage unit /2 (belt cleaning+output) x
5 High voltage unit /2 (belt cleaning-output) x
6 High voltage unit /2 (belt cleaning+output: for individual check)
x
7 High voltage unit /2 (belt cleaning-output: for individual check)
x
08 0 High voltage unit /2 (2nd transfer output1) x
1 High voltage unit /2 (2nd transfer output2) x
2 High voltage unit /2 (2nd transfer output1: for current measurement)
x
3 High voltage unit /2 (2nd transfer output2: for current measurement)
x
4 High voltage unit /2 (2nd transfer output3: for cleaning consideration)*
x
5 High voltage unit /2 (guide plate) x
HV1 09 0 High voltage unit /1 (developing bias /Y) x
1 High voltage unit /1 (developing bias /M) x
2 High voltage unit /1 (developing bias /C) x
3 High voltage unit /1 (developing bias /K) x
— 15 1 Counter reset
— 2 Job memory clear
— 98 RD mode setup
Classification Symbol Code Multi
code
Name Cannot be set or
changed in the field
CF5001 Field Service Ver.1.0 Sep 2003 47 MODE
2-123
II A
DJ
US
TM
EN
T
Paper feed, conveyance
SD7 20 0 Pick up solenoid /1
SD8 1 Pick up solenoid /2
SD9 2 Pick up solenoid /3
SD5 4 Pick up solenoid /BP
SD100 5 Paper feed solenoid (C-208)
MC7 21 0 Paper feed clutch /1
MC9 1 Paper feed clutch /2
MC11 2 Paper feed clutch /3
MC6 4 Paper feed clutch /BP
MC101 5 Paper feed clutch (C-208)
MC8 22 0 Pre-registration clutch /1
MC10 1 Pre-registration clutch /2
MC12 2 Pre-registration clutch /3
MC102 5 Pre-registration clutch (C-208)
M40 23 0 Tray up drive motor /1
M39 1 Tray up drive motor /2
M38 2 Tray up drive motor /3
M35 3 Tray up drive motor /BP (down)
4 Tray up drive motor /BP (up)
M100 5 UP/DOWN motor (C-208: down)
6 UP/DOWN motor (C-208: up)
M34 24 0 2nd transfer pressure/release motor (continuous rotation)
1 2nd transfer pressure/release motor (pressure)
2 2nd transfer pressure/release motor (release)
M30 25 0 Registration motor (1/3 speed)
1 Registration motor (1/2 speed)
2 Registration motor (1/1speed)
3 Registration motor (paper feed line speed)
4 Registration motor (hard timer on: 1/1 speed)
M31 26 0 Loop roller motor (1/3 speed)
1 Loop roller motor (1/2 speed)
2 Loop roller motor (1/1speed)
M31 3 Loop roller motor (paper feed line speed)
M33 27 0 Reverse/exit motor (normal rotation:1/3 speed)
1 Reverse/exit motor (normal rotation:1/2 speed)
2 Reverse/exit motor (normal rotation:1/1 speed)
3 Reverse/exit motor (normal rotation:3 times speed)
4 Reverse/exit motor (reverse rotation:1/3 speed)
5 Reverse/exit motor (reverse rotation:1/2 speed)
6 Reverse/exit motor (reverse rotation:1/1 speed)
7 Reverse/exit motor (reverse rotation:3 times speed)
M41 28 0 Paper feed motor
M101 1 Paper feed motor (C-208)
Classification Symbol Code Multi
code
Name Cannot be set or
changed in the field
47 MODE CF5001 Field Service Ver.1.0 Sep 2003
2-124
II A
DJ
US
TM
EN
T
Paper feed, conveyance
MC13 29 0 Intermediate conveyance clutch /1
MC4 1 Intermediate conveyance clutch /2
MC5 2 Intermediate conveyance clutch /3
SD1 3 Transfer belt separating claw
M136,
M137
5 Paper feed assist fan /F, /R (C-208)
SD6 6 ADU lock solenoid
M3 32 0 Polygon motor /Y (1/1 rotation)
M4 1 Polygon motor /M (1/1 rotation)
M5 2 Polygon motor /C (1/1 rotation)
M6 3 Polygon motor /K (1/1 rotation)
M3, M4,
M5, M6
4 Polygon motor /Y, /M, /C, /K (1/1 rotation)
M3 5 Polygon motor /Y (rotates at nonvolatile setting)
M4 6 Polygon motor /M (rotates at nonvolatile setting)
M5 7 Polygon motor /C (rotates at nonvolatile setting)
M6 8 Polygon motor /K (rotates at nonvolatile setting)
M3, M4,
M5, M6
9 Polygon motor /Y, /M, /C, /K (rotates at nonvola-tile setting)
LDB Y 33 0 Laser drive board /Y
LDB M 1 Laser drive board /M
LDB C 2 Laser drive board /C
LDB K 3 Laser drive board /K
LDB Y,
M, C, K
4 Laser drive board /Y, /M, /C, /K
— 34 Shading correction
PS8 36 3 Color registration sensor /F
PS9 4 Color registration sensor /R
— 37 0 LD alarm level detection all colors
M1 38 0 Scanner motor (back and forth drive 1: continu-ous)
1 Scanner motor (back and forth drive 2: continu-ous)
2 Scanner motor (back and forth drive 3: continu-ous)
3 Scanner motor (back and forth drive 4: continu-ous)
4 Scanner motor (back and forth drive 5: continu-ous)
5 Scanner motor (HP search)
6 Scanner motor(moves to the back scan position)
7 Scanner motor (back scan AGS operation+scan operation: one operation)
Main body ACDB 40 0 AC drive board (RL1 (main relay)ON)
1 AC drive board (HTR1, 2 (HTR1, 2(heater/1, /2)OFF)
M14 41 0 Drum motor /Y (1/3 speed)
Classification Symbol Code Multi
code
Name Cannot be set or
changed in the field
CF5001 Field Service Ver.1.0 Sep 2003 47 MODE
2-125
II A
DJ
US
TM
EN
T
1 Drum motor /Y (1/2 speed)
2 Drum motor /Y (1/1speed)
M15 3 Drum motor /M (1/3 speed)
4 Drum motor /M (1/2 speed)
5 Drum motor /M (1/1speed)
M16 6 Drum motor /C (1/3 speed)
7 Drum motor /C (1/2 speed)
8 Drum motor /C (1/1speed)
M17 9 Drum motor /K (1/3 speed)
10 Drum motor /K (1/2 speed)
11 Drum motor /K (1/1speed)
M18 12 Transfer belt motor (1/3 speed)
13 Transfer belt motor (1/2 speed)
14 Transfer belt motor (1/1speed)
15 Transfer belt motor (1/3 speed: for nip measure-ment)
x
M18 41 16 Transfer belt motor (1/2 speed: for nip measure-ment)
x
17 Transfer belt motor (1/1 speed: for nip measure-ment)
x
M2 42 0 Scanner cooling fan
M25 1 IPB cooling fan
M42 2 DCPS cooling fan
M10,
M36,
M37
3 Fixing cooling fan /1, /3, /2
M48 4 Charger intake fan
M47 5 Drum unit fan
M43,
M44,
M45,
M46
6 Writing intake fan /1, /2, Writing exhaust fan /1, /2
M24 7 IP cooling fan
M26,
M27,
M28
8 Exhaust fan/R, /M, /F
M12 9 Drum cooling fan /1
M13 10 Drum cooling fan /2
M11 11 Transfer belt cooling fan
T (C) 43 1 Total counter
T (BK) 2 Black counter
T (K) 6 Key counter
Main body DCPS2 44 DC power supply unit /2 (24VDC breaking)
L2, L3,
L4
45 0 Fixing upper lamp/1, /2, Fixing lower lamp1
2
Classification Symbol Code Multi
code
Name Cannot be set or
changed in the field
47 MODE CF5001 Field Service Ver.1.0 Sep 2003
2-126
II A
DJ
US
TM
EN
T
3
L2 4 Fixing upper lamp /1
L3 5 Fixing upper lamp /2
L4 6 Fixing lower lamp
L2, L3,
L4
7 Fixing upper lamp/1, /2, Fixing lower lamp8
9
10
M29 47 0 Fixing motor (1/3 speed)
1 Fixing motor (1/2 speed)
2 Fixing motor (1/1speed)
3 Fixing motor (reverse rotation: release operation on, full-time rotation)
4 Fixing motor (reverse rotation: moves to the pressure position)
5 Fixing motor (reverse rotation: moves to the release position)
M29 47 9 Fixing motor (pressure continuous rotation: 1/3 speed)
10 Fixing motor (pressure continuous rotation: 1/2 speed)
11 Fixing motor (pressure continuous rotation: 1/1 speed)
M29, L2,
L3, L4
13 Fixing motor, Fixing upper lamp/1, /2, fixing lower lamp (fixing roller pressure+all heater lamps on)
M54 15 Web motor
M19 48 0 1st transfer pressure/release motor (full-time rotation)
1 1st transfer pressure/release motor (stops at the release position)
2 1st transfer pressure/release motor (stops at black and white pressure position)
3 1st transfer pressure/release motor (stops at color mode pressure position)
M18 49 0 Transfer belt motor (for checking photosensitive material control 1: 1/1 speed)
x
1 1st transfer pressure/release motor (for check-ing photosensitive material control 2: 1/2 speed)
x
2 1st transfer pressure/release motor (for check-ing photosensitive material control 3: 1/3 speed)
x
3 1st transfer pressure/release motor (for check-ing photosensitive material control 4: 1/1 speed)
x
4 1st transfer pressure/release motor (for check-ing photosensitive material control 5: 1/2 speed)
x
5 1st transfer pressure/release motor (for check-ing photosensitive material control 6: 1/3 speed)
x
Intrinsic functions
M20 50 0 Developing motor /Y (1/1speed)
1 Developing motor /Y (1/2 speed)
2 Developing motor /Y (1/3 speed)
M21 3 Developing motor /M (1/1speed)
Classification Symbol Code Multi
code
Name Cannot be set or
changed in the field
CF5001 Field Service Ver.1.0 Sep 2003 47 MODE
2-127
II A
DJ
US
TM
EN
T
4 Developing motor /M (1/2 speed)
5 Developing motor /M (1/3 speed)
M22 6 Developing motor /C (1/1speed)
7 Developing motor /C (1/2 speed)
8 Developing motor /C (1/3 speed)
M23 9 Developing motor /K (1/1speed)
10 Developing motor /K (1/2 speed)
11 Developing motor /K (1/3 speed)
PCL Y 51 0 Pre-charging lamp /Y
PLC M 1 Pre-charging lamp /M
PCL C 2 Pre-charging lamp /C
PCL K 51 3 Pre-charging lamp /K
PCL Y 4 Pre-charging lamp /Y (turns on the control signal)
PCL M 5 Pre-charging lamp //M (turns on the control signal)
PLC C 6 Pre-charging lamp /C (turns on the control signal)
PCL K 7 Pre-charging lamp /K (turns on the control signal)
— 52 0 L detection reference for all colors x
— 1 L detection reference for colors (Y, M, C) x
— 2 L detection reference for K x
— 3 L detection reference for Y x
— 4 L detection reference for M x
— 5 L detection reference for C x
M49 54 0 Toner supply motor /Y (high speed)
1 Toner supply motor /Y (low speed)
2 Toner supply motor /Y (setting value)
M50 3 Toner supply motor /M (high speed)
4 Toner supply motor /M (low speed)
5 Toner supply motor /M (setting value)
M51 6 Toner supply motor /C (high speed)
7 Toner supply motor /C (low speed)
8 Toner supply motor /C (setting value)
M52 9 Toner supply motor /K (high speed)
10 Toner supply motor /K (low speed)
11 Toner supply motor /K (setting value)
MC14 12 Toner bottle clutch /Y
MC15 13 Toner bottle clutch /M
MC16 14 Toner bottle clutch /C
MC17 15 Toner bottle clutch /K
Intrinsic functions
SD2 55 0 Color registration shutter solenoid
SD3 1 Gamma sensor shutter solenoid
— 56 0 Indicator lamp (PAT1 on)
1 Indicator lamp (PAT2 on)
Classification Symbol Code Multi
code
Name Cannot be set or
changed in the field
47 MODE CF5001 Field Service Ver.1.0 Sep 2003
2-128
II A
DJ
US
TM
EN
T
2 Indicator lamp (PAT3 on)
3 Indicator lamp (PAT4 on)
— 57 0 FN-120, FN-9 connection check
— 1 C-208 connection check
— 2 AFR-20 connection check
TDS Y 58 0 Toner density sensor /Y
TDS M 1 Toner density sensor /M
TDS C 2 Toner density sensor /C
TDS K 3 Toner density sensor /K
AFR-20 M301 60 1 Paper feed motor (normal rotation: 300mm/sec)
2 Paper feed motor (normal rotation: 400mm/sec)
3 Paper feed motor (normal rotation: 900mm/sec)
4 Paper feed motor (reverse rotation: 300mm/sec)
5 Paper feed motor (reverse rotation: 400mm/sec)
6 Paper feed motor (reverse rotation: 900mm/sec)
M302 7 Conveyance motor (normal rotation: 300mm/sec)
8 Conveyance motor (normal rotation: 400mm/sec)
9 Conveyance motor (normal rotation: 900mm/sec)
10 Conveyance motor (reverse rotation: 300mm/sec)
11 Conveyance motor (reverse rotation: 400mm/sec)
12 Conveyance motor (reverse rotation: 900mm/sec)
M303 13 Paper exit motor (normal rotation: 300mm/sec)
14 Paper exit motor (normal rotation: 400mm/sec)
15 Paper exit motor (normal rotation: 900mm/sec)
16 Paper exit motor (reverse rotation: 300mm/sec)
17 Paper exit motor (reverse rotation: 400mm/sec)
18 Paper exit motor (reverse rotation: 900mm/sec)
SD302 19 Reverse solenoid
SD301 20 Paper exit solenoid
MC301 21 Registration clutch
FN-120, FN-9 M701 75 1 FNS conveyance motor
M702 2 Shift motor (HP search)
3 Shift motor (moves to the shift position)
4 Shift motor ( rotation)
Classification Symbol Code Multi
code
Name Cannot be set or
changed in the field
CF5001 Field Service Ver.1.0 Sep 2003 47 MODE
2-129
II A
DJ
US
TM
EN
T
FN-120, FN-9 M703 75 5 Tray up/down motor (HP search)
6 Tray up/down motor (down)
7 Tray up/down motor (up)
M705 8 Alignment motor /U (HP search)
M707 9 Paper exit roller motor (HP search)
10 Paper exit roller motor (reverse rotation)
M708 11 Paper exit opening motor (HP search)
M708 12 Paper exit opening motor (moves to opening)
M709 13 Stapler motor /R (initianl operation)
14 Stapler motor /R (stapling)
M714 15 Stapler motor /F (initianl operation)
16 Stapler motor /F (stapling)
M711 17 Stapler movement motor (HP search)
18 Stapler movement motor (movement by size)
M713 19 Stacker entrance motor
M718 20 Stopper motor (HP search)
M716 21 Alignment motor /L
M719 23 Folding knife motor
M720 24 Folding conveyance motor
SD704 31 Paper exit opening solenoid
SD705 32 By-pass gate solenoid
M705 33 Alignment motor /U (open)
34 Alignment motor /U (close)
35 Alignment motor /U (rocking)
M716 36 Alignment motor /L (open)
37 Alignment motor /L (close)
38 Alignment motor /L (rocking)
M718 39 Stopper motor (moves to the A4R position)
TMG-3 M101 55 Conveyance motor
M102 56 Cutter motor (normal rotation)
57 Cutter motor (reverse rotation)
M103 58 Stopper motor (HP search)
M104 59 Stopper release motor (HP search)
60 Stopper release motor (release)
61 Stopper release motor (set)
M105 62 Press motor (HP search)
63 Press motor (press)
Cover Inserter D
MC202 75 64 Conveyance clutch /L
M202 65 Tray up/down motor /L (down)
66 Tray up/down motor /L (up)
SD202 67 Sheet feed solenoid /L
PK-5 M801 78 Punch motor
Classification Symbol Code Multi
code
Name Cannot be set or
changed in the field
47 MODE CF5001 Field Service Ver.1.0 Sep 2003
2-130
II A
DJ
US
TM
EN
T
M802 79 Punch shift motor (HP search)
Cover Inserter D
MC201 83 Conveyance clutch /U
M201 84 Tray up/down motor (down)
85 Tray up/down motor (up)
SD201 86 Sheet feed solenoid /U
M203 87 PI conveyance motor
FN-120, FN-9 M712 88 Gate drive motor (HP search)
89 Gate drive motor (stacker direction switching)
90 Gate drive motor (straight direction switching)
M721 91 Sub-tray paper exit motor
M704 92 Clincher rotation motor (HP search)
93 Clincher rotation motor (skew shift)
M706 94 Stapler rotation motor (HP search)
95 Stapler rotation motor (skew shift)
SD706 96 Three-folding gate solenoid
— 99 FNS paperless running mode
ADU SD4 80 Reverse/exit solenoid
MC2 81 0 ADU conveyance clutch /1
MC1 1 ADU conveyance clutch /2
MC3 2 ADU pre-registration clutch
M32 84 0 ADU reverse motor (forward rotation: 1/3 speed)
1 ADU reverse motor (forward rotation: 1/2 speed)
2 ADU reverse motor (forward rotation: 1/1 speed)
3 ADU reverse motor (forward rotation: paper feed line speed)
4 ADU reverse motor (forward rotation: 3 times speed)
5 ADU reverse motor (reverse rotation: 1/3 speed)
6 ADU reverse motor (reverse rotation: 1/2 speed)
7 ADU reverse motor (reverse rotation: 1/1 speed)
8 ADU reverse motor (reverse rotation: paper feed line speed)
M32 84 9 ADU reverse motor (reverse rotation:3 times speed)
Others — 94 0 Adjustment data display
— 1 Illuminate all LEDs on the operation board
— 2 Message display
— 97 1 E-RDH (DRAM) capacity display
— 98 2 E-RDH (DRAM) check
— 99 3 HDD bad sectors check and recovery
Classification Symbol Code Multi
code
Name Cannot be set or
changed in the field
CF5001 Field Service Ver.1.0 Sep 2003 OTHER ADJUSTMENTS
2-131
II A
DJ
US
TM
EN
T
9. OTHER ADJUSTMENTS
Caution:
• Make sure the power cord of the copier is
unplugged from the power outlet
9.1 Paper feed roller/BP pres-sure adjustment
Perform the paper feed roller/BP pressure adjust-
ment when the no feed jam occurs at the by-pass
feed.
A. Procedure
1. Pull out the ADU.
2. Install the piled plate [3] on the paper feed roller/
BP [2] with 2 screws [1].
3. Replace the ADU.
4. Perform the copy to check the paper feed opera-
tion.
5. Repeat steps 1 to 4 if the no feed jam continues
to occur at the paper feed.
Note:
• The weight plate is a supply part. It should be
purchased separately.
• Up to 4 plates can be used at a time.
• Perform "9.3 Pick-up movement amount
adjustment (by-pass)" when the weight plate
is added.
[1] [3] [2]
8050fs1050
OTHER ADJUSTMENTS CF5001 Field Service Ver.1.0 Sep 2003
2-132
II A
DJ
US
TM
EN
T
9.2 Paper feed height (upperlimit) adjustment (by-pass)
Perform the paper feed height (upper limit) adjust-
ment when the no feed jam occurs, the edge of the
fed paper is folded, or you want to feed curled
paper.
Note:
• This adjustment affects the pick-up movement
amount. When the adjustment is complete,
perform "9.3 Pick-up movement amount
adjustment (by-pass)".
A. Procedure
1. Pull out the ADU.
2. Remove 6 screws [1] and remove the paper feed
solenoid cover [2].
[1][2]
[1]
8050fs1051
CF5001 Field Service Ver.1.0 Sep 2003 OTHER ADJUSTMENTS
2-133
II A
DJ
US
TM
EN
T
3. Loosen a screw [1] and adjust the position of the
tray upper limit sensor/BP (PS25) [2].
Note:
• Take note of the original scale.
(1) If it is not within the standard value:
Adjust the vertical position of the sensor mounting
bracket to make the height of the entrance guide
upper surface and the up/down plate upper surface
to be within the standard value.
• When raising the height of the up/down plate:lower the sensor mounting bracket.
• When lowering height of the up/down plate:lower the sensor mounting bracket.
(2) If any problem occurs:
• When the edge of the fed paper is folded: raisethe position of the sensor mounting bracket.
• When paper with a concave curl is fed: raise theposition of the sensor mounting bracket.
• When paper with a convex curl is fed: lower theposition of the sensor mounting bracket.
1. Replace the paper feed solenoid cover.
2. Replace the ADU.
3. Perform the copy to check the paper feed opera-
tion.
4. Repeat steps 1 to 6 to adjust the position of
PS25 again if the problem continues to occur.
[2]
[1]
8050fs1052
OTHER ADJUSTMENTS CF5001 Field Service Ver.1.0 Sep 2003
2-134
II A
DJ
US
TM
EN
T
9.3 Pick-up movement amountadjustment (by-pass)
Perform the pick-up movement amount adjustment
when a no feed jam occurs frequently.
A. Procedure
1. Pull out the ADU.
2. Remove 6 screws [1] and remove the paper feed
solenoid cover [2].
3. Loosen a screw [1] and adjust the position of the
pick-up solenoid/BP (SD5) [2].
Note:
• Take note of the original scale.
4. Replace the paper feed solenoid cover.
5. Replace the ADU.
6. Perform the copy to check the paper feed opera-
tion.
7. Repeat steps 1 to 6 to adjust the position of SD5
again if the no feed jam continues to occur.
[1][2]
[1]
8050fs1053
[2]
[1]
8050fs1054
CF5001 Field Service Ver.1.0 Sep 2003 OTHER ADJUSTMENTS
2-135
II A
DJ
US
TM
EN
T
9.4 Paper feed tray /1 to /3 mis-centering adjustment
Perform this adjustment when the mis-centering
occurs even after "Printer-centering adjustment" in
the 36 mode, has been performed.
A. Procedure
1. Pull out the paper feed tray.
2. Loosen 3 screws [2] for the up/down plate [1].
3. Move the guide plate and adjust the center posi-
tion.
4. Tighten 3 screws [2].
5. Print the test pattern (No.16).
6. Fold the output in half vertically and check
whether the mis-centering [3] of the center of
image [2] against the center of paper [1] is
within the standard value.
Standard value: ± 3 mm or less
7. Repeat steps 1 to 6 until the mis-centering
amount is within the standard value.
8050fs1055
[2][1]
[3]
8050fs1056
[2]
[1]
[3]
OTHER ADJUSTMENTS CF5001 Field Service Ver.1.0 Sep 2003
2-136
II A
DJ
US
TM
EN
T
9.5 Paper feed tray/1 to /3 sheetfeed pressure adjustment
Perform the sheet feed pressure adjustment when
the no feed jam or the double feed jam occurs at the
paper feed. The sheet feed pressure is affected by
the paper type and the operating environment (the
no feed jam is likely in the low temperature environ-
ment and the double feed is likely in the high tem-
perature environment). Excess adjustment may
reverse the symptom.
A. Procedure
1. Pull out the paper feed tray [1].
2. Remove 4 screws [2] and remove the paper feed
unit cover [3].
[2]
[1]
[2]
[3]
8050fs1057
CF5001 Field Service Ver.1.0 Sep 2003 OTHER ADJUSTMENTS
2-137
II A
DJ
US
TM
EN
T
3. Unplug the connector [1].
4. Remove a screw [2] and loosen a hold-down
shaft screw [3].
5. Slide the paper feed unit [4] toward the rear side
and lift it up. Then, unplug the connector [5] and
remove the paper feed unit [4].
6. Change the hook position of the spring [1] at the
bottom of the paper feed unit.
Weak[2]: Double feed jam is corrected.
Strong [3]: No feed jam is corrected.
7. Replace the paper feed unit and the paper feed
tray.
[1]
[2]
[4]
[5]
[3]
8050fs1058
8050fs1059
[1]
[2] [3]
OTHER ADJUSTMENTS CF5001 Field Service Ver.1.0 Sep 2003
2-138
II A
DJ
US
TM
EN
T
9.6 FNS adjustment of the by-pass conveyance guide platemagnet
A. Procedure
1. Open the finisher door.
2. Check whether the stopper piece [4] of the by-
pass conveyance guide plate is in contact with
the by-pass conveyance guide plate/L [5] when
the magnet [2] for the by-pass conveyance
guide plate [1] is attached to the front panel [3].
If not, perform the following adjustment.
3. Loosen the magnet screw [1].
4. Push the by-pass conveyance guide plate [2]
toward the arrow until the stopper piece [4]
comes into contact with the conveyance guide
plate/L [4].
5. Attach the magnet [5] to the front panel [6].
Then, tighten the magnet screw [1].
6. Close the finisher door.
8050fs1075
[1]
[1]
[3][5]
[5]
[2]
[4]
[2]
[4]
8050fs1076
[2]
[6][5]
[1]
[3]
[4]
CF5001 Field Service Ver.1.0 Sep 2003 OTHER ADJUSTMENTS
2-139
II A
DJ
US
TM
EN
T
9.7 FNS adjustment of the by-pass gate
A. Procedure
1. Open the finisher door.
2. Pull out the stacker unit [1].
3. Remove 2 rail stopper screws [2]. Then, pull out
the stacker unit further.
Note:
• To avoid FNS from falling, make sure to place
a support [3] under the stacker unit.
4. Open the by-pass conveyance guide plate [1].
5. Visually check whether the clearance between
the by-pass gate [2] and the by-pass convey-
ance plate [3] is within the standard value when
the by-pass gate solenoid (SD705) is off.
Standard value: A = 3.2 ± 0.5 mm
If not, perform the following adjustment.
8050fs1077[3]
[1]
[2]
[2]
8050fs1078
A=3.2
0.5m
m
[2]
[2]
[1]
[3]
OTHER ADJUSTMENTS CF5001 Field Service Ver.1.0 Sep 2003
2-140
II A
DJ
US
TM
EN
T
6. Remove the rear cover.
7. Unplug all connectors [2] from the FNS control
board (FNSCB) [1] and remove the wiring har-
ness from the clamp [3].
8. Remove 5 screws [4]. Then, remove the FNSCB
[1] with the bracket [5].
9. Loosen 2 screws [2] for the by-pass gate sole-
noid (SD705) [1] and adjust the position of SD
705 [1] based on the mark [5] to make the clear-
ance between the by-pass gate [3] and the by-
pass conveyance plate [4] to be within the stan-
dard value when SD705 [1] is off.
Standard value: A = 3.2 ± 0.5 mm
10. Reinstall the above parts following the removal
steps in reverse.
8050fs1079
[4]
[2] [3]
[5]
[1]
8050fs1080
A=3.2 0.5mm
[5]
[2]
[1]
[4]
[3]
CF5001 Field Service Ver.1.0 Sep 2003 OTHER ADJUSTMENTS
2-141
II A
DJ
US
TM
EN
T
9.8 FNS adjustment of the shiftposition
A. Procedure
1. Remove the following parts.
• Top cover or optional PI (if installed)• Top cover/22. Turn on the main body, and then drive the shift
motor (M702) in the 47 mode (code 75-2/75-3).
3. Check whether the edge of the actuator [5] for
the slide gear is placed in the notched hole [3] at
the slide stay [2] for the shift unit [1] for both the
HP search (home position) and the shift posi-
tion.
If not, perform the following adjustment.
4. Loosen the bracket screw [2] for the shift HP
sensor (PS718) and adjust the position of the
bracket [4] based on the mark [3].
5. Tighten the bracket screw [2] when the adjust-
ment is complete.
6. Reinstall the above parts following the removal
steps in reverse.
8050fs1081
[5][3]
[4]
[2]
[1]
8050fs1082
[2]
[3]
[4][1]
OTHER ADJUSTMENTS CF5001 Field Service Ver.1.0 Sep 2003
2-142
II A
DJ
US
TM
EN
T
9.9 FNS adjustment of the paperexit opening solenoid
A. Procedure
1. Remove the following parts.
• Top cover/1 or optional PI (if installed)• Top cover/2• Rear cover2. Turn on the main body, and then turn on the
paper exit opening solenoid (SD704) in the 47
mode (code 75-31).
3. Check whether the clearance between the
plunger [2] on the solenoid and the stopper [3]
on the bracket is within the standard value when
SD704 [1] is on.
Standard value: A = 6.5 ± 0.5 mm
If not, perform the following adjustment.
4. Remove 2 solenoid bracket screws [1] and
remove the solenoid [2] with the bracket [3].
8050fs1083
A=6.5 0.5mm
[1]
[2]
8050fs1084
[1]
[3]
[2]
CF5001 Field Service Ver.1.0 Sep 2003 OTHER ADJUSTMENTS
2-143
II A
DJ
US
TM
EN
T
5. Loosen 2 solenoid screws [1], adjust the posi-
tion of the solenoid [2], and then tighten the
screws.
Standard value: A = 6.5 ± 0.5 mm
6. Replace the solenoid bracket [1] and tighten the
solenoid bracket screws [5] at the position
where the paper exit guide [2] is in contact with
the stopper (rubber) [4] on the paper exit guide
stay [3].
Note:
• There should be the gap of 1 mm or more
between the paper exit guide [2] and the paper
exit guide stay [3].
7. Reinstall the above parts following the removal
steps in reverse.
8050fs1085
[2]
[1]
A=6.5 0.5mm
8050fs1086
1mm
[1] [5]
[4]
[3]
[2]
[2]
[3]
OTHER ADJUSTMENTS CF5001 Field Service Ver.1.0 Sep 2003
2-144
II A
DJ
US
TM
EN
T
9.10 FNS adjustment of the posi-tion of paper exit arm
A. Procedure
1. Open the finisher door and pull out the stacker
unit.
2. Check whether the upper face of the paper exit
belt arm [4] is located at the center of 2 marks
[5] when the edge of the actuator [2] for the belt
detection gear [1] is placed in the notched hole
[3] at the rear panel.
If not, perform the adjustment.
3. Remove the rail stopper screws for the stacker
unit. Then, pull out the stacker unit further.
Note:
• To avoid the finisher from falling, make sure to
place a support under the stacker unit.
8050fs1087
[3]
[1]
[2]
[5]
[4]
CF5001 Field Service Ver.1.0 Sep 2003 OTHER ADJUSTMENTS
2-145
II A
DJ
US
TM
EN
T
4. Remove a screw [2] for the belt detection gear
[1]. Place the paper eject belt arm at the speci-
fied position. Then, fix the detection gear [1] at
the specified position.
5. Reinstall the above parts following the removal
steps in reverse.
8050fs1088
[1]
[2]
OTHER ADJUSTMENTS CF5001 Field Service Ver.1.0 Sep 2003
2-146
II A
DJ
US
TM
EN
T
9.11 FNS adjustment of the posi-tion of alignment plate/U
A. Procedure
1. Turn on the main body. Once the finisher com-
pletes its initial operation, turn off the main body.
2. Open the finisher door and pull out the stacker
unit.
3. Remove the rail stopper screws for the stacker
unit. Then, pull out the stacker unit further.
Note:
• To avoid the finisher from falling, make sure to
place a support under the stacker unit.
4. Check whether the actuator [2] for the alignment
HP sensor/U (PS708) [1] is aligned with the
home position.
5. Check whether the clearance A for the align-
ment plate/U [1] is within the standard value.
Standard value: A = 340.6 + 0/ -0.5 mm (in to in)
If not, perform the following adjustment.
8050fs1089
[1]
[2]
8050fs1090
[1] PS708
A=340.6 mm
CF5001 Field Service Ver.1.0 Sep 2003 OTHER ADJUSTMENTS
2-147
II A
DJ
US
TM
EN
T
6. Loosen 2 screws [1]. Align the rear side of the
alignment plate/U [2] with the long line at the
center of the marking lines [3]. Then, adjust the
front side of the alignment plate/U [4] to be
within the standard value based on the rear
side.
8050fs1091
[1] [3]
[2]
[1] [2][4]
OTHER ADJUSTMENTS CF5001 Field Service Ver.1.0 Sep 2003
2-148
II A
DJ
US
TM
EN
T
9.12 FNS adjustment of the posi-tion of alignment plate/L(only for FN-9)
A. Procedure
1. Check whether "Adjustment of the position of
FNS alignment plate/U" has been completed.
2. Turn on the main body. In the 47 mode, use one
of the following codes to drive a motor and turn
off the main body.
• Code 75-8: alignment motor/U (M705) homeposition search
• Code 75-21: alignment motor/L (M716) homeposition search
• Code 75-39: stopper motor (M718) moves to theA4R or larger position
3. Open the finisher door and pull out the stacker
unit.
4. Remove the rail stopper screws for the stacker
unit. Then, pull out the stacker unit further.
Note:
• To avoid the finisher from falling, make sure
to place a support under the stacker unit.
5. Remove the stapler unit cover.
6. Check whether the actuator for the alignment
HP sensor/U (PS708) is aligned with the home
position.
7. Check whether the actuator [3] for the alignment
HP sensor/L (PS724) for the alignment plate/L
[1] is aligned with the home position.
8050fs1092
[1]
[2]
[3]
CF5001 Field Service Ver.1.0 Sep 2003 OTHER ADJUSTMENTS
2-149
II A
DJ
US
TM
EN
T
8. Place a sheet larger than A4R in the stacker
section and check the position of the alignment
plate/U (rear) [1] and alignment plate/L (rear) [2]
by placing a sheet [3]. Check whether the space
A between the alignment plate/L (rear) [2] and
the alignment plate/L (front) [4] is within the
standard value.
Standard value: A = 340.6 + 0/ -0.5 mm (in to in)
If not, perform the following adjustment.
9. Loosen 2 screws [1] and adjust the position of
the alignment plate/L [2] to be within the stan-
dard value.
8050fs1093
[3][1]
[2][4]
A=340.6 mm
8050fs1094
[1][1]
[1]
[2]
[2]
OTHER ADJUSTMENTS CF5001 Field Service Ver.1.0 Sep 2003
2-150
II A
DJ
US
TM
EN
T
9.13 FNS adjustment of the sta-pling position (flat stapling)
Note:
• Never move the stapler unit in a horizontal
direction manually (it may cause the teeth to
skip between the belt and gear).
A. Procedure
1. Perform a stapling operation to check whether it
is performed within the standard value.
• Standard value for the one-corner stapling (atrear) [1]: A = 8.5 ± 3mm
• Standard value for the one-corner stapling (atfront) [2]: B = 8.5 ± 3mm
• Standard value for the flat stapling [3]: C= B=8.5± 3mm
(In the flat stapling, the paper edge and the line [4]
connecting 2 staples must become parallel)
If not, perform the following adjustment.
2. Open the finisher door and pull out the stacker
unit.
3. Remove the rail stopper screws for the stacker
unit. Then, pull out the stacker unit further.
Note:
• To avoid the finisher from falling, make sure to
place a support under the stacker unit.
4. Remove the stapler unit cover.
8050fs1095
[1] [2]
[3]
[4]
A=8.5 3mm
B=8.5 3mm
C=8.5 3mm
CF5001 Field Service Ver.1.0 Sep 2003 OTHER ADJUSTMENTS
2-151
II A
DJ
US
TM
EN
T
5. Loosen the adjustment screws [3] for the
clincher/F [1] and the clincher/R [2] and adjust
the position of the flat-stapling stopper [5] based
on the mark [4].
6. Perform a stapling operation to check whether it
is performed within the standard value.
8050fs1096
[1]
[1]
[2]
[2]
[4]
[4] [3]
[5]
OTHER ADJUSTMENTS CF5001 Field Service Ver.1.0 Sep 2003
2-152
II A
DJ
US
TM
EN
T
9.14 FNS adjustment of the sta-pling position in a verticaldirection
A. Procedure
Note:
• Never move the stapler unit in a horizontal
direction manually (it may cause the teeth to
skip between the belt and gear).
1. Perform a stapling operation to check for the
clinch failure.
• Buckled staple-needles [1]• Floating stapling [2] (standard value: L = 1mm or
less)• Height of belt staple-needle [3] (standard value:
L = 0.7mm or less)If there is a failure, perform the following adjust-
ment.
Note:
• Adjust the clincher or stapler if it is replaced
or removed.
2. Open the finisher door and pull out the stacker
unit.
3. Remove the rail stopper screws for the stacker
unit. Then, pull out the stacker unit further.
Note:
• To avoid the finisher from falling, make sure
to place a support under the stacker unit.
4. Remove the stapler unit cover.
5. Remove the cartridge [1], open the cover [2],
and then remove the staple sheet [3] by sliding
it.
8050fs1097
[1]
[2]
[3]
L=1mm
L=0.7mm
LL
8050fs1098[2]
[3][1]
CF5001 Field Service Ver.1.0 Sep 2003 OTHER ADJUSTMENTS
2-153
II A
DJ
US
TM
EN
T
6. Remove the plate [2] from the stapler position-
ing jig [1], insert the hooks [3] on the plate into
the hook holes [4] on the cartridge, and then
close the cover [5].
7. Attach the cartridge onto the stapler.
8. Loosen 4 screws [3] for the clincher/F [1] and
the clincher/R [2].
8050fs1099
[1]
[2]
[3]
[5]
[4]
8050fs1100
[1] [2]
[3]
[2][1]
[3] [3]
OTHER ADJUSTMENTS CF5001 Field Service Ver.1.0 Sep 2003
2-154
II A
DJ
US
TM
EN
T
9. Fold the stacking assist unit [1] and insert 2
guide pins [3] on the stapler positioning jig [2]
into the holes [5] on the clincher [4].
Note:
• The stapler positioning jig is adequate to be
hooked on the clincher.
8050fs1101
[2]
[1]
[5]
[2]
[3]
[4]
CF5001 Field Service Ver.1.0 Sep 2003 OTHER ADJUSTMENTS
2-155
II A
DJ
US
TM
EN
T
10. Rotate the gear [1] for the stapler downward.
Adjust the position of the clincher [4] for the
plate [2] attached to the cartridge to be inserted
into the slot [3] on the jig smoothly. Rotate the
gear [1] downward further. Then, place the plate
[2] onto the slot [3] on the jig and fully insert the
jig into the clincher unit [4].
11. Tighten 4 screws for each clincher.
12. Remove the jig by rotating the gear for the sta-
pler upward.
Note:
• Make sure not to snag on Mylar on the
clincher when removing the stapler position-
ing jig.
13. Remove the cartridge and plate. Then, replace
the staple sheet removed at the step 5. Replace
the cartridge.
14. Check the operation of the stapler.
8050fs1102[1]
[2]
[3]
[1]
[4]
OTHER ADJUSTMENTS CF5001 Field Service Ver.1.0 Sep 2003
2-156
II A
DJ
US
TM
EN
T
9.15 FNS adjustment of the sta-pling position (flat stapling)(only for FN-9)
A. Procedure
Note:
• Never move the stapler unit in a horizontal
direction manually (it may cause teeth to skip
between the belt and gear).
1. Perform a stapling operation to check whether
the paper edge and the line [2] connecting 2 sta-
ples [1] becomes parallel [3] and the discrep-
ancy L is within the standard value.
Standard value: discrepancy L = 1 mm or less
If the discrepancy is not within the standard
value, perform the following adjustment.
2. Check whether "adjustment of the position of
FNS alignment plate/U" and "adjustment of the
position of alignment plate/L" has been com-
plete.
3. Open the finisher door and pull out the stacker
unit.
4. Remove the rail stopper screws for the stacker
unit. Then, pull out the stacker unit further.
Note:
• To avoid the finisher from falling, make sure to
place a support under the stacker unit.
5. Remove the stapler unit cover.
6. Loosen 3 screws [2] for the alignment plate/L
[1].
8050fs1103
L
[1]
[2]
[3]
8050fs1104[2]
[1]
CF5001 Field Service Ver.1.0 Sep 2003 OTHER ADJUSTMENTS
2-157
II A
DJ
US
TM
EN
T
7. Adjust the position based on the mark [3] to
make the upper edge [1] and lower edge [2] of
paper to be horizontal.
8. Tighten the 3 screws, then perform a stapling
operation to check whether the stitch-and-fold
position is within the standard value.
8050fs1105[3]
[3]
[2]
[1]
OTHER ADJUSTMENTS CF5001 Field Service Ver.1.0 Sep 2003
2-158
II A
DJ
US
TM
EN
T
9.16 FNS adjustment of the angleof the folding stopper (onlyfor FN-9)
Note:
• Never move the stapler unit in a horizontal
direction manually (it may cause teeth to skip
between the belt and gear).
• Never loosen the screw [1] that must not be
removed.
A. Procedure
1. Perform a folding operation with A3 paper to
check whether the discrepancy at the folding
edge is within the standard value.
Standard value: A = 1mm or less
If the discrepancy is not within the standard
value, perform the following adjustment.
2. Open the finisher door and pull out the stacker
unit.
3. Remove the rail stopper screws for the stacker
unit. Then, pull out the stacker unit further.
Note:
• To avoid the finisher from falling, make sure to
place a support under the stacker unit.
4. Remove the stapler unit cover.
8050fs1106
[1]
8050fs1107
A
CF5001 Field Service Ver.1.0 Sep 2003 OTHER ADJUSTMENTS
2-159
II A
DJ
US
TM
EN
T
5. Loosen 5 screws [2] for the folding stopper [1]
and adjust the angle based on the mark [3].
Note:
• Never loosen the screw [4] that must not be
removed.
6. Tighten the 5 screws [2], then perform the fold-
ing to check whether the discrepancy is within
the standard value.
8050fs1108
[1]
[3]
[2]
[4]
OTHER ADJUSTMENTS CF5001 Field Service Ver.1.0 Sep 2003
2-160
II A
DJ
US
TM
EN
T
9.17 FNS adjustment of the fold-ing force (only for FN-9)
A. Procedure
1. Perform the followings to change the pressure of
the folding roller.
2. Remove the rear cover.
3. Open the finisher door and pull out the stacker
unit.
4. Remove the stacker unit cover.
5. Change the positions of each 2 pressure
springs [3] at front [1] and rear [2].
Note:
• The 4 pressure springs [3] must be hooked on
the hook holes with same symbol.
8050fs1109[3]
[1]
[3]
[2]
C
AA
B
C
B
C
A
B
C
A
B
CF5001 Field Service Ver.1.0 Sep 2003 OTHER ADJUSTMENTS
2-161
II A
DJ
US
TM
EN
T
9.18 FNS adjustment of the three-holding position (only forFN-9)
A. Procedure
1. Check whether "adjustment of the angle of the
folding stopper" has been completed.
2. Perform a three-folding operation to check
whether the three-folding position is within the
specification.
If it is not within the specification, perform the
following adjustment.
3. Turn on the main body, adjust the first folding
position (standard value a) in "Finisher adjust-
ment" ⇒ "Three-holding position adjustment" in
the 36 mode. Then, perform the three-folding for
confirmation.
4. Once the first folding line is adjusted within the
specification, open the finisher door and pull out
the stacker unit.
5. Open the three-folding guide plate [1], loosen 2
three-folding stopper screws [2], and then adjust
the position of the three-folding stopper [4]
based on the mark [3].
6. Tighten the 2 screws [2], then perform the three-
folding to check whether the three-folding posi-
tion is within the standard value.
Folding
position
Standard value Specification
A4R 8.5 x 11R
a 95 mm 89.4 mm ± 2 mm
b 101 mm 95 mm ± 2 mm
c 101 mm 95 mm ± 2 mm
8050fs1110
a
b
c
8050fs1111
[1][2][4]
[2]
[3]
OTHER ADJUSTMENTS CF5001 Field Service Ver.1.0 Sep 2003
2-162
II A
DJ
US
TM
EN
T
9.19 FNS adjustment of the sta-pler drive belt position
A. Procedure
Note:
• This adjustment is performed only if the posi-
tion between the drive belt and the gear is dis-
placed during another adjustment by mistake.
1. Open the finisher door and pull out the stacker
unit.
2. Remove the rail stopper screws for the stacker
unit. Then, pull out the stacker unit further.
Note:
• To avoid the finisher from falling, make sure to
place a support under the stacker unit.
3. Remove the following parts.
• Rear cover• Stapler unit cover4. Insert the stacker unit.
5. Loosen 2 screws (M3) [2] for the staple slide
pulley/B [1] from the rear side with the hexago-
nal wrench [3].
6. Move the stapler and clincher simultaneously
toward center until they contacts with the bear-
ing.
Note:
• Make sure to move them simultaneously. The
flat-stapling stopper may be damaged at the
metal frame of the stapler if they are moved
individually.
8050fs1112
[1] [3][2]
CF5001 Field Service Ver.1.0 Sep 2003 OTHER ADJUSTMENTS
2-163
II A
DJ
US
TM
EN
T
7. Remove the cartridge [1] for the stapler/R, open
the cover [2], and then remove the staple sheet
[3] by sliding it.
8. Remove the plate [2] from the stapler position-
ing jig [1], insert the hooks [3] on the plate into
the hook holes [4] on the cartridge, and then
close the cover [5].
9. Attach the cartridge onto the stapler/R.
8050fs1113
[1]
[2]
[3]
8050fs1114
[4]
[5]
[3]
[2]
[1]
OTHER ADJUSTMENTS CF5001 Field Service Ver.1.0 Sep 2003
2-164
II A
DJ
US
TM
EN
T
10. Fold the stacking assist unit [1] and insert 2
guide pins [3] on the stapler positioning jig [2]
into the holes [5] on the clincher [4].
Note:
• The stapler positioning jig is adequate to behooked on the clincher.
11. Rotate the gear [1] for the stapler/R downward.
Adjust the horizontal position of the clincher [4]
for the plate [2] attached to the cartridge to be
inserted into the slot [3] on the jig smoothly.
Then, adjust the horizontal position of the sta-
pler/R and the clincher/R. Then, rotate the gear
[1] downward further. Place the plate [2] onto
the slot [3] on the jig and fully insert the jig into
the clincher unit [4].
Note:
• Do not loosen the screws for the clincher at
this time.
• The stapler/R and the clincher/R must be
finely adjusted if the position is not matched.
8050fs1115
[2]
[1]
[5]
[2]
[3]
[4]
8050fs1116[1]
[2]
[3]
[4]
CF5001 Field Service Ver.1.0 Sep 2003 OTHER ADJUSTMENTS
2-165
II A
DJ
US
TM
EN
T
12. Insert the stacker with the jig attached (with the
plate and the jig joined). Then, tighten 2 screws
for the staple slide pulley/B from the rear side.
13. Pull out the stacker unit. Then, remove the jig by
rotating the gear for the stapler upward.
Note:
• Make sure not to snag on Mylar on the
clincher when removing the stapler position-
ing jig.
14. Remove the cartridge for the stapler/R and
plate. Replace the staple sheet removed at the
step 7 and replace the cartridge. Then check fol-
lowing 3 stapling operations.
• 1-staple (at rear)• 1-staple (at front)• 2-staple15. Replace the rear cover and the stapler cover.
OTHER ADJUSTMENTS CF5001 Field Service Ver.1.0 Sep 2003
2-166
II A
DJ
US
TM
EN
T
9.20 TU adjustment of the sheetcutting parallelism
A. Procedure
1. Measure the length between the folding face [1]
and trimming surface [2] and calculate the paral-
lelism. Then, check whether it is within the stan-
dard value.
Standard value: parallelism = A-B = ± 1 mm or
less
If not, perform the following adjustment.
2. Open the front door [1].
3. Push up the pressure release lever [2].
4. Loosen the screw [3]. Then adjust the convey-
ance guide plate [5] based on the mark [4].
5. Tighten the screw [3].
8050fs1117
[1] [2]
A
B
8050fs1118
[2]
[1]
[5]
[3][4]
CF5001 Field Service Ver.1.0 Sep 2003 OTHER ADJUSTMENTS
2-167
II A
DJ
US
TM
EN
T
9.21 LCT tray mis-centeringadjustment
Perform this adjustment when the positioning cor-
rection cannot be done (the mis-centering amount
exceeds the automatic adjustment range of ± 5mm)
even if "Printer centring adjustment (tray 4)" in the
36 mode, has been performed.
A. Procedure
1. Print the test pattern No.16 to check the mis-
centering amount.
2. Lift up the up/down plate [1].
3. Open the top cover [2].
4. Loosen 4 screws [3] at the top of LCT. Then,
slide the guide plate/front [4] and the guide
plate/rear [5] in the same direction at the same
amount.
8050fs1064
[3] [5][4] [3]
[2]
[1]
OTHER ADJUSTMENTS CF5001 Field Service Ver.1.0 Sep 2003
2-168
II A
DJ
US
TM
EN
T
5. Loosen 2 screws [2] for the center positioning
bracket [1] at the bottom of LCT. Then, slide the
guide plate in the same direction at the same
amount with step 4
6. Tighten the 2 screws [2].
7. Replace the LCT and print the test pattern
No.16 again.
8. Repeat steps 1 to 7 until the mis-centering
amount becomes within the automatic adjust-
ment range.
8050fs1065
[2]
[1]
CF5001 Field Service Ver.1.0 Sep 2003 OTHER ADJUSTMENTS
2-169
II A
DJ
US
TM
EN
T
9.22 LCT skew adjustment
Perform the LCT skew adjustment when the paper
skew is different with paper supplied from the other
tray in such case as LCT is placed on the inclined
surface. However, it has just a little effect because
all paper is corrected at the second paper feed sec-
tion.
A. When all printouts are skewed:
1. Print the test pattern No.16 in the continuous
copy mode to check the skew amount.
2. Open the front door of the LCT.
3. Loosen 2 screws [2] for the positioning bracket
[1] at the bottom of the LCT.
4. Adjust the position of the positioning bracket [2].
5. Tighten the 2 screws [2].
8050fs1066
[2][1]
OTHER ADJUSTMENTS CF5001 Field Service Ver.1.0 Sep 2003
2-170
II A
DJ
US
TM
EN
T
B. When some printouts are skewed:
1. Print the test pattern No.16 in the continuous
copy mode to check the skew amount.
2. Open the top cover [1].
3. Loosen 6 screws [2] at the top of LCT to loosen
the guide plate/front [3], the guide plate/rear [4],
and the guide plate/right side [5].
4. Tighten the 6 screws at the position where each
guide plate is in contact with paper.
Reference:
• The size indicator on the guide plate is
approximately 2mm wider than the actual
standard size paper. It may cause the skew for
some paper. The skew amount is reduced if
paper is fixed with each guide plate in tight.
8050fs1067
[2] [4][3] [2]
[1]
[5]
[2]
CF5001 Field Service Ver.1.0 Sep 2003 OTHER ADJUSTMENTS
2-171
II A
DJ
US
TM
EN
T
9.23 LCT paper feed roller pres-sure adjustment
Perform the LCT paper feed roller pressure adjust-
ment when the no feed jam occurs at the paper
feed.
Note:
• The weight plate is a supply part. It should be
purchased separately.
A. Procedure
1. Open the top cover [1].
2. Remove the spring [2].
3. Install the weight plate [4] on the paper feed
roller [3] with 2 screws [5].
4. Replace the spring [2].
5. Close the top cover.
6. Perform the continuous copy to check the paper
feed.
7. Repeat steps 1 to 6 if the no feed jam continues
to occur at the paper feed.
8050fs1068
[2]
[5] [4]
[1][3]
OTHER ADJUSTMENTS CF5001 Field Service Ver.1.0 Sep 2003
2-172
II A
DJ
US
TM
EN
T
9.24 LCT up/down plate horizon-tal adjustment
Perform the LCT up/down plate horizontal adjust-
ment when the paper feed jam occurs frequently or
the up/down wire is replaced.
A. Procedure
1. Lift up the up/down plate [1].
2. Open the top cover [2].
3. Loosen 4 screws [3] at the front and rear side.
4. Position the mark [5] to make the up/down plate
to be horizontal with 2 adjusting screws [4] at
the front and rear side.
5. Tighten the 4 screws [3].
8050fs1069
[2]
[1] [5][3][4]
[1][5] [3] [4]
CF5001 Field Service Ver.1.0 Sep 2003 OTHER ADJUSTMENTS
2-173
II A
DJ
US
TM
EN
T
9.25 LCT sheet feed pressureadjustment
Perform the LCT sheet feed pressure adjustment
when a no feed jam or a double feed jam occurs at
the paper feed.
The sheet feed pressure is affected by the paper
type and the operating environment (the no feed
jam is likely in the low temperature environment and
the double feed is likely in the high temperature
environment).
A. Procedure
1. Remove LCT from the main body.
2. Check the adjusting spring mechanism [2] from
the top left side of the LCT (paper exit side) [1].
3. Change the spring hook position [2] depending
on the symptom.
• The load of the spring changes approximately10% for a change in its position.
Note:
• Excess adjustment may reverse the symptom.
For example, a no feed jam becomes a double
feed jam.
Weak: Double feed jam is corrected.
Strong: No feed jam is corrected.
8050fs1070
[2] [1]
OTHER ADJUSTMENTS CF5001 Field Service Ver.1.0 Sep 2003
2-174
II A
DJ
US
TM
EN
T
9.26 LCT paper feed height (upperlimit) adjustment
Perform the LCT paper feed height (upper limit)
adjustment when the no feed jam occurs, the edge
of the fed paper is folded, or you want to feed curled
paper. The adjustment is performed by changing
the vertical position of the upper limit sensor
(PS109).
A. Procedure
1. Lift up the up/down plate [1].
2. Open the top cover [2].
3. Measure the height of the entrance guide upper
surface [3] and up/down plate upper surface [4]
with a scale to check whether it is within the
standard value.
Standard value: 2 to 5mm
Perform the following adjustment if it is not within
the standard value or the edge of the fed paper is
folded even if it is within the standard value.
Note:
• This adjustment affects the pick-up release
amount.
When the adjustment is complete, perform
"9.27 LCT pick-up release amount adjust-
ment".
4. Remove the sprint [6] from the paper feed unit
[5].
5. Remove 4 screws [7].
6. Remove the paper feed pick-up cover/B [8]
toward right.
8050fs1071
[6]
[5]
[1][4]
[2]
[3]
[8]
[7]
CF5001 Field Service Ver.1.0 Sep 2003 OTHER ADJUSTMENTS
2-175
II A
DJ
US
TM
EN
T
7. Loosen a screw [1].
8. Move the sensor mounting bracket [2] vertically
to make the height of the entrance guide upper
surface and the up/down plate upper surface to
be within the standard value.
If it is not within the standard value and the
height of the up/down plate has to be raised:
•When paper with a convex curl is fed: Lower the position of the sensor mountingbracketIf it is not within the standard value and theheight of the up/down plate has to be lowered:
•When the edge of the fed paper is folded:•When paper with a concave curl is fed:
Raise the position of the sensor mountingbracket
9. When the adjustment is complete, tighten a
screw [1].
8050fs1072
[2][1]
OTHER ADJUSTMENTS CF5001 Field Service Ver.1.0 Sep 2003
2-176
II A
DJ
US
TM
EN
T
9.27 LCT pick-up release amountadjustment
Perform the LCT pick-up release amount adjust-
ment when a no feed jam occurs frequently. The
adjustment is performed by changing the horizontal
position of the paper feed solenoid (SD100).
A. Procedure
1. Lift up the up/down plate [1].
2. Open the top cover [2].
3. Remove the sprint [4] from the paper feed unit
[3].
4. Remove 4 screws [5].
5. Remove the paper feed pick-up cover/B [6]
toward right.
8050fs1073
[4]
[3]
[1]
[2]
[6]
[5]
CF5001 Field Service Ver.1.0 Sep 2003 OTHER ADJUSTMENTS
2-177
II A
DJ
US
TM
EN
T
6. Pull the moving section of SD100 (paper feed
solenoid) [1] and measure the distance between
the paper feed roller [2] and the upper surface of
the up/down plate [3] to check whether it is
within the standard value.
Standard value: 0.5 to 2.5mm
Perform the following adjustment if it is not
within the standard value.
7. Loosen a screw [4].
Note:
• Before starting the operation, note the origi-
nal position of the solenoid.
8. Move the paper feed solenoid (SD100) [1] hori-
zontally to make the distance between the paper
feed roller and the upper surface of the up/down
plate to be within the standard value.
9. Tighten the screw [4] for the paper feed sole-
noid.
8050fs1074
[3]
[2]
[4]
[1]
OTHER ADJUSTMENTS CF5001 Field Service Ver.1.0 Sep 2003
2-178
II A
DJ
US
TM
EN
T
9.28 PK Adjusting the tilt of thepunch hole position
A. Preparation
1. Check the following items:
• The finisher is connected to the main body.• The main body is loaded with the paper based
on the punch specifications.2. Check the skew of output paper in advance.
• Slide the side guide plate and the rear guideplate for the main body's feed tray, and align thepaper loaded on the main body's tray.
• Check the skew by using the platen copy oradjustment mode.
3. To check the tilt of the punch hole position, make
a sample copy in the punch mode.
4. Make three copies each in single side copy
mode and double side copy mode with the
punch mode to check the skew.
B. Procedure
1. Measure the position of the sampled punch
holes to check the tilt of the position.
2. Open the front cover.
3. Remove the punch unit cover by removing three
screws
4. Loosen the four adjustment screws of PK.
5. Using the mark scale as a guide, move the
punch unit horizontally by the amount of tilt for
the punch hole position.
1 scale: 0.5%
6. Retighten the screws.
7. Reinstall the punch unit cover.
8. Make a sample copy of punch mode and
recheck the tilt of the punch hole position.
A
B
C
Punch unit cover
7165field135iScrews
Adjustment screws
7165field128i
Adjust to the left or right
Adjustment screws
Mark
CF5001 Field Service Ver.1.0 Sep 2003 OTHER ADJUSTMENTS
2-179
II A
DJ
US
TM
EN
T
9.29 Sensitivity adjustment forthe PK paper edge sensor
A. Preparation
1. Check that the finisher is connected to the main
body.
B. Procedure
1. Open the front door of the finisher.
2. Remove the punch drive board cover by remov-
ing one screw
3. Power on the main body.
4. Turn the volume fully clockwise and then turn it
back counterclockwise until the LED corre-
sponding to each volume lights up
5. Perform the procedure of step 4 for all five vol-
umes.
6. Power off the main body after completing the
adjustment.
7. Reinstall the punch drive board cover.
8. Close the front door of the finisher.
7165field129i
Punch drive board cover
Screw
7165field130i
LED
Punch drive board (PKDB)
Volumes
OTHER ADJUSTMENTS CF5001 Field Service Ver.1.0 Sep 2003
2-180
II A
DJ
US
TM
EN
T
9.30 PI Centering Adjustment
Note:
• PI Centering adjustement must be performed
on the upper tray first, then on the lower tray.
When it is necessary to slide the side guide
plate (rear) a lot, perform step 11 before step 3
and subsequent procedures.
• When tightening two screws of the side guide
plate (rear), be careful not to tighten them too
much. (Tightening torque: less than 5kg/cm)
A. Preparation
1. Check that PK adjusting the punch hole vertical
position has been completed.
2. Perform Tray 1/2/3 centering adjustment.
3. Feed the three sheets from PI with the punch
mode.
4. Check the position of each punch hole on the
three sheets.
B. Procedure
1. Release the hook and remove the adjustment
cover of the side guide plate (rear)
2. When adjusting for the lower tray, remove two
screws and slide rightward to remove the side
guide plate (rear)
3. Loosen two adjustment screws securing the
side guide plate (rear), and slide it by the twice
the difference. (ie: If there is 1.5mm difference
in direction of rear side, slide by 3mm to rear
side.)
1 scale : 2 mm
4. Fasten the two adjustment screws securely to fix
the side guide plate (rear).
5. In case of the lower tray, install the side guide
plate (rear).
6. Set a sheet on the tray and fit the side guide
plate (rear) to the sheet to check that the side
guide plate (rear) is parallel to the sheet.
7. Feed the three sheets from PI with the punch
mode.
8. Check the position of each punch hole.
9. Repeat step 2 to 8 until the difference of the
holes is improved.
10. Install the adjustment cover to the side guide
plate (rear).
11. Set A4R size paper to the tray and perform the
cover sheet tray size adjustment in 36 mode.
Pi-W-1
Side guide plate
(rear)
Adjustment cover
Hock
Pi-W-2
ScrewsSide guide plate
(rear)
Pi-W-3
Adjustment
screws
Side guide plate (rear)
CF5001 Field Service Ver.1.0 Sep 2003 OTHER ADJUSTMENTS
2-181
II A
DJ
US
TM
EN
T
9.31 Adjusting the tilt of PI (whenPK punch is used)
A. Preparation
1. Check the following items:
• PI is connected to FNS.• The tray of PI is loaded with paper.2. Check the tilt of output paper in advance.
• Feed 3 sheets from PI with the Punch modeselected to check the tilt of punch holes.
3. Loosen one screw securing the guide plate.
B. Procedure
1. Fold each of the fed 3 sheets into two as illus-
trated below and find out in which direction the
punch holes tilt.)
2. Open the FNS front cover.
3. Loosen one screw securing the guide plate.
4. Using the mark as a guide, move the guide plate
laterally by the amount of tilt in the position of
punch holes.
5. Retighten the screw securing the guide plate.
6. Repeat steps 1 to 5 until the amount of tilt in the
position of punch holes is improved.
7165field142i
Tilting toward
the right edge
of the sheet
Tilting toward
the left edge
of the sheet
Tilting towardthe right edgeof the sheet
Tilting towardthe left edgeof the sheet
Screw securingthe guide plate
7165field143i
OTHER ADJUSTMENTS CF5001 Field Service Ver.1.0 Sep 2003
2-182
II A
DJ
US
TM
EN
T
Blank page
CF5001 Field Service Ver.1.0 Sep 2003 ISW
3-1
III
SE
RV
ICE
TO
OL
III SERVICE TOOL
1. ISW
1.1 Description of the ISW
ISW (In-system Writer) is an operation to rewrite the
control program stored in the flash ROM on a vari-
ety of control boards in Minolta's digital copier with-
out removing the boards from the main body of the
copier. ISW allows you to update the version of the
control program without replacing the board or to
install the latest program when replacing the board.
[ISWTrns (PC software)] is provided to execute ISW,
which rewrite the program by connecting a PC to
the digital copier. The software rewrites the control
program stored in the flash ROM in the copier main
body directly.
1.2 Installing the USB driver forISWTrns
Note:
• It is required to install the USB driver for
ISWTrns to perform ISW via USB on this
machine. See the installation procedure file
attached to ISWTrns for the installation proce-
dure.
• Before performing ISW via USB, be sure to
turn on the USB radio button in [Setting (S)] -
[Set Communication (C)] in ISWTrns and
press the OK button.
• Only ISWTrns is supported for ISW in this
machine.
ISW CF5001 Field Service Ver.1.0 Sep 2003
3-2
III
SE
RV
ICE
TO
OL
1.3 Setup
1.3.1 Board used for the ISW
ISWTrns supports the following boards for rewriting
the control program in CF5001.
• Overall control board (OACB)
• Printer controller board (PRCB)
• Operation board/1 (OB1)
• RADF control board (DFCB)
• FNS control board (FNSCB)
• See IP SHB for the printer controller.
ROM replacement is needed for boards other than
the above.
1.3.2 Data flow
The following shows the ISW data flow.
Note:
• The control program on other boards cannot
be written until that for the overall control
board (OACB) is written.
1.3.3 ISW transfer type
The copier supports three ISW transfer modes as
follows.
A. Power ON mode
The power ON mode is used if no program is
installed on the overall control board (OACB) or it is
faulty.
If no program is installed on OACB, the OACB pro-
gram becomes possible to be written at power ON.
No display appears on the operation panel and the
timer LED flashes even if the operation board con-
trol program is installed because the OACB controls
the power for the operation board.
B. HELP + CHECK mode
The HELP + CHECK mode is started when the
main switch (SW2) is pressed while pressing
"HELP" and "CHECK button." This mode is
designed specifically for ISW to be started when the
overall control program is installed but the operation
board control program is not installed because the
25 mode cannot be started in such case.
C. 25 mode
The 25 mode is available only if both the overall
control program and the operation board control
program are installed.
PC OACB OB1
PRCB DFCB
FNSCB
CF5001 Field Service Ver.1.0 Sep 2003 ISW
3-3
III
SE
RV
ICE
TO
OL
1.3.4 Instances of ISW transfer
A. When writing a new program (because
replacing a board or failed to rewrite the
program)
B. When updating the version of the program
Normal startup display ISW transfer method Condition
Overall control board
Flashing timer LEDNo display on the operation panel
Power ON mode Overall control program is not installed or faulty
Operation board /1 Error code display HELP + CHECK mode
The overall control program is installed but the operation board program is not installed or faulty
Others Error code display 25 mode Both the overall control program and the operation board program is installed
Normal startup display ISW transfer method Condition
Overall control board
Normal 25 mode All program has been installed
Operation board /1 Normal 25 mode
Others Normal 25 mode
ISW CF5001 Field Service Ver.1.0 Sep 2003
3-4
III
SE
RV
ICE
TO
OL
1.3.5 Setup procedure
A. Connecting a PC
a. Procedure
Note:
• Before performing ISW via USB, be sure to
turn on the USB radio button in [Setting (S)] -
[Set Communication (C)] in ISWTrns and
press the OK button.
B. Power on mode
a. Procedure
C. HELP + CHECK mode
a. Procedure
1. Loosen 4 screws [1] and remove the side
cover/2 [2].
2. Connect either of IEEE1284 port [1] or USB
(Type B) port [2] to the PC via a cable.
[2]
[1]
[2]
[1]
1. Turn ON the main switch (SW2).
2. Check the timer LED is flushing.
The control program becomes possible to be
written in this state.
3. Execute the operation according to the proce-
dures specified in the "2.UPDATING WITH
ISW Trns."
Note:
• Do not turn OFF the copier while writing theISW data is being rewritten.
4. The operation screen appears if it is completed
successfully.
If it is terminated abnormally, see "E. The rela-
tionship between ISW resulting operation and
the operational LEDs."
1. Turn ON the copie while pressing "HELP" and
"CHECK button."
2. "ISW write mode select menu screen"
Press 1 (PC) with the numeric keys.
ISW WRITE MODE SELECT MENU
1.PC
PLEASE PUSH TEN-KEY 9.EXIT
CF5001 Field Service Ver.1.0 Sep 2003 ISW
3-5
III
SE
RV
ICE
TO
OL
3. "ISW device select menu screen"
Select 3 (OPERATION CONTROL) with the
numeric keys.
Press 9 (EXIT) to exit from the menu or press 0
(PREVIOUS) to return to the previous screen.
Note:
• Rewrite programs other than 3 (OPERATIONCONTROL) in the 25 mode because thismode does not support them.
4. "Operation control - item select menu screen"
Select an item from 1 - 5 to rewrite it individu-
ally or select 6 (ALL) to rewrite all items at a
time.
Press 9 (EXIT) to exit from the menu or press 0
(PREVIOUS) to return to the previous screen.
5. "ISW start screen"
Select 1 (YES) to start ISW.
Select 2 (NO) to cancel.
ISW DEVICE SELECT MENU [MODE:PC]
1. GRAPHIC CONTROL
2. PRINTER CONTROL3. OPERATION CONTROL4. ADF5. VIF
PLEASE PUSH TEN-KEY 0. PREVIOUS 9. EXIT
OPERATION CONTROL - ITEM SELECT MENU [MODE:PC]
1. 012. 023. 034. 045. 05
6. ALL
PLEASE PUSH TEN-KEY 0. PREVIOUS 9. EXIT
OPERATION CONTROL - 01 [MODE:PC]
ISW START OK ?
PLEASE PUSH TEN-KEY 1. YES 2. NO
6. "ISW executing screen"
Execute the operation according to the proce-
dures specified in the "2.UPDATING WITH
ISW Trns."
"Result screen" appears once ISW is com-
plete.
7. "Result screen"
• The operation is completed successfully
"NORMAL END" appears.
• The operation is terminated abnormally
"ABNORMAL END" appears.
Check the error code on the screen if the
rewriting is terminated abnormally.
8. Select 0 (CONTINUE) to continue ISW or
select 9 (EXIT) to exit.
"PLEASE TURN OFF A POWER SUPPLY"
appears when pressing 9, then turn OFF the
main switch (SW2).
EXECUTING
*** NORMAL END ***
PLEASE PUSH TEN-KEY 0. CONTINUE 9. EXIT
*** ABNORMAL END ***INPUT DEVICE ERROR(ERROR CODE : XX)
PLEASE PUSH TEN-KEY 0. CONTINUE 9. EXIT
ISW CF5001 Field Service Ver.1.0 Sep 2003
3-6
III
SE
RV
ICE
TO
OL
b. Error code
• Resulting operations
(1) The program is not operating normally. Turn OFF and
ON the main switch (SW2) and then start ISW again.
(2) Check the ISW transfer data file.
(3) Check the connection of the communication
cable from the input device (PC).
(4) Check I/F between the overall control board
and the operation board.
(5) The flash ROM on the overall control board is
faulty.
Execute ISW again. If the same error occurs,
the flash ROM on the overall control board may
be faulty or it may have reached its life. Replace
the overall control board.
(6) An error is detected from the board on which
you want to rewrite the program. Check the
board on which you want to execute ISW.
Error code Causes No. of resulting
operation
01 Error in the instruction against the ISW processing unit (1)
1F Program error (1)
41 Input data format error (at ISW for the operation board program) (2)
42 Model name error in input data (at ISW for the operation board program) (2)
43 Board name error in input data (at ISW for the operation board program) (2)
81 Input device error such as the input time out (at ISW for the operation board program)
(3)
C1 Flash ROM erasing failure (at ISW for the overall control program) (5)
C2 Flash ROM writing failure (at ISW for the overall control program) (5)
C3 ROM check sum error (at ISW for the overall control program) (8)
C4 Output device error such as the input time out (6)
E1 Erase error (9)
E2 Write error (9)
E3 Communication error (4)
E9 I/F communication parameter error between the overall control board and the operation board (at ISW for the operation board program)
(4)
EA I/F command sequence error between the overall control board and the operation board (at ISW for the operation board program)
(4)
EB I/F communication timeout error between the overall control board and the operation board (at ISW for the operation board program)
(4)
F0 Flash ROM error (at ISW for the operation board program) (7)
F1 Flash ROM verify error (at ISW for the operation board program) (7)
F2 Flash ROM write error (at ISW for the operation board program) (7)
F3 Flash ROM erase error (at ISW for the operation board program) (7)
F8 I/F receive checksum error between the overall control board and the operation board (at ISW for the operation board program)
(7)
F9 I/F receive header code error between the overall control board and the operation board (at ISW for the operation board program)
(7)
FA I/F receive parity error between the overall control board and the opera-tion board (at ISW for the operation board program)
(7)
FB I/F receive framing error between the overall control board and the oper-ation board (at ISW for the operation board program)
(7)
FC I/F receive overflow error between the overall control board and the oper-ation board (at ISW for the operation board program)
(4)
CF5001 Field Service Ver.1.0 Sep 2003 ISW
3-7
III
SE
RV
ICE
TO
OL
(7) The flash ROM on the operation board/1 is
faulty.
Execute ISW again. If the same error occurs,
the flash ROM on the operation board/1 may be
faulty or it may have reached its life. Replace
the operation board/1.
(8) The checksum calculated after the program is
written does not become equal to the ROM
checksum data. Execute ISW again. If the
same error occurs, the ISW transfer data file
may not be downloaded properly.
(9) It cannot write/erase data to/from area on which
ISW is executed.
The flash ROM may be faulty or have reached
its life. Replace the object board.
The checksum calculated after the program is
written does not become equal to the ROM
checksum data. Execute ISW again. If the
same error occurs, the ISW transfer data file
may not be downloaded properly.
Note:
• If an error occurs during rewriting the pro-
gram on the overall control board, the opera-
tion panel cannot be displayed even if the
main switch is ON because the program con-
trolling the whole components has been lost.
Execute ISW in the power ON mode if such is
the case.
• If an error occurs during rewriting the pro-
gram on the operation board/1, it cannot be
started in the 25 mode because the error code
is displayed. Execute ISW in the HELP +
CHECK mode if such is the case.
D. 25 mode
a. Procedure
1. Enter the 25 mode.
2. "25 mode menu screen"
Press the [11 ISW] key.
3. "ISW mode menu screen"
Select a program for which ISW is executed.
4. Pressing the [Start] key, cause the machine to
be data waiting condition.
Note:
• See "C. HELP + CHECK mode" since select-ing "Operation panel" switches to the HELP+ CHECK mode.
5. Execute the operation according to the proce-
dures specified in the "2.UPDATING WITH
ISW Trns."
Note:
• Do not turn OFF the copier while rewritingthe ISW data is being written.
ISW CF5001 Field Service Ver.1.0 Sep 2003
3-8
III
SE
RV
ICE
TO
OL
E. The relationship between ISW operation and
the operational LEDs
The following shows the display of the operation
panel in the power ON mode with ISW executed.
No. Operation Timer LED Power save LED
1 CPU initialization OFF OFF
2 During memory check OFF OFF
3 Memory check error (waiting data from PC) Blink OFF
4 ISW processing (receiving data) OFF Blink
5 ISW processing (writing to flash ROM) OFF Blink
6 Transfer data error Blink Blink
7 Flash ROM write error Blink Steady lit
8 Memory check successful and reboot OFF OFF
CF5001 Field Service Ver.1.0 Sep 2003 UPDATING WITH ISW Trns
3-9
III
SE
RV
ICE
TO
OL
2. UPDATING WITH ISW Trns
2.1 Setting Up ISW Trns
Note:
• The explanation screen here is used based on
another model. Therefore, there is a thing dif-
ferent from an actual screen.
2.1.1 Installing the application program
Install the ISW Trns on the PC.
2.1.2 Setting up ISW Trns
When the ISW Trns program has been installed
on the PC, run it to set up a folder in which the
transfer file (update data) is stored. When this
setting completes, the ISW Trns program is
ready to run.
Step Procedure
1 Boot the PC.
2 Mount setup disk 1 on the PC and double-click the [Setup.exe] icon to start the installer.If an old version ISW Trns program is present, uninstall it first, then start the setup operation.
3 [ISW Trns setup window]Confirm the installation folder as instructed by on-screen guidance and click Next.By default, the program installs in [C:\Program_File\Minolta\ISWTrns for Minolta].To change the installation folder, click Browse and type a new folder name.
4 [Program folder confirmation window]Confirm the ISW Trns program installation folder as instructed by on-screen guidance and click Next.By default, the ISW Trns program installs in [ISW Trns for Minolta].To change the installation folder, either type a new folder name or select one from the list of existing folders on display.
5 [Next disk insertion request window]Mount setup disk 2 as instructed by on-screen guidance and click OK.
6 [Information dialog box]Click OK as instructed by on-screen guid-ance.This procedure will add an ISW Trns icon to the Start menu.
7 [Setup completion window]Click Complete as instructed by on-screen guidance.
8 The ISW Trns install exits automatically.
Step Procedure
1 Boot the PC.
2 [Select [ISW Trns] from the start menu to run the ISW Trns program.
3 [ISW Trns dialog box]
Click OK to set up a folder in which the transfer file (update data) is stored.This dialog box will not appear when ISW Trns is run next time.
4 [Option window]
Set up a folder in which the transfer file (update data) is stored and click Make Folder.By default, the folder in which the ISW Trns program has installed (C:\Program_File\Minolta\ISWTrns for Minolta) has been set up as a storage folder (data folder).To change the storage folder, click Browse and select a new folder or type its full-path name in directly the edit box.
UPDATING WITH ISW Trns CF5001 Field Service Ver.1.0 Sep 2003
3-10
III
SE
RV
ICE
TO
OL
Step Procedure
Note:
• Clicking Make Folder will create the fol-lowing hierarchy of folders branchingoff from the new storage folder:
5 [Option window]Click OK.
Note:
• This procedure will save the data fold-ers created in Step 4 to the INI file forthe ISW Trns program.
6 [ISW Trns main window]The ISW Trns main window opens.
CF5001
Printer
Vif
ISWTrns for Minolta
Operation
Euro
Japan
Usa
Adf
Graphic control
Fns
CF5001 Field Service Ver.1.0 Sep 2003 UPDATING WITH ISW Trns
3-11
III
SE
RV
ICE
TO
OL
2.1.3 ISW Trns Main Window Overview
The ISW Trns program, when run, comes up
with the ISW Trns main window. The ISW Trns
main window lets you select, verify, and trans-
fer a transfer file (update data) and display
information in it.
A detailed description of its functions follows:
A Select Type frame
Select conditions for a transfer file (update
data). When you select all the four combo
boxes, folder is set up on the basis of the
information set in the INI file.
The settings of the combo boxes selected are
saved to the ISW Trns.INI file when you click
File Send. The ISW Trns program comes up
with the ISW Trns main window prefilled with
these combo box settings when runs next time.
Version selection frame
This frame lets you select which version of a
transfer file you want transmitted when more
than one version is stored in a single folder.
Send file information frame
List the files that are transferred actually on the
basis of the information specified in frames
and . Click File Check to view a checksum
of each file and its consistency (OK, NG or ??).
File Status frame
View detailed information about the version file
as it is selected in .
The table below presents differences in the
ways transfer files are displayed according to
their data distribution types.
* Sample display : Display information may be different from what you actually will see on your machine.
CF5001
CF5001
50img_dc00012003/ 9/15
50img_dc0001.b0150img_dc0001.b00
50img_dc000.b01
1
5
2
3
1
2
4
6
UPDATING WITH ISW Trns CF5001 Field Service Ver.1.0 Sep 2003
3-12
III
SE
RV
ICE
TO
OL
Data sources appearing in the detailed file informa-
tion list
Version Folder edit box
When Select Type frame is established, the
full-path folder name is displayed to reflect the
data folder and the INI file information set up in
the option window. If the transfer file exists in a
folder different from the data folder, change the
folder name to that folder by using Browse
or rewriting the folder name directly.
Those transfer files in the folder that meet the
INI file conditions are listed in File list box .
Version File selection list box
Lists those display files existing in the folder set
in .
Display Files are marked by a wildcard name(such as 85img*.b01) in the ISWTrns.INI file. Ifmultiple versions of a file exist in the folder,therefore, multiple versions would appear inthis list box accordingly.Example: 50img_dc0001AAA.bol 50img_dc002AAA.bol
The files in this list are sorted by name. Whenthe list opens, the last display item in the list ispreselected. Change the choice to establishthe version of transfer files to transmit.
Browse Version File button
Click Browse button to open the folder selection
window and select a folder for .
Send file information display list
List the names of files that are actually trans-
mitted when a version file is selected in . A
count of the number of files that are actuallytransmitted is indicated in a checksum fileattached to each transfer file (write data). If not
all the transfer files are stored in folder or if
extra files are included in it, the error message“Send files not found or invalid file name in thefolder” is displayed. This check is not made.
Clicking the File Check button in calculates
a checksum of the display files as a whole andcompares it with the checksum stored in thechecksum file (*.SUM) attached to the transferfile (write data), displaying the result of thatcomparison.
Display title ORIGINAL (Batch data) DIVIDE (Divided data)
File Name File name of the version selection file File name of the version selection file
File Date Date of the version selection file Date of the version selection file
File Time Time of the version selection file Time of the version selection file
File size File size of the version selection file File size of the version selection file
ROM Version Footer information Footer information (last file)
SP ROM Version Footer information Footer information (last file)
Message Conversion For development use For development use
Machine Name Header information + INI file Header information + INI file
Country Combo box display Combo box display
Board Name Header information + INI file Header information + INI file
Data Format Header information (Binary) Header information (Binary)
5
1
7
6
6
5
7
5
8
6
5
9
CF5001 Field Service Ver.1.0 Sep 2003 UPDATING WITH ISW Trns
3-13
III
SE
RV
ICE
TO
OL
File Check button
Click this button when send files are listed in
the Send File Info list in , and a file check-
sum of the transfer files displayed (file check-
sum) is calculated and attached to each file.
Further, the calculated checksum is compared
with the checksum storage file (*.SUM)
attached to the transfer file (write data) to dis-
play the result of the comparison in the follow-
ing format:
[OK] = Matched
[NG] = Unmatched
[??] = Checksum file (*.SUM) not found
File Send Button
Perform transmission of transfer files
2.1.4 Parallel port setup
If a parallel data transfer is to be executed with
the ISW Trns program, the ECP mode setting
of the PC parallel port should be cleared. ISW
Trns does not support parallel data transfers. If
a parallel data transfer is launched with the PC
set in ECP mode, the transfer could be aborted
by an error occurring in between. It would be
necessary, therefore, to disable ECP mode
before run ISW Trns on a PC with the ECP set-
ting.
Instructions on how to disable ECP mode are
given below.
9
8
10Step Procedure
1 Boot the PC.
2 Open the System icon in the Control Panel and click the Device Manager tab. Then, search for LPT1 in Ports (COM/LPT1).
Note:
• If LPT1 appears as “ECP Printer Port(LPT1),” then it is an ECP port.
• If LPT1 appears as “Printer Port(LPT1),” then it is a regular parallel port.
3 With an ECP printer port, change the BIOS setting of the PC to disable the ECP port.
Note:
• Because the BIOS setting depends onthe PC, check with your system admin-istrator on how to disable ECP mode.
4 When the BIOS change is complete, open the System icon in the Control panel and change the parallel port driver.
5 Run a send test to verify the successful operation.
Note:
• If a transfer succeeds on one copiermodel, then transfers would be suc-cessful on all models.
UPDATING WITH ISW Trns CF5001 Field Service Ver.1.0 Sep 2003
3-14
III
SE
RV
ICE
TO
OL
2.2 Copying Transfer Data(Update Data)
Run the ISW Trns program to copy transfer
data (update data) to the PC.
Step Procedure
1 Boot the PC.
2 Select ISW Trns from the Start menu to run the ISW Trns program.
3 Click the Option menu.
4 [Option window]
Click Data Copy.
5 [File Copy window]
Mount an update disk on the PC and click Browse.
6 Select the folder on drive A that contains the transfer file (update data) as a source file.
Note:
• The selected folder is displayed in theupper section in the Original Files field.
• The transfer files (update data) that arestored in the selected folder are dis-played in the lower section in the Origi-nal Files field.
7 Select the transfer files (update data) you want copied from the lower section in the Original Files field.
Note:
• You can select multiple transfer files(update data).
• To copy all the files (update data) dis-played, skip this step to go to Step 8directly.
8 Click Copy to copy the selected transfer files (update data) to the folder created at ISW Trns setup.
Note:
• To copy all the files (update data) dis-played in the Original Files field, clickCopy All, instead of Copy.
• The folder name created at ISW Trnssetup is displayed above the CopiedFile field.
• The transfer files that have been copiedsuccessfully so far are listed in full-path name in the lower part of the Cop-ied File list view.The transfer files that have not beencopied successfully are listed in theFailed to Copy Files list view.Causes of copy errors:
1. A file with the same name existed and
the O/W (overwrite) check box was not
checked.
2. The storage destination folder could
not be found.
3. Attempted to overwrite an overwrite
protected file.
• To update existing transfer files (updatedata), check the O/W (overwrite) checkbox.
9 When the copying completes, click Refresh.
10 If more update disks are involved, repeat Steps 5 to 9.
11 Click Cancel to return to the option win-dow.
12 [Option window]Click OK.
CF5001 Field Service Ver.1.0 Sep 2003 UPDATING WITH ISW Trns
3-15
III
SE
RV
ICE
TO
OL
2.3 Connecting the CF5001
The ISW connector is hidden under the drum
cover. Detach this cover to run ISW.
A. Procedure
(1) Loosen 4 screws [1] and remove the side cover/
2 [2]
(2) Connect the PC port and the copier ISW con-
nector with interface cable.
Note:
• Before performing ISW via USB, be sure to
turn on the USB radio button in [Setting (S)] -
[Set Communication (C)] in ISWTrns and
press the OK button.
2.4 Updating
2.4.1 Update operation overview
Follow the steps below to update the ROM data
on each control board using ISW Trns. For
more operational details, see the relevant parts
of this section.
[2]
[1]
Interface cable
USB (TypeB) port
IEEE1284 port
PC
Step Procedure
1 Check the ROM version of the copier before proceeding with updating. (See 2.4.2 “Checking the ROM version of the copier (before updating).”)
2 Run the ISW Trns program. (See 2.4.4 ”Running ISW Trns.”).
3 Set the copier in ISW receive mode.(See 2.4.3 “Preparing the copier to trans-fer.”)
4 Select conditions for transfer files (update data) with IWS Trns. (See 2.4.5 “Selecting transfer file (update data) conditions.”)
5 Select a version of transfer files (update data) with IWS Trns. (See 2.4.6 “Selecting a version of transfer files (update data).”)
6 Verify the transfer files (update data) selected with IWS Trns. (See 2.4.7“Verify-ing transfer files (update data).”
7 Transmit the transfer files (update data) with IWS Trns. (See 2.4.8 “Transmitting transfer files (update data).”)
8 To update ROM data on more control boards, repeat Steps 3 to 7.
9 Exit the ISW Trns program. (See 2.4.9 “Exiting ISW Trns.”)
10 Verify the ROM version of the copier after updating. (See 2.4.10 “Verifying the ROM version of the copier (after updating).”)
UPDATING WITH ISW Trns CF5001 Field Service Ver.1.0 Sep 2003
3-16
III
SE
RV
ICE
TO
OL
2.4.2 Checking the ROM version of the copier
(before updating)
Before updating ROM data, check the ROM
version of the existing control program in the 25
mode.
2.4.3 Preparing the copier to transfer.
Start the copier with 25 mode enabled to put
the copier into ISW transfer wait state.
2.4.4 Running ISW Trns.
Run the ISW Trns program.
2.4.5 Selecting transfer file (update data)
conditions
Select various conditions for selecting the
transfer files (update data) in the ISW Trns
main window. Conditions to select are:
• (Machine) The name of the model on which
ROM data is updated.
• (Country) The destination of the transfer files
(update data)
• (Board) The name of the board on which ROM
data is updated
• (Divide) The type of the transfer files (update
data)
Step Procedure
1 Turn OFF the copier main switch.
2 Turn ON the copier main switch while hold-ing down the copy count setup buttons 2 and 5, to enable 25 mode.
3 [25 mode menu window]Check the ROM version by following the copier-specific procedure.
Note:
• For operating instructions, refer to theAdjustment section of the service man-ual supplied for the copier.
Step Procedure
1 Turn OFF the copier main switch.
2 Turn ON the copier main switch while hold-ing down the copy count setup buttons 2 and 5, to enable 25 mode.
3 [25 mode menu window]Put the copier into ISW transfer wait state by following the copier-specific procedure.
Note:
•“ ISW transfer wait state” is the state ofthe copier with the “START” key beingshown in the display area.
• For operating instructions, refer to theAdjustment section of the service man-ual supplied for the copier.
Step Procedure
1 Boot the PC.
2 Select ISW Trns from the Start menu and run the ISW Trns program.
Step Procedure
1 [ISW Trns main window]In the ISW Trns main window, click in the [Machine] field in [Select Type] and select the name of the model on which to update ROM data from the pulldown menu.
2 In the ISW Trns main window, click in the [Country] field in [Select Type] and select the destination of the transfer files (update data) from the pulldown menu.
CF5001
CF5001
USA
EuroJapan
CF5001 Field Service Ver.1.0 Sep 2003 UPDATING WITH ISW Trns
3-17
III
SE
RV
ICE
TO
OL
2.4.6 Selecting a version of transfer files
(update data)
When a transfer file (update data) has been
chosen to meet a given set of conditions, it may
be available in multiple versions. Here, select a
particular version of a transfer file (update data)
for use in the actual data transfer.
Step Procedure
3 In the ISW Trns main window, click in the [Board] field in [Select Type] and select the name of the board on which to update ROM from the pulldown menu.
4 In the ISW Trns main window, click in the [Divide] field in [Select Type] and select a method of dividing the transfer files (update data) from the pulldown menu.
Note:
• Normally, select ORIGINAL as themethod of division.
• Select DIVIDED for large ROM data (e.g.for Main Control Unit), that is dividedinto several files (extension .001.b01,etc.) to be stored to several floppydisks for distribution.
CF5001
USA
CF5001
ORIGINALDIVIDED
USA
C1/C4(ALL)
Step Procedure
1 [ISW Trns main window]In the ISW Trns main window, select a transfer file (update data) of the version that is used in the actual data transfer from among the files listed in the [File] field in [Version].
Note:
• The version of a transfer file (updatedata) can be determined from its filename.Example: 50img_DC001AAA.b01 .. Version 1 50img_DC002AAA.b01 .. Version 2
2 The target file (update data) may not be shown in the [File] field in [Version], if it exists in a folder different from the data folders set in the Option screen. Click Browse and find the appropriate file to select.
Note:
• Clicking Browse will open the Select
File window.
CF5001
CF5001
50img_dc00012003/ 8/15
50img_dc0001.b0150img_dc0001.b00
50img_dc000.b01
Di850CF5001
UPDATING WITH ISW Trns CF5001 Field Service Ver.1.0 Sep 2003
3-18
III
SE
RV
ICE
TO
OL
2.4.7 Verifying transfer files (update data)
Once a particular version of a transfer file
(update data) is selected, the transfer files
(update data) that are transmitted actually are
listed in [Send File Infor] in the ISW Trns main
window. Verify the validity of the transfer files
(data) for transfer.
2.4.8 Transmitting transfer files (update data)
When transfer files (update data) are estab-
lished, run a data transfer to the copier.
Step Procedure
1 [ISW Trns main window]In the ISW Trns main window, click File Check in [Send File Infor]..
2 Check to see if OK appears in the [File Sum] field in [Send File Infor] in the ISW Trns main window.
Note:
• A file that is labeled NG is inappropriateas a transfer file (update data). Try tocopy the file again. If you can not suc-ceed to copy it again, the original filemay be corrupted.
• Transfer files (update data) may bemarked ?? when enough information isnot available to verify their validity.When a transfer file is labeled, check ifthe checksum file (*.sum) was copiedcorrectly.
CF5001
CF5001
50img_dc00012003/ 8/15
50img_dc0001.b0150img_dc0001.b00
50img_dc000.b01
Step Procedure
1 Press the “START” key on the copier while it is in ISW transfer wait state.
Note:
• The “START” key is displayed in thedisplay area on the copier.
2 [ISW Trns main window]Click File Send in [Send File Infor] in the ISW Trns main window.
3 Transfer files (update data) are transmitted to the copier.Note7: While data is being transferred to a
copier, an LED or indicator flashesto indicate a data transfer inprogress. The mode of such indica-tion varies from one copier toanother.
Note8: ISW Trns produces an indication todesignate a data transfer inprogress.
Note9: If a data transfer is aborted due toany trouble occurring with the copieror ISW Trns, turn the copier mainswitch OFF, then ON to retry thedata transfer by ISW Trns. In thiscase, a condition indication andnecessary operation vary depend-ing on each model. Please refer toservice manual for the copier.
4 To update ROM data on more control boards, repeat the step in 2.4.5 “Selecting transfer file (update data) conditions,” to 2.4.8 “Transmit-ting transfer files (update data).”
CF5001
CF5001
50img_dc00012003/ 8/15
50img_dc0001.b0150img_dc0001.b00
50img_dc000.b01
CF5001 Field Service Ver.1.0 Sep 2003 UPDATING WITH ISW Trns
3-19
III
SE
RV
ICE
TO
OL
2.4.9 Exiting ISW Trns.
When the update of the ROM data on the con-trol boards completes, exit the ISW Trns pro-gram.
2.4.10 Verifying the ROM version of the copier
(after updating)
When the update of the ROM data completes,
verify the ROM version of the control program
in the 25 mode.Step Procedure
1 Exit the ISW Trns program.
2 Turn OFF the PC.
3 Turn OFF the copier main switch.
4 Disconnect the parallel interface cable from the PC and the copier.
Note:
• Turn OFF the PC and copier before dis-connecting the parallel interface cablefrom them.
Step Procedure
1 Turn OFF the copier main switch.
2 Turn ON the copier main switch while hold-ing down the copy count setup buttons 2 and 5, to enable 25 mode.
3 [25 mode menu window]Check the ROM version by following the copier-specific procedure.
Note:
• For operating instructions, refer to theAdjustment section of the service man-ual supplied for the copier.
UPDATING WITH ISW Trns CF5001 Field Service Ver.1.0 Sep 2003
3-20
III
SE
RV
ICE
TO
OL
2.5 ISW Trns Messages
The ISW Trns program displays dialogue messages when errors occur and when processing ends. Def-
initions of these messages are listed below, along with the associated display status.
Message Display status
Cannot open a checksum file Opening of a checksum file failed. Possible causes include a corrupted file and a file in use.
Cannot read a checksum file Loading of a checksum file into memory failed. Possible causes include a shortage of memory and an OS prob-lem.
Cannot open a file Opening of a send file failed. Possible causes include a corrupted file and a file in use.
File transmission complete File transfer completed.
Cannot open the LPT port Opening of the LPT port failed.
Communications port setup acquisition error
A call to GetCommSate failed.
Communications port setup error A call to GetCommSate failed.
Cannot open a send file Opening of a send file failed. Possible causes include a corrupted file and a file in use.
Cannot send a Term Test file Transmission of a communications test block failed.1. The copier is not ready to receive.2. The cable is out of position.3. Transmission of the wrong send file was attempted.
Unsuccessful file transmission The transmission of a send file failed. Possible causes include a cable out of position.
Unsuccessful transmission to the LPT port Output to the LPT port failed. Possible causes include a cable out of position.
Starting file transmission. OK? A message seeking confirmation at the start of file transmission.
Send file not selected No files exist on the send file list.
Canceled Transmission of a file in progress was canceled. CAN-CEL is normally hidden. Its setting can be altered with the INI file.
Default data folder created A data folder was created by clicking Create Folder.
Invalid folder name An invalid folder name was entered. Start a folder name with a drive name, such as C:\.
Default data folder not set. Set a folder.
A data folder is not set in ISWTrns.INI. This message is displayed when ISW Trns launches for the fist time.
Unsuccessful thread creation The creation of a thread failed.
Copying the selected file. OK? File copy start message
Copying all files to the default data folder. OK?
File copy start message
No send file available No file to copy file is selected or exists in the folder.
CF5001 Field Service Ver.1.0 Sep 2003 UPDATING WITH ISW Trns
3-21
III
SE
RV
ICE
TO
OL
Message Display status
Unable to copy several files 1. The destination folder does not exist.2. When the Overwrite check box is not checked, an
attempt is made to copy to a file having the same file name.
3. An attempt is made to overwrite a protected file4. Any other cause (such as a file being used by another
application or OS problem)
File copying end File copying completed.
Send file not found, or invalid file name in the folder. Check.
The number of divisions of a send file recorded in thefolder. Check. checksum file and the number of files actually existing do notmatch.1. A file having an invalid file name exists in the data
folder. Delete possibly invalid file names from the folder list.
2. The number of files in a divided file is wanting. Iden-tify the wanting files in the folder list and recopy them.
UPDATING WITH ISW Trns CF5001 Field Service Ver.1.0 Sep 2003
3-22
III
SE
RV
ICE
TO
OL
2.6 Troubleshooting ISW Trns
If errors occur while running the ISW Trns pro-
gram, take the actions suggested below to cor-
rect them.
2.6.1 Unable to run ISW Trns
• Corrupted ISWTrns.EXE file
→ Set up again.
• The setup disk is corrupted.
→ Verify the setup disk and then set up again.
2.6.2 Send file is not displayed when a
combo box item is selected
• The send file is not stored in the folder.
→ Check to see if the send file is stored in the folder
appearing in the [Folder] text box in [Versions].
Use the [File Copy] function if the file storage
location is unknown.
• Check to see if the base data folder setting in the
option window is not wrong.
→ Verify the base folder setting. Use the [File Copy]
function if the file storage location is unknown.
• Invalid file name (altered)
→ The file name of a file must be used exactly as it
is delivered. If a file is renamed, it cannot be
displayed or selected. If a file name has been
altered, return it to its original file name.
• Invalid folder name (altered)
→ If a folder as created with [Make Folder] in the
option window is renamed, it cannot be located.
Restore the original folder name and check.
2.6.3 NG produced by a file check
• Corrupted send file
→ Copy the file again and recheck. If NG recurs,
check with the vendor of that file.
2.6.4 “??” produced by a file check
• With any other model, the checksum file (*.SUM)
had not been copied when the send file was cop-
ied to the PC.
→ Copy the checksum to the same folder as the file
is copied. It would be copied automatically if the
[File Copy] function is used.
2.6.5 Unsuccessful file transfer
A. “Cannot open a file” error
• The file is used by any other program or by the
system.
→ Close that other program. If the file transfer.
still fails, reboot Windows.
B. “Cannot send a Term Test file” error
• The cable is not in firm position.
→ Check to see if the cable is inserted in firm
position or if the cable is not impaired.
• The copier is not ready to receive.
→ Check to see if the copier is ready to receive.
C. “Unsuccessful transmission to the LPT
port” error
• The cable is not in firm position.
→ Check to see if the cable is inserted in firm.
position or if the cable is not impaired.
• Invalid data has been transmitted.
→ Check to from the file information window to see
if the receive mode (receiving board type) of the
copier and the send file on the PC match.
→ If the file is transmitted for the first time,
check with its vendor.
• The PC parallel port is set in ECP mode.
→ Consulting the manual, free the parallel port from
ECP mode.
• Compatibility between the PC parallel port and
the copier port.
→ Verify by testing on a PC with proven trans
mission performance.
• Use a cable shorter than 2 meters in length.
2.7 Connecting to the ISW con-nector
The ISW connector is at the right side of the
copier.
2.7.1 Procedure
• Connect the PC port and the copier ISW port
with a interface cable.
• Connect port is correct.
→ Use the USB port or Parallel port.
CF5001 Field Service Ver.1.0 Sep 2003 INTERNET ISW
3-23
III
SE
RV
ICE
TO
OL
3 INTERNET ISW
3.1 What is the Internet ISW?The Internet ISW is the system to perform ISW, by indicating ISW using the Internet mail (E-mail) or
browser to let copier automatically acquire the subject program from program server and rewrite its own
program.
With this Internet ISW, you can update copier's programs just by transmitting E-mail with simple keyword
described, without visiting customer's office. With the Web function, you can perform the ISW on customer
site, without carrying the actual programs with you.
3.2 Operating environmentTo use the Internet ISW function, the following conditions must be satisfied.
A. The copier is connected to a built in network where programs can be downloaded from the
Internet using ftp or http protocol. *1
B. The Internet ISW does not function in copier under the following conditions.
(1) The reset switch (SW1) is OFF.
(2) The main switch (SW2) is OFF.
(3) The copier is shut OFF by the auto shut off function.
*1 Programs can be downloaded using Firewall.
Note:
• The Internet ISW does not function even if the copier receives the Internet ISW designating mail,
as long as it is in any of the above conditions. The Internet ISW starts when the above condi-
tions are released.
However, the mails are able to have period of validity.
• The Internet ISW continues to function in the condition of a paper jam or SC occurs, or in the
low power mode.
3.3 Main featuresWith the Internet ISW, the following functions are available.
A. Internet ISW using E-Mail remote notification system *2
By sending simple keywords to a copier by E-Mail, the programs in the copier are rewritten automatically.
The boards of which programs can be rewritten with the Internet ISW are as follows. *3
(1) Overall control board (I)
(2) Printer control board (C)
(3) Operation board /1 (O)
(4) RADF control board (F)
(5) FNS control board (N)*2 To use the function, the E-Mail remote notification system must be setup separately.*3 The available boards are different depending on the copier models.
B. Internet ISW using Web utility
By accessing copier main body's homepage via PC web browser, programs in the copier are rewritten
automatically. To use the function, a Web terminal that is networked to the copier is necessary. *4*4 In case it is connected to a LAN, it can only be used within the LAN.
INTERNET ISW CF5001 Field Service Ver.1.0 Sep 2003
3-24
III
SE
RV
ICE
TO
OL
3.4 Initial setting
To use the Internet ISW, the related settings such as network parameter, program server address, firewall
address must be performed in the copier main body beforehand.
Also, to use the [1.1 Internet ISW using E-Mail remote notification system], the related settings such as
account registration must be set on the mail server separately.
For the details, please refer to "3. Mail remote notification system".
3.4.1 Setting on Control panel
First, set the copier's IP address on the control panel, to network the copier. If it has already been set, go
to "2.4.2 Setting on Web brouser".
a. Procedure
1. Select "Key operator mode" on the control panel.
2. Select "[1] System initial setting".
3. Select "[3] IP address setting".
4. Enter [IP address], [Subnet mask] and [Gateway address]. *5
5. Reboot the copier.*5 Copier's IP address, etc. are usually assigned by the system administrator.
For the details, please contact the customer's system administrator.
3.4.2 Setting on Web browser
Next, set the program server, etc. from the Web browser. To use the Web browser, prepare a networked
PC *6.*6 Prepare a PC by borrowing customer's PC or carrying laptop PC, for example.
(Considerations)
• In any setting item, space cannot be set.
• If there is a mistake in input process on the Web browser, be sure to correct it according to error mes-
sage displayed. If the mistake is left without correction, program download error may occur.
• Web's layout may change without prior notice.
CF5001 Field Service Ver.1.0 Sep 2003 INTERNET ISW
3-25
III
SE
RV
ICE
TO
OL
a. Procedure
1. Start the Web browser. *7
2. Specify the copier's IP address that you have entered at "2.4.1 Setting on Control panel".
If you access the copier's http address, the [Main page] as the top figure on next page appears.*7 If proxy is set on the web browser, it may not be able to access the copier's http address (web page).
For the details, please contact the customer's system administrator. As Web browser, Internet Explorer
or Netscape is recommended.
Do not perform setting from two or more browsers concurrently.
Copyright © 2000 GoAhead Software, Inc. All Rights Reserved.Copier Web Utility Main Page
3. On the [Main page], click the [Environment setup], to display [Login to Environment setup] page.
Login window to Environment setting
INTERNET ISW CF5001 Field Service Ver.1.0 Sep 2003
3-26
III
SE
RV
ICE
TO
OL
4. On [Login to Environment setup] page, enter the key operator password (the same password as key
operator mode password) and click Apply. The environment setup list appears. Then click [Extension
for maintenance].
Environment setup screen
5. On [Login to Extension for maintenance] page, enter the password (the same password as mode
change menu password) and click Apply. The environment setting list appears. Then click [Internet
ISW].
Login window to Extension for maintenance Extension for maintenance screen
CF5001 Field Service Ver.1.0 Sep 2003 INTERNET ISW
3-27
III
SE
RV
ICE
TO
OL
6. Click [Initial Setting].
Internet ISW main screen
7. Set proxy server.
When you don't use proxy server (firewall), go to Step 9.
INTERNET ISW CF5001 Field Service Ver.1.0 Sep 2003
3-28
III
SE
RV
ICE
TO
OL
*8 Types 2, 3 and 4 are not guaranteed.
When you finish entering all items, click [Next] and check the contents on the setting confirmation screen.
If all are fine, click [Next]. If there is any input error, click [Back] and reset the item according to the mes-
sage in red.
8. Set the program server. (Proxy server is used)
Enableproxy Select [no] if you do not use proxy
Select [Use ftp proxy] if you use ftp proxy
Select [Use http proxy] if you use http proxy
Proxy server Type *8 If you selected [Use ftp proxy] for [Use of proxy], select the type of proxy
from the following.
Type1 [USER USER@HOST]
Type2 [OPEN HOSTNAME]
Type3 [FW USERNAME→FW PASSWORD→SITE HOSTNAME]
Type4 [FW USERNAME→FW PASSWORD→USER USER@HOST]
Proxy server IP Address If you use proxy server, enter the IP address of the proxy server.
Port Number If you use proxy server, set the port No. that is used by the proxy server.
User name on the proxy
server
If you selected Type1 or Type2 for [Type of proxy server], set an account
name for the proxy server.
Password for the proxy server If you selected Type1 or Type2 for [Type of proxy server], set a password
for the proxy server.
CF5001 Field Service Ver.1.0 Sep 2003 INTERNET ISW
3-29
III
SE
RV
ICE
TO
OL
When you finish entering all items, click [Next] and check the contents on the setting confirmation screen.
If all are fine, click [Finish]. If there is any input error, click [Back] and reset the item according to the mes-
sage in red.
9. Set the program server. (Proxy is not used.)
Program server address Enter the address of the server where programs to download are stored.
Select the protocol you use from the drop down list at the left and enter
the following address in the test box at the right.
In case of ftp, it is the relative path from the home directory.
Example: ftp://210.226.5.5/EUR/8050/
User name on the program
server
Enter the account name of the program server.
Password for the program
server
Enter the program server password.
Receiving time out Set the program reception timeout. (Default: 30 minutes)
If timeout occurs, the program downloading is forcibly terminated. With-
out performing ISW, the machine recovers to normal mode.
Protocol Select a protocol to receive programs.
Program server IP Address Enter the IP address of the server where programs to download are
stored.
Target directory For http, enter path that follows the host domain. For ftp, enter the rela-
tive path from the home directory.
Example: EUR/8050/
User name on the program
server
Enter the account name of the program server.
Password for the Program
server
Enter the program server password.
Receiving time out Set the program reception timeout. (Default: 30 minutes)
If timeout occurs, the program downloading is forcibly terminated. With-
out performing ISW, the machine recovers to normal mode.
INTERNET ISW CF5001 Field Service Ver.1.0 Sep 2003
3-30
III
SE
RV
ICE
TO
OL
When you finish entering all items, click [Next] and check the contents on the setting confirmation screen.
If all are fine, click [Finish]. If there is any input error, click [Back] and reset the item according to the mes-
sage in red.
10. Perform the download test.
This test downloads "test.dat" from the program server set in the initial setting, to ensure all items
have been set appropriately. If the download test fails, check the setting items again according to the
error message.
When the test finished successfully, the communication speed and estimated download time are displayed
as shown below. Draw upon the data to decide [Reception timeout].
CF5001 Field Service Ver.1.0 Sep 2003 INTERNET ISW
3-31
III
SE
RV
ICE
TO
OL
If the download test fails, response error code sent from the server is displayed as follows. There may be
input errors. Check the initial setting again.
INTERNET ISW CF5001 Field Service Ver.1.0 Sep 2003
3-32
III
SE
RV
ICE
TO
OL
3.5 Internet ISW using E-Mail remote notification system
3.5.1 Function
Customer engineer sends an E-mail with simple keyword description. Then, the copier that received the
mail downloads specified program from the program server and rewrites its program.
This function is executed by a different command (keyword) from the list print acquisition function of the [E-
Mail remote notification system].
A. The boards of which programs can be rewritten with the Internet ISW are as follows.
(1) Overall control board: I0
(2) Printer control board: C0
(3) Operation board /1: O0, O1, O2, O3, O4, O5
(4) RADF control board: F0
(5) FNS control board: N0
B. You can acquire version information of programs to be rewritten.
C. You can find out how to use [Internet ISW] by mail.
To use the above functions, it is necessary to send the copier E-mail with the specified simple keyword
(command) description. The following are the commands and the options.
When no file name is specified, the following files are acquired from the program server address set
beforehand.
Command Option Description
ISW Subject board name Specifies name of a board to ISW. (must be entered)
The specifiable boards are as follows.
[I0, C0, O0, O1, O2, O3, O4, O5, F0, N0]
The available boards are different depending on mod-
els. File name can be specified with "=" as [Subject
board name=File name].
Timeout Specifies period of validity of mail.
(From 5 to 1,440 minutes. Unit is minute. If none is
specified, timeout takes place at 90 minutes.)
When the time from mail transmission by CE to mail
reception at copier exceeds the specified period, ISW is
not performed due to expiration.
ISWHELP — Returns a help mail with the above command use
descriptions.
I0 bootI1.bin C0 bootC1.bin O0 bootO0.bin F0 bootF1.bin N0 bootN1.bin
O1 bootO1.bin
O2 bootO2.bin
O3 bootO3.bin
O4 bootO4.bin
O5 bootO5.bin
CF5001 Field Service Ver.1.0 Sep 2003 INTERNET ISW
3-33
III
SE
RV
ICE
TO
OL
3.5.2 Transmitting E-Mail
The following is an example of transmitting an E-mail with the aforementioned command to a copier.
You can use either upper and lower case characters when typing a command (option) in E-mail. *9
When transmitting an E-mail to a copier, take care of the following.
• The ISW-designated mail has the period of validity. Therefore, set the date of mailer and time zone of
the copier *10 accurately.
• One mail can be described with only one ISW command. If two or more commands are described,
the second and later ones are ignored.
• Any mail software can be used. For example, mobile device mail, browser mail and so on.
• With the mail software in use, transmit mails in text mode.
(Commands in mails in HTML mode cannot be handled correctly.)
• Place at least one space or TAB *11 between command and option, and option and option described
in mails.
• Type every command in mails only with alphanumeric one-byte characters (ASCII characters). If other
characters *12 are typed, an error mail with [Command not found] is returned.
• Type every command in mails from the line head. Line head starting with a space or TAB is ignored.
• Do not attach files or others to the mails transmitted to copiers.
Depending on the size of files, such mails may be handled as illegal mails and copier may refuse to
receive.
• Do not type signatures in the mails transmitted to copiers. If auto signature addition is set on the mail
software, turn off the setting. Signatures may be handled as commands and error mails may be
returned from the copier.
*9 Case sensitivity is on for the file name. Take care when typing.*10 Set in the E-mail transmission setting for [E-mail transmission setting].*11 Linefeed is not available.*12 Two-byte characters also cause errors. Take care not to use them.
(1) Transmitting ISW command
The transmission mail must have the following descriptions.
• In Subject, type a CE password that has been entered in the mail reception setting.
For the details, please refer to the "3. E-Mail remote notification system".
• In To, type mail address of a copier.
• In Body, type a command.
INTERNET ISW CF5001 Field Service Ver.1.0 Sep 2003
3-34
III
SE
RV
ICE
TO
OL
An example of I0 ISW:
An example of return mail (ISW start) *13
When the copier allows the ISW, it moves into the ISW mode, displaying [Remote ISW executing] on the
operation panel. The copier cannot be used while it is in the ISW mode. *14 Then, a mail like the following
is returned from the copier.
*13 The return mail is in English regardless of the language selected for the copier's main body operation
panel display.*14 During the ISW, main switch (SW2) of the copier does not function. The copier cannot be shutdown.
Password for authentication
Command
Copier's mail address
aaaaa.com
CF5001 Field Service Ver.1.0 Sep 2003 INTERNET ISW
3-35
III
SE
RV
ICE
TO
OL
An example of return mail (ISW complete)
When ISW completes and copier reboots automatically, a mail like the following is returned from the copier.
You can confirm that the ROM version is upgraded.
However, if transmission of the above two kinds of return mails fails, the mails are not retransmitted.
When specifying a file name
When specifying a file name for ISW command, type the name with "=" following the subject board name.
In this case, "65FAI012UGH0.bin" must exist in the program server address that has been set in the Inter-
net ISW setting.
Transmission mail
ISW I0 = 65FAI012UGH0.bin 30
When transmission mail exceeds the period of validity
On ISW command, period of validity (timeout) can be changed set for every mail. (Default: 90 minutes) If
period from the mail transmission to mail reception at copier (duration) is longer than the timeout period,
ISW is not performed by that mail.
INTERNET ISW CF5001 Field Service Ver.1.0 Sep 2003
3-36
III
SE
RV
ICE
TO
OL
Transmission mail
Return mail
5 minutes is set for timeout
aaaaa.com
Timeout took place as 6 minutes had passed.
aaaaa.com
CF5001 Field Service Ver.1.0 Sep 2003 INTERNET ISW
3-37
III
SE
RV
ICE
TO
OL
(2) Transmitting ISWHELP command
Manual that shows how to use command is returned by mail.
It is useful if you forget how to use command and options.
Transmission mail
ISWHelp
Return mail
INTERNET ISW CF5001 Field Service Ver.1.0 Sep 2003
3-38
III
SE
RV
ICE
TO
OL
3.6 Internet ISW using Web utility
3.6.1 Function
Using the copier's web utility, just by clicking on the browser *15, customer engineer can let the copier
automatically download programs from the program server and rewrite its own programs.
The boards of which programs can be rewritten are the same as those of [Internet ISW using E-mail
remote notification system]. *15 Usually, it is not possible to access company-inside copier from outside exceeding firewall.
3.6.2 How to use
A. Going to Internet ISW page
The same as instructed in "2.4 Initial Setting", go to the [Internet ISW] page on the Web browser.
Internet ISW main screen
Next to each board name, the program version is displayed.
aaaaa.com
CF5001 Field Service Ver.1.0 Sep 2003 INTERNET ISW
3-39
III
SE
RV
ICE
TO
OL
B. Performing ISW
From the [ISW] items, select a board to ISW and check the box. When specifying a name of file to down-
load, type the name in the text box of [File name]. When no file name is specified, the following files are
acquired from the program server address set beforehand.
When the above input completes, click [ISW].
C. Starting ISW
When ISW starts, the following screen appears. If there is any input error, click [Back] and reset the item
according to the message in red.
ISW execution screen
When ISW completes successfully, the copier automatically reboots.
If you click [Check status], you can check the current ISW status.
If you click [Cancel], you can stop the ISW only while program is being downloaded
I0 bootI1.bin C0 bootC1.bin O0 bootO0.bin F0 bootF1.bin N0 bootN1.bin
O1 bootO1.bin
O2 bootO2.bin
O3 bootO3.bin
O4 bootO4.bin
O5 bootO5.bin
INTERNET ISW CF5001 Field Service Ver.1.0 Sep 2003
3-40
III
SE
RV
ICE
TO
OL
D. Checking ISW status
ISW status check screen
This screen shows the current performance or error. The display items are as follows.
• ISW is downloading
• ISW is writing
• Finished *16
• ISW was cancelled due to transferring problem
• ISW was cancelled due to transferring overtime
• ISW was cancelled due to writing problem to flash memory*16 Copier reboots after ISW completes normally. Do not click [Refresh] on the browser.
E. Ending ISW
When ISW completes and copier reboots, ensure that the program version is upgraded on the [Internet
ISW main screen].
CF5001 Field Service Ver.1.0 Sep 2003 INTERNET ISW
3-41
III
SE
RV
ICE
TO
OL
3.7 Precautions for use
3.7.1 Prior announcement to administrator
When performing the Internet ISW, be sure to contact the copier's administrator or the like and get his/her
agreement beforehand.
Perform ISW in condition that the copier is not being used.
If the copier is being used (a job is being processed), the Internet ISW is not performed.
3.7.2 If power failure occurs during data rewriting
While ISW rewriting is in progress *17, the operation panel and main switch (SW2) are locked. However, if
the main power goes down due to power failure or other, the copier becomes unable to start up. *18
This is only the problem on rewriting the overall control board and the operation board/1. Even if errors
occur on rewriting other boards, the boards can be overwritten again with the Internet ISW.
If the copier becomes unable to start for the above reason, go to the copier's site and rewrite the program
using the ISWTrns.
<How to recover> Overall control board : Turn ON the main switch (SW2) and then perform ISW.
Operation board /1: Turn ON the main switch (SW2) while pressing HELP and CHECK
button and then perform ISW.
For the details, please refer to "1. ISW"*17 Rewriting takes maximum 10 minute.*18 No problem is cased by power failure during program downloading process.
3.7.3 ISW of multiple programs
It is not possible with the Internet ISW to ISW several programs concurrently. Always perform ISW one by
one. If several programs must be rewritten at the same time, perform ISW from board of higher priority. *19
When rewriting several programs, SC may occur during rewriting intervals between programs.
However, such SC will clear when all the subject programs are rewritten.*19 In case of the Internet ISW using the E-mail remote notification system, the sequence of transmitted
ISW designating mails and mails received by copier may change. Transmit multiple mails while ensur-
ing reception of completion mail or putting enough intervals.
3.7.4 If ISW fails in low power mode
If ISW fails due to errors in program download, data check, and so on, the copier recovers into normal
mode. Only in low power mode, the copier reboots when ISW fails.
Priority 1 RADF control board (F), FNS control board (N)
Priority 2 Printer control board (C), Operationboard/1 (O)
Priority 3 Overall control board (I)
INTERNET ISW CF5001 Field Service Ver.1.0 Sep 2003
3-42
III
SE
RV
ICE
TO
OL
3.8 Proxy server authentication in Internet ISW
3.8.1 What is a proxy server?
It is a server that receives request (HTTP or FTP etc) from a client inside the firewall, and represents the
client. With this server, access to outside the firewall is enabled.
3.8.2 Authentication of proxy server
Following are the lists of commands of each authentication type:
All the 4 types below are supported in the Internet ISW.
3.8.3 Type and command list for authentication on proxy server
The following shows the brief description of each authentication type and the list of commands being used.
A. Type 1: USER user@host
This type does not require an authentication to the proxy sever when accessing outside via proxy.
In case it is possible to access outside via proxy server without entering user name and password of the
proxy server, this type may be used.
Command
B. Type 2: OPEN host
It is almost the same as Type 1. The only difference is a command at the authentication.
Apply this type when all the settings are set properly but communication fails with Type 1.
Command
Command Parameter Reply Code Description
USER user@host 331 Sends user name of the program server and program
server's address
PASS password 230 Sends password for the above user name
Command Parameter Reply Code Description
OPEN host ftp expanded
function:
Defined by
each server
Sends program server's address
USER user 331 Sends user name of the program sever
PASS password 230 Sends password for the above user name
CF5001 Field Service Ver.1.0 Sep 2003 INTERNET ISW
3-43
III
SE
RV
ICE
TO
OL
C. Type 3: FW user → FW password → SITE host
This type requires an authentication to the proxy server itself when accessing outside.
It is necessary to enter information of the server that you wish to access, user name and password of the
proxy sever (firmware).
In case the user name and password of the proxy server are required when accessing outside via proxy
sever, this type may be used.
Command
D. FW user name → FW password → USER user@host
It is almost the same as Type 3. The only difference is a command at the authentication.
Apply this type when all the settings are set properly but communication fails with Type 3.
Command
3.8.4 Remarks
• For fwtk2.1 (for unix) and Black Jumbo Dog (for Windows), authentication Type 1 is used.
• Type 1 is used in many proxy servers.
If you are not sure about the authentication type of the proxy server, KC recommends that you use
Type 1 in the meantime.
Command Parameter Reply Code Description
USER FW user 331 Sends user name of the proxy server
PASS FW password 230 Sends password for the above user name
SITE host ftp expanded
function:
Defined by
each server
Sends program server's address
USER user 331 Sends user name of the program sever
PASS password 230 Sends password for the above user name
Command Parameter Reply Code Description
USER FW user 331 Sends user name of the proxy server
PASS FW password 230 Sends password for the above user name
USER user@host 331 Sends user name of the program server and program
server's address
PASS password 230 Sends password for the above user name
MAIL REMOTE NOTIFICATION SYSTEM CF5001 Field Service Ver.1.0 Sep 2003
3-44
III
SE
RV
ICE
TO
OL
4 MAIL REMOTE NOTIFICATION SYSTEM
4.1 What is the Mail remote notification system?Mail remote notification system allows to acquire machine data, that have been available as "List Output
Mode" in 36 mode from copier, through internet mail (E-mail). This function is achieved without visiting
customer site and printing on paper if the simple keyword is e-mailed.
4.2 Operation environmentFollowing conditions should be satisfied in order to use mail remote notification system. The function
works during JAM, SC or Low power mode, but does not work during shut-off. However, the sent mail does
not disappear and the copier process the mail after next starting up. During low power mode, the machine
operation is as usual.
A. The mail server *1 that allows copier to receive mail in POP3 or IMAP protocol.
(It is preferred that mail server can receive external mail and service constantly.)
B. The mail server *2 that allows copier to transmit mail in SMTP protocol.
(It is preferred that mail server can send external mail and service constantly.).
C. Mail remote notification system disabling conditions on copier are as follows.
(1) Main power switch is OFF.
(2) Sub power switch is OFF.
*1 Popper, Lotus Notes, Mercury Mail etc. Assign one account per one copier. It can be the same machine
to the SMTP server. "Mail remote notification system" corresponds to "POP before SMTP".*2 Sendmail 8.9, qmail, Lotus Notes, Mercury Mail etc. It can be the same machine to the receiving
server.
4.3 Initial setting
In order to use Mail remote notification system, settings such as network parameter on copier and account
registration on mail server are necessary.
A. Setting on operation panel
In order to connect the copier main body to network, IP address of the copier should be set on opera-
tion panel. If it is already set, please go to "B. Setting on Web.
a. Procedure
1. Select [Key operator mode] on operation panel.
2. Select [1. System initial setting].
3. Select [3. IP address setting].
4. Input [IP address], [Subnetmask] and [Gateway address]*1.
5. Turn OFF/ON power switch of copier.
*1 System administrator usually assigns IP address and network related setting to copier. Please ask sys-
tem administrator for details.
CF5001 Field Service Ver.1.0 Sep 2003 MAIL REMOTE NOTIFICATION SYSTEM
3-45
III
SE
RV
ICE
TO
OL
B. Setting on Web
Next, input setting for mail server from Web browser. Please use PC*2 connected to the network in
order to use Web browser.
*2 Prepare PC; borrow the customer's one or bring notebook computer.
Note:
• No blank space should be entered for any column. Following characters cannot be used for the
E-mail address.
( ) < > ; : ¥ " [ ]
When the error message is displayed on the web browser, correct the input error following to the
message. If the error is not corrected, mail sending or receiving may fail.
• Web design is subject to change without notice.
(1) How to set
a. Procedure
1. Start up Web browser *1.
2. Type IP address of the copier you input to the [A. Setting on operation panel].
When accessing Web, the [main page] (see upper figure in next page) is displayed.
*1 If proxy is set on Web browser, it may not possible to access web utilities of copier. Please ask system
administrator for details. KC recommends to use Internet explorer or Netscape as the Web browser. Do
not perform setting from the two or more browsers concurrently.
Copyright © 2000 GoAhead Software, Inc. All Rights Reserved.
Copier Web utilities main page
MAIL REMOTE NOTIFICATION SYSTEM CF5001 Field Service Ver.1.0 Sep 2003
3-46
III
SE
RV
ICE
TO
OL
3. In [Main] page, click [Environment Setup] button and display [Environment setup log in] page.
Environment setup log in page
4. Input key operator password in [Environment setup log in] page, then click [Apply].
[Environment set up] page is displayed. Then click [E-Mail transmission setting].
Even key operator password set "0000" in 25-mode setting, input "0000".
Environment setup page
CF5001 Field Service Ver.1.0 Sep 2003 MAIL REMOTE NOTIFICATION SYSTEM
3-47
III
SE
RV
ICE
TO
OL
5. Set the transmission setting.
In order to use Mail remote notification system, registration of E-mail address of manager (machine
administrator), and sending (SMTP) server input is mandatory.
*1 The same setting can be set on LCD of the copier. But do not set concurrently from web browser and
Web.
*2 Please see the "INSTRUCTION MANUAL" of copier if use the mail transmission system.
E-Mail transmission setting page
Manager Address *1 To specify E-mail address of machine manager.
The e-mail address to notify error from SMTP.
DNS Server IP Address Input as needed. If not needed, leave it blank.
Time difference *1 The send time of mail is calculated referring this value.
Input the time difference from UTC within the range -1200 (-
12h00min) to +1200 (+12h00min).
If setting is not made, it is +0000 (the same as UTC).
For example, the time difference in New York is -5 hours, - 500 is
input.
Sending mail (SMTP) sever *1 The IP address of SMTP sever.
Condition Informing Address *1 It is for mail transmission system. *2
You may leave it blank when mail transmission system is not used.
E-Mail Transmission *1 It is for mail transmission system. *2
You may leave it blank when mail transmission system is not used.
MAIL REMOTE NOTIFICATION SYSTEM CF5001 Field Service Ver.1.0 Sep 2003
3-48
III
SE
RV
ICE
TO
OL
6. Click [Apply] button to finish input.
CF5001 Field Service Ver.1.0 Sep 2003 MAIL REMOTE NOTIFICATION SYSTEM
3-49
III
SE
RV
ICE
TO
OL
(2) Test mail sending
Click [Sending test] button and then a test mail is sent to SMTP server. Test mail is sent to [Manager
address] set on Step5. Click [Sending test] to display result of the test mail. If it is failed, please re-con-
firm the setting following to error message.
a. Procedure
1. Set the reception setting.
In the [Extension for maintenance] column at the bottom of the page, input the password to change
the mode then click the initial setting.
Use the password for changing modes.
Extension for maintenance page (for customer engineer)
MAIL REMOTE NOTIFICATION SYSTEM CF5001 Field Service Ver.1.0 Sep 2003
3-50
III
SE
RV
ICE
TO
OL
The records of sent and received mails listed on mail log on the [Extension for maintenance] page are the
latest 10 mails. Even the main power switch is turned OFF, the communication is logged and kept though
there are some restrictions.
E-Mail reception setting page
CF5001 Field Service Ver.1.0 Sep 2003 MAIL REMOTE NOTIFICATION SYSTEM
3-51
III
SE
RV
ICE
TO
OL
2. Set the e-mail reception screen based on the following.
*1 Consult system administrator and create mail account for copier on receiving mail server.*2 No echo back from the password.*3 Use it as identifier, when managing multiple copiers.
*4 Use it to check the copier. is turned ON or not. If the time of the copier or the mail application software
is not set correctly (including time difference), wrong time is described. In that case, select [No].
3. Click "Apply" to finish input.
Enable E-mail notification Select [Yes] to use Mail remote notification system.
Default is [No].
Interval between fetching mails Interval between checking mail on receiving mail server from copier.
The interval can be set within the range from 1 min. to 60 min.
Usually, set around 10 min. considering load for network.
Receiving mail server The IP address of receiving mail server.
Kind of mail spool Select [POP3] or [IMAP]. Default is [POP3].
User name on the server *1 The account name for copier assigned on receiving mail server.
Password *2 The password for the above user name.
E-Mail Address of this copy
machine
E-mail address of the copier.
Usually, the name is [User name@receiving mail server name].
Nickname *3 The name added to the mail subject sent from the copier.
It can be blank.
CE Password *2 Input password used for the "Subject" of the mail sent to the copier.
The copier uses this password for security check.
Also Notice to the administrator (CC mail)
- No
- Only illegal mails
- All mails
Default (Do not send the e-mail to the administrator)
Specify whether to transfer mail in following conditions; When the
mail received by copier does not match to the registered password or
the mail size is 10 k-byte or larger.
Transfer all sending mails from Mail remote notification system.
Administrator E-Mail address Input address for the transfer if above [Only illegal mail] or [all mails]
is selected.
Announce delay time in reply mail
*4
Select whether to contain the time difference from CE`s transmission
and copier reception on the mail.
Default is [No].
Enable POP (IMAP) before SMTP Select whether SMTP server transmits the mail after POP (IMAP)
server attests.
Default is [Yes].
MAIL REMOTE NOTIFICATION SYSTEM CF5001 Field Service Ver.1.0 Sep 2003
3-52
III
SE
RV
ICE
TO
OL
4. Test mail sending and receiving.
Click [Sending and receiving test] button and then sending and receiving tests are performed by one
transaction. It checks whether the sent mail is correctly received. Click [Sending and receiving test]
to display result of the test. If it is failed, please re-confirm the setting following to error message.
5. Turn OFF/ON power switch of copier.
Sending mail test Mail sending test is performed to SMTP server.
Test mail is sent to [E-Mail Address of the copy machine] set on
Step2.
Receiving mail test Receiving test from receiving mail server is performed.
Test mail is received by [E-Mail Address of the copy machine] set
on Step2.
CF5001 Field Service Ver.1.0 Sep 2003 MAIL REMOTE NOTIFICATION SYSTEM
3-53
III
SE
RV
ICE
TO
OL
4.4 How to use the Mail remote notification system
A. Function
CE can use following functions of Mail remote notification system by e-mailing simple keyword to copier.
CE can receive the data of the desired copier data list by the e-mail.
• JOB memory list
• User management list
• Font pattern list
• Machine management list 1
• Adjustment data list
• Parameter list
• E.K.C. management list
• Machine management list 2
• Counter list
• Pixel ratio data list
In order to use above function, the simple keyword (command) must be sent by e-mail.
The following table shows the command and options.
Command Options Explanation Mini-
mum
GETLOG [List output] The [List output] specified by the following is returned by
mail.
G
JOB [JOB memory list] J
USER [User management list] U
FONT [Font pattern list] F
MANAGEMENT [Machine management list 1] M
ADJUSTMENT [Adjustment data list] A
PARAMETER [Parameter list] P
EKC [EKC management list] E
2MANAGEMENT [Machine management list 2] 2
COUNTER [Counter list] C
PIXEL [Pixel ratio data list] PI
ALL All of above list data. AL
Not specified Edited [Counter list] for the cellular phone display.
CHPASS [OldPasswd] [New-
Passwd]
To change the password used to certify mail. C
[OldPasswd] Specify current password
[NewPasswd] Specify new password
HELP Not specified Help mail explaining usage of the above commands is sent. H
MAIL REMOTE NOTIFICATION SYSTEM CF5001 Field Service Ver.1.0 Sep 2003
3-54
III
SE
RV
ICE
TO
OL
B. Send mails
The example of the mail containing the command to the copier is shown. The command and option on
the mail are recognized by the top letters without distinction between capital and small letters. Accord-
ingly, not all letters of the command must be typed. It is recognized by the minimum letters in the above
table *1. When sending mail to the copier, please note followings.
Note:
• Mail software on any OS, handy terminal, free-mail using browser can be used without any differ-
ence.
• When sending mail on mail software, be sure to use text mode.
(Mail in HTML mode cannot be handle properly.)
• As for the reception on mail software, the desirable maximum displayable letters per one line is 128
and over (single-byte).
(The length of the one line reaches to 128 letters in the part of the data list mail. Accordingly, mail
may not be easily seen on the cellular phone or other mobile devices.)
• Put minimum one space or TAB*2 between the command and option on the mail.
• Use only single-byte alphanumeric character (ASCII character) for the command on mail. Other-
wise, an error mail, [Command Not Found], is returned.
• Type command from the beginning of the line. If the line starts with blank or TAB, the line is
ignored.
• Maximum number of commands that can be contained in one mail is 10. The eleventh and onwards
commands are ignored.
• Do not attach file to the mail sent to the copier. Depending on file size, it is handled as illegal mail.
• Do not attach signature to the mail sent to the copier. If automatic attachment of the signature is
already set to the mail software, change the setting not to attach the signature. The signature is
regarded as command and error mail may be returned.
• While copier is sending or receiving the mail, if the power switch of the copier is turned OFF or list
output is performed on the copier, two mails may be returned.
• The maximum number of the mails that copier receives from the mail server is 5 per one time. If the
mail server has more received mails at a time, remaining mails are processed after the [interval
between fetching mails].
*1 Example: All of G, GE, GET, GETL, GETLO, GETLOG equal to specify GETLOG.*2 Return cannot be used.
CF5001 Field Service Ver.1.0 Sep 2003 MAIL REMOTE NOTIFICATION SYSTEM
3-55
III
SE
RV
ICE
TO
OL
(1) Send GETLOG command
Following should be described in the sending mail.
• Subject: Input "CE password" set in reception setting.
• To: Input E-mail address of the copier.
• Body: Input command.
a. Example of mail requesting counter list
Mail address of the copier
CE password
Command
MAIL REMOTE NOTIFICATION SYSTEM CF5001 Field Service Ver.1.0 Sep 2003
3-56
III
SE
RV
ICE
TO
OL
b. Example of mail requesting counter list*1
*1 Language of the returned mail is English only.
Serial number of copier
Nickname of the copier
Mail address of the sender
Requested counter list
CF5001 Field Service Ver.1.0 Sep 2003 MAIL REMOTE NOTIFICATION SYSTEM
3-57
III
SE
RV
ICE
TO
OL
c. When option is not specified
GETLOG command without option is specified, Counter list for the cellular phone display is returned.
Sending mail [GetLog]
Example of returned mail
MAIL REMOTE NOTIFICATION SYSTEM CF5001 Field Service Ver.1.0 Sep 2003
3-58
III
SE
RV
ICE
TO
OL
d. To receive multiple data list
Data lists in reply to GETLOG command are separately returned by mails; one list per mail. If the
same list is requested twice or more in a mail, the list is returned only once.
When followings are described in a mail, both counter list mail and machine management list 1 mail
are returned.
[GetLog Counter]
[GetLog Management]
When the commands are written in one line continuously, Management (the later command) is ignored
and only counter list (the first command) is returned.
[GetLog Counter Management]
e. When unrecognizable option is specified.
Sending mail
[GetLog Log]
Returned mail
[Option Not Found → GetLog Log]
(2) Send CHPASS command
The sending mail password described on the subject can be changed remotely. Specify 20 or less let-
ters to [OldPasswd] and [NewPasswd]. Use ASCII characters except space.
Password cannot be changed by mail if you don't remember the old password. Change the [CE pass-
word] from the browser, explained in Chapter 2.
a. Example of correct password change
In this case, old password [U-BIX] is changed to new password [Sitios].
Sending mail
[ChPass U-BIX Sitios]
Returned mail
[SE's Password was changed successfully. → New Password [Sitios]]
When the password is changed, use [NewPasswd] from the next mail. When the mail is sent with [Old-
Passwd], it is treated as illegal mail.
b. Example of invalid password change
Old password [U-BIX] is changed to new password [Sitios].
Sending mail
[ChPass Sitios U-BIX]
Returned mail
[Old Password is Invalid. → ChPass Sitios U-BIX]
Then, password was not changed. Accordingly, the password is unchanged and [U-BIX].
Sending mail
[ChPass Sitios]
Returned mail
[Violation on format by new password. → ChPass Sitios]
When the new password is blank, password is not changed.
CF5001 Field Service Ver.1.0 Sep 2003 MAIL REMOTE NOTIFICATION SYSTEM
3-59
III
SE
RV
ICE
TO
OL
(3) Send HELP command
The manual describing above usage of the commands is returned by mail. Use this function when you
forget how to use command and option.
Sending mail [Help]
Returned mail
4.5 Disabling systemIn order to disable Mail remote notification system, in Mail reception setting, select [No] for the "Enable
E-Mail notification" and then click [Apply] button.
MAIL REMOTE NOTIFICATION SYSTEM CF5001 Field Service Ver.1.0 Sep 2003
3-60
III
SE
RV
ICE
TO
OL
Blank page
CF5001 Field Service Ver.1.0 Sep 2003 SERVICE SCHEDULE
4-1
IV S
ER
VIC
E
IV SERVICE
1. SERVICE SCHEDULE
1.1 Service schedule
Guarantee period (5 years or 5,000,000 copies)
Service itemx 10,000 copies Service
count0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100 150 180 200 250 300 350 360 400 450 500
Main
body
Maintenance
Every 100,000
copies
49 times
Periodic check (1)
Every 200,000 copies
24 times
Periodic check (2)
Every 400,000
copies
12 times
Periodic check (3)
Every 600,000
copies
8times
Periodic check (4)
Every 1,000,000 copies
4times
Periodic check (5)
Every 1,500,000
copies
3times
Periodic check (6)
Every 2,000,000
copies
2times
Periodic check (7)
Every 2,500,000 copies
1time
Periodic check (8)
Every 4,000,000
copies
1time
AFR-20 *1
Maintenance
Every 100,000
copies
49 times
Periodic check (1) *1
Every 1,800,000 copies
2times
*1 Perform the periodic check (1) for the AFR-20 at 2 times (1,800,000 copies and 3,600,000 copies).
SERVICE SCHEDULE CF5001 Field Service Ver.1.0 Sep 2003
4-2
IV S
ER
VIC
E
C-208
Maintenance
Every 100,000
copies
49times
Periodic check (1)
Every 600,000
copies
8times
Periodic check (2)
Every 2,500,000
copies
1time
FN-120/
FN-9
Maintenance
Every 100,000
copies
49times
Periodic check (1)
Every 200,000
copies
24times
Periodic check (2)
Every 400,000
copies
12times
Periodic check (3)
Every 1,000,000
copies
4times
Periodic check (4)
Every 2,500,000
copies
1time
Cover
Inserter
D
Maintenance
Every 100,000
copies
49times
Periodic check (1)
Every 500,000
copies
9times
Periodic check (2)Every 1,000,000
copies
4times
Periodic check (3)
Every 3,000,000
copies
1time
PK-5
Maintenance
Every 100,000
copies
49times
TMG-3MaintenanceEvery 100,000
copies
49times
Periodic check (1)
Every 4,000,000
copies
1time
Service itemx 10,000 copies Service
count0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100 150 180 200 250 300 350 360 400 450 500
CF5001 Field Service Ver.1.0 Sep 2003 SERVICE SCHEDULE
4-3
IV S
ER
VIC
E
1.2 Maintenance items
A. Main body (Every 100,000 copies/prints)
No.Classifica-
tionService item Quantity
Implementation classificationMaterials•Tools usedClean-
ingCheck
Lubri-cation
Replacement
1Prepara-
tions
(1) Image check
2 Drum (1) Drum cartridge 4 Setting powder
(2) Drum unit cleaning Hydro wipe (cleaning pad is not available)
3Charging corona
(1) Charging wire assy /Y, /M, /C, /K
4
(2) Changing grid plate /Y, /M, /C, /K
Blower brush
(3) Charging corona dust-proof filter
1 ( )
4 Developer (1) Developer (Y, M, C, K) 4
(2) Developer unit cleaning Hydro wipe (cleaning pad is not availa-ble)
5Transfer belt
(1) Belt cleaning blade1
6 ADU (1) Separation corona unit 1
(2) Paper feed roller /BP
(3) Feed roller /BP
(4) Double feed prevention roller /BP
(5) Registration roller cleaning Hydro wipe/drum cleaner
(6) Conveyance roller section cleaning
Hydro wipe/drum cleaner
(7) ADU paper through sen-sor cleaning
Blower brush
7 Exterior (1) Ozone filter /1 1
(2) Dust proof filter /1 2
(3) Dust proof filter /2 1
8Fixing (1) Fixing roller /U *2
1Multemp FF-RM (or Solvest 240)
(2) Fixing roller /L *21
Multemp FF-RM (or Solvest 240)
(3) Cleaning roller Roller cleaner
9Reverse/exit
(1) Decurler roller25 mode count reset
1*1
*1 Reset "5. Parts counter" and "1. Count of special parts" in the 25 mode to prevent the fixing jam when
replacing the decurler roller.
*2 When replacing the fixing roller /U or /L, be sure to apply Multemp FF-RM on the heat insulating sleeve
/U or /L, respectively.
SERVICE SCHEDULE CF5001 Field Service Ver.1.0 Sep 2003
4-4
IV S
ER
VIC
E B. AFR-20 (Every 100,000 copies/prints)
10Paper feed (1) Paper feed roller /1, /2, /3 Hydro wipe/
drum cleaner
(2) Feed roller /1, /2, /3 Hydro wipe/drum cleaner
(3) Double feed prevention roller /1, /2, /3
Hydro wipe/drum cleaner
11
Vertical
convey-
ance
(1) Conveyance roller, sensor Hydro wipe/drum cleaner/blower brush
12Scanner (1) Original glass, exposure
lamp, reflector, lens, mir-ror, sensor
Hydro wipe/drum cleaner/blower brush
13Write unit (1) Dust-proof glass (Y, M, C,
K)Hydro wipe
14Toner supply
(1) Toner supply unit cleaning Hydro wipe
15Toner collection
(1) Toner collection box replacing/cleaning
( )Hydro wipe
16 Final check (1) W.U.T. check
(2) Exterior cleaning Hydro wipe/drum cleaner
(3) Image and paper through check
(4) PM counter resetting (25 mode)
No.Classifica-
tionService item Quantity
Implementation classificationMaterials•Tools usedClean-
ingCheck
Lubri-cation
Replacement
No.Classifica-
tionService item Quantity
Implementation classificationMaterials•Tools usedClean-
ingCheck
Lubri-cation
Replacement
Prepara-
tions
(1) Paper through check
1Paper feed (1) Paper feed roller Cleaning pad/
drum cleaner
(2) Feed roller Cleaning pad/drum cleaner
(3) Double feed prevention roller
Cleaning pad/drum cleaner
(4) Pre-separation rubber Cleaning pad/drum cleaner
(5) Rubber roller Blower brush
(6) Reflective sensor Blower brush
(7) Conveyance belt Cleaning pad/drum cleaner
2Exterior (1) Exterior cleaning Cleaning pad/
drum cleaner
3 Final check (1) Paper through check
CF5001 Field Service Ver.1.0 Sep 2003 SERVICE SCHEDULE
4-5
IV S
ER
VIC
E
C. C-208 (Every 100,000 copies/prints)
D. FN-120 (Every 100,000 copies/prints)
No.Classifica-
tionService item Quantity
Implementation classificationMaterials•Tools usedClean-
ingCheck
Lubri-cation
Replacement
1Prepara-
tions
(1) Paper through check
2Paper feed (1)Paper feed roller Cleaning pad/
drum cleaner
(2) Feed roller Cleaning pad/drum cleaner
(3) Double feed prevention roller
Cleaning pad/drum cleaner
(4) Paper dust removing
(5) Sensor Blower brush
(6) Gear( )
Plus guard No.2 *1
3Exterior (1) Exterior cleaning Cleaning pad/
drum cleaner
4 Final check (1) Paper through check
No.Classifica-
tionService item Quantity
Implementation classificationMaterials•Tools usedClean-
ingCheck
Lubri-cation
Replacement
1Prepara-
tions
(1) Paper through check
2Convey-
ance
(1) Conveyance roller Cleaning pad/drum cleaner
3Drive (1) Main drive unit
( )Plus guard No.2 *1
(2) Tray up/down drive unit( )
Plus guard No.2 *1
(3) Shift drive unit( )
Plus guard No.2 *1
(4) Paper exit drive section( )
Plus guard No.2 *1
(5) Staple unit( )
Plus guard No.2 *1
4Stapler (1) Staple check Actual durable
count: 5,000
5 Exterior (1) Exterior cleaning
6 Final check (1) Paper through check
*1 If abnormal sound is heard due to insufficient oil, lubricate it.
SERVICE SCHEDULE CF5001 Field Service Ver.1.0 Sep 2003
4-6
IV S
ER
VIC
E
E. FN-9 (Every 100,000 copies/prints)
F. Cover Inserter D (Every 100,000 copies/prints)
No.Classifica-
tionService item Quantity
Implementation classificationMaterials•Tools usedClean-
ingCheck
Lubri-cation
Replacement
1Prepara-
tions
(1) Paper through check
2Convey-
ance
(1) Conveyance roller Cleaning pad/drum cleaner
3Drive (1) Main drive unit
( )Plus guard No.2 *1
(2) Tray up/down drive unit( )
Plus guard No.2 *1
(3) Shift drive unit( )
Plus guard No.2 *1
(4) Paper exit drive section( )
Plus guard No.2 *1
(5) Staple unit( )
Plus guard No.2 *1
(6) Folding unit ( )
4 Folding (1) Folding roller
5Stapler (1) Staple check Actual durable
count: 5,000
6 Exterior (1) Exterior cleaning
7Final check (1) Paper through check Stapler
positioning jig
*1 If abnormal sound is heard due to insufficient oil, lubricate it.
No.Classifica-
tionService item Quantity
Implementation classificationMaterials•Tools usedClean-
ingCheck
Lubri-cation
Replacement
1Convey-
ance
(1) Conveyance roller Cleaning pad/drum cleaner
2Paper feed (1) Feed roller Cleaning pad/
drum cleaner
(2) Paper feed conveyance roller
Cleaning pad/drum cleaner
(3) Double feed prevention roller
Cleaning pad/drum cleaner
3 Final check (1) Paper through check
(2) Exterior cleaning Cleaning pad/drum cleaner
CF5001 Field Service Ver.1.0 Sep 2003 SERVICE SCHEDULE
4-7
IV S
ER
VIC
E
G. PK-5 (Every 100,000 copies/prints)
H. TMG-3 (Every 100,000 copies/prints)
No.Classifica-
tionService item Quantity
Implementation classificationMaterials•Tools usedClean-
ingCheck
Lubri-cation
Replacement
1 Punch unit (1) Punch die Blower brush
2 Punch scraps section
(1) Punch scraps dump
(2) Punch scraps full sensor Blower brush
3 Final check (1) Paper through check
(2) Interior cleaning Cleaning pad/drum cleaner
No.Classifica-
tionService item Quantity
Implementation classificationMaterials•Tools usedClean-
ingCheck
Lubri-cation
Replacement
1Convey-
ance
(1) Conveyance roller Cleaning pad/drum cleaner
(2) Conveyance belt
2Trimmer (1) Trimmer blade /U Cleaning pad/
drum cleaner
(2) Trimmer blade /L
(3) Trimming box and its periphery
3Stacker (1) Pusher section
( )Plus guard No.2 *1
(2) Stacker section( )
Plus guard No.2 *1
4 Drive (1) Conveyance drive section
5 Final check (1) Paper through check
(2) Exterior cleaning Cleaning pad/drum cleaner
*1 If abnormal sound is heard due to insufficient oil, lubricate it.
SERVICE SCHEDULE CF5001 Field Service Ver.1.0 Sep 2003
4-8
IV S
ER
VIC
E
1.3 Periodic check items (main body)
A. Periodic check (I) (Every 200,000 copies/prints)
B. Periodic check (II) (Every 400,000 copies/prints)
No.Classifica-
tionService item Quantity
Implementation classificationMaterials•Tools usedClean-
ingCheck
Lubri-cation
Replacement
1Charging corona
(1) Changing grid plate4
(2) Changing grid spring 8
2Transfer belt
(1) 1st transfer roller /K25 mode count reset
1*1
(2) 1st transfer roller /C25 mode count reset
31
(3) 2nd transfer roller /U 1
(4) Belt drive roller cleaning Hydro wipe/drum cleaner
(5) Transfer belt 1
(6) Toner collection sheet /1 1
32nd trans-
fer
(1) 2nd transfer roller /L1
4Fixing (1) Fixing cleaning unit
25 mode count reset1
*2
*1 Reset "5. Parts counter" and "1. Count of special parts" to prevent a image disturbances in the 25
mode when replacing the 1st transfer roller /Y/M/C/K.
*2 Reset "5. Parts counter" and "1. Count of special parts" in the 25 mod when replacing the fixing clean-
ing unit. Otherwise, the message "You need to replace the fixing cleaning unit. Please call the service."
appears and the copy/print prohibition state is started.
No.Classifica-
tionService item Quantity
Implementation classificationMaterials•Tools usedClean-
ingCheck
Lubri-cation
Replacement
1
Paper feed (1) Feed rubber (tray/1, /2, /3)
3Actual durable count: 125,000
(2) Double feed prevention rubber (tray/1, /2, /3)
3Actual durable count: 125,000
CF5001 Field Service Ver.1.0 Sep 2003 SERVICE SCHEDULE
4-9
IV S
ER
VIC
E
C. Periodic check (III) (Every 600,000 copies/prints)
D. Periodic check (IV) (Every 1,000,000 copies/prints)
E. Periodic check (V) (Every 1,500,000 copies/prints)
No.Classifica-
tionService item Quantity
Implementation classificationMaterials•Tools usedClean-
ingCheck
Lubri-cation
Replacement
1Charging corona
(1) Charging corona dust-proof filter
1
2Developer (1) Developing unit /Y, /M, /C, /
K4
3Transfer belt
(1) Transfer belt separation claw
3
(2) Belt cleaning brush unit 1
4Registra-
tion
(1) Registration cleaning sheet 1
5 Fixing (1) Ball bearing /U 2
(2) Ball bearing /L 2
(3) Heat insulating sleeve /U2
Multemp FF-RM (or Solvest 240)
(4) Heat insulating sleeve /L2
Multemp FF-RM (or Solvest 240)
(5) Fixing torque limiter 1
No.Classifica-
tionService item
Quantity Implementation classificationMaterials•Tools usedClean-
ingCheck
Lubri-cation
Replacement
1Fixing (1) Fixing drive gear
1Multemp FF-RM (or Solvest 240)
22nd trans-
fer
(1) Transfer ground plate unit1
No.Classifica-
tionService item Quantity
Implementation classificationMaterials•Tools usedClean-
ingCheck
Lubri-cation
Replacement
1Registra-
tion
(1) Registration roller1
2Transfer belt
(1) Separation claw solenoid1
3ADU (1) Feed rubber /BP
1Actual durable count: 125,000
(2) Double feed prevention rubber /BP
1Actual durable count: 125,000
SERVICE SCHEDULE CF5001 Field Service Ver.1.0 Sep 2003
4-10
IV S
ER
VIC
E
F. Periodic check (VI) (Every 2,000,000 copies/prints)
G. Periodic check (VII) (Every 2,500,000 copies/prints)
No.Classifica-
tionService item Quantity
Implementation classificationMaterials•Tools usedClean-
ingCheck
Lubri-cation
Replacement
1Vertical convey-ance
(1) Intermediate conveyance clutch /1 1
Actual durable count: 2,000,000
2ADU (1) Intermediate conveyance
clutch /2 1Actual durable count: 2,000,000
(2) Intermediate conveyance clutch /3 1
Actual durable count: 2,000,000
No.Classifica-
tionService item Quantity
Implementation classificationMaterials•Tools usedClean-
ingCheck
Lubri-cation
Replacement
1 Fixing (1) Fixing upper lamp /1 1
(2) Fixing upper lamp /2 1
(3) Fixing lower lamp 1
(4) Fixing temperature sensor /3
1
(5) Fixing temperature sensor /4
1
2Paper feed (1) Paper feed roller
(tray/1, /2, /3)3
Actual durable count: 800,000
CF5001 Field Service Ver.1.0 Sep 2003 SERVICE SCHEDULE
4-11
IV S
ER
VIC
E
H. Periodic check (VIII) (Every 4,000,000 copies/prints)
1.4 Periodic check items (AFR-20)
A. Periodic check (I) (Every 1,800,000 copies/prints)
No.Classifica-
tionService item Quantity
Implementation classificationMaterials•Tools usedClean-
ingCheck
Lubri-cation
Replacement
1Paper feed (1) Paper feed clutch
(tray/1, /2, /3) 3Actual durable count: 2,000,000
(2) Pre-registration clutch (tray/1, /2, /3) 3
Actual durable count: 2,000,000
2ADU (1) ADU conveyance clutch /1
1Actual durable count: 2,000,000
(2) ADU conveyance clutch /21
Actual durable count: 2,000,000
(3) ADU pre-registration clutch 1
Actual durable count: 2,000,000
(4) Paper feed roller /BP1
Actual durable count: 800,000
(5) Paper feed clutch /BP1
Actual durable count: 2,000,000
No.Classifica-
tionService item Quantity
Implementation classificationMaterials•Tools usedClean-
ingCheck
Lubri-cation
Replacement
1Paper feed (1) Paper feed roller
1Actual durable count: 625,000
(2) Feed roller1
Actual durable count: 625,000
(3) Double feed prevention roller
1Actual durable count: 625,000
SERVICE SCHEDULE CF5001 Field Service Ver.1.0 Sep 2003
4-12
IV S
ER
VIC
E
1.5 Periodic check items (C-208)
A. Periodic check (I) (Every 600,000 copies/prints)
B. Periodic check (II) (Every 2,500,000 copies/prints)
No.Classifica-
tionService item Quantity
Implementation classificationMaterials•Tools usedClean-
ingCheck
Lubri-cation
Replacement
1Paper feed (1) Paper feed roller
1Actual durable count: 500,000
(2) Feed roller1
Actual durable count: 500,000
(3) Double feed prevention roller
1Actual durable count: 500,000
No.Classifica-
tionService item Quantity
Implementation classificationMaterials•Tools usedClean-
ingCheck
Lubri-cation
Replacement
1Paper feed (1) Paper feed clutch
1Actual durable count: 2,000,000
(2) Pre-registration clutch1
Actual durable count: 2,000,000
CF5001 Field Service Ver.1.0 Sep 2003 SERVICE SCHEDULE
4-13
IV S
ER
VIC
E
1.6 Periodic check items (FN-120/FN-9)
A. Periodic check (I) (Every 200,000 copies/prints)
B. Periodic check (II) (Every 400,000 copies/prints)
C. Periodic check (III) (Every 1,000,000 copies/prints)
D. Periodic check (IV) (Every 2,500,000 copies/prints)
No.Classifica-
tionService item Quantity
Implementation classificationMaterials•Tools usedClean-
ingCheck
Lubri-cation
Replacement
1Convey-
ance
(1) Paper exit roller /A (sponge roller) 10
Actual durable count: 200,000
(2) Intermediate conveyance roller /4 (sponge roller)
4Actual durable count: 200,000
No.Classifica-
tionService item Quantity
Implementation classificationMaterials•Tools usedClean-
ingCheck
Lubri-cation
Replacement
1Convey-
ance
(1) Stack assist roller (sponge roller) 1
No.Classifica-
tionService item Quantity
Implementation classificationMaterials•Tools usedClean-
ingCheck
Lubri-cation
Replacement
1
Stapler (1) Stapler unit
2
Stapler positioning jigActual durable count: 200,000
No.Classifica-
tionService item Quantity
Implementation classificationMaterials•Tools usedClean-
ingCheck
Lubri-cation
Replacement
1Drive (1) FNS up/down motor
1Actual durable count: 2,500,000
SERVICE SCHEDULE CF5001 Field Service Ver.1.0 Sep 2003
4-14
IV S
ER
VIC
E
1.7 Periodic check items (Cover Inserter D)
A. Periodic check (I) (Every 500,000 copies/prints)
B. Periodic check (II) (Every 1,000,000 copies/prints)
C. Periodic check (III) (Every 3,000,000 copies/prints)0
1.8 Periodic check items (TMG-3)
A. Periodic check (I) (Every 4,000,000 copies/prints)
No.Classifica-
tionService item Quantity
Implementation classificationMaterials•Tools usedClean-
ingCheck
Lubri-cation
Replacement
1Paper feed (1) Feed roller assembly /B
2Actual durable count: 100,000
(2) Double feed prevention roller assembly
2Actual durable count: 100,000
No.Classifica-
tionService item Quantity
Implementation classificationMaterials•Tools usedClean-
ingCheck
Lubri-cation
Replacement
1Paper feed (1) Feed roller assembly /A
2Actual durable count: 200,000
No. Classification Service item QuantityImplementation classification
Materials•Tools usedClean-
ingCheck
Lubri-cation
Replacement
1Paper feed (1) Torque limiter
2Actual durable count: 600,000
No. Classification Service item QuantityImplementation classification
Materials•Tools usedClean-
ingCheck
Lubri-cation
Replacement
1Trimmer (1) Trimmer blade /U
1Actual durable count: 500,000
(2) Trimmer blade /L1
Actual durable count: 500,000
CF5001 Field Service Ver.1.0 Sep 2003 SERVICE SCHEDULE
4-15
IV S
ER
VIC
E
1.9 Replacement parts list
Note:
• No. in this list is identical with No. in "5. Parts counter" and "1. Count of special parts" in the 25
mode.
No. Unit Parts name QuantityActual durable
count
001 Toner correction Toner collection box 1 50,000
002 Main body Ozone filter /1 1 100,000
004 Dust proof filter /1 2 100,000
005 Dust proof filter /2 1 100,000
006 Charging corona Charging corona dust-proof filter 1 600,000
007 Drum Drum cartridge /Y 1 100,000
012 Drum cartridge /M 1 100,000
017 Drum cartridge /C 1 100,000
022 Drum cartridge /K 1 100,000
028 Charging corona Charging wire assy /Y 1 100,000
029 Charging grid plate /Y 1 200,000
031 Charging wire assy /M 1 100,000
032 Charging grid plate /M 1 200,000
034 Charging wire assy /C 1 100,000
034 Charging grid plate /C 1 200,000
037 Charging wire assy /K 1 100,000
038 Charging grid plate /K 1 200,000
— Charging grid spring 8 200,000
040 Transfer belt Transfer belt 1 200,000
041 1st transfer roller /Y 1 200,000
042 1st transfer roller /M 1 200,000
043 1st transfer roller /C 1 200,000
044 1st transfer roller /K 1 200,000
045 2nd transfer roller /U 1 200,000
046 Transfer belt separation claw 3 600,000
048 Belt cleaning brush unit 1 600,000
049 Toner collection sheet /1 1 200,000
050 Belt cleaning blade 1 100,000
051 2nd transfer 2nd transfer roller /L 1 200,000
052 ADU Separation Discharging board unit 1 100,000
053 Fixing Fixing cleaning unit 1 200,000
054 Fixing roller /U 1 100,000
055 Fixing roller /L 1 100,000
SERVICE SCHEDULE CF5001 Field Service Ver.1.0 Sep 2003
4-16
IV S
ER
VIC
E
056 Developing Developer /Y 1 100,000
057 Developer /M 1 100,000
058 Developer /C 1 100,000
059 Developer /K 1 100,000
060 Developing unit /Y (color label included) 1 600,000
061 Developing unit /M (color label included) 1 600,000
062 Developing unit /C (color label included) 1 600,000
063 Developing unit /K (color label included) 1 600,000
069 FN-120/FN-9 FNS up/down unit 1 2,500,000
070 Stapler unit 1 200,000
071 Stapler unit 1 200,000
— Staple 1 5000
— Staple 1 5000
108 Paper exit roller /A (sponge roller) 10 200,000
109 Intermediate conveyance roller (sponge roller) 4 200,000
110 Stacking assist roller (sponge roller) 1 400,000
078 Cover Inserter D Feed roller assembly /A 1 200,000
079 Feed roller assembly /B 1 100,000
080 Double feed prevention roller assembly 1 100,000
081 Torque limiter 1 600,000
083 Feed roller assembly /A 1 200,000
084 Feed roller assembly /B 1 100,000
085 Double feed prevention roller assembly 1 100,000
086 Torque limiter 1 600,000
087 TMG-3 Trimmer blade /U 1 500,000
087 Trimmer blade /L 1 500,000
092 AFR-20 Paper feed roller 1 625,000
093 Feed roller 1 625,000
095 Double feed prevention roller 1 625,000
113 Registration Registration cleaning sheet 1 600,000
112 Fixing unit Fixing torque limiter 1 600,000
114 Ball bearing /U (for upper roller) 2 600,000
115 Heat insulating sleeve /U (for upper roller) 2 600,000
116 Vertical conveyance Intermediate conveyance clutch /1 1 2,000,000
117 ADU Intermediate conveyance clutch /2 1 2,000,000
118 Intermediate conveyance clutch /3 1 2,000,000
No. Unit Parts name QuantityActual durable
count
CF5001 Field Service Ver.1.0 Sep 2003 SERVICE SCHEDULE
4-17
IV S
ER
VIC
E
119 Main body paper feed Paper feed rubber /1 1 125,000
119 Double feed prevention rubber /1 1 125,000
120 Paper feed rubber /2 1 125,000
120 Double feed prevention rubber /2 1 125,000
121 Paper feed rubber /3 1 125,000
121 Double feed prevention rubber /3 1 125,000
122 Paper feed rubber /BP 1 125,000
122 Double feed prevention rubber /BP 1 125,000
130 Paper feed roller /1 1 800,000
131 Paper feed roller /2 1 800,000
132 Paper feed roller /3 1 800,000
133 Paper feed roller (By-pass) 1 800,000
123 Registration Registration roller 1 1,500,000
124 Transfer belt Separation claw solenoid 1 1,500,000
125 Fixing Fixing upper lamp /1 1 2,500,000
126 Fixing upper lamp /2 1 2,500,000
127 Fixing lower lamp 1 2,500,000
128 Fixing temperature sensor /3 1 2,500,000
129 Fixing temperature sensor /4 1 2,500,000
134 ADU ADU conveyance clutch /1 1 2,000,000
135 ADU conveyance clutch /2 1 2,000,000
136 ADU pre-registration clutch 1 2,000,000
137 Fixing Ball bearing /L (for lower roller) 2 600,000
138 Heat insulating sleeve/L (for lower roller) 2 600,000
139 Fixing drive gear 1 1,000,000
140 Reverse/exit unit Decurler roller 1 100,000
141 C-208 Paper feed roller 1 500,000
142Feed roller 1 500,000
Double feed prevention roller 1 500,000
143 Paper feed clutch 1 2,000,000
144 Pre-registration clutch 1 2,000,000
145 Main body paper feed Paper feed clutch /1 1 2,000,000
146 Pre-registration clutch /1 1 2,000,000
147 Paper feed clutch /2 1 2,000,000
148 Pre-registration clutch /2 1 2,000,000
149 Paper feed clutch /3 1 2,000,000
150 Pre-registration clutch /3 1 2,000,000
151 Paper feed clutch /BP 1 2,000,000
152 2nd transfer Transfer ground plate unit 1 1,000,000
No. Unit Parts name QuantityActual durable
count
SERVICE SCHEDULE CF5001 Field Service Ver.1.0 Sep 2003
4-18
IV S
ER
VIC
E
1.10 Important maintenance parts
• The important parts specified by Minolta in order
to maintain safety of the products are referred to
as "important maintenance parts". The important
maintenance parts for this machine are as
described below:
No. Unit Parts name Quantity
1 Fixing unit Thermostat /1 1
2 Fixing unit Thermostat /L 1
CF5001 Field Service Ver.1.0 Sep 2003 COPY MATERIAL
4-19
IV S
ER
VIC
E
2. COPY MATERIAL
2.1 Product
A. Drum cartridge
2.2 Materials
A. Single unit supply
B. Kit
a Developer black set
b Developer yellow set
c Developer magenta set
d Developer cyan set
Drum
Toner black
Toner yellow
Toner magenta
Toner cyan
Developer black
Developer charging funnel/U
Developer collection sheet (rubber band)
Developer yellow
Developer charging funnel/U
Developer collection sheet (rubber band)
Developer magenta
Developer charging funnel/U
Developer collection sheet (rubber band)
Developer cyan
Developer charging funnel/U
Developer collection sheet (rubber band)
COPY MATERIAL CF5001 Field Service Ver.1.0 Sep 2003
4-20
IV S
ER
VIC
E
2.3 PM parts kit
A. 100,000 copies/1 set (total)
B. 200,000 copies/1set (total)
NameQuantity
North America Europe
Toner collecting box assy 2 1
Ozone filter /1 1 1
Dust proof filter /1 2 2
Dust proof filter /2 1 1
Belt cleaning blade 1 1
Separation corona unit 1 1
Fixing roller /U 1 1
Fixing roller /L 1 1
Decurler roller 1 1
Charging wire assy 4 4
Paper for fixing speed adjustment (16 sheets/A3)
1 1
Dust bag (rubber band) - 1
Hand case for collection - 1
Cotton swab (x4) - 1
Hydro wipe (x10) - 1
NameQuantity
*All area
Transfer belt 1
1st transfer roller /K 1
1st transfer roller /Y, /M, /C 3
Toner collection sheet /1 1
2nd transfer roller /U 1
2nd transfer roller /L 1
Fixing cleaning unit 1
Changing grid plate 4
Changing grid spring 8
CF5001 Field Service Ver.1.0 Sep 2003 SERVICE MATERIAL LIST
4-21
IV S
ER
VIC
E
3. SERVICE MATERIAL LIST
Material No. Name Shape Remark
4014-5007-01 Setting powder
25g
Multemp grease
FF-RM 25g
Solvest 240 Multemp FF-RM is
recommended
Plasguard No.2
CE TOOLS LIST CF5001 Field Service Ver.1.0 Sep 2003
4-22
IV S
ER
VIC
E
4. CE TOOLS LISTTool No. Name Shape Quantity Remark
4969-1885-01 Fixing thermostat positioning jig
(for upper roller) 1
4969-1886-01 Fixing thermostat positioning jig
(for lower roller) 1
4014-5005-01 Mirror positioning jig
2
4014-5006-01 Door switch jig
1
4969-1887-01 Color chart (metric)
1
4969-1888-01 Color chart (inch)
1
4024-2153-01 New Pyramid chart
1
4014-5010-01 Adjustment chart
1
4014-5009-01 Stapler positioning jig
1
For adjusting
FN-120/FN-9
CF5001 Field Service Ver.1.0 Sep 2003 JAM CODE LIST
5-1
V
CO
DE
LIS
T
V CODE LIST
1. JAM CODE LIST
Classifi-cation
Jam code
Causes Resultingoperation
Correction
By-pass feed
J10-01D
urin
g op
erat
ion After the pickup solenoid /BP (SD5) is
turned ON, by-pass feed feeder sensor (PS26) is not turned ON within the specified time.
If copy is pro-gressing when jam arises, main body stops after completion of paper exit.
Remove the paper from the by-pass feed tray once and remove jammed paper, if any.
J10-02 After no paper sensor /BP (PS47) is turned ON, tray up drive motor /BP (M35) is not turned ON within specified time.
Remove paper from the by-pass feed tray once, decrease the stacked sheets and set again.J10-03 After the tray up drive motor /BP (M35)
is turned ON, tray upper limit sensor /BP (PS25) is not turned ON within specified time.
J10-11
Whe
n id
ling By-pass feed conveyance sensor
(PS26) was turned ON in the idling con-dition.
— Remove the paper from the by-pass feed tray once and remove jammed paper, if any.
Paper feed tray /1
J11-01
Dur
ing
oper
atio
n After the pick-up solenoid /1 (SD7) is turned ON, pre-registration sensor /1 (PS29) is not turned ON within the specified time.
If copy is pro-gressing when jam arises, main body stops after completion of paper exit.
Pull out the paper feed tray /1 and remove jammed paper, if any.
J11-11
Whe
n id
ling Pre-registration sensor /1 (PS29) was
turned ON in the idling condition.—
Paper feed tray /2
J12-01
Dur
ing
oper
atio
n After pick-up solenoid /2 (SD8) is turned ON, pre-registration sensor /2 (PS35) is not turned ON within speci-fied time.
If copy is pro-gressing when jam arises, main body stops after completion of paper exit.
Pull out the paper feed tray /2 and remove jammed paper, if any.
J12-11
Whe
n id
ling Pre-registration sensor /2 (PS35) was
turned ON in the idling condition.—
JAM CODE LIST CF5001 Field Service Ver.1.0 Sep 2003
5-2
V
CO
DE
LIS
T
Paper feed tray /3
J13-01
Dur
ing
oper
atio
n After the pick-up solenoid /3 (SD9) is turned ON, pre-registration sensor /3 (PS41) is not turned ON.
If copy is pro-gressing when jam arises, main body stops after completion of paper exit.
Pull out the paper feed tray /3 and remove jammed paper, if any.
J13-11
Whe
n id
ling Pre-registration sensor /3 (PS41) was
turned ON in the idling condition.—
C-208 J14-01
Dur
ing
oper
atio
n After the paper feed solenoid (SD100) is turned ON, paper feed sensor (PS107) is not turned ON within speci-fied time.
If copy is pro-gressing when jam arises, main body stops after completion of paper exit.
Open the LCT top cover and remove jammed paper, if any.
J14-11
Whe
n id
ling Feed sensor (PS106) was turned ON in
the idling condition.—
Paper feed
J17-01
Dur
ing
oper
atio
n After the loop roller motor (M31) is turned ON, registration sensor (PS22) is not turned ON within specified time.
If copy is pro-gressing when jam arises, main body stops after completion of paper exit.
Pull out ADU and remove jammed paper, if any.
J17-02 After the ADU pre-registration clutch (MC3) is turned ON, registration sensor (PS22) is not turned ON within the specified time.
Printer section stops immedi-ately.
J17-03 After the pre-registration clutch /3 (MC12) is turned ON, vertical convey-ance sensor (PS50) is not turned ON within specified time.
If copy is pro-gressing when jam arises, main body stops after completion of paper exit.
Open the vertical con-veyance door and remove jammed paper, if any.
J17-04 After the pre-registration clutch /2 (MC10) is turned ON, vertical convey-ance sensor (PS50) is not turned ON within specified time.
Pull out the paper feed tray /2 and remove jammed paper, if any.
Classifi-cation
Jam code
Causes Resultingoperation
Correction
CF5001 Field Service Ver.1.0 Sep 2003 JAM CODE LIST
5-3
V
CO
DE
LIS
T
Paper feed
J17-05
Dur
ing
oper
atio
n After the intermediate conveyance clutch /1 (MC13) is turned ON, interme-diate conveyance sensor /1 (PS27) is not turned ON within the specified time.
If copy is pro-gressing when jam arises, main body stops after completion of paper exit.
Open the vertical con-veyance door and remove jammed paper, if any.
J17-06 After the pre-registration clutch /1 (MC7) is turned ON, intermediate con-veyance sensor /1 (PS27) is not turned ON within the specified time.
J17-07 After the pre-registration clutch (MC102) is turned ON, intermediate conveyance sensor /1 (PS27) is not turned ON within the specified time.
Open the LCT front door and remove jammed paper, if any.
J17-08 After the intermediate conveyance sen-sor /1 (PS27) is turned ON, intermedi-ate conveyance sensor /2 (PS28) is not turned ON within specified time.
Pull out ADU and remove jammed paper, if any.
J17-09 After the by-pass feed conveyance sen-sor (PS26) is turned ON, the intermedi-ate conveyance sensor /2 (PS28) is not turned ON within the specified time.
Remove paper from the by-pass feed tray and remove jammed paper, if any.
C-208 J17-10 After the pre-registration clutch (MC102) is turned ON, paper feed sen-sor (PS107) is not turned ON within the specified time.
Open the LCT top cover and remove jammed paper, if any.
Paper feed
J17-11
Whe
n id
ling Vertical conveyance sensor (PS50) was
turned ON in the idling condition.— Open the vertical con-
veyance door and remove jammed paper, if any.
J17-12 Intermediate conveyance sensor /1 (PS27) was turned ON in the idling con-dition.
Pull out ADU and remove jammed paper, if any.
J17-13 Intermediate conveyance sensor /2 (PS28) was turned ON in the idling con-dition.
J17-14 Registration sensor (OS22) was turned in the idling condition.
C-208 J17-15 Paper feed sensor (PS107) was turned ON in the idling condition.
Open the LCT front door and remove jammed paper, if any.
Classifi-cation
Jam code
Causes Resultingoperation
Correction
JAM CODE LIST CF5001 Field Service Ver.1.0 Sep 2003
5-4
V
CO
DE
LIS
T
Others J19-01
Dur
ing
oper
atio
n Vertical conveyance door open jam. Vertical conveyance door sensor (PS51) was turned OFF when copying /printing.
If copy is pro-gressing when jam arises, main body stops after completion of paper exit.
Close the vertical con-veyance door.
OthersC-208
J19-02 LCT top cover open jam or LCT front door open jam. Top cover open/close sensor (PS100) or front door open/close sensor (PS115) was turned OFF when copying/printing.
In case of LCT paper feed, main body stops after completion of paper exit. In case of paper feed other than LCT, main body does not stop.
Close the LCT top cover or LCT front door.
Paper exit
J31-02 After the registration roller motor (M30) is turned ON, fixing paper exit sensor (PS17) is not turned ON.
Printer section stops immedi-ately.
Pull out ADU and remove jammed paper, if any.
J32-01 After the fixing paper exit sensor (PS17) is turned ON, paper exit sensor (PS13) is not turned ON within the specified time.
J32-02 After the fixing paper exit sensor (PS17) is turned ON, reverse paper exit sensor (PS19) is not turned ON within the specified time.
J32-03 In the reverse paper exit mode, after the reverse paper exit sensor (PS19) is turned ON, paper exit sensor (PS13) is not turned ON within the specified time.
J32-04 After the fixing paper exit sensor (PS17) is turned ON, it is not turned OFF within the specified time.
J32-05 After the paper exit sensor (PS13) is turned ON, it is not turned OFF within the specified time (in straight paper exit mode).
J32-07 After the paper exit sensor (PS13) is turned ON, it is not turned OFF within the specified time (in reverse paper exit mode).
J32-08 When the registration roller motor (M30) is ON, fixing paper exit sensor (PS17) is ON.
Paper exit
J32-11
Whe
n id
ling Paper exit sensor (PS13) is ON in the
idling condition.— Pull out ADU and
remove jammed paper, if any.J32-12 Fixing paper exit sensor (PS17) is
turned ON in the idling condition.
J32-13 Reverse paper exit sensor (PS19) is ON in the idling condition.
Classifi-cation
Jam code
Causes Resultingoperation
Correction
CF5001 Field Service Ver.1.0 Sep 2003 JAM CODE LIST
5-5
V
CO
DE
LIS
T
Others J51-01
Dur
ing
oper
atio
n Front door open jam. Front door open/close sensor (PS18) was turned OFF while copying/printing.
Printer section stops immedi-ately.
Close the front door.
AFR-20 J61-01 Paper feed section cover open jam. Paper feed cover sensor (PS303) was turned OFF when copying.
RADF stops immediately.If there is paper in or after trans-fer process, main body stops after paper exit.
Close the paper feed section cover.
J61-02 Paper feed tray open jam. Tray open/close sensor (PS308) was turned OFF when copying.
Close the paper feed tray.
J61-03 Paper exit section cover open jam. Paper exit cover sensor (PS307) was turned OFF when copying.
Close the paper exit section cover.
J62-01 Registration sensor (PS301) is not turned OFF within specified time after paper feed is started.
Open the paper feed section cover and remove jammed paper, if any.Remove jammed paper in the main body conveyance sec-tion, if any.
J62-02 After reversal of paper feed motor (M301) is started, timing sensor (PS302) is not turned ON within the specified time.
J62-03 After the timing sensor (PS302) is turned ON, it is not turned OFF within the specified time.
J62-04 After the reverse/paper exit motor (M303) is turned ON, reverse sensor (PS305) is not turned ON within the specified time.
Open the paper exit section cover and remove jammed paper, if any.Remove jammed paper in the main body conveyance sec-tion, if any.
J62-05 After the reverse sensor (PS305) is turned ON, it is not turned OFF within the specified time.
J62-06 In the one-sided original exit mode, paper exit sensor (PS306) is not turned ON within the specified time after the start of paper exit.In the double-sided original exit mode, original exit sensor (PS306) is not turned ON within the specified time after the reverse sensor (PS305) is turned ON.
Classifi-cation
Jam code
Causes Resultingoperation
Correction
JAM CODE LIST CF5001 Field Service Ver.1.0 Sep 2003
5-6
V
CO
DE
LIS
T
AFR-20 J62-07
Dur
ing
oper
atio
n After the paper exit sensor (PS306) is turned ON, it is not turned OFF within the specified time.
RADF stops immediately.If there is paper in or after trans-fer process, main body stops after paper exit.
Open the paper exit section cover and remove jammed paper, if any.Remove jammed paper in the main body conveyance sec-tion, if any.
J65-01
Whe
n id
ling Registration sensor (PS301) is ON in
the idling condition.— Open the paper feed
section cover and remove jammed paper, if any.
J65-02 Reverse sensor (PS305) is ON in the idling condition.
Open the paper exit section cover and remove jammed paper, if any.
J65-03 Timing sensor (PS302) is ON in the idling condition.
Open the paper feed section cover and remove jammed paper, if any.
J65-04 Paper exit sensor (PS306) is ON in the idling condition.
Open the paper exit section cover and remove jammed paper, if any.
OthersFN-120FN-9
J71-01
Dur
ing
oper
atio
n FNS front door open jam. FNS interlock switch (MS701) was turned OFF when copying/printing.
Printer section stops immedi-ately.
Close the FNS front door.
OthersTMG-3
J71-02 TU front door open jam. Front door MS2 (MS2) was turned OFF when copying/printing.
Close the TU front door.
FN-120FN-9
J72-16 After the paper exit sensor (PS13) is turned ON, FNS inlet sensor (PS704) is not turned ON within the specified time.
FNS/main body stop immedi-ately.
Remove jammed paper in the FNS/main body, if any.
J72-17 After the FNS inlet sensor (PS704) is turned ON, main tray paper exit sensor (PS706) is not turned ON within the specified time.
J72-18 After the FNS inlet sensor (PS704) is turned ON, stacker inlet sensor (PS705) is not turned ON within the specified time (when stapling).
Classifi-cation
Jam code
Causes Resultingoperation
Correction
CF5001 Field Service Ver.1.0 Sep 2003 JAM CODE LIST
5-7
V
CO
DE
LIS
T
FN-120FN-9
J72-19
Dur
ing
oper
atio
n After the stacker inlet motor (M713) is turned ON, stacker inlet sensor (PS705) is not turned ON within the specified time.
FNS/main body stop immedi-ately.
Remove jammed paper in the FNS/main body, if any.
J72-20 After paper exit operation is started, main tray paper exit sensor (PS706) is not turned ON within the specified time (when stapling).
J72-21 After the main tray paper exit sensor (PS706) is turned ON, it is not turned OFF within the specified time (in the large-size staple mode).
J72-22 After the FNS inlet sensor (PS704) is turned ON, sub-tray paper exit sensor (PS701) is not turned ON within the specified time within the specified time (in the sub-tray paper exit mode).
J72-23 After the sub-tray paper exit sensor (PS701) is turned ON, it is not turned OFF within the specified time (in the large-size staple mode).
J72-24 After completion of stapling, folding passage sensor (PS726) is not turned ON.
J72-25 After the folding knife motor (M719) is turned ON, folding paper exit sensor (PS725) is not turned ON within the specified time.
J72-26 After the folding paper exit sensor (PS725) is turned ON, it is not turned OFF within the specified time.
J72-28 After the stacker inlet sensor (PW705) is turned ON, it is not turned OFF within the specified time.
J72-29 After the main tray paper exit sensor (PS706) is turned ON, it is not turned OFF within the specified time (in the non-staple mode).
J72-30 After the main tray paper exit sensor (PS706) is turned ON, it is not turned OFF within the specified time (in the small-size staple mode).
Classifi-cation
Jam code
Causes Resultingoperation
Correction
JAM CODE LIST CF5001 Field Service Ver.1.0 Sep 2003
5-8
V
CO
DE
LIS
T
TMG-3 J72-32
Dur
ing
oper
atio
n After the folding paper exit sensor (PS725) is turned ON, inlet sensor (PS101) is not turned ON within the specified time.
TU/FNS/main body stop imme-diately.
Remove jammed paper in TU/FNS/main body, if any.
J72-33 After the inlet sensor (PS101) is turned ON, inlet sensor (PS101) is not turned ON within the specified time.
J72-34 After the conveyance motor (M101) is turned ON, paper exit sensor (PS108) is not turned OFF within the specified time.
Cover Inserter D
J72-35 After the conveyance clutch /L (MC202) is turned ON, PI passage sensor /L (PS206) is not turned ON within speci-fied time.
FNS/main body stop immedi-ately.
Remove jammed paper in the FNS/main body, if any.
PK-5 J72-43 After the punch motor (M801) is turned ON, punch HP sensor (PS801) is not turned ON within the specified time.
FN-120FN-9
J72-48 After the folding passage sensor (PS726) is turned ON, it is not turned OFF within the specified time.
Cover Inserter D
J72-49 After the conveyance clutch /U (MC201) is turned ON, PI passage sen-sor (PS201) is not turned ON within the specified time.
J72-50 After the PI passage sensor (PS201) is turned ON, FNS inlet sensor (PS704) is not turned ON within the specified time.
J72-51 After the PI passage sensor /L (PS206) is turned ON, FNS inlet sensor (PS704) is not turned ON within the specified time.
FN-120FN-9
J72-81 After the stapler motor /F (M714) and clincher motor /F (M715) are turned ON, stapler HP sensor /F (PS731) and clincher HP sensor /F (PS733) are not turned ON within specified time.
J72-82 After the stapler motor /R (M709) and clincher motor /R (M710) are turned ON, stapler HP sensor /R (PS730) and clincher HP sensor (PS732) are not turned ON within the specified time.
Classifi-cation
Jam code
Causes Resultingoperation
Correction
CF5001 Field Service Ver.1.0 Sep 2003 JAM CODE LIST
5-9
V
CO
DE
LIS
T
FN-120FN-9
J72-83
Dur
ing
oper
atio
n After the stapler motor /F, /R (M714), M709), and clincher motor /F, /R (M715, M710) are turned ON, stapler HP sen-sor /F, /R (PS731, PS730) and clincher HP sensor /F, /R (PS733, PS732) are not turned ON within the specified time.
FNS/main body stop immedi-ately.
Remove jammed paper in the FNS/main body, if any.
J72-90 After operation stop signal is transmit-ted from the main body to FNS, FNS does not stop within the specified time.
J73-01
Whe
n id
ling Main tray paper exit sensor (PS706) is
ON in the idling condition.— Open the FNS front
door and remove jammed paper, if any.J73-02 Stacker inlet sensor (PS705) is ON in
the idling condition.
J73-05 FNS inlet sensor (PS704) is ON in the idling condition.
J73-07 Sub-tray paper exit sensor (PS701) is ON in the idling condition.
Remove jammed paper in the sub-tray, if any.
J73-08 Stacker no-paper sensor (PS720) is ON in the idling condition.
Open the FNS front door and remove jammed paper, if any.J73-09 Folding passage sensor (PS726) is ON
in the idling condition.
J73-10 Folding paper exit sensor (PS725) is ON in the idling condition.
TMG-3 J73-11 Inlet sensor (PS101) is ON in the idling condition.
Open the TU front door and remove jammed paper, if any.J73-12 Conveyance sensor (PS102) is ON in
the idling condition.
J73-13 Paper exit sensor (PS108) is ON in the idling condition.
Cover Inserter D
J73-14 PI passage sensor (PS206) is ON in the idling condition.
Remove paper from the cover sheet feeder /L and remove jammed paper, if any.
J73-17 PI passage sensor /U (PS201) is ON in the idling condition.
Remove paper in the cover sheet feeder /U once and remove jammed paper, if any.
ADU J92-01
Dur
ing
oper
atio
n After the reverse paper exit sensor (PS19) is turned ON, ADU reverse sen-sor (PS21) is not turned ON within the specified time.
Printer section stops immedi-ately.
Pull out ADU and remove jammed paper, if any.
ADU J92-11
Whe
n id
ling ADU reverse sensor (PS21) is ON in
the idling condition.— Pull out ADU and
remove jammed paper, if any.
Classifi-cation
Jam code
Causes Resultingoperation
Correction
JAM CODE LIST CF5001 Field Service Ver.1.0 Sep 2003
5-10
V
CO
DE
LIS
T
J93-01
Dur
ing
oper
atio
n After reversal of ADU reverse motor (M32) is turned ON, ADU conveyance sensor (PS20) is not turned ON within the specified time.
Printer section stops immedi-ately.
J93-11
Whe
n id
ling ADU conveyance sensor (PS20) is ON
in the idling condition.—
J94-02
Dur
ing
oper
atio
n After the ADU conveyance sensor (PS20) is turned ON, ADU pre-registra-tion sensor (PS23) is not turned ON within the specified time.
Printer section stops immedi-ately.
J94-11
Whe
n id
ling ADU pre-registration sensor (PS23) is
ON in the idling condition.—
Classifi-cation
Jam code
Causes Resultingoperation
Correction
CF5001 Field Service Ver.1.0 Sep 2003 ERROR CODE LIST
5-11
V
CO
DE
LIS
T
2. ERROR CODE LIST
Note:
• In the F code area of warning codes, "Contact the Service Section" is indicated and in the E
code area, "Turn ON the power switch again" is indicated. On the actual LCD screen, all the indi-
cations are SC codes.
Classification Abnor-mality code
Causes Resulting operation
Estimated abnormal parts
Mai
n bo
dy
Commu-nication abnor-mality
F10-10 Communication abnormality between printer control board (PRCB) and LT drive board (LTDB)
Main body stops imme-diately and main relay (RL1) is turned OFF.
Printer control board (PRCB)LT drive board (LTDB)
Paper feed motor abnor-mality
F13-01 M41 abnormality detection sig-nal was continuoudly detected for the specified time when the paper feed motor (M41) was ON.
Printer control board (PRCB)Paper feed motor (M41)
C-2
08
LT paper feed motor abnor-mality
F13-02 M101 abnormality detection signal was continuously detected for the specified time when the paper feed motor (M101) was ON.
LT drive motor (LTDB)Paper feed motor (M101)
Mai
n bo
dy
Paper feed tray abnor-mality
F18-01 After the tray up/down motor /l (M40) is turned ON, tray upper limit sensor /1 (PS30) is not turned ON.
Printer control board (PRCB)Tray up/down motor /1 (M40)Tray upper limit sensor /1 (PS30)
F18-02 After the tray up/down motor /2 (M39) is turned ON, tray upper limit sensor /2 (PS38) is not turned ON.
Printer control board (PRCB)Tray upper limit motor /2 (M39)Tray upper limit sensor /2 (PS38)
F18-03 After the tray up/down motor /3 (M38) is turned ON, tray upper limit sensor /3 (PS42) is not turned ON.
Printer control board (PRCB)Tray upper limit motor /3 (M38)Tray upper limit sensor /3 (PS42)
F18-04 After the tray up/down motor /BP (M35) is turned ON, the tray upper limit sensor /BP (PS25) is not turned ON within the specified time.
Conveyance drive board (CVDB)Tray up/down motor /BP (M35)Tray upper limit sensor /BP (PS25)
C-2
08
LT up/down motor abnor-mality
F18-50 When the up/down motor (M100) was ON, M100 abnor-mality detection signal was continuously detected for the specified time.
Main body stops imme-diately and main relay (RL1) is turned OFF.
LT drive board (LTDB)UP/DOWN motor (M100)
ERROR CODE LIST CF5001 Field Service Ver.1.0 Sep 2003
5-12
V
CO
DE
LIS
T
C-2
08
LT up/down motor abnor-mality
F18-51 When the upper limit sensor (PS109) or lower limit sensor (PS101) is OFF, PS101 or PS109 is not turned ON within the specified time after the up/down motor (M100) is turned ON.
Main body stops imme-diately and main relay (RL1) is turned OFF.
LT drive board (LTDB)UP/DOWN motor (M100)Upper limit sensor (PS109)Lower limit sensor (PS101)
LT paper feed assist fan abnor-mality
F18-60 When the paper feed assist fan /R (M137) was ON, M137 abnormality detection signal was continuously detected for the specified time.
LT drive board (LTDB)Paper feed assist fan /R (M137)
F18-61 When the paper feed assist fan /F (M136) was ON, M136 abnormality detection signal was continuously detected for the specified time.
LT drive board (LTDB)Paper feed assist fan /F (M136)
LT power abnor-mality
F18-70 24VDC is not supplied to LCT. DC power unit /2 (DCPS2)LT drive board (LTDB)
F18-71 12VDC is not supplied to LCT. DC power unit /1 (DCPS1)LT drive board (LTDB)
Mai
n bo
dy
Commu-nication abnor-mality
F20-10 Communication abnormality between printer control board (PRCB) and drum drive board /Y (DRDB /Y) or drum drive board /M (DRDB /M).
Printer control board (PRCB)Drum drive board /Y (DRDB /Y)Drum drive board /M (DRDB /M)
F20-11 Communication abnormality between printer control board (PRCB) and drum drive board /C (DRDB /C) or drum drive board /K (DRDB /K).
Printer control board (PRCB)Drum drive board /C (DRDB /C)Drum drive board /K (DRDB /K)
F20-12 Communication abnormality between printer control board (PRCB) and transfer belt motor (M18)
Printer control board (PRCB)Transfer belt motor (M18)
Classification Abnor-mality code
Causes Resulting operation
Estimated abnormal parts
CF5001 Field Service Ver.1.0 Sep 2003 ERROR CODE LIST
5-13
V
CO
DE
LIS
T
Mai
n bo
dyPre-charging exposure lampabnor-mality
F21-01 Pre-charging exposure lamp /Y (PCL Y) set cannot be detected.
Main body stops imme-diately and main relay (RL1) is turned OFF.
Printer control board (PRCB)Pre-charging exposure lamp /Y (PCL Y)
F21-02 Pre-charging exposure lamp /M (PCL M) set cannot be detected.
Printer control board (PRCB)Pre-charging exposure lamp /M (PCL M)
F21-03 Pre-charging exposure lamp /C (PCL C) set cannot be detected.
Printer control board (PRCB)Pre-charging exposure lamp /C (PCL C)
F21-04 Pre-charging exposure lamp /K (PCL K) set cannot be detected.
Printer control board (PRCB)Pre-charging exposure lamp /K (PCL K)
Develop-ing motor abnor-mality
F23-01 When the developing motor /Y (M20) was ON, M20 abnormal-ity detection signal was contin-uously detected for the specified time.
Printer control board (PRCB)Developing motor /Y (M20)
F23-02 When the developing motor /M (M21) was ON, M21 abnormal-ity detection signal was contin-uously detected for the specified time.
Printer control board (PRCB)Developing motor /M (M21)
F23-03 When developing motor /C (M22) was ON, M22 abnormal-ity detection signal was contin-uously detected for the specified time.
Printer control board (PRCB)Developing motor /C (M22)
F23-04 When the developing motor /K (M23) was ON, M23 abnormal-ity detection signal was contin-uously detected for the specified time.
Printer control board (PRCB)Developing motor /K (M23)
Drum motor abnor-mality
F23-05 When the drum motor /Y (M14) was ON, M14 abnormality detection signal was continu-ously detected for the specified time.
Printer control board (PRCB)Drum drive board /Y (DRDB /Y)Drum motor /Y (M14)
F23-06 When the drum motor /M (M15) was ON, M15 abnormal-ity detection signal was contin-uously detected for the specified time.
Printer control board (PRCB)Drum drive board /M (DRDB /M)Drum motor /M (M15)
Classification Abnor-mality code
Causes Resulting operation
Estimated abnormal parts
ERROR CODE LIST CF5001 Field Service Ver.1.0 Sep 2003
5-14
V
CO
DE
LIS
T
Mai
n bo
dy
Drum motor abnor-mality
F23-07 When the drum motor /C (M16) was ON, M16 abnormality detection signal was continu-ously detected for the specified time.
Main body stops imme-diately and main relay (RL1) is turned OFF.
Printer control board (PRCB)Drum drive board /C (DRDB /C)Drum motor /C (M16)
F23-08 When drum motor /K (M17) was ON, M17 abnormality detection signal was continu-ously detected for the specified time.
Printer control board (PRCB)Drum drive board /K (DRDB /K)Drum motor /K (M17)
Transfer belt unit abnor-mality
F23-09 When the transfer belt motor (M18) was ON, M18 abnormal-ity detection signal was contin-uously detected for the specified time.
Printer control board (PRCB)Transfer belt motor (M18)
F23-10 When the 1st transfer HP sen-sor (PS15) is ON, PS15 is not turned OFF within the speci-fied time after the 1st transfer pressing/releasing motor (M19) is turned ON.When PS15 is OFF, PS15 is not turned ON within the speci-fied time after M19 is turned ON.
Printer control board (PRCB)1st transfer pressing/releasing motor (M19)1st transfer HP sensor (PS15)
Toner supply abnor-mality
F23-11 When either of the toner sup-ply motor /Y, /M, /C, /K (M49, M50, M51, or M52), toner bot-tle motor (M53), or toner bottle clutch /Y, /M, /C, /K (MC14, MC15, MC16, or MC17) was ON, either abnormality detec-tion signal was continuously detected for the specified time.
Printer control board (PRCB)Toner supply drive board (TSDB)Toner supply motor /Y (M49)Toner supply motor /M (M50)Toner supply motor /C (M51)Toner supply motor /K (M52)Toner bottle motor (M53)Toner bottle clutch /Y (MC14)Toner bottle clutch /M (MC15)Toner bottle clutch /C (MC16)Toner bottle clutch /K (MC17)
L detec-tion abnor-mality
F27-01 Output of toner density sensor /Y (TDS Y) cannot be con-trolled.
Printer control board (PRCB)Toner density sensor /Y (TDS Y)
F27-02 Output of toner density sensor /M (TDS M) cannot be con-trolled.
Printer control board (PRCB)Toner density sensor /M (TDS M)
F27-03 Output of toner density sensor /C (TDS C) cannot be con-trolled.
Printer control board (PRCB)Toner density sensor /C (TDS C)
Classification Abnor-mality code
Causes Resulting operation
Estimated abnormal parts
CF5001 Field Service Ver.1.0 Sep 2003 ERROR CODE LIST
5-15
V
CO
DE
LIS
T
Mai
n bo
dyL detec-tion abnor-mality
F27-04 Output of toner density sensor /K (TDS K) cannot be con-trolled.
Main body stops imme-diately and main relay (RL1) is turned OFF.
Printer control board (PRCB)Toner density sensor /K (TDS K)
High pressure unit abnor-mality
F28-01 When the charging /Y was ON, charging /Y abnormality detec-tion signal was continuously detected for the specified time.
High pressure unit /1 (HV1)
F28-02 When charging /M was ON, charging /M abnormality detec-tion signal was continuously detected for the specified time.
F28-03 When charging /C is ON, charging /C abnormality detec-tion signal was continuously detected for the specified time.
F28-04 When charging /K was ON, charging /K abnormality detec-tion signal was continuously detected for the specified time.
F29-01 When the primary transfer Y was ON, primary transfer Y abnormality detection signal was continuously detected for the specified time.
High pressure unit /2 (HV2)1st transfer roller
F29-02 When the primary transfer M was ON, primary transfer M abnormality detection signal was continuously detected for the specified time.
F29-03 When the primary transfer C was ON, primary transfer C abnormality detection signal was continuously detected for the specified time.
F29-04 When the primary transfer K was ON, primary transfer K abnormality detection signal was continuously detected for the specified time.
Classification Abnor-mality code
Causes Resulting operation
Estimated abnormal parts
ERROR CODE LIST CF5001 Field Service Ver.1.0 Sep 2003
5-16
V
CO
DE
LIS
T
Mai
n bo
dy
Process abnor-mality
F29-06 Gamma sensor (PS11) improperly adjusted while in the Dmax control.
Main body stops imme-diately and main relay (RL1) is turned OFF.
Printer control board (PRCB)Gamma sensor (PS11)
F29-07 Dmax control /Y resulted in an abnormality.
Printer control board (PRCB)Developing unit /YGamma sensor (PS11)
F29-08 Dmax control /M resulted in an abnormality.
Printer control board (PRCB)Developing unit /MGamma sensor (PS11)
F29-09 Dmax control /C resulted in an abnormality.
Printer control board (PRCB)Developing unit /CGamma sensor (PS11)
F29-10 Dmax control /K resulted in an abnormality.
Printer control board (PRCB)Developing unit /KGamma sensor (PS11)
F29-11 In charging potential control, drum surface potential /Y was out of specification.
Printer control board (PRCB)Drum potential sensor board /Y (DRPSB Y)Drum potential sensor /Y (DRPS Y)
F29-12 In charging potential control, drum surface potential /M was out of specification.
Printer control board (PRCB)Drum potential sensor board /M (DRPSB M)Drum potential sensor /M (DRPS M)
F29-13 In charging potential control, drum surface potential /C was out of specification.
Printer control board (PRCB)Drum potential sensor board /C (DRPSB C)Drum potential sensor /C (DRPS C)
F29-14 In charging potential control, drum surface potential /K was out of specification.
Printer control board (PRCB)Drum potential sensor board /K (DRPSB K)Drum potential sensor /K (DRPS K)
F29-15 Charging potential control /Y resulted in an abnormality.
Printer control board (PRCB)Drum potential sensor board /Y (DRPSB Y)Drum potential sensor /Y (DRPS Y)
F29-16 Charging potential control /M resulted in an abnormality.
Printer control board (PRCB)Drum potential sensor board /M (DRPSB M)Drum potential sensor /M (DRPS M)
Classification Abnor-mality code
Causes Resulting operation
Estimated abnormal parts
CF5001 Field Service Ver.1.0 Sep 2003 ERROR CODE LIST
5-17
V
CO
DE
LIS
T
Mai
n bo
dyProcess abnor-mality
F29-17 Charging potential control /C resulted in an abnormality.
Main body stops imme-diately and main relay (RL1) is turned OFF.
Printer control board (PRCB)Drum potential sensor board /C (DRPSB C)Drum potential sensor /C (DRPS C)
F29-18 Charging potential control /K resulted in an abnormality.
Printer control board (PRCB)Drum potential sensor board /K (DRPSB K)Drum potential sensor /K (DRPS K)
F29-19 Dot diameter adjustment con-trol /Y resulted in an abnormal-ity.
Printer control board (PRCB)Drum potential sensor board /Y (DRPSB Y)Drum potential sensor /Y (DRPS Y)
F29-20 Dot diameter adjustment con-trol /M resulted in an abnormal-ity.
Printer control board (PRCB)Drum potential sensor board /M (DRPSB M)Drum potential sensor /M (DRPS M)
F29-21 Dot diameter adjustment con-trol /C resulted in an abnormal-ity.
Printer control board (PRCB)Drum potential sensor board /C (DRPSB C)Drum potential sensor /C (DRPS C)
F29-22 Dot diameter adjustment con-trol /K resulted in an abnormal-ity.
Printer control board (PRCB)Drum potential sensor board /K (DRPSB K)Drum potential sensor /K (DRPS K)
F29-23 Gamma sensor (PS11) improperly adjusted while in the gamma correction control
Printer control board (PRCB)Gamma sensor (PS11)
F30-01 2nd transfer abnormality High voltage unit /2 (HU2)
F30-02 Separation abnormality High voltage unit /2 (HU2)
Motor abnor-mality
F30-10 ADU conveyance drive board communication abnormality
Conveyance drive board (CVDB)Printer control board (PRCB)
Fan abnor-mality
F32-01 When the fixing cooling fan /1 and /2 (M10, M36, M37) were ON, abnormality detection sig-nal of either of them was con-tinuously detected for the specified time.
Printer control board (PRCB)Fixing cooling fan /1 (M10)Fixing cooling fan /2 (M37)Fixing cooling fan /3 (M36)
F32-02 When the drum unit fan /3 (M47) was ON, M36 abnormal-ity detection signal was contin-uously detected for the specified time.
Printer control board (PRCB)Drum unit fan /3 (M47)Fixing cooling fan /3 (M36)
Classification Abnor-mality code
Causes Resulting operation
Estimated abnormal parts
ERROR CODE LIST CF5001 Field Service Ver.1.0 Sep 2003
5-18
V
CO
DE
LIS
T
Mai
n bo
dy
Fan abnor-mality
F32-03 When the paper exit fan /F, /M, and /R (M28, M27, and M26) were ON, abnormality detec-tion signal of either of them was continuously detected for the specified time.
Main body stops imme-diately and main relay (RL1) is turned OFF.
Printer control board (PRCB)Paper exit fan /F (M28)Paper exit fan /M (M27)Paper exit fan /R (M26)
F32-04 When charging air intake fan (M48) was ON, M48 abnormal-ity detection signal was contin-uously detected for the specified time.
Toner supply drive board (TSDB)Charging air suction fan (M48)
F32-05 When the drum cooling fan /1 and /2 (M12, M13) were ON, abnormality detection signal of either of them was continu-ously detected for the specified time.
Printer control board (PRCB)Drum cooling fan /1 (M12)Drum cooling fan /2 (M13)
F32-06 When the transfer belt cooling fan (M11) was ON, M11 abnor-mality detection signal was continuoudly detected for the specified time.
Printer control board (PRCB)Transfer belt cooling fan (M11)
Motor abnor-mality
F33-01 When the fixing motor (M29) was ON, M29 abnormality detection signal was continu-ously detected for the specified time.
Conveyance drive motor (CVDB)Fixing motor (M29)
F33-02 When the pressure release sensor (PS16) is ON, PS16 is not turned OFF within the specified time after the fixing motor (M29) is turned ON.When PS16 is OFF, PS16 is not turned ON within the speci-fied time after M29 is turned ON.
Conveyance drive motor (CVDB)Fixing motor (M29)Fixing pressure release sensor (PS16)
F33-03 After the 2nd transfer pressing/releasing motor (M34) is turned ON, it is not turned OFF within the specified time.
Conveyance drive motor (CVDB)2nd transfer pressing/releasing motor (M34)
F33-04 Abnormality of Web motor (M54) or circuit was detected.
Conveyance drive motor (CVDB)Web motor (M54)
Classification Abnor-mality code
Causes Resulting operation
Estimated abnormal parts
CF5001 Field Service Ver.1.0 Sep 2003 ERROR CODE LIST
5-19
V
CO
DE
LIS
T
Mai
n bo
dyFixing high tem-perature abnor-mality
F34-01 Fixing high temperature abnor-mality (TH1)Fixing temperature sensor /1 (TH1) detection temperature over 250°C was continuously detected for the specified time.
Main body stops imme-diately and main relay (RL1) is turned OFF.
Printer control board (PRCB)AC drive board (ACDB)Fixing upper lamp /1 (L2)Fixing upper lamp /2 (L3)Fixing lower lamp (L4)Fixing temperature sensor /1 (TH1)Fixing temperature sensor /2 (TH2)Fixing temperature sensor /3 (TH3)Fixing temperature sensor /4 (TH4)
WARNING• When F34-**, F35-** or
F36-** (fixing tempera-ture related abnormality)occurs, be sure to repaira defective part beforesetting the 25 DIPSW 3-1to 0.If the 25 DIPSW 3-1 is setto 0 without repairing adefective part, this maycause a fire.
F34-02 Fixing high temperature abnor-mality (TH2)Fixing temperature sensor /2 (TH2) detection temperature over 250°C was continuously detected for the specified time.
F34-03 Fixing high temperature abnor-mality (TH3)Fixing temperature sensor /3 (TH3) detection temperature over 250°C was continuously detected for the specified time.
F34-04 Fixing high temperature abnor-mality (TH4)Fixing temperature sensor /4 (TH4) detection temperature over 250°C was continuously detected for the specified time.
F34-05 Fixing compensation high tem-perature abnormality (TH1)Fixing temperature sensor /1 (TH1) detection temperature over 150°C was continuously detected for the specified time.
F34-06 Fixing compensation high tem-perature abnormality (TH3)Fixing temperature sensor /3 (TH3) detection temperature over 150°C was continuously detected for the specified time.
F34-08 Fixing roller paper seizure abnormalityJ31-02 occurred 4 continuous times.
Classification Abnor-mality code
Causes Resulting operation
Estimated abnormal parts
ERROR CODE LIST CF5001 Field Service Ver.1.0 Sep 2003
5-20
V
CO
DE
LIS
T
Mai
n bo
dy
Fixing low tempera-ture abnor-mality
F35-01 Fixing low temperature abnor-mality (TH1)Fixing temperature sensor /1 (TH1) detection temperature under 150°C was continuously detected.
Main body stops imme-diately and main relay (RL1) is turned OFF.
Printer control board (PRCB)AC drive board (ACDB)Fixing upper lamp /1 (L2)Fixing upper lamp /2 (L3)Fixing lower lamp (L4)Fixing temperature sensor /1 (TH1)Fixing temperature sensor /2 (TH2)Fixing temperature sensor /3 (TH3)Fixing temperature sensor /4 (TH4)
WARNING• When F34-**, F35-** or
F36-** (fixing tempera-ture related abnormality)occurs, be sure to repaira defective part beforesetting the 25 DIPSW 3-1to 0.If the 25 DIPSW 3-1 is setto 0 without repairing adefective part, this maycause a fire.
F35-02 Fixing low temperature abnor-mality (TH2)Fixing temperature sensor /2 (TH2) detection temperature under 150°C was continuously detected for the specified time.
F35-03 Fixing low temperature abnor-mality (TH3)Fixing temperature sensor /3 (TH3) detection temperature under 150°C was continuously detected for the specified time.
F35-04 Fixing low temperature abnor-mality (TH4)Fixing temperature sensor /4 (TH4) detection temperature under 150°C was continuously detected for the specified time.
F35-05 Fixing compensation low tem-perature abnormality (TH1)Fixing temperature sensor /1 (TH1) detection temperature under 20°C was continuously detected for the specified time.
F35-06 Fixing compensation low tem-perature abnormality (TH3)Fixing temperature sensor /3 (TH3) detection temperature under 20°C was continuously detected for the specified time.
Classification Abnor-mality code
Causes Resulting operation
Estimated abnormal parts
CF5001 Field Service Ver.1.0 Sep 2003 ERROR CODE LIST
5-21
V
CO
DE
LIS
T
Mai
n bo
dyFixing sensor abnor-mality
F36-02 Fixing high temperature hard-ware detection abnormality (TH2)Fixing temperature sensor /2 (TH2) detected abnormality signal continuously for the specified time.
Main body stops imme-diately and main relay (RL1) is turned OFF.
Printer control board (PRCB)AC drive board (ACDB)Fixing upper lamp /1 (L2)Fixing upper lamp /2 (L3)Fixing lower lamp (L4)Fixing temperature sensor /1 (TH1)Fixing temperature sensor /2 (TH2)Fixing temperature sensor /3 (TH3)Fixing temperature sensor /4 (TH4)
WARNING• When F34-**, F35-** or
F36-** (fixing tempera-ture related abnormality)occurs, be sure to repaira defective part beforesetting the 25 DIPSW 3-1to 0.If the 25 DIPSW 3-1 is setto 0 without repairing adefective part, this maycause a fire.
F36-04 Fixing high temperature hard-ware detection abnormality (TH4)Fixing temperature sensor /4 (TH4) detected abnormality signal continuously for the specified time.
F36-05 Fixing low temperature hard-ware detection abnormality (TH1)Fixing temperature sensor /1 (TH1) detected abnormality signal continuously for the specified time.
F36-06 Fixing low temperature hard-ware abnormality (TH2)Fixing temperature sensor /2 (TH2) detected abnormality signal continuously for the specified time.
F36-07 Fixing low temperature hard-ware detection abnormality (TH3)Fixing temperature sensor /3 (TH3) detected abnormality signal continuously for the specified time.
F36-08 Fixing low temperature hard-ware detection abnormality (TH4)Fixing temperature sensor /4 (TH4) detected abnormality signal continuously for the specified time.
F36-09 Fixing compensation high tem-perature hardware detection abnormality (TH1)Fixing temperature sensor /1 (TH1) detected abnormality signal continuously for the specified time.
Classification Abnor-mality code
Causes Resulting operation
Estimated abnormal parts
ERROR CODE LIST CF5001 Field Service Ver.1.0 Sep 2003
5-22
V
CO
DE
LIS
T
Mai
n bo
dy
Fixing sensor abnor-mality
F36-10 Fixing compensation low tem-perature hardware detection abnormality (TH1)Fixing temperature sensor /1 (TH1) detected abnormality signal continuously for the specified time.
Main body stops imme-diately and main relay (RL1) is turned OFF.
Printer control board (PRCB)AC drive board (ACDB)Fixing upper lamp /1 (L2)Fixing upper lamp /2 (L3)Fixing lower lamp (L4)Fixing temperature sensor /1 (TH1)Fixing temperature sensor /2 (TH2)Fixing temperature sensor /3 (TH3)Fixing temperature sensor /4 (TH4)
WARNING• When F34-**, F35-** or
F36-** (fixing tempera-ture related abnormality)occurs, be sure to repaira defective part beforesetting the 25 DIPSW 3-1to 0.If the 25 DIPSW 3-1 is setto 0 without repairing adefective part, this maycause a fire.
Fixing sensor abnor-mality
F36-11 Fixing compensation high tem-perature hardware detection abnormality (TH3)Fixing temperature sensor /3 (TH3) detected abnormality signal continuously for the specified time.
F36-12 Fixing compensation low tem-perature hardware detection abnormality (TH3)Fixing temperature sensor /3 (TH3) detected abnormality signal continuously for the specified time.
F38-02 After the main switch (SW2) is turned ON, fixing temperature sensor /1 (TH1) detection tem-perature does not reach 150°C within the specified time.
F38-03 After the main switch (SW2) is turned ON, fixing temperature sensor /3 (TH3) detection tem-perature does not reach 150°C within the specified time.
F39-01 Fixing section has not been set.
Scanner abnor-mality
F41-01 At the home position search, scanner HP sensor (PS1) is not turned on within the speci-fied time after the scanner motor (M1) is turned ON.
Scanner drive board (SCDB)Scanner motor (M1)Scanner HP sensor (PS1)
Motor abnor-mality
F41-02 When the polygon motor /Y (M3) is started or when the speed is switched, M3 lock sig-nal is not detected within the specified time.
Printer control board (PRCB)Polygon motor /Y (M3)
F41-03 When the polygon motor (M4) is started or the speed is switched, M4 lock signal is not detected within the specified time.
Printer control board (PRCB)Polygon motor /M (M4)
Classification Abnor-mality code
Causes Resulting operation
Estimated abnormal parts
CF5001 Field Service Ver.1.0 Sep 2003 ERROR CODE LIST
5-23
V
CO
DE
LIS
T
Mai
n bo
dyMotor abnor-mality
F41-04 When the polygon motor /C (M5) is started or the speed is switched, M5 lock signal is not detected within the specified time.
Main body stops imme-diately and main relay (RL1) is turned OFF.
Printer control board (PRCB)Polygon motor /C (M5)
F41-05 When the polygon motor /K (M6) is started or the speed is switched, M6 lock signal is not detected within the specified time.
Printer control board (PRCB)Polygon motor /K (M6)
Scanner abnor-mality
F41-06 When the optical scanning returns, scanner HP sensor (PS1) is not turned ON within the specified time after the scanner motor (M1) is turned ON.
Scanner drive board (SCDB)Scanner motor (M1)Scanner HP sensor (PS1)
Motor abnor-mality
F41-07 Abnormal temperature of poly-gon motor /Y (M3) was detected.
Printer control board (PRCB)Polygon motor /Y (M3)
F41-08 Abnormal temperature of poly-gon motor /M (M4) was detected.
Printer control board (PRCB)Polygon motor /M (M4)
F41-09 Abnormal polygon motor /C (M5) was detected.
Printer control board (PRCB)Polygon motor /C (M5)
F41-10 Abnormal temperature of poly-gon motor /K (M6) was detected.
Printer control board (PRCB)Polygon motor /K (M6)
F41-11 Temperature detection board (TDB) detected temperature abnormality in writing unit /K.
Printer control board (PRCB)Temperature detection board (TDB)
Fan abnor-mality
F42-01 When the write intake fan /1, /2 (M43, M44), and write exhaust fan /1, /2 (M45, M46) were ON, abnormality detection signal of either of them was continu-ously detected for the specified time.
Printer control board (PRCB)Writing suction fan /1 (M43)Writing suction fan /2 (M44)Writing exhaust fan /1 (M45)Writing exhaust fan /2 (M46)
F42-02 When scanner cooling fan (M2) was ON, M2 abnormality detection signal was continu-ously detected for the specified time.
Scanner drive board (SCDB)Scanner cooling fan (M2)
Classification Abnor-mality code
Causes Resulting operation
Estimated abnormal parts
ERROR CODE LIST CF5001 Field Service Ver.1.0 Sep 2003
5-24
V
CO
DE
LIS
T
Mai
n bo
dy
Color reg-istration abnor-mality
F45-01 Color registration base line correction /F resulted in abnor-mality.
Main body stops imme-diately and main relay (RL1) is turned OFF.
Printer control board (PRCB)Color registration sensor /F (PS8)
F45-03 Color registration base line correction /R results in abnor-mality.
Printer control board (PRCB)Color registration sensor /R (PS9)
F45-07 When laser correction motor /Y (M7) was ON, laser correction HP sensor /Y (PS5) was turned OFF.
Printer control board (PRCB)Laser correction motor /Y (M7)Laser correction HP sensor /Y (PS5)
F45-08 When the laser correction motor /M (M8) was ON, laser correction HP sensor /M (PS6) was turned OFF,
Printer control board (PRCB)Laser correction motor /M (M8)Laser correction HP sensor /M (PS6)
F45-09 When the laser correction motor /C (M9) was ON, laser correction HP sensor /C (PS7) was turned OFF.
Printer control board (PRCB)Laser correction motor /C (M9)Laser correction HP sensor /C (PS7)
F45-10 After the laser correction motor /Y (M7) is turned ON, it is not turned OFF within the speci-fied time. Or, laser correction HP sensor /Y (PS5) installing position is abnormal.
Printer control board (PRCB)Laser correction motor /Y (M7)Laser correction HP sensor /Y (PS5)
F45-11 Laser correction motor /M (MB) is not turned OFF within the specified time after it is turned ON. Or, laser correction HP sensor /M (PS6) installing posi-tion is abnormal.
Printer control board (PRCB)Laser correction motor /M (M8)Laser correction HP sensor /M (PS6)
F45-12 Laser correction motor /C (M9) is not turned OFF within the specified time after it is turned ON. Or, the laser correction HP sensor /C (PS7) installing posi-tion is abnormal.
Printer control board (PRCB)Laser correction motor /C (M9)Laser correction HP sensor /C (PS7)
F45-20 Color registration correction results in abnormality.
Printer control board (PRCB)Color registration sensor /F (PS8)Color registration sensor /R (PS9)
Classification Abnor-mality code
Causes Resulting operation
Estimated abnormal parts
CF5001 Field Service Ver.1.0 Sep 2003 ERROR CODE LIST
5-25
V
CO
DE
LIS
T
Mai
n bo
dyImage process-ingabnor-mality
E46-01 When scanning the image, sub-scan beam correction APC cannot be applied. Laser does not light up because 12VDC power to drive the beam is not supplied, MPC is not correct, or because of fault laser.
Main body stops imme-diately and main relay (RL1) is turned OFF.
Writing unit /Y /M /C /KImage processing board (IPB)
E46-02 Address abnormality of FIFO for scanner. When scanning the image, compression of scanned image data is not nor-mally completed.
Image processing board (IPB)Printer control board (PRCB)
E46-03 Address abnormality of FIFO for printer. Expansion of scanned image data is not nor-mally completed.
E46-05 FIFO interrupt error of com-pression/expansion chip occurred.
Image processing board (IPB)
E46-06 Image data expansion abnor-mality
Image processing board (IPB)Expansion memory
E46-07 Connection abnormality between A/D conversion board (ADB) and image processing board (IPB)
Image processing board (IPB)Overall control board (OACB)A/D conversion board (ADB)CCD wiring harness
E46-08 Index sensor output does not change by the execution of APC. Index sensor cannot decect the laser because the polygon mirror does not rotate, or because of the index sensor out of position or defective index sensor
Writing unit /Y /M /C /KImage processing board (IPB)Printer control board (PRCB)
E46-09 Connection abnormality between index sensor /Y, /M, /C, /K (INDX SB Y, M, C, K) or laser drive board (LDB Y, M, C, K) and image processing board (IPB)
Writing unit /Y /M /C /KImage processing board (IPB)
Classification Abnor-mality code
Causes Resulting operation
Estimated abnormal parts
ERROR CODE LIST CF5001 Field Service Ver.1.0 Sep 2003
5-26
V
CO
DE
LIS
T
Mai
n bo
dy
Image process-ingabnor-mality
E46-12 After negation of SVV, com-pression of scanned image and evolution to page memory are not completed.
Main body stops imme-diately and main relay (RL1) is turned OFF.
Printer control board (PRCB)Overall control board (OACB)Image processing board (IPB)
E46-13 When scanning the image, compression process from scanner to memory is not com-pleted within the specified time. Evolution from scanner to page memory is not completed within the specified time. SVV is not detected within the spec-ified time.
Printer control board (PRCB)Overall control board (OACB)Image processing board (IPB)
E46-14 When scanning the image, expansion process from mem-ory to printer is not completed within the specified time. Out-put from page memory to printer is not completed within the specified time. PVV is not detected within the specified time.
Printer control board (PRCB)Overall control board (OACB)Image processing board (IPB)Writing unit /Y /M /C /K
E46-15 When scanning the image, access to expansion device or some other improper process took place even though there was no resource.
Image processing board (IPB)Program of overall control board (OACB)
E46-16 When scanning the image, access to compression device or some other improper pro-cess took place even though there was no resource.
E46-17 When processing the image, filter coefficient cannot be properly prepared.
E46-19 When accessing the memory device, software fault was detected.
Classification Abnor-mality code
Causes Resulting operation
Estimated abnormal parts
CF5001 Field Service Ver.1.0 Sep 2003 ERROR CODE LIST
5-27
V
CO
DE
LIS
T
Mai
n bo
dyImage process-ingabnor-mality
E46-21 Expansion process from mem-ory to page memory is not completed within the specified time.Compression process from page memory to memory is not completed within the specified time.Evolution from memory to page memory is not completed within the specified time.Compressed data transfer from memory to memory is not com-pleted within the specified time.
Main body stops imme-diately and main relay (RL1) is turned OFF.
Printer control board (PRCB)Image processing board (IPB)Program of overall control board (OACB)
E46-23 When scanning the image, SVV is not turned OFF within the specified time and there-fore scanning of next page cannot be started.
Printer control board (PRCB)Image processing board (IPB)Overall control board (OACB)
E46-24 Shading correction abnormal-ity (GA abnormality)
Image processing board (IPB)Program of image processing board (IPB)
E46-25 AOC/AGC adjustment abnor-mality• Blocking cover and lens cover
of scanner section are out of place.
• A/D conversion board (ADB) connector is disconnected.
• ADB power cable is discon-nected.
• ADB IC protector is broken.• Quantity of light of exposure
lamp (L1) is excess.• L1 does not light up.
A/D conversion board (ADB)Exposure lamp (L1)Image processing board (IPB)Printer control board (PRCB)Overall control board (OACB)Scanner drive board (SCDB)L1 inverter board (L1INVB)
Classification Abnor-mality code
Causes Resulting operation
Estimated abnormal parts
ERROR CODE LIST CF5001 Field Service Ver.1.0 Sep 2003
5-28
V
CO
DE
LIS
T
Mai
n bo
dy
Image process-ingabnor-mality
E46-26 There is no correction data which has been reserved by resolution.
Abnormality detection process is performed but no abnor-mality code is indicated on the opera-tion board and main body contin-ues opera-tion. Abnormality code is indi-cated only for data collec-tion, list out-put and KRDS.
Image processing board (IPB)Program of overall control board (OACB)
E46-31 Before completion of MPC, APC initial sampling was attempted.
Main body stops imme-diately and main relay (RL1) is turned OFF.
Image processing board (IPB)ICP program
E46-32 Execution of MPC was attempted during execution of APC.
E46-35 Continuous page imaging range abnormality.Image cannot be evolved on memory due to abnormal image range on memory.
E46-36 When starting APC, PVV was ON (APC was executed during print)
E46-40 Hard disk initialization abnor-mality.Hard disk failure or improper connector connection.
Image processing board (IPB)Hard disk (HDD-7)HDD I/F board (HDD IFB)
E46-41 JOB information could not be stored in the hard disk.
E46-42 At the time of automatic hard disk job deletion, route could not be opened.
E46-43 Hard disk access error.Hard disk failure or improper connector connection.
Classification Abnor-mality code
Causes Resulting operation
Estimated abnormal parts
CF5001 Field Service Ver.1.0 Sep 2003 ERROR CODE LIST
5-29
V
CO
DE
LIS
T
Mai
n bo
dyImage process-ingabnor-mality
E46-58 Software failure.CCD board was replaced but I1ROM version is not compli-ant.
Main body stops imme-diately and main relay (RL1) is turned OFF.
Image processing board (IPB)ICP programCCP wiring harness of A/D conversion board (ADB)
E46-59 A/D conversion board (ADB) bunch or connector is dam-aged.
F46-62 Before completion of paper mis-centering correction, scan-ning was started (mis-center-ing correction cannot be completed).
Abnormality detection process is conducted but no code is indicated on the opera-tion board and main body contin-ues opera-tion.Abnormality code is indi-cated only for data collec-tion, list out-put and KRDS.
Printer control board (PRCB)Image processing board (IPB)LCT drive board (LTDB)
F46-63 Since the quantity of light of exposure lamp (L1) decreased, AGC was retried, though no error occurred.
Exposure lamp (L1)Overall control board (OACB)CCD board (CCDB)
F46-64 PWM gammer curve was not properly prepared.
Toner density sensor /Y (TDS Y)Toner density sensor /M (TDS M)Toner density sensor /C (TDS C)Toner density sensor /K (TDS K)Printer control board (PRCB)Image processing board (IPB)
E46-66 Shift failure at repeat. Image processing board (IPB)Overall control board (OACB)
E46-80 Message cue was not enough or destructed.
Main body stops imme-diately and main relay (RL1) is turned OFF.
Image processing board (IPB)Program of overall control board (OACB)E46-81 Parameter value exceeds
allowable range.
E46-82 Message cue sender task has an undefined ID.
E46-83 Message receiving event is undefined.
E46-90 Abnormal access to memory Image processing board (IPB)Overall control board (OACB)Expansion memory
E46-91 Header address scanning abnormality
E46-98 Page memory cannot be secured for printing.
E46-99 Memory initialization abnor-mality.Memory may not be correctly connected.
Classification Abnor-mality code
Causes Resulting operation
Estimated abnormal parts
ERROR CODE LIST CF5001 Field Service Ver.1.0 Sep 2003
5-30
V
CO
DE
LIS
T
Mai
n bo
dy
Commu-nication abnor-mality
E50-01 12VDC abnormality.Abnormality signal was contin-uously detected for the speci-fied time.
Main body stops imme-diately and main relay (RL1) is turned OFF.
DC power unit /1 (DCPS1)
E50-02 24VDC abnormality.Abnormality signal was contin-uously detected for the speci-fied time after the specified time from REN /2 ON.
DC power unit /2 (DCPS2)
E50-03 Conveyance drive board (CVDB) 24VDC abnormality.Abnormality signal of 24VDC for CVDB was detected after specified time from REN /2 ON.
DC power unit /2 (DCPS2)Conveyance drive motor (CVDB)
E50-04 Laser correction motor 5VDC abnormality.Abnormal 5VDC for laser cor-rection motor /Y, /M, and /C (M7, M8, and M9) was detected.
DC power unit /1 (DCPS1)
E50-05 Conveyance drive board (CVDB) 12VDC abnormality.Abnormality signal of 12VDC for CVDB was detected.
DC power unit /1 (DCPS1)Conveyance drive motor (CVDB)
E50-10 Line status error and check sum error was detected between the overall control board (OACB) and image pro-cessing board (IPB) and demand for re-transmission was sent but recovery could not be attained.Re-transmission was demanded and answered but recovery could not be attained.Space is not obtained in the transmission ring buffer within the specified time.
Overall control board (OACB)Image processing board (IPB)
E50-11 Communication with the coin vendor cannot be performed.
Printer control board (PRCB)Coin vendor
Classification Abnor-mality code
Causes Resulting operation
Estimated abnormal parts
CF5001 Field Service Ver.1.0 Sep 2003 ERROR CODE LIST
5-31
V
CO
DE
LIS
T
Mai
n bo
dyFan abnor-mality
F52-01 When the DCPS cooling fan (M42) was ON, M42 abnormal-ity detection signal was contin-uously detected for the specified time.
Main body stops imme-diately and main relay (RL1) is turned OFF.
Printer control board (PRCB)DCPS cooling fan (M42)
F52-02 When the IP cooling fan (M24) was ON, M24 abnormality detection signal was continu-ously detected for the specified time.
Printer control board (PRCB)IP cooling fan (M24)
F52-03 When the IPB cooling fan (M25) was ON, M25 abnormal-ity detection signal was contin-uously detected for the specified time.
Printer control board (PRCB)IPB cooling fan (M25)
Opera-tion board abnor-mality
E56-02 After the main switch (SW2) is turned ON, communication between the printer control board (PRCB), overall control board (OACB), and operation board /1 (OB1) is not started.
Printer control board (PRCB)Overall control board (OACB)Operation board /1 (OB1)
E56-11 When the main switch (SW2) was turned ON, unwritten con-trol program 01 of operation board /1 (OB1) was detected.
Operation board /1 (OB1)
E56-12 When the main switch (SW2) was turned ON, unwritten con-trol program 02 of operation board /1 (OB1) was detected.
Operation board /1 (OB1)
E56-13 When the main switch (SW2) was turned ON, unwritten con-trol program 03 of operation board /1 (OB1) was detected.
Operation board /1 (OB1)
AF
R-2
0 AFR-20 abnor-mality
E60-01 Communication error. RADF control board (DFCB)Printer control board (PRCB)
F61-01 Registration sensor (PS301) error.
RADF control board (DFCB)Registration sensor (PS301)
F61-02 Timing sensor (PS302) error. RADF control board (DFCB)Timing sensor (PS302)
F61-03 Reverse sensor (PS305) error. RADF control board (DFCB)Reverse sensor (PS305)
F61-04 Paper exit sensor (PS306) error.
RADF control board (DFCB)Paper exit sensor (PS306)
Classification Abnor-mality code
Causes Resulting operation
Estimated abnormal parts
ERROR CODE LIST CF5001 Field Service Ver.1.0 Sep 2003
5-32
V
CO
DE
LIS
T
AF
R-2
0 AFR-20 abnor-mality
F61-05 Size VR (VR301) error. Main body stops imme-diately and main relay (RL1) is turned OFF.
RADF control board (DFCB)Size VR (VR301)
F61-06 Non-volatile memory error. RADF control board (DFCB)
F61-07 When the main switch (SW2) was ON, unwritten control pro-gram of RADF control board (DFCB) was detected.
F61-08 Paper feed motor (M301) error. RADF control board (DFCB)Paper feed motor (M301)
F61-09 Conveyance motor (M302) error.
RADF control board (DFCB)Conveyance motor (M302)
F61-10 Reverse paper exit motor (M303) error.
RADF control board (DFCB)Reverse paper exit motor (M303)
FN
-120
, FN
-9 FN-120 and FN-9 abnor-mality
E70-01 Communication error. Main body and FNS stop opera-tion immedi-ately and main relay (RL1) is turned OFF.
FNS control board (FNSCB)Printer control board (PRCB)
F77-01 Shift unit does not reach the shifting position or home posi-tion within the specified time.
FNS control board (FNSCB)Shift motor (M702)Shift HP sensor (PS718)
F77-02 After the tray up/down motor (M703) was turned ON, tray upper limit sensor (PS702) is not turned ON within the speci-fied time.
FNS control board (FNSCB)Tray up/down motor (M703)Tray upper limit sensor (PS702)
F77-03 After the alignment motor /U (M705) was turned ON, the alignment HP sensor /U (PS708) is not turned ON or OFF within the specified time.
FNS control board (FNSCB)Alignment motor /U (M705)Alignment HP sensor /U (PS708)
F77-04 After the paper exit roller motor (M707) was turned ON, speed does not reach the specified level within the specified time.
FNS control board (FNSCB)Paper exit roller motor (M707)
F77-05 After the paper exit motor (M708) is turned ON, paper exit opening HP sensor (PS712) is not turned ON or OFF within the specified time.
FNS control board (FNSCB)Paper exit opening motor (M708)Paper exit opening sensor (PS712)
F77-06 After the stapler moving motor (M711) is turned ON, stapler moving HP sensor (PS711) is not turned ON or OFF within the specified time.
FNS control board (FNSCB)Stapler movement motor (M711)Stapler movement HP sensor (PS711)
Classification Abnor-mality code
Causes Resulting operation
Estimated abnormal parts
CF5001 Field Service Ver.1.0 Sep 2003 ERROR CODE LIST
5-33
V
CO
DE
LIS
T
FN
-120
, FN
-9 FN-120 and FN-9 abnor-mality
F77-07 After the clincher rotating motor (M704) is turned ON, clincher rotating HP sensor (PS714) is not turned ON or OFF within the specified time.
Main body and FNS stop opera-tion immedi-ately and main relay (RL1) is turned OFF.
FNS control board (FNSCB)Clincher rotation motor (M704)Clincher rotation HP sensor (PS714)
F77-08 After the stapler rotating motor (M706) is turned ON, stapler rotating HP sensor (PS713) is not turned ON or OFF within the specified time.
FNS control board (FNSCB)Stapler rotation motor (M706)Stapler rotation HP sensor (PS713)
F77-11 After the stapler motor /F (M714) is turned ON, stapler HP sensor /F (PS731) is not turned ON within the specified time.
FNS control board (FNSCB)Stapler motor /F (M714)Stapler HP sensor /F (PS731)
F77-12 After the stapler motor /R (M709) is turned ON, stapler HP sensor /R (PS730) is not turned ON within the specified time.
FNS control board (FNSCB)Stapler motor /R (M709)Stapler HP sensor /R (PS730)
F77-13 After the clincher motor /F (M715) is turned ON, clincher HP sensor /F (PS733) is not turned ON within the specified time.
FNS control board (FNSCB)Clincher motor /F (M715)Clincher HP sensor /F (PS733)
F77-14 After clincher motor /R (M710) is turned ON, clincher HP sen-sor /R (PS732) is not turned ON within the specified time.
FNS control board (FNSCB)Clincher motor /R (M710Clincher HP sensor /R (PS732)
F77-21 After the stopper motor (M718) is turned ON, stopper HP sen-sor (PS723) is not turned ON within the specified time.
FNS control board (FNSCB)Stopper motor (M718)Stopper HP sensor (PS723)
F77-22 After the alignment motor /L (M716) is turned ON, align-ment HP sensor /L (PS724) is not turned ON within the speci-fied time.
FNS control board (FNSCB)Alignment motor /L (M716)Alignment HP sensor /L (PS724)
F77-25 After the folding knife motor (M719) is turned ON, folding knife HP sensor (PS722) is not turned ON within the specified time.
FNS control board (FNSCB)Folding knife motor (M719)Folding knife HP sensor (PS722)
Classification Abnor-mality code
Causes Resulting operation
Estimated abnormal parts
ERROR CODE LIST CF5001 Field Service Ver.1.0 Sep 2003
5-34
V
CO
DE
LIS
T
FN
-120
, FN
-9 abnor-mality
F77-26 After the folding conveyance motor (M720) is turned ON, speed does not reach the specified level within the speci-fied time.
Main body and FNS stop opera-tion immedi-ately and main relay (RL1) is turned OFF.
FNS control board (FNSCB)Folding conveyance motor (M720)
TM
G-3 abnor-
malityF77-31 After the conveyance motor
(M101) is turned ON, speed does not reach the specified level within the specified time.
FNS control board (FNSCB)TU drive board (TUDB)Conveyance motor (M101)
F77-32 After the cutter motor (M102) is turned ON, cutter HP sensor (PS106) is not turned ON within the specified time.
FNS control board (FNSCB)TU drive board (TUDB)Cutter motor (M102)Cutter HP sensor (PS106)
F77-33 After the stopper motor (M103) is turned ON, stopper HP sen-sor (PS103) is not turned ON within the specified time.
FNS control board (FNSCB)TU drive board (TUDB)Stopper motor (M103)Stopper HP sensor (PS103)
F77-34 After the stopper release motor (M104) is turned ON, stopper release HP sensor (PS104) is not turned ON within the speci-fied time.
FNS control board (FNSCB)TU drive board (TUDB)Stopper release motor (M104)Stopper release HP sensor (PS104)
F77-35 After the press motor (M105) is turned ON, press HP sensor (PS105) is not turned ON within the specified time.
FNS control board (FNSCB)TU drive board (TUDB)Press motor (M105)Press HP sensor (PS105)
F77-36 After the pressure motor (M107) is turned ON, pressure HP sensor (PS112) is not turned ON within the specified time.
FNS control board (FNSCB)TU drive board (TUDB)Pusher motor (M107)Pusher HP sensor (PS112)
F77-37 After the holder motor (M106) is turned ON, upper limit PS sensor (PS110) is not turned ON.
FNS control board (FNSCB)TU drive board (TUDB)Holder motor (M106)Upper limit PS sensor (PS110)
Cov
er In
sert
er D abnor-
malityF77-41 After the tray up/down motor /L
(M202) is turned ON, tray upper limit sensor /L (PS209) or tray lower limit sensor /L (PS210) is not turned ON within the specified time.
FNS control board (FNSCB)PI drive board (PIDB)Tray up/down motor /L (M202)Tray upper limit sensor /L (PS209)Tray lower limit sensor /L (PS210)
Classification Abnor-mality code
Causes Resulting operation
Estimated abnormal parts
CF5001 Field Service Ver.1.0 Sep 2003 ERROR CODE LIST
5-35
V
CO
DE
LIS
T
Cov
er In
sert
er D abnor-
malityF77-42 After the tray up/down motor /U
(M201) is turned ON, tray upper limit sensor /U (PS204) or tray lower limit sensor /U (PS205) is not turned ON within the specified time.
Main body and FNS stop opera-tion immedi-ately and main relay (RL1) is turned OFF.
FNS control board (FNSCB)PI drive board (PIDB)Tray up/down motor /U (M201)Tray upper limit sensor /U (PS204)Tray lower limit sensor /U (PS205)
F77-43 After the PI conveyance motor (M203) is turned ON, speed does not reach the specified level within the specified time.
FNS control board (FNSCB)PI drive board (PIDB)PI Conveyance motor (M203)
PK
-5 PK-5 abnor-mality
F77-44 After the punch shift motor (M802) is turned ON, punch shift HP sensor (PS803) is not turned ON within the specified time.
FNS control board (FNSCB)Punch drive board (PKDB)Punch shift motor (M802)Punch shift HP sensor (PS803)
F77-47 Communication abnormality between FNS control board (FNSCB) and punch drive board (PKDB)
FNS control board (FNSCB)Punch drive board (PKDB)
F77-54 After punch motor (M801) is turned ON, punch HP sensor (PS801) is not turned ON within the specified time.
FNS control board (FNSCB)Punch drive board (PKDB)Punch motor (M801)Punch HP sensor (PS801)
FN
-120
, FN
-9 FN-120, FN-9 abnor-mality
F77-81 After the gate drive motor (M712) is turned ON, gate HP sensor (PS716) is not turned ON within the specified time.
FNS control board (FNSCB)Gate drive motor (M712)Gate HP sensor (PS716)
F77-91 Communication abnormality when sub-CPU in FNS control board (FNSCB) receives data
FNS control board (FNSCB)Printer control board (PRCB)
F77-92 Communication abnormality when the main CPU in FNS control board (FNSCB) receives data.
F77-98 When the main switch (SW2) was turned ON, unwritten con-trol program of FNS control Board (FNSCB) was detected.
F77-99 Abnormality other than those known to control program of FNS control board (FNSCB) was detected.
Classification Abnor-mality code
Causes Resulting operation
Estimated abnormal parts
ERROR CODE LIST CF5001 Field Service Ver.1.0 Sep 2003
5-36
V
CO
DE
LIS
T
Mai
n bo
dy
Commu-nication abnor-mality
E80-01 When the main switch (SW2) is ON, no response is received from the printer control board (PRCB) within the specified time.
Main body stops imme-diately and main relay (RL1) is turned OFF.
Printer control board (PRCB)
E80-02 Printer control board (PRCB) communication abnormality
E80-03 Operation board communica-tion abnormality
Operation board /1 (OB1)
ISWabnor-mality
E80-11 When the main switch (SW2) was ON, unwritten range of ISW was detected in the printer control program.
Printer control program
E80-21 When the main switch (SW2) was ON, unwritten range of ISW was detected in the GIF control program.
VIF control program
E80-30 In the data transfer by ISW, regular header information cannot be received within the specified time.
Printer cableUSB cablePC parallel portPC USB port
E80-31 In the data transfer by ISW, check sum error or header error was detected in the downloaded data.
Printer cableUSB cableProgram file abnormality
E80-32 When transferring data by ISW, data cannot be correctly writ-ten to flash ROM.
Printer cableUSB cableProgram transferred board
E80-40 Engine continued operation without preparing image or process patch for the specified time.
Printer control program
Classification Abnor-mality code
Causes Resulting operation
Estimated abnormal parts
CF5001 Field Service Ver.1.0 Sep 2003 ABOUT ABNORMAL UNIT ISOLATION
5-37
V
CO
DE
LIS
T
3. ABOUT ABNORMAL UNIT ISOLATION
In the event of following abnormalities, the failed unit can be isolated so that other functions may be tempo-
rarily operated.
If any abnormality code is issued, press the Auto Reset key and turn OFF and ON the SW2 (auxiliary
power switch). The unit subjected to abnormality is isolated in the software system and other functions can
be operated. If SW2 is turned OFF or ON without correcting the faulty unit, the abnormality is detected and
the abnormality code is indicated again (a function effective only one time).
Error code Error Unit to be cut off Remarks
18-01 Error in paper feed tray /1 up Paper feed tray /1 Tray can not be selected.
18-02 Error in paper feed tray /2 up Paper feed tray /2 Tray can not be selected.
18-03 Error in paper feed tray /3 up Paper feed tray /3 Tray can not be selected.
18-05 Error in LT tray up LT tray Tray can not be selected.
13-02 LT paper feed motor abnormality
46-40 to 43 HDD abnormality HDD HDD can not be used.
77-22, 25, 26 Folding drive abnormality Folding machine Folding mode, stitch-and-
fold mode, and cutting
mode can not be selected.
77-31, 37 Cutting drive abnormality TMG-3
77-41, 42, 43 CF tray drive abnormality Cover Inserter D Cover sheet mode can not
be selected.
77-44, 47, 55 Punch rocking motor abnormality PK-5 Punch mode can not be
selected.
ABOUT ABNORMAL UNIT ISOLATION CF5001 Field Service Ver.1.0 Sep 2003
5-38
V
CO
DE
LIS
T
Blank page
CF5001 Field Service Ver.1.0 Sep 2003 PARTS LAYOUT DRAWING
6-1
VI
DIA
GR
AM
S
VI DIAGRAMS
1. PARTS LAYOUT DRAWING1.1 CF5001 parts layout drawing
A. Switches and sensors
(1) Rear of the main body
[1] Encoder sensor /Y1 (PS60) [7] Encoder sensor /C2 (PS65)
[2] Encoder sensor /M1 (PS62) [8] Encoder sensor /K2 (PS67)
[3] Encoder sensor /C1 (PS64) [9] Waste toner full sensor (PS52)
[4] Encoder sensor /K1 (PS66) [10] Waste toner door sensor (PS53)
[5] Encoder sensor /Y2 (PS61) [11] Encoder sensor/belt 2 (PS68)
[6] Encoder sensor /M2 (PS63) [12] Encoder sensor/belt 1 (PS69)
8050fs6600
[10] [9] [8] [7] [6] [5]
[11] [12]
[4] [3] [2] [1]
PARTS LAYOUT DRAWING CF5001 Field Service Ver.1.0 Sep 2003
6-2
VI
DIA
GR
AM
S
(2) Top of the main body
(3) Front of the main body
[1] DF reset switch (RS1) [4] APS sensor /S (PS3)
[2] Toner supply unit open/close sensor (PS14) [5] Scanner HP sensor (PS1)
[3] APS sensor /L (PS4) [6] AAPS timing sensor (PS2)
[1] Front door open/close sensor (PS18) [3] Main switch (SW2)
[2] Front door interlock switch (MS1) [4] Reset switch (SW1)
[2][3]
[6][5]
[4]
[1]
8050fs6601
[2] [1]
[3] [4]
8050fs6602
CF5001 Field Service Ver.1.0 Sep 2003 PARTS LAYOUT DRAWING
6-3
VI
DIA
GR
AM
S
(4) Right side of the main body
(5) Front side of the main body
[1] Temp/humidity sensor (TEMP/HUM)
[1] 1st transfer HP sensor (PS15)
8050fs6603[1]
8050fs6604[1]
PARTS LAYOUT DRAWING CF5001 Field Service Ver.1.0 Sep 2003
6-4
VI
DIA
GR
AM
S
(6) Write unit
* Laser correction HP sensor does not attached to write unit /K.
(7) Process unit
[1] Index sensor board /Y (INDX SB Y) [5] Laser correction HP sensor /Y (PS5)*
[2] Index sensor board /M (INDX SB M) [6] Laser correction HP sensor /M (PS6)*
[3] Index sensor board /C (INDX SB C) [7] Laser correction HP sensor /C (PS7)*
[4] Index sensor board /K (INDX SB K)
[1] Drum potential sensor /K (DRPS K) [3] Drum potential sensor /M (DRPS M)
[2] Drum potential sensor /C (DRPS C) [4] Drum potential sensor /Y (DRPS Y)
8050fs6605[1][2][3][4]
[7][6][5]
8050fs6606[1][2][3][4]
CF5001 Field Service Ver.1.0 Sep 2003 PARTS LAYOUT DRAWING
6-5
VI
DIA
GR
AM
S
(8) Developing unit
(9) Image correction unit
[1] Toner density sensor /K (TDS K) [3] Toner density sensor /M (TDS M)
[2] Toner density sensor /C (TDS C) [4] Toner density sensor /Y (TDS Y)
[1] Gamma sensor (PS11) [3] Color registration sensor /R (PS9)
[2] Color registration sensor /F (PS8)
[1][2][3][4] 8050fs6607
8050fs6608[1]
[2] [3]
PARTS LAYOUT DRAWING CF5001 Field Service Ver.1.0 Sep 2003
6-6
VI
DIA
GR
AM
S
(10) Toner supply unit
(11) Paper feed tray 1 to 3
[1] Toner level detection sensor /K (TLD K) [4] Toner supply door open/close sensor (PS54)
[2] Toner level detection sensor /C (TLD C) [5] Toner level detection sensor /M (TLD M)
[3] Toner supply interlock switch (MS2) [6] Toner level detection sensor /Y (TLD Y)
[1] Pre-registration sensor /1 (PS29) [10] Paper size VR/1 (VR1)
[2] Pre-registration sensor /2 (PS35) [11] Paper size VR/2 (VR2)
[3] Pre-registration sensor /3 (PS41) [12] Paper size VR/3 (VR3)
[4] No paper sensor /1 (PS31) [13] Paper size /S1 (PS33)
[5] No paper sensor /2 (PS37) [14] Paper size /S2 (PS39)
[6] No paper sensor /3 (PS44) [15] Paper size /S3 (PS45)
[7] Tray upper limit sensor /1 (PS30) [16] Paper size /L1 (PS34)
[8] Tray upper limit sensor /2 (PS36) [17] Paper size /L2 (PS40)
[9] Tray upper limit sensor /3 (PS42) [18] Paper size /L3 (PS46)
[2][3] [1]
[4] [6][5]
8050fs6609
8050fs6630[18]
[9] [8] [7]
[3] [2] [1]
[4] [5] [6]
[17] [16] [15] [14] [13] [12] [11] [10]
CF5001 Field Service Ver.1.0 Sep 2003 PARTS LAYOUT DRAWING
6-7
VI
DIA
GR
AM
S
(12) By-pass feed unit
(13) Vertical conveyance unit
[1] Paper size /LBP (PS49) [3] Paper size VR/BP (VR4)
[2] No paper sensor /BP (PS47) [4] Paper size /SBP (PS48)
[1] Vertical conveyance door sensor (PS51) [2] Vertical conveyance sensor (PS50)
8050fs6610[4] [3] [2] [1]
8050fs6631
[1][2]
PARTS LAYOUT DRAWING CF5001 Field Service Ver.1.0 Sep 2003
6-8
VI
DIA
GR
AM
S
(14) ADU
(15) Paper exit section (left side of the main body)
[1] Intermediate conveyance sensor /1 (PS27) [7] ADU conveyance sensor (PS20)
[2] Intermediate conveyance sensor /2 (PS28) [8] ADU reverse sensor (PS21)
[3] ADU pre-registration sensor (PS23) [9] Registration sensor (PS22)
[4] 2nd transfer HP sensor (PS24) [10] By-pass conveyance sensor (PS26)
[5] Conveyance lever sensor (PS55) [11] Tray upper limit sensor (PS25)
[6] Reverse/exit sensor (PS19)
[1] Paper exit sensor (PS13) [2] Paper exit full sensor (PS12)
8050fs6611
[6] [7] [8] [9] [10] [11]
[5] [4] [3] [2] [1]
8050fs6612
[1][2]
CF5001 Field Service Ver.1.0 Sep 2003 PARTS LAYOUT DRAWING
6-9
VI
DIA
GR
AM
S
(16) Fixing unit
[1] Fixing temperature sensor /3 (TH3) [5] Thermostat /2 (TS2)
[2] Fixing temperature sensor /1 (TH1) [6] Fixing temperature sensor /2 (TH2)
[3] Thermostat /1 (TS1) [7] Fixing paper exit sensor (PS17)
[4] Fixing pressure/release sensor (PS16) [8] Fixing temperature sensor /4 (TH4)
[4]
[5]
[6]
[7]
[8]
[3]
[2]
[1]
8050fs6632
PARTS LAYOUT DRAWING CF5001 Field Service Ver.1.0 Sep 2003
6-10
VI
DIA
GR
AM
S
B. Loads
(1) Rear of the main body
[1] 1st transfer pressure/release motor (M19) [13] DCPS cooling fan (M42)
[2] Drum motor /Y (M14) [14] Developing motor /K (M23)
[3] Drum motor /M (M15) [15] Developing motor /C (M22)
[4] Drum motor /C (M16) [16] Developing motor /M (M21)
[5] Drum motor /K (M17) [17] Scanner motor (M1)
[6] Fixing cooling fan /1 (M10) [18] Developing motor /Y (M20)
[7] IP cooling fan (M24) [19] Drum cooling fan /2 (M13)
[8] IPB cooling fan (M25) [20] Drum cooling fan /1 (M12)
[9] Tray up drive motor /1 (M40) [21] Fixing cooling fan /3 (M36)
[10] Tray up drive motor /2 (M39) [22] Fixing cooling fan /2 (M37)
[11] Tray up drive motor /3 (M38) [23] Transfer belt motor (M18)
[12] Paper feed motor (M41)
8050fs6613
[12]
[11] [10] [9] [8] [7] [6]
[2][3][4][5] [1]
[13] [14] [15] [16] [17] [18] [19] [20] [21] [22] [23]
CF5001 Field Service Ver.1.0 Sep 2003 PARTS LAYOUT DRAWING
6-11
VI
DIA
GR
AM
S
(2) Top of the main body
(3) Front of the main body
[1] Scanner cooling fan (M2) [2] Exposure lamp (L1)
[1] Transfer belt cooling fan (M11)
[2]
[1]
8050fs6614
8050fs6615[1]
PARTS LAYOUT DRAWING CF5001 Field Service Ver.1.0 Sep 2003
6-12
VI
DIA
GR
AM
S
(4) Right side of the main body
(5) Left side of the main body
[1] Writing exhaust fan /2 (M46) [5] Writing intake fan /1 (M43)
[2] Heater /1 (HTR1) [6] Writing exhaust fan /1 (M45)
[3] Heater /2 (HTR2) [7] Drum unit fan (M47)
[4] Writing intake fan /2 (M44)
[1] Paper exit fan /F (M28) [3] Paper exit fan /R (M26)
[2] Paper exit fan /M (M27)
8050fs6616
[4] [5] [6] [7]
[3] [2] [1]
8050fs6617[3] [2] [1]
CF5001 Field Service Ver.1.0 Sep 2003 PARTS LAYOUT DRAWING
6-13
VI
DIA
GR
AM
S
(6) Write unit
* Laser correction motor does not attached to write unit /K.
(7) Process unit
[1] Polygon motor /Y (M3) [5] Laser correction motor /Y (M7)*
[2] Polygon motor /M (M4) [6] Laser correction motor /M (M8)*
[3] Polygon motor /C (M5) [7] Laser correction motor /C (M9)*
[4] Polygon motor /K (M6)
[1] Pre-charging lamp /Y (PCL Y) [4] Pre-charging lamp /K (PCL K)
[2] Pre-charging lamp /M (PCL M) [5] Belt separation claw solenoid (SD1)
[3] Pre-charging lamp /C (PCL C)
8050fs6618[4] [3] [2] [1][7] [6] [5]
[1][2][3][4][5]
8050fs6619
PARTS LAYOUT DRAWING CF5001 Field Service Ver.1.0 Sep 2003
6-14
VI
DIA
GR
AM
S
(8) Image correction unit
(9) Toner supply unit
[1] Gamma shutter solenoid (SD3) [2] Color registration shutter solenoid (SD2)
[1] Toner bottle clutch /M (MC15) [6] Toner supply motor /C (M51)
[2] Toner bottle motor (M53) [7] Toner supply motor /M (M50)
[3] Toner bottle clutch /C (MC16) [8] Charger intake fan (M48)
[4] Toner bottle clutch /K (MC17) [9] Toner supply motor /Y (M49)
[5] Toner supply motor /K (M52) [10] Toner bottle clutch /Y (MC14)
8050fs6620[1][2]
[3]
[1]
[2]
[4][5][6][7][8]
[9] [10]
8050fs6621
CF5001 Field Service Ver.1.0 Sep 2003 PARTS LAYOUT DRAWING
6-15
VI
DIA
GR
AM
S
(10) Paper feed tray 1 to 3
(11) Vertical conveyance unit
[1] Pick up solenoid /1 (SD7) [6] Paper feed clutch /3 (MC11)
[2] Pick up solenoid /2 (SD8) [7] Pre-registration clutch /1 (MC8)
[3] Pick up solenoid /3 (SD9) [8] Pre-registration clutch /2 (MC10)
[4] Paper feed clutch /1 (MC7) [9] Pre-registration clutch /3 (MC12)
[5] Paper feed clutch /2 (MC9)
[1] Intermediate conveyance clutch /1 (MC13)
8050fs6633
[6] [5] [4][3] [2] [1]
[7] [8] [9]
8050fs6634[1]
PARTS LAYOUT DRAWING CF5001 Field Service Ver.1.0 Sep 2003
6-16
VI
DIA
GR
AM
S
(12) ADU
[1] Intermediate conveyance clutch /2 (MC4) [9] ADU reverse motor (M32)
[2] Intermediate conveyance clutch /3 (MC5) [10] 2nd transfer pressure/release motor (M34)
[3] ADU lock solenoid (SD6) [11] Registration motor (M30)
[4] ADU pre-registration clutch (MC3) [12] Loop roller motor (M31)
[5] ADU conveyance clutch /2 (MC1) [13] Pick up solenoid /BP (SD5)
[6] Reverse/exit motor (M33) [14] Paper feed clutch /BP (MC6)
[7] ADU conveyance clutch /1 (MC2) [15] Tray up drive motor /BP (M35)
[8] Reverse/exit solenoid (SD4)
8050fs6622
[9]
[8] [7] [6] [5] [4] [3] [2] [1]
[10] [11] [12] [13] [14] [15]
CF5001 Field Service Ver.1.0 Sep 2003 PARTS LAYOUT DRAWING
6-17
VI
DIA
GR
AM
S
(13) Fixing unit
[1] Fixing upper lamp /1 (L2) [4] Fixing motor (M29)
[2] Fixing upper lamp /2 (L3) [5] Fixing lower lamp (L4)
[3] Web motor (M54)
[4]
[5]
[2]
[1]
[3]
8050fs6635
PARTS LAYOUT DRAWING CF5001 Field Service Ver.1.0 Sep 2003
6-18
VI
DIA
GR
AM
S
C. PCBs and others
(1) Rear of the main body
[1] AC drive board (ACDB) [13] HDD: option (HDD-7)
[2] Noise filter (NF) [14] HDD I/F board: option (HDD IFB)
[3] Circuit breaker /2 (CBR2) [15] Extended memory: option
[4] Circuit breaker /1 (CBR1) [16] Memory board (MB)
[5] Transformer /LCT (TRNS2) [17] High voltage unit /1 (HV1)
[6] Transformer /main body (TRNS1) [18] Overall control board (OACB)
[7] DC power supply unit /2 (DCPS2) [19] Image processing board (IPB)
[8] DC power supply unit /1 (DCPS1) [20] Scanner drive board (SCDB)
[9] Drum drive board /Y (DRDB Y) [21] DC power supply unit /4:Option (DCPS4)
[10] Drum drive board /M (DRDB M) [22] High voltage unit /2 (HV2)
[11] Drum drive board /C (DRDB C) [23] Printer control board (PRCB)
[12] Drum drive board /K (DRDB K) [24] Fixing heater control board : only in EU (FHCB)
8050fs6623
[17] [18] [19] [20] [21] [22] [23]
[24]
[9]
[10]
[11]
[12]
[16] [15] [14] [13]
[8] [7] [6] [5] [4] [3] [2] [1]
CF5001 Field Service Ver.1.0 Sep 2003 PARTS LAYOUT DRAWING
6-19
VI
DIA
GR
AM
S
(2) Top of the main body
(3) Front of the main body
[1] CCD board (CCDB) [3] L1 inverter board (L1 INVB)
[2] Key counter (C (K))
[1] Black counter (C (BK)) [5] OB inverter board (OB INVB)
[2] Total counter (C (T)) [6] LCD board (LCDB)
[3] Operation board /2 (OB2) [7] Touch panel board
[4] Operation board /3 (OB3) [8] Operation board /1 (OB1)
[1]
[2][3]
8050fs6624
8050fs6625
[3]
[2] [1]
[4] [5] [6] [7] [8]
PARTS LAYOUT DRAWING CF5001 Field Service Ver.1.0 Sep 2003
6-20
VI
DIA
GR
AM
S
(4) Write unit
(5) Process unit
[1] Temp detection board (TDB)
(attached to write unit /K only)
[3] Laser drive board /M (LDB M)
[4] Laser drive board /C (LDB C)
[2] Laser drive board /Y (LDB Y) [5] Laser drive board /K (LDB K)
[1] Drum potential sensor board /K (DRSPSB K) [3] Drum potential sensor board /M (DRSPSB M)
[2] Drum potential sensor board /C (DRSPSB C) [4] Drum potential sensor board /Y (DRSPSB Y)
8050fs6626
[2] [3] [4] [5]
[1]
[4] [3] [2] [1] 8050fs6627
CF5001 Field Service Ver.1.0 Sep 2003 PARTS LAYOUT DRAWING
6-21
VI
DIA
GR
AM
S
(6) Toner supply section
(7) ADU
[1] Toner supply drive board (TSDB)
[1] Conveyance drive board (CVDB)
[1] 8050fs6628
8050fs6629[1]
PARTS LAYOUT DRAWING CF5001 Field Service Ver.1.0 Sep 2003
6-22
VI
DIA
GR
AM
S
1.2 AFR-20 parts layout drawing
[1] Paper feed motor (M301) [11] Paper exit cover sensor (PS307)
[2] Conveyance motor (M302) [12] Tray open/close sensor (PS308)
[3] Reverse/exit motor (M303) [13] Size sensor /S (PS309)
[4] Registration clutch (MC301) [14] Size sensor /L (PS310)
[5] Registration sensor (PS301) [15] Paper exit solenoid (SD301)
[6] Timing sensor (PS302) [16] Reverse solenoid (SD302)
[7] Paper feed cover sensor (PS303) [17] Size VR (VR301)
[8] No paper sensor (PS304) [18] RADF control board (DFCB)
[9] Reverse sensor (PS305) [19] Size sensor board (SSB)
[10] Paper exit sensor (PS306)
8050fs6031
[5][6]
[8]
[7]
[15]
[16]
[14][13]
[1]
[2] [9]
[18] [3] [11] [10]
[12][4][17]
CF5001 Field Service Ver.1.0 Sep 2003 PARTS LAYOUT DRAWING
6-23
VI
DIA
GR
AM
S
1.3 C-208 parts layout drawing
[1] Front door interlock switch (MS101) [9] Remaining paper sensor /4 (PS105)
[2] Paper mis-centering sensor (PS120) [10] Remaining paper sensor /3 (PS104)
[3] No paper sensor (PS108) [11] Remaining paper sensor /2 (PS103)
[4] Paper feed sensor (PS107) [12] Remaining paper sensor /1 (PS102)
[5] Feed sensor (PS106) [13] Top cover interlock switch (MS102)
[6] Upper limit sensor (PS109) [14] Top cover open/close sensor (PS100)
[7] Pre-registration clutch (MC102) [15] Paper feed clutch (MC101)
[8] Lower limit sensor (PS101) [16] LT drive board (LTDB)
[7][16]
SD100[15]
[2]
[4]
M101 8050fs6700
FRONT
[8] [6] [5]M100
[1]SW100[13] [14]
[3]
[9]
[10][11][12]
PARTS LAYOUT DRAWING CF5001 Field Service Ver.1.0 Sep 2003
6-24
VI
DIA
GR
AM
S
1.4 FN-120/FN-9 parts layout drawing
[1] Sub-tray paper exit sensor (PS701) [15] Stopper HP sensor (PS723) (FN-9 only)
[2] Paper exit opening HP sensor (PS712) [16] Stacker inlet sensor (PS705)
[3] Gate HP sensor (PS716) [17] Stacker no paper sensor (PS720)
[4] FNS inlet sensor (PS704) [18] Stacker auxiliary solenoid (SD702)
[5] Stapler movement motor (M711) [19] Stack auxiliary motor (M722)
[6] FNS interlock switch (MS701) [20] Alignment HP sensor/U (PS708)
[7] Clincher rotation motor (M704) [21] Paper exit belt HP sensor (PS709)
[8] Alignment HP sensor/L (PS724) (FN-9 only) [22] Stacker inlet motor (M713)
[9] Alignment motor/L (M716) (FN-9 only) [23] Shift HP sensor (PS718)
[10] Folding knife HP sensor (PS722) (FN-9 only) [24] Shift motor (M702)
[11] Folding knife motor (M719) (FN-9 only) [25] Main tray paper exit sensor (PS706)
[12] Stopper motor (M718) (FN-9 only) [26] Sub-tray full sensor (PS719)
[13] Clincher rotation HP sensor(PS714) [27] Paper exit opening solenoid (SD704)
[14] Folding passage sensor (PS726) (FN-9 only)
[3]
[2]
[1]
[4]
[5]
[6]
[7]
[9]
[10]
[11]
[14]
[15]
[16]
[17]
[18]
[19]
[20]
[21]
[22]
[23]
[24]
[25][26] [27]
[13]
[12]
[8]
8050fs6701
FRONT
CF5001 Field Service Ver.1.0 Sep 2003 PARTS LAYOUT DRAWING
6-25
VI
DIA
GR
AM
S
[1] Stapler paper exit upper limit sensor
(PS707)
[8] Relay board (RB)
[2] Tray upper limit sensor (PS702) [9] FNS control board (FNSCB)
[3] Counter rest sensor (PS715) [10] Gate drive motor (M712)
[4] By-pass gate solenoid (SD705) [11] FNS conveyance motor (M701)
[5] Tray lower limit sensor (PS703) [12] Paper exit opening motor (M708)
[6] Tray up/down motor (M703) [13] Sub-tray paper exit motor (M721)
[7] Folding conveyance motor (M720)
(FN-9 only)
[14] Paper exit opening roller motor (M707)
[1]
[2]
[3]
[4]
8050fs6702
[5]
[6]
[7]
[8]
[9]
[10]
[11]
[12] [13]
[14]
PARTS LAYOUT DRAWING CF5001 Field Service Ver.1.0 Sep 2003
6-26
VI
DIA
GR
AM
S
[1] Folding paper exit sensor (PS725)
(FN-9 only)
[5] Three-folding gate solenoid (SD706)
(FN-9 only)
[2] Folding full LED (LED729) (FN-9 only) [6] Stapler rotation motor (M706)
[3] Folding full sensor (PS729) (FN-9 only) [7] Stapler movement HP sensor (PS711)
[4] Stapler rotation HP sensor (PS713) [8] Alignment motor/U (M705)
[8]
[7]
[6]
[5]
[4] [3] [2] [1] 8050fs6703
CF5001 Field Service Ver.1.0 Sep 2003 PARTS LAYOUT DRAWING
6-27
VI
DIA
GR
AM
S
[1] Clincher motor/R (M710)
Clincher motor/F (M715)
[4] Stapler HP sensor/R (PS730)
Stapler HP sensor/F (PS731)
[2] Clincher HP sensor/R (PS732)
Clincher HP sensor/F (PS733)
[5] Cartridge switch/R (SW701)
Cartridge switch/F (SW703)
[3] Stapler motor/R (M709)
Stapler motor/F (M714)
[6] Stapler switch/R (SW702)
Stapler switch/F (SW704)
[1]
[3][4]
[5]
[6]
[2] 8050fs6704
PARTS LAYOUT DRAWING CF5001 Field Service Ver.1.0 Sep 2003
6-28
VI
DIA
GR
AM
S
1.5 TMG-3 parts layout drawing
[1] Upper limit sensor (PS110) [7] Relay 2 (RL28)
[2] DC power unit (DCPS) [8] Coil (COL)
[3] Lower limit sensor (PS111) [9] Scrap box detection sensor (PS107)
[4] Holder motor (M106) [10] Conveyance motor (M101)
[5] Circuit breaker (CBR) [11] TU drive board (TUDB)
[6] Relay 1 (RL1)
[4]
[5][6][7]
[8][9]
[10]
[11]
[3]
[2]
[1]
8050fs6705
CF5001 Field Service Ver.1.0 Sep 2003 PARTS LAYOUT DRAWING
6-29
VI
DIA
GR
AM
S
[1] Scrap removal fan motor (M108) [9] Front door MS2 (MS2)
[2] Scrap full LED (LED101) [10] Paper exit sensor (PS108)
[3] Scrap full sensor (PS109) [11] Stacker S3 (MS3)
[4] Entrance sensor (PS101) [12] Stacker door sensor (PS114)
[5] Trimmer motor (M102) [13] Stacker MS4 (MS4)
[6] Trimmer HP sensor (PS106) [14] Stacker full sensor (PS113)
[7] Press HP sensor (PS105) [15] Pusher HP sensor(PS112)
[8] Press motor (M105) [16] Pusher motor (M107)
[1] Stopper movement motor(M103) [4] Stopper release motor (M104)
[2] Conveyance sensor (PS102) [5] Stopper HP sensor (PS103)
[3] Stopper release HP sensor (PS104)
[4]
[5][6][7]
[8][9]
[10][11]
[3][2]
[1]
[16][15][14][13]
[12]
8050fs6706
[1]
[5]
[4]
[2]
[3]8050fs6707
CONNECTOR LAYOUT DRAWING CF5001 Field Service Ver.1.0 Sep 2003
6-30
VI
DIA
GR
AM
S
2. CONNECTOR LAYOUT DRAWING
2.1 Main Body connector layout drawing
A. Printer control board
8050fs6033
391 (GY : 18 pin)360 (W : 40 pin)357 (W : 9 pin)650 (W : 20 pin)
340 (W : 28 pin)
572 (W : 4 pin)
620 (BN : 7 pin)
700 (W : 26 pin)
309 (W : 36 pin)
353 (BN : 12 pin)
1 (N.C.)
150 (GY : 24 pin)442 (W : 34 pin)
36 (N.C.)
301 (W : 4 pin)
730 (W : 32 pin)151 (GY : 8 pin)
4 (N.C.)
573 (W : 3 pin)
651 (W : 20 pin) 384 (W : 30 pin)
574 (W : 3 pin)
376 (W : 28 pin)
564 (W : 2 pin)
393 (W : 24 pin)
459 (W : 10 pin)
736 (W : 24 pin)
37 (N.C.)
464 (BN : 19 pin)
467 (BN : 6 pin)
600 (BN : 20 pin)
300 (BN : 18 pin)
303 (W : 2 pin)
302 (W : 6 pin)
400 (BN : 32 pin)
414 (B : 32 pin)
2 (N.C.)
500 (BN : 34 pin)
428 (BN : 30 pin)
CF5001 Field Service Ver.1.0 Sep 2003 CONNECTOR LAYOUT DRAWING
6-31
VI
DIA
GR
AM
S
B. AC drive board
C. CCD drive board
D. Conveyance drive board
8050fs6034
121 (W : 8 pin)
120 (W : 5 pin)
157 (W : 4 pin)155 (W : 5 pin)
153 (W : 4 pin)
156 (W : 5 pin)152 (W : 11 pin)
8050fs6035511 (W : 50 pin)
8050fs6036
507 (W : 6 pin)
503 (W : 34 pin) 510 (W : 11 pin)1 (N.C.)527 (W : 15 pin)
536 (W : 6 pin)
518 (W : 15 pin) 569 (B : 4 pin) 513 (W : 6 pin)
3 (N.C.) 539 (W : 22 pin)5 (N.C.)534 (W : 12 pin)
548 (W : 6 pin)
524 (W : 7 pin)
CONNECTOR LAYOUT DRAWING CF5001 Field Service Ver.1.0 Sep 2003
6-32
VI
DIA
GR
AM
S
E. DC power unit/1
F. DC power unit/2
G. DC power unit/3
8050fs6037
104 (W : 10 pin)
105 (W : 6 pin)
103 (W : 6 pin)
108 (W : 4 pin)
106 (W : 8 pin)
107 (W : 7 pin)
102 (W : 4 pin)
101 (W : 3 pin)
8050fs6038
115 (W : 8 pin)
111 (W : 12 pin)
112 (W : 6 pin)
113 (W : 4 pin)
114 (W : 9 pin)
110 (W : 4 pin)
8050fs6100
109 (W : 6 pin)
CF5001 Field Service Ver.1.0 Sep 2003 CONNECTOR LAYOUT DRAWING
6-33
VI
DIA
GR
AM
S
H. Drum drive board/Y, /M, /C, /K
I. Fixing heater control board
J. High voltage unit/1
8050fs6039
312,319,326,333 (W : 2 pin)
311,318,325,332 (W : 9 pin)
316,323,330,337 (W : 3 pin)
313,320,327,334 (W : 6 pin)
8050fs6040
158 (W : 4 pin)
8050fs6041
734 (W : 8 pin)
733 (W : 8 pin)
735 (W : 3 pin)
732 (W : 8 pin)
731 (W : 8 pin)
CONNECTOR LAYOUT DRAWING CF5001 Field Service Ver.1.0 Sep 2003
6-34
VI
DIA
GR
AM
S
K. High voltage unit/2
L. Image processing board
8050fs6042
738 (W : 10 pin)
740 (N.C.)
737 (W : 12 pin)
739 (W : 3 pin)
8050fs6043
254 (BK : 120 pin)
253 (BK : 100 pin)
270 (BK : 60 pin)
8 (N.C.)9 (N.C.)
271 (W : 6 pin)
260 (W : 68 pin)
220 (W : 120 pin)272 (W : 34 pin)
280 (B : 34 pin)
CF5001 Field Service Ver.1.0 Sep 2003 CONNECTOR LAYOUT DRAWING
6-35
VI
DIA
GR
AM
S
M. Index sensor/Y,/M,/C,/K
N. L1 inverter board
O. Laser drive board/Y, /M, /C, /K
P. Memory board
8050fs6044
274,278,282,286 (GY : 5 pin)
8050fs6045?? (W : 4 pin)
606 (W : 3 pin)
8050fs6046
275,279,283,287 (W : 12 pin)
8050fs6047
142 (W : 20 pin)
141 (W : 40 pin)
CONNECTOR LAYOUT DRAWING CF5001 Field Service Ver.1.0 Sep 2003
6-36
VI
DIA
GR
AM
S
Q. Overall control board
R. OB inverter board
8050fs6048
255 (BK : 8 pin)
259 (BK : 4 pin)
256 (BK : 36 pin)
257 (BK : 9 pin)
9 (N.C.)
14 (N.C.)
251 (W : 16 pin) 252 (W : 4 pin)
8 (N.C.)5 (N.C.)
250 (W : 18 pin) 217 (BN : 50 pin) 258 (N.C.)
254 (W : 120 pin)
253 (W : 100 pin)
270 (W : 60 pin)
13 (N.C.)
11 (N.C.)
10 (N.C.)
12 (N.C.)
6 (N.C.) 7 (N.C.)
8050fs6049
165 (W : 3 pin)166 (W : 4 pin)
CF5001 Field Service Ver.1.0 Sep 2003 CONNECTOR LAYOUT DRAWING
6-37
VI
DIA
GR
AM
S
S. Operation board/1
T. Operation board/2
U. Operation board/3
8050fs6050
176 (W : 6 pin) 173 (W : 6 pin) 172 (W : 12 pin)
175 (W : 4 pin)
174 (W : 14 pin)
8050fs6051
162 (W : 3 pin)
8050fs6101
158 (W : 3 pin)
CONNECTOR LAYOUT DRAWING CF5001 Field Service Ver.1.0 Sep 2003
6-38
VI
DIA
GR
AM
S
V. Scanner drive board
W. Temperature detection board
X. Toner supply drive board
Y. Gamma sensor
8050fs6052
601 (W : 20 pin)
605 (W : 3 pin)602 (W : 4 pin)
609 (W : 14 pin) 1 (N.C.)607 (W : 3 pin)
603 (W : 3 pin)
8050fs6053
670 (W : 3 pin)
8050fs6054
711 (W : 8 pin)
708 (W : 11 pin)
702 (W : 26 pin)
705 (W : 7 pin)
706 (W : 6 pin)
704 (W : 6 pin) 724 (W : 18 pin)
726 (W : 12 pin)
8050fs6055
558 (W : 5 pin)
CF5001 Field Service Ver.1.0 Sep 2003 CONNECTOR LAYOUT DRAWING
6-39
VI
DIA
GR
AM
S
2.2 AFR-20 connector layout drawing
A. DF drive board
2.3 C-208 connector layout drawing
8050fs6102
13 (W : 15 pin)14 (W : 9 pin)
5 (W : 5 pin)
1 (N.C.)
8 (N.C.)
3 (W : 7 pin)
2 (W : 6 pin)
4 (W : 6 pin)
6 (W : 2 pin)10 (W : 8 pin)7 (W : 9 pin)
12 (W : 5 pin)
8050fs6103
802 (W : 10 pin)
3 (N.C.)
807 (W : 14 pin)
5 (N.C.)
4 (N.C.)
808 (W : 2 pin)
803 (W : 6 pin)
805 (W : 11 pin)
800 (W : 6 pin)
801 (W : 11 pin)
806 (W : 15 pin) 1 (N.C.)2 (N.C.)
804 (W : 12 pin)
CONNECTOR LAYOUT DRAWING CF5001 Field Service Ver.1.0 Sep 2003
6-40
VI
DIA
GR
AM
S
2.4 FN-120/FN-9 connector layout drawing
A. FNS control board
B. Relay board
8050fs6104
33 (W : 38 pin)
8 (W : 8 pin)
52 (W : 6 pin)
61 (W : 2 pin) 51 (W : 32 pin)
62 (W : 40 pin)
4 (W : 40 pin)
5 (W : 22 pin)
9 (W : 28 pin) FS-215 only
3 (W : 11 pin)2 (W : 5 pin)
43 (W : 8 pin) FS-215 only
42 (W : 5 pin) FS-215 only
41 (GY : 30 pin) FS-215 only
12 (W : 24 pin)
1 (W : 18 pin)
10 (W : 4 pin)11 (W : 9 pin)
7 (W: 6 pin)
6 (W : 5 pin)
8050fs6105
5 (W : 30 pin)6 (W : 30 pin)
2 (W : 22 pin) 3 (W : 28 pin) FS-215 only
8 (W : 34 pin)
7 (W : 28 pin) FS-215 only
9 (W : 2 pin) FS-215 only
4 (W : 24 pin) FS-215 only
10 (W : 8 pin)
1 (W : 40 pin)
CF5001 Field Service Ver.1.0 Sep 2003 CONNECTOR LAYOUT DRAWING
6-41
VI
DIA
GR
AM
S
2.5 TMG-3 connector layout drawing
8050fs6106
407 (W : 2 pin)
408 (W : 3 pin)
403 (W : 5 pin)
406 (GY : 20 pin)404 (GY : 18 pin)402 (GY : 28 pin)
401 (GY : 40 pin)
409 (W : 4 pin)
405 (W : 4 pin)
TIMING CHART CF5001 Field Service Ver.1.0 Sep 2003
6-42
VI
DIA
GR
AM
S
3. TIMING CHART
3.1 Main Body timing chart
A. Full color, life size, ADF single sided original document of 2 sheets, double sided original doc-
ument of 2 copies, paper feed tray /1 paper feed
Chart 1/2
AB
CD
49
69
fs6
32
4a
Pap
er fe
ed m
otor
Pic
k up
sol
enoi
d /1
Pap
er fe
ed c
lutc
h /1
P
re-r
egis
trat
ion
clut
ch /1
Pre
-reg
istr
atio
n se
nsor
/1In
term
edia
te c
onve
yanc
e se
nsor
/1In
term
edia
te c
onve
yanc
e se
nsor
/2R
egis
trat
ion
sens
or
Inte
rmed
iate
con
veya
nce
clut
ch /1
Inte
rmed
iate
con
veya
nce
clut
ch /2
Inte
rmed
iate
con
veya
nce
clut
ch /3
V_T
OP
Loop
rol
ler
mot
or
Reg
iste
r ou
t rol
ler
mot
or
Fix
ing
mot
or
Fix
ing
pape
r ex
it se
nsor
Pap
er e
xit s
enso
rR
ever
se/e
xit s
enso
rA
DU
rev
erse
sen
sor
AD
U c
onve
yanc
eA
DU
pre
-reg
istr
atio
n se
nsor
1st t
rans
fer
pres
sure
/rel
ease
mot
or2n
d tr
ansf
er p
ress
ure/
rele
ase
mot
or
Rev
erse
/exi
t mot
or
AD
U r
ever
se m
otor
Rev
erse
/exi
t sol
enoi
dA
DU
con
veya
nce
clut
ch /1
AD
U c
onve
yanc
e cl
utch
/2A
DU
pre
-reg
istr
atio
n cl
utch
F R
Cod
e
MC
3
Tim
e (s
ec)
Item
MC
1M
C2
SD
4
M32
M33
M34
M19
F RF R
PS
23P
S20
PS
21P
S19
PS
13P
S17
M29
M30
M31
MC
5M
C4
MC
13
PS
22P
S28
PS
27P
S29
MC
8M
C7
SD
7M
41
To c
hart
2/2
CF5001 Field Service Ver.1.0 Sep 2003 TIMING CHART
6-43
VI
DIA
GR
AM
S
Chart 2/2
4969fs
6324b
AB
CD
Dru
m m
otor
/YD
rum
mot
or /M
Dru
m m
otor
/CD
rum
mot
or /K
Tran
sfer
bel
t mot
or
Cha
rgin
g /Y
Cha
rgin
g /M
Cha
rgin
g /C
Dev
elop
er b
ias
AC
/K1s
t tra
nsfe
r /Y
1st t
rans
fer
/M1s
t tra
nsfe
r /C
1st t
rans
fer
/K
2nd
tran
sfer
Sep
arat
ion
AC
/DC
Tran
sfer
Dru
m s
epar
atio
n cl
aw s
olen
oid
Cha
rgin
g /K
Dev
elop
er b
ias
DC
/YD
evel
oper
bia
s D
C /M
Dev
elop
er b
ias
DC
/CD
evel
oper
bia
s D
C /K
Dev
elop
er b
ias
AC
/YD
evel
oper
bia
s A
C /M
Dev
elop
er b
ias
AC
/C
To c
hart
1/2
M17
M16
M15
M14
M18
SD
1
Cod
eT
ime
(sec
)Ite
m
TIMING CHART CF5001 Field Service Ver.1.0 Sep 2003
6-44
VI
DIA
GR
AM
S
3.2 AFR-20 timing chart
A. A4, life size, single-sided original document, original document of 3 sheets (1/3)
4969fs6310
0
No
pape
r se
nsor
PS
304
Pap
er u
nloa
ded
Reg
istr
atio
n se
nsor
PS
301
Pap
er u
nloa
ded
Pap
er lo
aded
Reg
istr
atio
n cl
utch
MC
301
OF
FO
NP
aper
feed
mot
orM
301
CW
300
mm
/sC
W 6
7mm
/sS
top
CC
W 3
00m
m/s
CC
W 7
10m
m/s
Pap
er u
nloa
ded
Con
veya
nce
mot
orM
302
Sto
pC
CW
138
mm
/sC
CW
300
mm
/sC
CW
710
mm
/s
Rev
erse
sen
sor
PS
305
Pap
er u
nloa
ded
Pap
er lo
aded
Tim
ing
sens
orP
S30
2
Rev
erse
/exi
t mot
orM
303
CW
710
mm
/sC
W 4
00m
m/s
CW
350
mm
/sC
W 1
50m
m/s
Sto
pC
CW
150
mm
/sC
CW
400
mm
/sC
CW
710
mm
/sC
CW
900
mm
/s
Pap
er lo
aded
Pap
er e
xit s
enso
rP
S30
6P
aper
unl
oade
dP
aper
load
edR
ever
se s
olen
oid
SD
302
OF
FO
NP
aper
exi
t sol
enoi
dS
D30
1O
FF
ON
CW
710
mm
/s
Pap
er lo
aded
CF5001 Field Service Ver.1.0 Sep 2003 TIMING CHART
6-45
VI
DIA
GR
AM
S
A. A4, life size, single sided original document, original document of 3 sheets (2/3)
8050fs6311
No
pape
r se
nsor
PS
304
Pap
er u
nloa
ded
Pap
erlo
aded
Reg
istr
atio
n se
nsor
PS
301
Pap
er u
nloa
ded
Pap
er lo
aded
Reg
istr
atio
n cl
utch
MC
301
OF
FO
NP
aper
feed
mot
orM
301
CW
CW
67m
m/s
Sto
pC
CW
300
mm
/sC
CW
710
mm
/s
Pap
er u
nloa
ded
Con
veya
nce
mot
or
M30
2
Sto
pC
CW
138
mm
/sC
CW
300
mm
/sC
CW
710
mm
/s
Rev
erse
sen
sor
PS
305
Pap
er u
nloa
ded
Pap
er lo
aded
Tim
ing
sens
orP
S30
2
Rev
erse
/exi
t mot
orM
303
CW
710
mm
/sC
W 4
00m
m/s
CW
350
mm
/sC
W 1
50m
m/s
Sto
pC
CW
150
mm
/sC
CW
400
mm
/sC
CW
710
mm
/sC
CW
900
mm
/s
Pap
er lo
aded
Pap
er e
xit s
enso
rP
S30
6P
aper
unl
oade
dP
aper
load
edR
ever
se s
olen
oid
SD
302
OF
FO
NP
aper
exi
t sol
enoi
d S
D30
1O
FF
ON
CW
710
mm
/s
TIMING CHART CF5001 Field Service Ver.1.0 Sep 2003
6-46
VI
DIA
GR
AM
S
A. A4, life size, single sided original document, original document of 3 sheets (3/3)
4969fs6312
No
pape
r se
nsor
P
S30
4P
aper
unl
oade
dP
aper
load
edR
egis
trat
ion
sens
or
PS
301
Pap
er u
nloa
ded
Pap
er lo
aded
Reg
istr
atio
n cl
utch
M
C30
1O
FF
ON
Pap
er fe
ed m
otor
M
301
CW
300
mm
/sC
W 6
7mm
/sS
top
CC
W 3
00m
m/s
CC
W 7
10m
m/s
Pap
er u
nloa
ded
Con
veya
nce
mot
or
M30
2
Sto
pC
CW
138
mm
/sC
CW
300
mm
/sC
CW
710
mm
/s
Rev
erse
sen
sor
PS
305
Pap
er u
nloa
ded
Pap
er lo
aded
Tim
ing
sens
or
PS
302
Rev
erse
/exi
t mot
or
M30
3C
W 7
10m
m/s
CW
400
mm
/sC
W 3
50m
m/s
CW
150
mm
/sS
top
CC
W 1
50m
m/s
CC
W 4
00m
m/s
CC
W 7
10m
m/s
CC
W 9
00m
m/s
Pap
er lo
aded
Pap
er e
xit s
enso
r P
S30
6P
aper
unl
oade
dP
aper
load
edR
ever
se s
olen
oid
SD
302
OF
FO
NP
aper
exi
t sol
enoi
d S
D30
1O
FF
ON
CW
710
mm
/s
CF5001 Field Service Ver.1.0 Sep 2003 TIMING CHART
6-47
VI
DIA
GR
AM
S
B. A4, life size, double sided original document, original document of 3 sheets (1/4)
4969fs6313
0
No
pape
r se
nsor
P
S30
4P
aper
unl
oade
dP
aper
load
edR
egis
trat
ion
sens
orP
S30
1P
aper
unl
oade
dP
aper
load
edR
egis
trat
ion
clut
ch
MC
301
OF
FO
NP
aper
feed
mot
or
M30
1C
W 3
00m
m/s
CW
67m
m/s
Sto
pC
CW
300
mm
/sC
CW
710
mm
/s
Pap
er u
nloa
ded
Con
veya
nce
mot
or
M30
2
Sto
pC
CW
138
mm
/sC
CW
300
mm
/sC
CW
710
mm
/s
Rev
erse
sen
sor
PS
305
Pap
er u
nloa
ded
Pap
er lo
aded
Tim
ing
sens
or
PS
302
Rev
erse
/exi
t mot
or
M30
3C
W 7
10m
m/s
CW
400
mm
/sC
W 3
50m
m/s
CW
150
mm
/sS
top
CC
W 1
50m
m/s
CC
W 4
00m
m/s
CC
W 7
10m
m/s
CC
W 9
00m
m/s
Pap
er lo
aded
Pap
er e
xit s
enso
r P
S30
6P
aper
unl
oade
dP
aper
load
edR
ever
se s
olen
oid
SD
302
OF
FO
NP
aper
exi
t sol
enoi
d S
D30
1O
FF
ON
CW
710
mm
/s
TIMING CHART CF5001 Field Service Ver.1.0 Sep 2003
6-48
VI
DIA
GR
AM
S
B. A4, life size, double sided original document, original document of 3 sheets (2/4)
4969fs6314
No
pape
r se
nsor
P
S30
4P
aper
unl
oade
dP
aper
load
edRe
gist
ratio
n se
nsor
P
S30
1P
aper
unl
oade
dP
aper
load
edR
egis
trat
ion
clut
chM
C30
1 O
FF
ON
Pap
er fe
ed m
otor
M
301
CW
300
mm
/sC
W 6
7mm
/sS
top
CC
W 3
00m
m/s
CC
W 7
10m
m/s
Pap
er u
nloa
ded
Conv
eyan
ce m
otor
M
302
Sto
pC
CW
138
mm
/sC
CW
300
mm
/sC
CW
710
mm
/s
Rev
erse
sen
sor
PS
305
Pap
er u
nloa
ded
Pap
er lo
aded
Tim
ing
sens
or
PS
302
Rev
erse
/exi
t mot
orM
303
CW
710
mm
/sC
W 4
00m
m/s
CW
350
mm
/sC
W 1
50m
m/s
Sto
pC
CW
150
mm
/sC
CW
400
mm
/sC
CW
710
mm
/sC
CW
900
mm
/s
Pap
er lo
aded
Pap
er e
xit s
enso
r P
S30
6P
aper
unl
oade
dP
aper
load
edR
ever
se s
olen
oid
SD
302
OF
FO
NP
aper
exi
t sol
enoi
dS
D30
1O
FF
ON
CW
710
mm
/s
CF5001 Field Service Ver.1.0 Sep 2003 TIMING CHART
6-49
VI
DIA
GR
AM
S
B. A4, life size, double sided original document, original documents of 3 sheets (3/4)
4969fs6315
No
pape
r se
nsor
P
S30
4P
aper
unl
oade
dP
aper
load
edR
egis
trat
ion
sens
or
PS
301
Pap
er u
nloa
ded
Pap
er lo
aded
Reg
istr
atio
n cl
utch
M
C30
1 O
FF
ON
Pap
er fe
ed m
otor
M
301
CW
300
mm
/sC
W 6
7mm
/sS
top
CC
W 3
00m
m/s
CC
W 7
10m
m/s
Pap
er u
nloa
ded
Con
veya
nce
mot
or
M30
2
Sto
pC
CW
138
mm
/sC
CW
300
mm
/sC
CW
710
mm
/s
Rev
erse
sen
sor
PS
305
Pap
er u
nloa
ded
Pap
er lo
aded
Tim
ing
sens
or
PS
302
Rev
erse
/exi
t mot
or
M30
3C
W 7
10m
m/ s
CW
400
mm
/sC
W 3
50m
m/s
CW
150
mm
/sS
top
CC
W 1
50m
m/s
CC
W 4
00m
m/s
CC
W 7
10m
m/s
CC
W 9
00m
m/s
Pap
er lo
aded
Pap
er e
xit s
enso
r P
S30
6P
aper
unl
oade
dP
aper
load
edR
ever
se s
olen
oid
SD
302
OF
FO
NP
aper
exi
t sol
enoi
d S
D30
1O
FF
ON
CW
710
mm
/s
TIMING CHART CF5001 Field Service Ver.1.0 Sep 2003
6-50
VI
DIA
GR
AM
S
B. A4, life size, double sided original document, original document of 3 sheets (4/4)
4969fs6316
No
pape
r se
nsor
P
S30
4P
aper
unl
oade
dP
aper
load
edR
egis
trat
ion
sens
or
PS
301
Pap
er u
nloa
ded
Pap
er lo
aded
Reg
istr
atio
n cl
utch
M
C30
1O
FF
ON
Pap
er fe
ed m
otor
M
301
CW
300
mm
/sC
W 6
7mm
/sS
top
CC
W 3
00m
m/s
CC
W 7
10m
m/s
Pap
er u
nloa
ded
Con
veya
nce
mot
or
M30
2
Sto
pC
CW
138
mm
/sC
CW
300
mm
/sC
CW
710
mm
/s
Rev
erse
sen
sor
PS
305
Pap
er u
nloa
ded
Pap
er lo
aded
Tim
ing
sens
or
PS
302
Rev
erse
/exi
t mot
or
M30
3C
W 7
10m
m/s
CW
400
mm
/sC
W 3
50m
m/s
CW
150
mm
/sS
top
CC
W 1
50m
m/s
CC
W 4
00m
m/s
CC
W 7
10m
m/s
CC
W 9
00m
m/s
Pap
er lo
aded
Pap
er e
xit s
enso
r P
S30
6P
aper
unl
oade
d
Pap
er lo
aded
Rev
erse
sol
enoi
dS
D30
2O
FF
ON
Pap
er e
xit s
olen
oid
SD
301
OF
FO
N
CW
710
mm
/s
CF5001 Field Service Ver.1.0 Sep 2003 TIMING CHART
6-51
VI
DIA
GR
AM
S
3.3 C-208 timing chart
A. A4, single sided, 2-sheet paper feed
4969fs6317
01
23
45
67
Item
Pap
er fe
ed m
otor
Pap
er fe
ed c
lutc
h
Pap
er fe
ed s
olen
oid
Pre
-reg
istr
atio
n cl
utch
Pap
er fe
ed s
enso
r
Fee
d se
nsor
Inte
rmed
iate
con
veya
nce
sens
or /1
Sta
rt b
utto
n O
N
Tim
e (s
ec)
Cod
e
M10
1
MC
101
SD
100
MC
102
PS
107
PS
106
PS
27
TIMING CHART CF5001 Field Service Ver.1.0 Sep 2003
6-52
VI
DIA
GR
AM
S
3.4 FN-120/FN-9 timing chart
A. Sort, A4, document of 2 sheets, 3-copy setting, single sided0
12
34
67
8
A
9
A
Cod
e
PS
704
M70
1F
NS
Con
veya
nce
mot
or67
0mm
/s
400m
m/s
FN
S E
ntra
nce
sens
or
M70
2S
hift
mot
orP
S71
8S
hift
HP
sen
sor
SD
704
Pap
er e
xit o
peni
ng s
olen
oid
M70
7P
aper
exi
t rol
ler
mot
or25
3mm
/s40
0mm
/sP
S70
6M
ain
tray
pap
er e
xit s
enso
r
PS
702
Tray
upp
er li
mit
sens
or
M70
3Tr
ay u
p/do
wn
mot
orU
PD
OW
N
Tim
e (s
ec)
Item
Cod
e
PS
704
M70
1
M70
2P
S71
8
SD
704
M70
7
Tim
e (s
ec)
M70
3
PS
702
PS
706
FN
S o
pera
tion
star
t si
gnal
ON
670m
m/s
400m
m/s
253m
m/s
400m
m/s
UP
DO
WN
FN
S C
onve
yanc
e m
otor
FN
S E
ntra
nce
sens
or
Shi
ft m
otor
Shi
ft H
P s
enso
r
Pap
er e
xit o
peni
ng s
olen
oid
Pap
er e
xit r
olle
r m
otor
Mai
n tr
ay p
aper
exi
t sen
sor
Tray
upp
er li
mit
sens
or
Tray
up/
dow
n m
otor
Item
2 -
2C
opy
- P
age
3 -
13
- 2
1 -
11
- 2
2 -
1
CF5001 Field Service Ver.1.0 Sep 2003 TIMING CHART
6-53
VI
DIA
GR
AM
S
B. Flat stapling at 2 points, A4, document of 11 sheets, 2-copy setting
4969fs6319
12
34
514
15
16
18
17
20
19
26
28
29
27
A
A
31
32
30
0C
ode
PS
704
FN
S E
ntra
nce
sens
orM
701
FN
S C
onve
yanc
e dr
ive
mot
orS
D70
5B
y-pa
ss g
ate
sole
noid
PS
705
Sta
cker
ent
ranc
e se
nsor
M71
3S
tack
er e
ntra
nce
mot
orM
722
Sta
ck d
rive
mot
orS
D70
2S
tack
driv
e so
leno
id
M70
5A
lignm
ent m
otor
/UC
lose
Ope
nM
711
Sta
pler
mov
emen
t mot
orM
714/
715
Sta
pler
, clin
cher
mot
or /F
M70
9/71
0S
tapl
er, c
linch
er m
otor
/RP
S70
9P
aper
exi
t bel
t HP
sen
sor
PS
706
Mai
n tr
ay p
aper
exi
t sen
sor
SD
704
Pap
er e
xit o
peni
ng s
olen
oid
M70
7P
aper
exi
t rol
ler
mot
or95
0mm
/s66
0mm
/s28
0mm
/sP
S70
7S
tapl
er p
aper
exi
t upp
er li
mit
sens
or
M70
3Tr
ay u
p/do
wn
mot
or
Item
FN
S o
pera
tion
star
t sig
nal O
N
1 -
1
Tim
e (s
ec)
UP
DO
WN
1 -
21
- 3
1 -
101
- 11
2 -
12
- 2
2 -
32
- 4
2 -
92
- 10
2 -1
1C
opy
- P
age
Cod
eP
S70
4F
NS
Ent
ranc
e se
nsor
M70
1F
NS
Con
veya
nce
driv
e m
otor
SD
705
By-
pass
gat
e so
leno
idP
S70
5S
tack
er e
ntra
nce
sens
orM
713
Sta
cker
ent
ranc
e m
otor
M72
2S
tack
driv
e m
otor
SD
702
Sta
ck d
rive
sole
noid
M70
5A
lignm
ent m
otor
/UC
lose
Ope
nM
711
Sta
pler
mov
emen
t mot
orM
714/
715
Sta
pler
, clin
cher
mot
or /F
M70
9/71
0S
tapl
er, c
linch
er m
otor
/RP
S70
9P
aper
exi
t bel
t HP
sen
sor
PS
706
Mai
n tr
ay p
aper
exi
t sen
sor
SD
704
Pap
er e
xit o
peni
ng s
olen
oid
M70
7P
aper
exi
t rol
ler
mot
or95
0mm
/s66
0mm
/s28
0mm
/sP
S70
7S
tapl
er p
aper
exi
t upp
er li
mit
sens
or
M70
3Tr
ay u
p/do
wn
mot
or
Item
670m
m/s
Tim
e (s
ec)
UP
DO
WN
TIMING CHART CF5001 Field Service Ver.1.0 Sep 2003
6-54
VI
DIA
GR
AM
S
C. Stitch and fold, A4R, original document of 3 sheets, 2-copy setting, single sided
4969fs6320
01
23
45
67
89
1011
1213
1415
1617
A
A
Cod
eIte
mT
ime
(sec
)
FN
S E
ntra
nce
sens
orF
NS
Con
veya
nce
driv
e m
otor
Sta
cker
Ent
ranc
e se
nsor
Sta
cker
ent
ranc
e m
otor
670m
m/s
500m
m/s
Alig
nmen
t HP
sen
sor
/UC
lose
Ope
nA
lignm
ent H
P s
enso
r /L
Alig
nmen
t mot
or /L
Sta
pler
mot
or, c
linch
er m
otor
/FS
tapl
er m
otor
, clin
cher
mot
or /R
Sto
pper
HP
sen
sor
Sto
pper
mot
or
Fold
ing
conv
eyan
ce m
otor
Dow
nU
p
Fold
ing
conv
eyan
ce s
enso
rFo
ldin
g kn
ife m
otor
Fold
ing
knife
HP
sen
sor
Fold
ing
pass
age
sens
orP
aper
exi
t ope
ning
HP
sen
sor
Pap
er e
xit o
peni
ng m
otor
Alig
nmen
t mot
or /U
PS
704
PS
705
M71
3
PS
708
M70
5
M70
1
PS
724
M71
6
M71
4/71
5
PS
723
M71
8
M72
0
PS
725
M71
9P
S72
2P
S72
6P
S71
2M
706
M70
9/71
0
FNS
Ope
ratio
n O
pen
star
t sig
nal O
N
2 -
1C
opy
- P
age
2 -
32
- 2
1 -
11
- 3
1 -
2
Clo
seO
pen
670m
m/s
500m
m/s
Cod
eIte
mT
ime
(sec
)
FN
S E
ntra
nce
sens
orF
NS
Con
veya
nce
driv
e m
otor
Sta
cker
Ent
ranc
e se
nsor
Sta
cker
ent
ranc
e m
otor
670m
m/s
500m
m/s
Alig
nmen
t HP
sen
sor
/UC
lose
Ope
nA
lignm
ent H
P s
enso
r /L
Alig
nmen
t mot
or /L
Sta
pler
mot
or, c
linch
er m
otor
/FS
tapl
er m
otor
, clin
cher
mot
or /R
Sto
pper
HP
sen
sor
Sto
pper
mot
or
Fold
ing
conv
eyan
ce m
otor
Dow
nU
p
Fold
ing
conv
eyan
ce s
enso
rFo
ldin
g kn
ife m
otor
Fold
ing
knife
HP
sen
sor
Fold
ing
pass
age
sens
orP
aper
exi
t ope
ning
HP
sen
sor
Pap
er e
xit o
peni
ng m
otor
Alig
nmen
t mot
or /U
PS
704
PS
705
M71
3
PS
708
M70
5
M70
1
PS
724
M71
6
PS
723
M71
8
M72
0
PS
725
M71
9P
S72
2P
S72
6P
S71
2
Clo
seO
pen
670m
m/s
500m
m/s
M71
4/71
5
M70
6
M70
9/71
0
CF5001 Field Service Ver.1.0 Sep 2003 TIMING CHART
6-55
VI
DIA
GR
AM
S
D. Three-folding, A4R, original document of 3 sheets, 2-copy setting, single sided
01
23
45
67
89
10
111
21
3
16
17
18
19
20
14
A
A
Cod
e
M70
7P
aper
exi
t rol
ler
mot
orP
S70
9P
aper
exi
t bel
t HP
sen
-P
S70
4F
NS
Ent
ranc
e se
nsor
M71
2G
ate
driv
e m
otor
M70
5A
lignm
ent m
otor
/U
M71
6A
lignm
ent m
otor
/L
PS
705
Sta
cker
Ent
ranc
e se
nsor
M71
3S
tack
er e
ntra
nce
mot
or
PS
726
Fol
ding
pas
sage
sen
sor
M71
9F
oldi
ng k
nife
mot
orP
S72
2F
oldi
ng k
nife
HP
sen
sor
M70
1F
NS
Con
veya
nce
mot
or
M71
8S
topp
er m
otor
SD
706
Thr
ee-f
oldi
ng g
ate
sole
noid
M72
0F
oldi
ng C
onve
yanc
e m
otor
PS
725
Fol
ding
exi
t sen
sor F
NS
ope
ratio
n st
art s
igna
l ON
Dow
n
Clo
se
670m
m/s
500m
m/s
Up
Ope
nC
lose
Ope
n
Item
Tim
e (s
ec)
Cod
eIte
mT
ime
(sec
)
Pap
er e
xit r
olle
r m
otor
Pap
er e
xit b
elt H
P s
enso
rF
NS
Ent
ranc
e se
nsor
Gat
e dr
ive
mot
or
Alig
nmen
t mot
or /U
Alig
nmen
t mot
or /L
Sta
cker
Ent
ranc
e se
nsor
Sta
cker
ent
ranc
e m
otor
Fol
ding
pas
sage
sen
sor
Fol
ding
kni
fe m
otor
Fol
ding
kni
fe H
P s
enso
rF
NS
Con
veya
nce
mot
or
Sto
pper
mot
or
Thr
ee-f
oldi
ng g
ate
sole
noid
Fol
ding
Con
veya
nce
mot
orF
oldi
ng e
xit s
enso
r
Dow
n
Clo
se
670m
m/s
500m
m/s
Up
Ope
nC
lose
Ope
n
M70
7P
S70
9P
S70
4M
712
M70
5
M71
6
PS
705
M71
3
PS
726
M71
9P
S72
2M
701
M71
8
SD
706
M72
0P
S72
5
TIMING CHART CF5001 Field Service Ver.1.0 Sep 2003
6-56
VI
DIA
GR
AM
S
3.5 TMG-3 timing chart
A. Cutting mode, A3, 16 sheets, 2 copies
4969fs6322
01
-52
-51
23
45
67
89
8283
8485
8687
8889
9091
9293
Item
Cod
eT
ime
(sec
)
Fol
ding
C
onve
yanc
e m
otor
(F
NS
)C
onve
yanc
e m
otor
E
ntra
nce
sens
or
Sto
pper
mot
or
Con
veya
nce
sens
orP
ress
mot
orC
utte
r m
otor
S
topp
er c
lear
mot
orH
olde
r m
otor
P
ress
ure
mot
or
Pap
er e
xit s
enso
r
Cop
y 1
Cop
y 2
PS
108
M10
7M
106
M10
2M
104
PS
102
M10
5
M10
3P
S10
1M
101
M72
0
CF5001 Field Service Ver.1.0 Sep 2003 TIMING CHART
6-57
VI
DIA
GR
AM
S
B. Through mode, A3, 16 sheets, 2 copies
4969fs6323
01
-52
-51
23
45
67
89
8283
8485
8687
8889
9091
9293
Item
Cod
eT
ime
(sec
)
PS
108
M10
7M
106
M10
2M
104
PS
102
M10
5
M10
3P
S10
1M
101
M72
0
Cop
y 1
Cop
y 2
Fold
ing
Con
veya
nce
mot
or (
FN
S)
Con
veya
nce
mot
or
Ent
ranc
e se
nsor
S
topp
er m
otor
C
onve
yanc
e se
nsor
Pre
ss m
otor
C
utte
r m
otor
S
topp
er c
lear
mot
orH
olde
r m
otor
P
ress
ure
mot
or
Pap
er e
xit s
enso
r
TIMING CHART CF5001 Field Service Ver.1.0 Sep 2003
6-58
VI
DIA
GR
AM
S
Blank Page
7662-4969-11 0309xxxx
Copyright2003 KONICA MINOLTA BUSINESS TECHNOLOGIES, INC.
Printed in Japan
Use of this manual should be strictly supervised to avoid disclosure of confidential information.